
is 






GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



FRENCH TONGUE, 

GROUNDED UPON THE DECISIONS « f*~**' 

*4£ 



9t f 

THE FRENCH ACADEMY, 

WHEREIN ALL THE NECESSARY 

RULES, OBSERVATIONS, and EXAMPLES, 

ARE 
EXHIBITED IN A MANNER ENTIRELY Nfi*fc 



BY JOHN PERELN. 

Necessaria puefis, jucunda senibus. Quintil. 



THE FIFTEENTH EDITION, 



CAREFULLY REVISE!} 

BY C. GROS. 

EDITOR OF MR. PERRIES »Til r 

A lo 






\%\ z 



MILORD LYTTELTON. 



MoNSEIGNEUR, 

T^N d&liant cet ouvrage a votre Gran- 



e 



deur, je ne debuterai pas par le pan£- 
gyrique de la noblesse de votrc iiaissance, et 
de votre rang: la flatterie ayant 6puis6 
toutes les nouvelles mani&res de louer les 
Grands, la seule qui me reste pour celebrer 
vos qualit^s personnelles, c'est d'oser les 
passer sous silence. 

Je laisse k votre Patrie la gloire d'ap- 
plaudir l'homme d'Etat, le Conseiller prive 
de Sa Majeste, l'ornement de la Society Roya- 
le, le Lord qui soccupe a Tenrichir de mo- 
numens plus durables que le marbre. Qu'il 
,me soit permis d'admirer THistorien, l'Au- 
teur, 1'Homme de Lettres. Oui, Mon- 
seigxfur, l'Angletene vous doit les recher- 
ches historiques les plus curieitsas et les- plus 
exactes. La force et la richesse de la langue 
Angloise paroissent dans tous vos Merits: 
Vous faites plus, Monseigxeur, vous l'em- 
bellissez. 

A 2 



iv BEDICATION. 

Tous les talens litt&aires sont rehaassds 
en voire Grandeur, par la protection 
qu'elle accorde aux Sciences et aux Arts. 
Le plus grand plaisir pour I'homme de Let* 
tres, est d'encourager tout ce qui peut con- 
tribuer a la litterature ; c'est le caractfcre 
distinctif du grand homme; c'est le votre, 
Monseigneur, qui ne recherchez pas les 
louanges, et qui faites tout ce qu'il faut pour 
les in Writer. 

II ne m'auroit done pas ete facile de trou- 
ver un autre M6c&ne atiasi cdlfebre par la su- 

p£riorit6 reconnue de son esprit, pour lui 
presenter cet ouvrage 3 comme a un Juge 
6rlafr6 et judicieux, qui connoit toutes les 
beautes reellcs de la langue Francoise, et 
dont lapprobation entratne naturcllement 
celle du public: mon ambition sera toujours 
de nl6riter la v6trc, et d'etre avec le plus 
profond respect, 

monseigneur, 

De Votre Grandeur, 
Le tres-humblc et tres-obeissant Serviteur, 

PERRIN. 



PREFACE. 



/"^_RAMMAR is universally allowed to be an object 
^-^ of extensive utility as the foundation of the Arts 
and Sciences, and a key. to languages in general. An 
excellent production of this kind was the first work of 
the late French Academy, who spared no pains to 
polish and improve their native language, and advance 
it as near as possible to a state of purity and per- 
fection. 

I am not insensible, that several authors consider it 
as an essential part of their prefaces to their respective 
works, to represent their own performances in the 
brightest colours, and treat those of others with the 
greatest severity ; but I rather choose to give, on this 
occasion, a short analytical account of the present un- 
dertaking, and then humbly submit the whole to the 
candid and impartial opinion of the Public. 

Having divided my Grammar into four parts, after 
a few preliminary observations, I begin the first with 
the French simple sounds, to which are subjoined all 
the sounds of the consonants ; and I am fully con- 
vinced, that any pupil will acquire the genuine 
French accent with more ease and expedition, by re- 
peating those invariable sounds with the assistance of a 
good master, than by the common tiresome rules of 
pronunciation, which, being grounded on nothing but 
arbitrary custom, are liable to all its changes and 
alterations. 

The sounds of the French language are followed 
by an alphabetical list of many French adjectives, 
each agreeing in gender and number with a di.f» 

A 3 



vl PREFACE. 

ferent substantive, to illustrate it's meaning. Another 
collection of adjectives, with the manner of placing 
them before or after their substantives, and their tftg- 
nification in either case, is likewise exhibited, which 
cannot fail of contributing towards the scholar's im- 
provement. 

The second part begins with a short analysis. of the 
parts of speech, which will enable the pupil to form 
an idea af the nature and construction of the Gram- 
mars of other languages, as well as of that of the 
Prench Tongue : and the two chapters, showing the 
formation of the feminine gender o\ adjectives accord- 
ing to the termination, and that of the plural number 
of nouns, place these subjects in a new light, and are 
adapted to the meanest capacities. 

As the verb is one of the principal parts of speech, 
it should always be considered as a primary object 
in all grammatical works: yet all grammars are de- 
fective in tthis point, though of the utmost import- 
ance. In order to do it all the justice in my power, 
I have fully conjugated, both in French and English, 
six regular verbs ; and all those that are irregular, in an 
alphabetical manner. These are followed by particular 
observations upon defective verbs, and the manner of 
conjugating them. 

The third part contains the theory and practice of 
the French language; the former comprehending the 
rules of syntax, with many new observations, illus- 
trated by proper examples ; and the latter giving sepa* 
rate anddistinct exemplifications of the rules and ob- 
servations of each part of speech, for the scholar's 
improvement. 

Precepts and practice, rules and examples, must go 
hand in hand, to impart a thorough knowledge of 
any tongue whatever. As to the French language, 
the only way for the pupil to learn it to any valuable 
purpose is, to lay a good foundation, by becoming 
well acquainted with it's rules, and then to read pro- 
per books, or converse with those who speak it in it> 



PREFACE. vii 

purity ; but neither reading nor conversation will ever 
enable him to speak or write it with propriety and 
elegance, if he be wholly unacquainted with it's fun- 
damental principles. 

In the fourth part are exhibited the practical irre- 
gularities of the French Tongue, alphabetically dis- 
posed, with the appropriate uses of particular words 
and phrases, warranted by the most approved au- 
thors, and especially by the decisions of the French 
Academy. It is needless to point out the great uti- 
lity of these important articles to those who have 
made a considerable progress in the language, since 
they manifestly contain the most elegant and curious 
of all the French idioms ; some of the rest are inter- 
spersed among the rules and observations exempli- 
fied in the third part of this work : and, to render 
the present undertaking more beneficial, I have in 
every part of it, and particularly in the conjugation 
of the verbs, not only in the orthography, but in 
other respects, had a due regard to the regulations of 
the Academy. 

Thus I have given a short account of my gram- 
matical performance, which is far from being an easy 
task. A Grammar for the use of schools consists of 
such a variety of parts, and some of them so minute 
and intricate, that it is a very difficult matter to 
render it at once concise and comprehensive, and 
adapt it to the meanest capacities. The subject, per- 
haps may be deemed low and vulgar; but Virgil ob- 
serves, that there is in tenui -labor; that such sub- 
jects require pains and application. Quintilian also 
assures, us, that such works plus habent operis quam 
ostentationis ; that they are laborious, though not 
splendid, productions. 

General utility was the object I principally re- 
garded in the execution of my design. I have 
omitted no necessary rules or observations; those 
that I have inserted are just, and illustrated by pro- 
ber examples j while, at the same time, I have had 



viii PREFACE. 

brevity in view, as far as it could be pursued without 
obscurity and confusion. But, though I have taken 
all the care in my power to render the follpwing 
sheets correct, I make no doubt, that unavoidable 
errors have escaped my utmost attention; for my 
own experience confirms the truth of what Mr. Pope 
asserts in the following words : 

<l Whoever thinks a faultless piece to see, 

" Thinks what ne'er was, nor is, nor e'er skall be." 

However, if, upon a candid and impartial exami- 
nation, the present should be found a well-conducted 
undertaking, I am not without hopes, that my invo- 
luntary errors will be favoured with the reader's in- 
dulgence; which Horace represents as a reasonable 
practice, in these lines : 

Verum uli plura ntienh , non ego panels 

Offendar maculis, quas ant incuria fndit, 
Aut humana pa rum cavit natura* 



N. B. In this edition the less essential rules are 
printed in a smaller type than the more important, that 
the Scholar may perceive what he o*ught chiefly to con- 
sider and learn, leaving the minuter observations to a 
farther inquiry ; the Definitions have been somewhat 
altered, in order to attain greater perspicuity : and the 
Practical Examples have been numbered, so as to refer 
to the Rules, and to the Author's Book of Exercises, 
both of which are numbered in like manner. 



CONTENTS* 

Preliminary observations 
PART I. 



FAGE 
1 



CHAP. I. 

€f Pronunciation - - » » 3 

CHAP. II. 
jTi&* $<?#;&& */*/& Consonants 5 

CHAP. III. 

^ Alphabetical List of many of the Trench Adjee- 
ject'wes, each Agreeing in Gender and Number with 
a different Subttanti<ve y to illustrate it's Meaning J 

CHAP. IV. 
jj List of Adjectives, with the Manner of their be* 
ing placed before or after their Substantives y and 
their Signification in either case - - 23 

CHAP. V. 
Of the marks and Points used in writing French 26 

CHAP. VI. 

Of Accents made use of in writing French - - 27 

A Vocabulary } French and English - - 3 r 

Familiar and easy Dialogues for young Beginners 3.7 

PART II. 

CHAP. I. 
A short Analysis of the Parts of Speech • . ' JI 

CHAP II. 

Of Genders - - . $6 

CHAP. III. 

Of the Formation of the Feminine Gender of Ad- 
jectiiiii - • - - - - 60 



CONTENTS. 



PACF 



CHAP. IV. 
Of the Formation of Plural Nouns - 6 1 

CHAP. V. 
The Dtdension of Nouns - -> W 62 

CHAP. VI. 

Of Pronouns - ~- 66 

Sect. I. Of Personal Pronouns - - ib. 

Sect. II. Of Possessive Pronouns - - 68 

Sect. III. Of Demonstrative Pronouns - 69 

Sect. IV. Of Relative Pronouns » - 70 

Sect. V. Of Interrogative Pronouns -• - ib. 

Sect. VI, Of Indefinite Pronouns »• - 71 

CHAP. VU. 

Of Verhs -- - - - 72 

preliminary Observations - • - ib. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verhs - - 73 

Conjugation of the Regular Verbs - - 77 
Termination of the Primitive Tenses of the regular 

Verbs - - . ib. 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs, alphabetically 88 
Particular Observations upon some Verbs y chiefly de- 
fective y and their Manner of being conjugated and 

used y in Alphabetical Order - - - 1 4 2 

PART III. 

CHAP. I. 

Theory joined to Practice - - • 147 

Rules and Observations upon the Articles - lb. 

Rules and Observations upon the Articles exemplified 

for the Scholar's Practice » - .151 

CHAP. II. 

Rules avd Observations upon Norms - - 1 59 

Rules and Observations upon Nouns exemplified for 

the Scholar's Practice. - * . l6l 

CHAP. III. 

Rules and Observations upon Pronouns «■ • 166 



CONTENTS. ^ 



CHAP, IV. 

Rules and Observations upon the Degrees of Com- 
parison m ' 

The Degrees of Comparison exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice 



PAGE 



Sect. I. Personal Pronouns - m j^fi 

Personal Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice ... „ I7I 

Sect. II. Possessive Pronouns - „ -176 

Possessive Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice . . j * g 

S^atTYl. Demonstrative Pronouns — _ jg 2 

Demonstrative Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice _ .» jg,. 

Sect, IV. Relative Pronouns - . .. jgg 

Relative Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice _» ^ 2 gg 

Sect. V. Interrogative Pronouns . m iqi 

Interrogative Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice . , lqz 

Sect, VI. Indefinite or Indeterminate Pronouns i q4t 

Indeterminate Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice . m 1QQ 

Se CT. VII. The Supplying Pronouns ]e, en,-y 2 Qg 

Supplying Pronouns exemplified for the 
Scholar's Practice 



209 
216 



CHAP. V. 

Rules and Observations upon Verbs * 

Sect. I. The VseofTnses I I 

The Tenses of Verbs exemplified for the 
Scholar 1 1 Practice 
SECT. II. 73* <7„ of the Subjective Mood * "l 

72* Subjunctive Mood exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice n „. 

SECT. III. 7& Government of Verbs . 

The Government of Verbs exemplified for 



22 2 

224 



- //fc Scholar's Practice 



240 
2 43 



xu 



CONTENTS. 



CHAP, VI. 

Rules and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs 
Rules and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs ex- 
amplified for the Scholar's Practice 

CHAP. VII. 

Rules and Observations Upon the Participles 
Sect. I, The Active or Present Participle 
Sect. II. The Passive or Past Participle 

Rules and Observations upon Participles 
exemplified far the Scholar's Practice 



exemplified 



CHAP. VIII. 

Rules and Observations upon Adverbs 
Rules and Observations tipou Adverl 
for the Scholar's Practice 

CHAP IX. 

Rules and Observations upon Prepositions 
Remarks upon some Prepositions - 
Further Remark upons the Prepositions a and de 
Rules and Observations upon Prepositions exemplified 
for the Scholar's Practice - 

CHAP. X; 

Observations upon the Conjunctions si and que 
The Conjunctions que exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice - 

PART IV. 

Practical Irregularities of the French Tongue alpha- 
beticallj disposed, vjith the appropriate Uses of 
particular Words and Phrases, warranted by the 
most approved Authors, and especially by the Deci- 
lions of the Fr r NCH Ac a d B M y 



249 
252 

ib. 

259 

260 

265 

267 



276 
276 
281 

28: 



293 
294 



?99 



GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 

jO RAM MAR is. a- collection of observations, to which 
^-* the manner of speaking or writing, used in a Ian- 
gage, may be reduced. 

This definition explains the natu r e of Grammar in ge- 
neral, and agrees both with the dead and living languages. 
However, to have a clear and exact idea of the Fre.-ch 
Grammar, we may define it in the following manner : 

The French Grammar is a collection of observations 
drawn from approved custom, to which the manner of 
speaking or writing French may be reduced. 

Firsr, The French Grammar is a collection of oh nervations ', 
established only by accident or fancy, independent- of 
reason, like fashion in dress. For a language is. no- 
thing more than the manner wherein a certain number of 
men have insensibly agreed to express their thoughts to 
each other. 

Secondly, Drawn from approved Custom, which is the 
actual manner ef, speaking or writing used by the majority 
of persons eminent for wit and learning. 

Thirdly, To these observations the. manner of speaking rr 
nvrifitfg French may be reduced: for, as we convey" 
ideas not only by speech, but likewise by writing, so the 
manner of speaking or writing French is to be reduced to 
observations drawn from approved custom. 

Pronunciation is the manner of expressing by speech 
the several sounds of a language, agreeably to the most 
approved custom. 

B 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



THE ALPHABET. 



A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, 
P, Q> K S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. 



a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, p, q, r, 
s, t, u, v, x, y, z. 



THE VOWELS, 

As they are pronounced in spelling, 

a, e, i, o, u. 

ANOTHER SCALE. 

a, e, e, e, i, o, u, ou. 

The scale of vowels or simple sounds may be in- 
creased ; for there are in French several other simple 
sounds, which are commonly represented by two letters, 
as by eu in beureuxy peureux* 

THE CONSONANTS, 
b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, 

V, X, z. 

The above characters may be pronounced according to 
the English way, by annexing to them any vowel either 
before or after. 
5 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



PART I. 



CHAP. I. 



Of Pronunciation. 

FN order to give a just and exact idea of the pronunci- 
-*- ation of a language, it is principally necessary to dis- 
tinguish, as clearly a^ possible, all the different sounds 
used in the language, without any regard to the letters 
made use of to express those sounds ; because a language, 
as French, English, &c, may express different sounds 
by the same characters, and the same sounds by different 
characters. 



The seventeen French simple Sounds, with the English JFords 
in nvhich the same rounds are found* 



I. 


a short, sounded 


as a in 


hoi 


2. 


a long. 


a 


all 


** 


e 


e 


battery 


4- 


e acute y 


a 


paper 


5- 


e grave. 


e 


mat 


6. 


e circumflex, 


e 


there 


7- 


i short or long. 


i 


big 


8. 


O short. 





pot 


9- 


long. 





bone 


10. 


u short or long, 


no similar sound 


i i. 


eu short. 


u 


tub 


12. 


eu longy 


no similar sound 


13. 


ou short or longy 





who 


14. 


an "J 






*5- 

16. 


onf 


no exact similar 


*7- 


uoj 







* 2 



^ A GRAMMAR OF THE 

In the above table of the French Sounds, there «re six 
that -cannot be exactly represented, and therefore muse be 
heard from the master. Nevertheless, an idea' may be 
given of their pronunciation, by the following observa- 
tions. 

To pronounce the tenth sound u, pronounce first e y as in 
English ; and then, without the least change in the position 
of your organs, but simply closing the lips a little, you 
articulate the sound ». 

The twelfth sound eu long, is pronounced by the same 
motion of the organs as the French u y only not closing so 
much the lips. 

The four last sounds, which are called the nasal vowels, 
have this peculiarity, that the n is not heard at all ; other- 
wise they should be sounded, en as en in the English word 
encore; in as en y in entire; on as on y in bond; and- un as 
tifti in bunch. 

Several of these simple sounds may be combined toge- 
ther, and form in one syllable, a compound sound, called a 
diphthong. 

The seventh sound i coalescing with the first, the fourth, 
the fifth, the .eighth, the tenth, the eleventh, the thir- 
teenth, the fourteenth, the fifteenth and the sixteenth, forms 
the diphthongs ia y ie y ie y io } iu y ieu y iou y ian y ien and ion, as 
•in fiacre , hackney-coach; amitie y friendship; biere y beer; 
<violon y violin ; re liu re , binding; 7tiieux y better; chiourme y 
galley's crew; <viande y meat ; chre!kn y christian; and 
passion y passion. 

The seventh soand a coalescing with the second, the 
fifth, and the fifteenth, forms the diphthongs oc* y ci*, 
and oin y as boete y box ; <voisin y neighbour ; and besoin y 
want. 

The tenth sound u coalescing, with the first, the fourth, 
the fifth, the seventh, the eighth, the eleventh, the twelfth, 
the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the sixteenth, forms the 
diphthongs ua y ue y ue, ui % uo y ueu short, u:u long, uan y xiu y 
and uon y as nuage y cloud ; denue y stript ; menuet s minuet ; 
huisson y bush; impetuosite y impetuosity; Iuiur y glimmering; 

* In these two diphthongs, e and i lofe their natural sound, to 
« that of a long, and i that of <? srave. 

2 



FRENCH TONGUE, f 

majesteuXj majestical * nuance y shade ; Juin> June ; and 

tious tuonSy we kill. 

The thirteenth sound qu coalescing with the first, thz 
fourth, the fifth, the seventh, the eleventh, the twelfth, the 
fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the sixteenth, forms the diph- 
thongs otta. ov-e, one, uni, oueu, short, oueu long, ciuh:. oniric 
and Quon, as rohage> wheelwork ; dejoue frustrated ; fouetter y 
to whip ; ca?nbouis, coom ; boueur^ dustman ; noueux> knotty ; 
§ouange y praise j babcitin y baboon, and noti s joucns^ we play. 

N. B. The greatest part of the seventeen simple ■ French sounds 
may be represented by a coalition of other letters* fer Which S-: 
Practise ©f t&z French PkdNimeiAf 14& 



CHAP. II. 



t Sounds of the Consonants, 



Sounds. 

J3 has-. I b, bouquet^ a ntsegay 

C, 3 k, coffre, a trunk 

s, cierge, a wax. candle 

g, second, second 
Cfw z sh, (English) chocolat, chtm 

colate 

k, echo, echo 
P, 2 d, donner, to give 

t, que verW-il ? what does 
he sell? 
F 2 2 f, vif, quick, 

v, neu^ homines, nine men 

* 3 



A 8RAMMAR OF THE 



Sounds. 



Gr, 


3 


g> 


gazon, /#r/* 






j» 


geant, a giant 






kj 


bourg, a borough 


Gn, liquid, 






dignite, dignity 


not liquid, 






stagnation, stagnation 


H, pronounced, 






heros, a hero 


not pronounced, 






heroine, a he rein e 


L, liquid 






fille, a girl 


not liquid, 






fil, thread 


M, 


2 


m, 


mon, my 






«i 


non, a name 


N, nasal, 






chien, a dog 


not nasal, 






bien aise, 'very glad 


P, 


I 




precepreur, a preceptor 


Q, followed by «, 




k, 


quatre, four 


R, 


I 




miroir, a looking glass 


s, 


2 


s, 


sage, wise 






z> 


rose, a rose 


T, 


2 


t, 


a m i t i e , friendship . 






s> 


patience, patience 


v, 


I 




vertu, 'virtue 


X, 


4 


ks 


, sexe, sex 



gz,exemple, an example 

ss, soixante, sixty 

z, dixieme, the tenth, 

dix, ten, followed by 

nj&wetm 



All these sounds are exemplified by more wo»ds ranged 
in their respective classes, in my Practice of the 
French Pronunciation alphabetically exhi- 
bited, where you may find words in which such letters 
axe either pronounced^ or not pronounced. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



CHAP. III. 

An Alphabetical List of many of the French Adjec- 
tives, each agreeing in Gender and Number with a 
different Substantive to illustrate its meaning. 



Cbs. Those adjectives marked 
placed before their Substantives. 



thus \ are generally 



Adjectives. 


Gend< 


A BJECTE, 
-*-*- abominable, 


F 
M 


academique, 


M 


acariatre, 


F 


admirable^ 

adverse, 


F 
F 


affable, 


F 


affaire, 


M 


affectees, 


F 


affirmatif, 


M 


agee, 

agreable, 


F 
F 


agreste, 

aigrelette, 

aimable, 


M 
F 
F 


aise, 


M 


aliment aire, 


F 


alizes, 


M 


alphabetique, 
altier, 


F 

M 


ambigM'e, 


F 


ambirieux, 


M 


amere, 


F 


amortissable, 


F 


amoureuse, 


F 


amphibologique, 


F 


anatomique, 


F 



rof 



Substantives* 



condition, an abject condition 
crime, an abominable crime 
exercice, an academical exercise 
humenr, a petulant temper 
invention, a wenderful invention 
partie, an adverse party 
demoiselle, an affable lady 
homme, a busy man 
manures, affected manners 
ton, a positive tone 
veuve, an elder ly widow 
surprise, an agreeable surprize 
fruit, wild fruit 
sauce, a sourish sauce 
fille, a lovely girl 
ouvrage, an easy work 
pension, an alimony 
vents, trade.winds 
liste, alphabetical list 
homme, a prond man 
parole, an ambiguous word 
projet, an ambitious project 
boissoa, a bitter drink 
rente, a redeemable re?it 
fille, an amorous girl 
expression, an a?nbiguous expres- 
sion 
dissection, an anatomical dissection 
b 4 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Adjectives, 


Gender 


$ ancien, 


M 


Anglicane, 


F 


animates, 


F 


annuelle, 


F 


anodins, 


M 


anonyme, 


M 


anseatique, 


F 


antique, 


M 


appetissante, 


F 


apre^ 


M 


aquilin, 


M 


arbitral re, 


M 


argentine, 


F 


ardent^ 


M 


argilleuse, 


F 


aro.matique, 


F 


atrabilaire, 


M 


artificieux, 


M 


Attique, 


M 


ayantageux, 


M 


aveugle, 


M 


auriculaire, 


M 


austere, 


F 


authentique, 


F 


auxiliaire, 


M 


Bachique, 


F 


badine, 


F 


bai, 


M 


barbare, • 


F 


basse, 


, F 


% bean, 


M 


begue, 


M 


belli queuse, 


F 


bienseante, 


F 


bilieux, 


M 


bissextile, 


F 


bitumineuse, 


F 



of Substantives. 

ami, an ancient friend 
eglise, the church of Engla 
facultes, the sensitive faculties 
pension, a yearly pension 
remedes, anodyne remedies 
livre, an anonymous book 
ville, a hanse town 
chateau, an antique castU 
viande, savoury meat 
fruit, harsh fruit 
nez, an aquiline nose 
pouvoir, art arbitrary power 
voix, a clear voice 
charbon, a burning 
terre, clayey ground 
herbe, an aromatic kerb 
temperament, an an 

melancholy temper*. 
detour, an artful evasion 
sel, pslite genteel raillery 
peste, an advantageous post 
cheval, a blind horse 
terrioin, an ear. witness 
mine, an austere mien 
loi, an authentic law 
verbe, an auxiliary verb 

char.s^n, a drinking song 
humeur, a wanton humwt 
cheval, a bay horse 
action, a barbarous action 
chambre, a ground . 
tapis, a fine c- 
enfant, a Stammering child 
nation, a warlike nation 
parole, a decent *ub 
temperament., a bih 

, the lea} 
maiiere, bituminous mat 



FRENCH' TONGUE. 



9 



Adjectives. 

bizaarre, 

blanche, 

bleu> 

blonds, 

boiteux, 

J.bon, 

borgne, 

bossn, 

botanique,. 

bourbeux, 

bourru, 

brave, 

brill ant, 

brulant, 

brune, 

brute, 

bruyante, 

burlesque, 

Calamiteux, 

calleuse, 

calomnieux, 

candi, 

capable, 

capricieuse} 

captieux, 

casuelle, 

categorique, 

catholique, 

cavalieres, 

caverneuse, 

caustique, 

celebre, 

celeste, 

ehatouilleux^ 

chaud, 

chaude, 

chauve, 

% chere, 

cher, 



cf 



Substantives. 



Gender 

M esprit, a whimsical mind 

F chemise, a clean shirt 

M ruban, a blue ribbon 

M cheveuXj light hair 

M coeval, a lame horse 

M vin, gifcd koine 

F femm^j a o?ie- eyed 'woman 

M homine, a crookhacked man 

M iardin.5 a botaincal garden 

M passage, a ?nuddy passage 

M air, a morose countenance 

M soldat,tf bravs scldier 

M esprit, shining hvit 

M soleii, a burning sun 

F colli eur, a brown colour 

F pierre, an urihewed stone 

F compagnie, a noisy company 

F poesie, burlesaue poetry 

M temps, a calamitous time 

F peau, a callous skin 

M rapport, a slanderous report 

M sucre, sugar- candy 

]VJ rnaitre, an able master 

F femme, a capricious wo?nan 

M discours, a captious discourse 

F entreprise, a casual undertaking- 

F r eponse, a categorical answer 

F" egiise, the catholic church 

F manieres, blunt manners 

F montagne, a hollow mountain 

M emplatre, an escharotic plaster 

M auteur, a celebrated author 

M~ bleu, sky-blue 

M homme. a ticklish man 

. M temps, hot weather 

F main, a warm hand 

F tete, a bold he dd 

F sceur, dear sister 

M chapeau, a dear hat 
» 5 



lo 



Adjectives. 


Gender 


chimerique, 


M 


chirurgicale, 


F 


circonspecte, 


F 


circulaire, 


F 


clair, 


M 


colossale. 


F 


combustible, 


F 


commode, 


F 


commun, 


M 


compacte, . 


M 


complet, 


M 


confuse, 


F 


conjecturale, 


F 


conjugate, 


F 


conscientieux, 


M 


considerable, 


M 


constant, 


M 


contagieuse, 


F 


comptanr, 


M 


continuel, 


M 


contraire, 


F 


contradictoire, 


F 


convenable, 


M 


cordiale, 


F 


corporelle, 


F 


correct, 


M 


cruel, 


M 


curieux, 


M 


Dangereux, 


M 


decent, 


M 


decisive, 


F 


delicate, 


F 


delicieuse, 


F 


demonstrative, 


F 


deraisornable, 


F 


J drrniere, 


F 


desagreable, 


F 



desastreux, 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

of Substantives. 

projet, a chimerical project 
operation, a surgical operation 
COnduite, wary behaviour 
let t re, a circular letter 
jour, a clear day 
statue, a colossal statue 
matiere, combustible matter 
maison, a convenient house 
prix, a common price 
corps, a compact body 
traite, a complete treatise 
idee, a confused idea. 
connoissance, conjectural knowledge 
fidelite, conjugal fidelity 
negociant, a conscientious merchant 
bien, a considerable estate 
ami, a constant friend 
maladie, a contagious disorder 
argent, ready money 
bruit, a continual noise 
resolution, a contrary resolution 
nouvelle, contradictory nevus 
logement, a convenient lodging 
liqueur, a cordial liquor 
punition, corporal punishment 
ouvrage, a correct vuork 
tourment, a cruel torment 
tableau, a curious picture 

passage, a dangerous passage 
habiilement, a decent dress 
sentence, decisive sentence 
viande, dainty ?nc at 
poire, a delicious pear 
preuve, a demonstrative proof 
demande, an unreasonable request 
place, the last place 
conversation, disagreeable convert 
sat ion 
M jour, an ill-fated day 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



n 



Adjectives. 


Gen<! 


desavantageuse, 


F 


deshonnete, 


F 


desirable, 


M 


despotique, 


M 


devote, 


F 


diffamatoire, 


M 


difficile, 


F 


X digne, 


M 


diligent, 


M 


discret, 


M 


disgracieux, 


M 


dispendieuse, 


F 


distinctive, 


F 


docte, 


M 


dogma tiq ue, 


M 


dominicale, 


F 


doulou reuse, 


F 


douce, 


F 


droite, 


F 


dure, 


F 


durable, 


F 


Ecclesiastique, 


F 


econome, 


M 


effeccif, 


M 


efficace, . 


M 


efficients, 


E 1 


effrovable,. 


M 


elastique, 




elegant, 




emblem atiqire, 


F 


emollient, 


M 


emphyteotique, 


M 


empirique, 


M 


energique, 


F 


enfantin, 


M 


enigmatique, 


F 


emiere, 


F 



r of Substantives. 

situation, a disadvantageous situa- 
tion 
parole, an immodest word 
bien, a desirable blessing 
pouvoir, despotic power 
fern me, a devout woman 
libelle, a defamatory libel 
langue, a difficult tongue 
magistrat, a worthy magistrate 
ecolier, a diligent scholar 



ami, a discreet friend 
etat, a disagreeable situation 
guerre, an expensive war 
marque, a distinctive mark 
professeur, a learned professor 
style, a dogmatical style 
oraison, the Lord's prayer 
condition,- a grievous condition 
odeur, a sweet smdling odour 
main, the right hand 
pier re, a hard stone 
prospe ri te, lasting prosperity 

dignite, ait ecclesiastical dignity 

man, a saving his band 

heritage, a real estate 

moyen, an efficacious mean 

cause, an efficient cause 

incendie, a dreadful fire 

corps, an elastic body 

. .. mpliment, an elegant compliment 

**e, an embh?natical figure 
le'j an e?nollient medicine 
a long lease 
mea c i i a qua ck doctor 
demand' , an . verge tical petition 
discours, a childish discourse 
proposition, an enigmatical proper 

sition 
semaine, a whole weeL 

B 6 



12 

Adjectives. 

envieux, 

epais, 

epidemique, r 

epineux, 

episcopal, 

epique, ■ 

epistolaire, 

exclusif, 

expeditif, 

expert, 

expressif, 

ex q ins, 

exterieure, 

extraordinaire, 

Fabuleuse, 

facile, 

Fantastique, 

ferineuse) 

fastidieuse, 

fatal, 

favorable, 

favori, 

t fausse, 

ferrne, 

feroce, 

fertile, 

fidele, 

fier, 

figuratif, 

fixe, 

flasquesj 

flatteur, 

J Foible, 

i'ortuity 

frais, 

X franc, 

Fr^ncoise, 

frauduleux, 



A GRAMMAR OF Tg£ 



Gender 

M 
M 
F 
M 
M 
M 
M. 
M 
M 

'M 

M 
M 

F 
M 

F 



F 
F 

M 
F 

M 

F 

M 

M 

F 

F 

M 

M 

M 

M 

F 

M 

F 

M 

M 

M 

F 

M 



of Substantives. 

artisan, an envious tradesman 

nuage, a thick cloud 

rnaladie, an epidemical disorder 

proces, ah intricate lawsuit 

palais, a bishsp's palace 

pocme, an epic poem 

style, epistolary style 

dixit, an exclusive right 

cornrnis, an expeditious clerk x 

medecin, an able physician 

mot, an expressive word 

meVs, a dainty dish 

par tie, the exterior part 

e tenement, an extraordinary event 

difference, a very great drffe\ 



histoire, a fabulous story 
;ue, an easy language 
P r j e t , <? fantastical p rf'ect ' 
dartre, *z <7/j.£/# tetter 
societe, 41 fastidious society 
moment, an\unh ment 

occasion, afavourab 
pi a i sir, a dauing pleas 
nciivelle, 
' p:i : Ifir 

' province, province 

arnan t, a fait hful lover 
homme, a haughty ma?i 
sens, a figurative sense 
prix, a set price 
joucs, fiabby cheeks 
cou r ti san, a favu h ing conn 
sante, /// health 
cas, a mere chance 
air, cool air 
a r hit re, freewill 
mode, a FrencS fashion 
commerce, a fraudulent fra 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



Adjectives. 


Gende 


friandj 


M 


froid, 


M 


fruo-aJe, 
frivole, 


F 
M 


fruitier, 


M 


funebre. 


, F 


funeste, 


F 


Ga!antes, 


F 


gauche, 


F 


genereux, 


M 


geographique, 


F 


geometrique > 


F 


glorieuse, 
Gothique, 


F 

F 


gracjeax, 


M 


Lmaticale,, 


F 


,gras, 


M 
M 


grave, 

gremi, 
% g™s, 


F 
M 
M 


grotesques^ 
gueable, 


F 
F 


guerrier, 


M 


gutturale, 


F 


% HabKe, 


M 


habkueji 


M 


rdi, 


M 


haissahle. 


M 


bardie, 


F 


harmoniease, 


F 


t ha 'J re, 
heroi'que, 


F 
F 


honorinque, 
hurrride, 


M 


hypocrite. 


F 



•of Substantives, 

pat 6, • a dainty pye 
temps, cold weather 
vie, a frugal life 
conte, a frivolous story 
arbre, a fruit tree 
oraison, a funeral sermon 
aventure, a fatal adventure 

manieres, genteel manners 

main, the left hand 

ma it re, a generous ?naster 

carte, a map 

demonstration, a geometrical demon* 

si ration 
entreprise, a glorious undertaking 
lettre, black letter 
compliment, a handsome compliment 
regie, a grammatical rule 
verger, a large orchard 
. jambon, a fat ham . 
demarche, a grave gait 
epi, a full ear of '.com 
pa que t, 'a large bundle 
tig-.: res, grotesque figures 
riviere, .a for dalle river. 
peuple, a warlike people 
lettre, a guttural letter 

ouvrier, .an able workman 

vice, an habitual vice 

yeuXj fierce eyes 

objet, a hateful object 

en t re prise, a bold undertaking 

period-e, a harmonious period- ' 

mpntagne, a high) mountain 

action, a heroic action 

titre, an honourable title 

Jinge, vjet linen 

Hiine^ a hypocritical mien ^ 



*4 

Adjectives. 

Illegitime, 

illicite, 

i [lustre, 

imaginaire, 

immemorial, 

immoderee, 

immodeste, 

impardonnable, 

imparfait, 

impenetrable, 

imprenable, 

impraticable, 

impropre, 

imprudent, 

impudente, 

inaccessible, 

incomparable, 

inconstant, 

incontestable, 

incorrigible, 

incroyable, 

incurable, 

indigent, 

indigeste, 

indisciplinable, 

indispensable, 

indubitable, 

inepuisable, 

inevitable, 

iiiieodee, 

infinie, 

ingcnieuse, 

inhabitable, 

inhumaine, 

inimitable, 

imntelligible, 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Gender of Substantives. 



imoj 



ue, 



M pouvoir, an illegal power 

M contrat, an illegal contract 

F famille, an illustrious family 

M bonheur, imaginary happiness 

M temps, time immemorial 

F passion, an immoderate passion 

F posture, an immodest posture 

F faute, an unpardonable fault 

M ouvrage, an imprfect vuork 

M secret, an impenetrable secret 

F ville, an impregnable city 

M chemin, an impassable road 

M terme, an improper term 

M avis, an imprudent advice 

F conversation, a shameful conversa- 
tion 

F montagne, an inaccessible mountain 

F beaute, an incomparable beauty 

M amour, inconstant love 

F verite, an incontestable truth 

M gar con, an incorrigible lad 

F nouvelle, incredible nevus 

F maladie, an incurable sickness 

M auteur, an indigent author 

M manger, indigestible victuals 

M e'w'olier, an unruly scholar 

M devoir, an indispensable duty 

M succes, undoubted success 

F source, an inexhaustible source 

M naufrage, an unavoidable ship vc reck 

F rente, a rent charge 

F obligation, an infinite obligation 

F invention, an ingenious invention 

F maison, an uninhabitable house 

"^ durete, inhuman rigour 

M sculpteur, an inimitable carver 

F proposition, an unintelligible prop*-* 
sit ion 

F action, a wicked action 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



Adjectives* 


Gende 


injurieuse, 


F 


inquiet, 


M 


insatiable, 


M 


iusolvable, 


M 


insoutenable, 


F 


in time, 


M 


intrinseque, 
invalide, 


F 
F 


invariable, 


F 


inventive, 


F 


invincible, 


M 


inviolable, 


M 


inutile, 


M 


irrevocable, 


M 


isabelle, 


M 


t Jeune, 
+ jolie, 


F 
F 


jo) euse, 

Judaique, 

judiciaire, 


F 
F 
F 


judicieux, 
juridique, 
juste, 


M 

F 

M 


justificative, 


F 


i 
Labcrieux, 


M 


Jabourable 


F 


laconique, 
t laide, 


M 
F 


lamentable, 


M 


langoureuse, 
languissante, 
large, 
lascif, - 


F 

F 

F 

M 


lent, 


M 


licentieuse, 


F 


licite, 


F 



' of Substantives. 

parole, an injurious expression 
esprit, an unquiet mind 
appetit, an un satiable appetite 
debiteur, an insolvent debtor 
opinion, an unwarrantable opinion 
ami, an intimate friend 
qualite, an intrinsic quality 
convention, an invalid agreement 
ami tie, an unchangeable friendship 
imagination, an inventive imagina- 

Hon 
courage, an invincible courage 
attachement, a?z inviolable attach- 

?nent 
travail, a useless labour 
arret, an irrevocable decree 
cheval, a yellovu dun horse 

beaute, a young beauty 
demoiselle, a handsome lady 
fille, a merry girl 
coutume, a Jfe<wish custom 
astrologie, judicial astrology 
phiiosophe, a judicious philosopher 
conviction, a legal conviction 
jugement, a just judgment 
piece, a voucher 

jardinier, a laborious gardener 

terre, arable land 

style, a laconic style 

figure, an ugly J ace 

cri, a lamentable shriek 

situation, a languishing situation 

sante, vueak health 

rue, a broad street 

desir, a lascivious desire 

pas, a sloiv step 

conduite, a licentious co?iduct 

vente, a lavoful sale 



i6 



Adjectives. 


Gendi 


limitrophe, 


M 


liquide, 


F 


litterale, 


F 


litigieux, 


M 


Jivide, 


M 


t l<mg> 


M 


lourd, 


M 


lucratif, 




• re, 


Ivl 


lyrique, 


F 


'?ue, 


M 


jue, 


F 


majestueux, 


M 


maigre, 


M 


ule, 


F 


maiencontieux, 


M 


majingre, 


M 


malicieuse, 


F 


ma 1 pro ores, 


F 


malsaine, 


F 


manifeste, 


F 


march a nde, 


F 


roarecageux, 


M 


marin,. 


M 


maritimes, 


F 


mart! ale, 


F 


massif, 


M 


materielJe, 


F 


maternelle, 


jr 


ma trice, 


•F 


J mauvaise, 


F 


mechanique, 


M 


J mechamc, 


F 


medieinale, 


F 


melancholique, 


i 


meh 


F 


memorable, 


M 


mesqui 


R 


methoaicue, 


M 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

tr of Sr;!rtantives. 

pays, a neighbouring country 
medecine, liquid ph, sic 
traduction, a literal t ran slat ie?i 
droit, a disputable right 
tevnt, a livid complexion 
di scours, a long discourse 
pa que t, a heavy burde?i 
metier, a lucrative ttr.de 
spectacle, a 'mournful spectacle 
poesie, lyric poetry 

art, magic art 
v e r . u , n agn e tie il virtue 
porr, a majestic carriage 
iiiOUton, Uaii mutton 
1 e 1 1 r e, a capital letter 
moment, an ominous ?noment 
cheval, a sickly horse ^ 

fern me, a malicious woman 
manchettes, dirty ruffles 
saison, an unhealthy season 
verite, manifest truth 
vil'e, a trading town 
terrain, marshy ground 
mon-stre, a suimonster 
puissances, mariti/ne^pewers- 
intrepidite, warlike intrepidity 
or, solid gold 

substance, a material substance 
tendresse, a motherly tenderness 
eglise, the mother church 
excuse, a had excuse 
arr, a mechanical art 
creature, a wicked creature 
potion, a medicinal draught 
humeur, a melancholy humour 

:, a meiodhms voice 
evenemeat, a nUmorable event 
ecQi ess 

discours, a methodical dicourse 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



l l 



Adjectives. . 


Genet 


militaire, 


F 


minerale, 


F 


mobiliaire, 


M 


modeste, 


F 


modique, 


M 


moelleux, 


M 


momentane, 


M 


monotone, 


F 


montagneux, 


M 


j morne, 


M 


mortelle, . 


F 


municipal, 


M 


municipale, 


F 


mur, 


M 


musical, 


M 


mutuel, 


M 


jique^ 


M 


Natal, 


M 


nature], 


M 


naval, 


M 


navigable, 


F 


nebuleux, 


M 


neigeux, 




nec^ssaire, 


F 


net, 


M 


neuve,, 


F 


noire, 


F 


nonchalant. 


M 


notoire, 


M 


f nouveile, 


F 


1 nu, 


M 


pblique, 


F 


obscene. 


F 


cbstructif, 


M 


occult 


F 


ire, 


M 


int^| 


F 



Substantives. 
academie, a military academy 
eau, a ?n'meral vjater 
bien, a personal estate 
filie, a made $t girl 
prix, a moderate price 
drap, a soft substantial cloth. 
plaisir, a momentary pleasure 
voix, a monotonous 'voice 
pays, a hilly country 
silence, sullen silence 
fie v re, ' a mortal fever 
droit, com?non law 
ville, a corporation to<vm 
raisin, ripe grapes * 

air, a musical tune 

n al love 
dictionnaire, a mythological diction* 

ary . • 

air, native mr 

penchant, a natural inclination 

combat, a sea fight 

riviere, a navigable river 

I temps, ■J'&SJ \ weather 
r snovy J 

condition, a necessary condition 

verre, a clean glass 

perruque, a nevj voig 

calotte, black breeches 

domes tique, a careless servant 

vol, a notorious robbery 

.mode, a ne*w fashion 

pieds, barefoot 



li gne, an oblique line 
peinture, an obscene picture 
remede, an astringent medicine 
qualite, a hidden quality 
temoin, an eyewitness 
fleur, an odoriferous fltoxjer 



18 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Adjectives. 


Gende 


r of Substantives. 


odicuse, 


F 


comparalson, an odious comparison 


oisif, 


M 


ecolier, an idle scholar 


Olympiques, 


M 


jeux, the Olympic games 


Olympien, 


M 


Jupiter, Olympic Jove 


onereuse, 


F 


charge, a burdensome employment 


opiniatre, 


M 


horame, an obstinate man 


opulente, 


F 


viile, a rich city 


orageux, 


M 


vent j a stormy -wind 


ergueilleux, 


M 


mepris, proud contempt 


origineJ, 


M 


pechtj, original sin 


outrageux, 


M 


soupcon, an offensive suspicion 


Paienne, 


F" 


religion, the Pagan religion 


pair, 


M 


nombre, an even number 


pale, 


M 


v i sa ge, a paU face 


pacifique, 


M 


roi, a peaceable king 


panique, 


F 


terreur, a panic fear 


pardonnable, 


F 


meprise, a pardonable mist ak$ 


paresseuse, 


F 


servante, an idle maid 


particulier, 


M 


soin, particular care 


patentes, 


F 


lettres, letters patent 


pater nel, 


M 


devoir, fatherly duty 


pathetique, 


M 


ton, a pathetic tone 


patrimonial, 


M 


bien, a patrimonial estate 


pattu, 


M 


pigeon, a rough-footed pigeon 


pedantes, 


F 


manieres, pedantic manners 


penale, 


F 


loij a penal la e w 


penates, 


M 


dieux, household goods 


pendable, 


M 


cas, a hanging matter 


penible, 


M 


ouvrage, a toilsome vcork 


perceptible, 


F 


faussete, an evident untruth 


peremptoire, 


M 


argument, a peremptory proof 


pernicieux, 


M 


jeu, a pernicious game 


perpetuel, 


M 


tourment, a perpetual torment 


personnelle, 


F 


faute, a personal fault 


pertinente, 


F 


replique, a pertinent reply 


pesant, 


M 


paquet, a heavy bun.de 


t P etit > 


M 


mouchoir, a small handkerchief 


philosophale, 


F 


p ie r re , the ph do sop he r's stone 


philosophiquc, 


F 


question, a philosophical question 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



»9 



-Adjectives* 


GenJe 


pleine, 


F 


poetique, 


M 


pointilleux, 


M 


p®issonneux, 


M 


polie, 


F 


polyglot te, 


F 


pompeux, 


M 


ponctuel, 


M 


poreux, 


M 


post h ume, 


M 


poudreux, 


M 


poussif, 


M 


prealable, 


F 


precieuse, 


F 


precis, 


M 


precoces, 


M 


pre. fixe, 


F 


preliminairej 


F 


premature, 


M 


presomptueuse, 


F 


principale, 


F 


probable, 


M 


pioblematique, 


F 


prochain, 


M 


prodigieux, 


M 


profond, 


M 


prolixe, 


M 


j prompte, 


F 


public, 


M 


pueril, 


M 


Quadrangulaire, 


F 


querelleuse, 


F 


quotidier,, 


M 


Raboter.se, 


F 


raisonnable, 


F 


rapide, 


M 



• of Substantives. 

bouteille, a full bottle 
style, a poetical style 
critique, a captious critic 
etang, a fish-pond <wdl stored 
nation, a polite nation 
Bible, a polyglot Bible 
equipage, a pompous equipage 
homme, a punctual man 
bois, porous <wood 
ou v r a ge, a posthumous wo rk 
souliers, dusty shoes 
cheval, a broken. winded horse 
convention, a previous agree ement 
pier re, a precious sttne 
jour, a determinate day 
fruits, early fruit 
heure, a fixed hour 
observation, a preliminary observer. 

tion 
esprit, an untimely <wit 
jeunesse, presumptuous youth 
etude, the chief study 
sentiment, a probable opinion 
proposition, a problematical froposU 

tion 
printemps, next spring 
colosse, a prodigious coUssus 
fosse, a deep ditch 
di scours, a prolix discourse 
col ere, sudden anger 
affront, a public affront 
amusement, childish amusement 

place, a square piece 
femme, a quarrelsome ivife 
pain, daily bread 

planche, a rough flank 
demande, a reasonable demand 
cours, a rapid stream 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Adjectives. 


Gender 


rare, 


M 


,rebelle, 


M 


recente, 


F 


reciproque, 


F 


recreative, 


F 


redoutable, , 


F 


reelle, 


F 


re forme, 


M 


regulier, 


M 


remarquable, 


F 


reprehensible, 


M 


respectueuse, 


F 


riche, 


F 


ridicule, 


M • 


u reusej 


F 


royal, 


M 






ronx, 




rubicond, 


M 


rude, 


M 


ruineuse, 


3~ 


rustique, 


F 


armeusc* 


F 


sage, 


F 


sain, 


M 


Salique, 


F 


sanguinaire, 


M 


satirique, 


M 


savant, 


M 


sauvage, 


M 


scabreuse, 


F 


sec, 


M 


scientifique, 


F 


scorbutique, 


F 




* M 


scditieux, 


M 


iempheroclle, 


F 



of Substantives, 

oiseau, an uncommon bird 
S u jet, a rebellious subject 
plaie, a recent luound 
flu elite, reciprocal fidelity 
lecture, an entertaining lecture 
mort, a dreadful death > 

per te, a real I -si 
ofHcier, a half -pay officer 
plan, a regular plan 
enseigne, a remarkable sign 
procede, a blamable proceeding 
reponse, a respectjul answer 
robe, a rich goim 
habillernent, a ridiculous drat 
■j$ punhhmtnt 
ii palace 

visage, a ruddy face 
hiver, a hard winter 
depense, a ruinous exbenct 
vie, country life 

terre, sandy ground 

conduite, prudent conduct 

fruit, sound fruit 

loi, the Salic faw 

conquerant, a blood-thirsty con* 

qui r or 
trait, a satirical stroke 
ouvragc, a Lav 
canard, a e wii 
entreprise, a 

linge, dry lift 

preface, - preface 

rdi rf 
art, a sex 
ecrit, a set 
vieillc, an old 



FRENCH TONGUE 



21 



Adjectives. 


Gender 


-sericuse, | 


F 


severe, 


M 


si mil aire, 


M 


sincere, 


M 


sinistre, 


M 


soignetix, 


M 


sclide, 


M 


solitaire, 


F 


solvable, 


M ' 


sombre, 


F 


soluble, 


M 


somptueux, 


M 


t sot, 


M 


spacieux, 


M 


specieux, 


M 


spirit ueuss, 


F 


splendide, 


M 


sterile, 


M 


stoiique, 


F 


studieux, 


M 


suave, 


F 


sublime, 


M 


subreptice, 


F 


succincte, 


F 


.suffisant, 


M 


superbe, 


M 


supertitieuse, 


F 


surnaturel, 


M 


suspect, 


M 


Tacite, 


M 


tardifs, 


M 


temeraire,, 


M 


tendre, 


M 


terrible, 


F 


tiede, 


M 


timide, 


M 


tolerable, 


M 


tortueux, 


M 


touffue, 


F 



of Substantives. 

reprimande, a serious reprimand 
ton, a severe tone 
son, a similar sou?id 
ami, a si?icere friend 
presage, an unlucky omen 
jardinier, a careful gardener 
fondement, a solid foundation 
vie, a retired life 
debiteur, a solvent debtor 
matinee, a gloomy morning 
probleme, a soluble problem 
repas, a sumptuous meal 
marche, a silly bargain 
jardin, a spacious garden 

pretexte, a specious pretext 
liqueur, a spirituous liquor 

repa s , a 4p lendid repast 

arbre, a barren tree 

insensibilite, stoical insensibility , 

ecolier, a studious scholar 

odeur, a siveet smell 

style, a sublime style 

dispense, a surreptitious dispensa- 
tion 

analyse, a short analysis 

temoignage, a sufficient testimony' 

batiment, a magnificent building 

pratique, a superstitious practice 

signe, a supernatural sign 

dessein, a suspicious design 

consentement, a tacit consent 
raisins, late grapes * 

combat, a rash combat 
pculet, a tender chicken 
epouvante, a terrible fright 
the, lukewarm tea 
lievre, a fearful hare 
mal, a tolerable evil 
ruisseau, a winding rivulet 
haie, a bushy hedge 



22 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Adjectives 

triennal, 

triompha!, 

J triste, 

tumultueuse, 

turbulente, 

Turque, 

tyrannique, 

Ulrerieur, 

unanime, 

uni forme, 

unique, 

wniverselle, 

urgente, 

Utile, 

Vague, 

vaillant, 

vaine, 

valide, 

variable, 

£ vaste, 

venimeux, 

vert, 

vereuse, 

veridique, 

venue use, 

viagere, 

victorieuse, 

v ide, 

+ vieux, 

vigoureuse, 

visible, 

vocale, 

volage, 

volontaire, 

vraie, 

vulgaire, 



Gender of 

M 
M 
M 

F 

F 

F 
M 



Substantives. 



bail, a lease for three years 
arc, a triumphal arch 
souvenir, a sad remembrance 
compagnie, a tumultuous company 
republique, a turbulent republic 
religion, the Turkish religion 
pou v oir, ty rannical power 



M examen, a farther examination 

M consentement, a unanimous co?uent 

M rapport, a uniform report 

M fils, an only son 

F connoissance, universal knowledge 

F necessite, a pressing necessity 

F decouverte, a useful discovery 

F signification, a vague signification 

M general, a valiant general 

F pensee, a vain thought 

M contra t, a valid contract 

M temps, variable weather 

F prairie, a large meadow 

M reptile, a venomous reptile 

M tapis, a green carpet 

F pom me, a maggoty apple 

M gazetier, an honest newswriter 

F fern me, a virtuous woman 

F pension, an annuity 

F armee, a victorious army 

M pot, an empty pet 

M pont, an old bridge 

F defense, a vigorous defence 

F eclipse, a visible eclipse 

F musique, vocal music 

F jeunesse, fickle youth 

M meurtre, a wilful murder 

F nouvelle, true news 

F opinion, a vulgar opinion 



Zele, 



M predicateur, 6 zealous preacher 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



n 



CHAP. IV. 

A List of Aijectwes, ivith the Manner of their beivg 
ffdced before or after their Substantively and their 
Signification in either Case. 

FUSTE prix, a reasonable homme juste, a just man. 



"USTE prix, a reasonable 
rate. 

juste defence, a just defence. 

a bas prix, at a low rate, 

le bas ventre, the louver part 
of the belly. 

une mure deliberation, a ma. 
ture deliberation. 

maigre chere, poor fare. 

vive douleur, a sharp pain. 

bon homme, a ma?t who 
means no harm, or a sim- 
ple man. 

pauvre homme, a sorry fel- 
low. 

grand homme, a great man. 

certaine nouvelle, a certain 
piece of news. 

sage-femme, a midwife. 

grosse femme, a large woman. 

galant homme, a complete 
gentleman. 

le grand monde, the great 
iv o rid. 

pl ai sa n t homme, an imperti- 
nent fellow. 

vLlain homme, a disagree** 
able man. 

furieux animal, a large crea- 
ture. 

mort-bois, wood of no value. 



action juste, a just action. 
action basse, a mean action. 
les Pays -bas *, the Loiv coun- 
tries. 
du fruit mur, ripe fruit. 

viande maigre, lean meat. 
esprit vif, a lively wit. 
homme bon, a good-natured 
man. 

homme pauvre, a poor man. 

homme grand, a tall man. 

nouvelle certaine, true or au- 
thentic intelligence. 

femme sage, a prudent woman. 

femme grosse, a woman with 
child. 

homme gallant, a man fond 
of the ladies. 

air grand, a noble mien. 

homme plaisant, a pleasant 
man. 

homme vilain, a niggardly 
fellow. 

animal furieux, a fierce crea- 
ture. 

bois mort, dead trees. 



* In other cases, speaking of coutries, the adjective goes before, 
as, le bas Languedoc, la basse Normandie, la basse Saxe, la haute 
Ssxs, la basse Auuiche, le £jjllhin, le haul Hhin, &c. 



*4 A GRAMMAR OF Ti 

morte-eau, the water at the eau rnorte, standing water, 

hot torn of the sea. 
en droiteligne, straight along, ligne droite, a straight line, 

franc coquin, a ifery rogue* ho mine franc, an honest 

downright man, % 

franc- sale, an allowance of arbre franc, an ungrafted or 

salt. real tree. 

franche verite, naked truth. marchandise franche, free 

merchandise. 

franc- til lac, the lower deck. bourgeois franc, a free citi- 
zen. 

basse-cour, an inner yard. voix basse A a low 'voice. 

basse-fosse, a dungeon. riviere basse, a shallow river* 

le bas bord, the larboard faire main basse, to put all 

side of a ship. to the sword. 

les basses voiles, the courses cceur bas, a base mind. 

or lower sails. 

le bas peuple, the mob. avoir la'vue basse, to be 

shortsighted. 

les basses cartes, the low esprit bas, a mean wit. 

cards. 

clier ami, dear friend. habit cher, a dear suit. 

clairs deniers, clear or spare du linon clair, clear lawn. 

money . 

un doux zephir, a gentle un billet doux, a Irve letter. 

gale. 

dure-mere, the dura ?nater. viande dure, tough meat. 

faux frais, extraordinary ex-- cheval faux, a sf::;,:b!i>rg?, 

pences. horse. 

fin nmois, a sly cunning diamant fin, a right dia> 

fll)W. 

fol espoir, a folish hope. peintre fou, a mnd 

fol amour, Cupid. poete fou, a mad'pobt\ 

le riant bout, the upper end. h chamore haute, i 

house. 
menss plaisirs, pocket money, jambes menues, small si, 

legs. 
molle condescendanee, a dull vie molle, an ean 
co?npliance. 

eouleurs, the green visage pale, a. 
sickness. 
rouge bord, a bumper. des yeux rouges, iUodshot 

tJtS. 



rouge-gorge, a robin, red- 
breast. 

rase campagne, an open fie?d. 
saine doctrine, sound doctrine. 

la saine raison, sound reason. 

de vains efforts, vain endea- 
vours. 
foible raison, a weak reason. 
vaine gloire, vain glory. 

double biS re, strong beer. 

un vif ressentiment, a lively 

remembrance, 
vive douleur, a smart pain. 
vif-argent, quicksilver. 
de vive voix, by voordof mouth. 
ferme resolution, a firm re- 
solution. 
dc vastes desseins, great de* 

signs. 
vieille mode, an old fashion. 
la verte jeunesse, youthful 

days. 
une verte reponse, a sharp 

answer. 
une verte reprimande, a 

sharp reprimand. 
un vert galant, a brisk gal. 

lant. 
apre combat, a cruel combat. 
la tendre jeunesse, tender 

youth. 
maigre repas, pitiful cheer* 
maigre auteur, a pitiful author. 
froide mine, a cold look. 
ample pouvoir, full power* 

a plus forte raison, how much 
more. 



FRENCH TONGUE. % ; 

couleur rouge, a r,-i colour. 



velours ras, shorn velvet, 

temps sain, healthy vuea^ 
ther. 

jugement sain, sound judg- 
ment. 

peine veine, unprofitable, 
trouble. 

l'age foible, infancy. 

homme vain, a vain glofioul 
man. 

$cte double, duplicate pf a 
writing. 

dei yeux vifs, sparkling eyes. 

eheval vif, a mettlesome horse. 
couleur vive, a lively colour. 
teint vif, a florid complexion. 
muraille ferme, a firm wall. 

uu esprit vaste, a great ge- 
nius. 
vin vieux, old wine. 
bois vert, green wood. 

fruit vert, unripe fruit. 

pois verts, green pease. 

une tete verte, a hare- 
brained fellow. 
un esprit apre, an austere man. 
l'age tendre, tender age* 

terroir maigre, a barren soil. 
style maigre, a poor style. 
viande froide, cold meat. 
discours ample, a diffuse Jii- 

course. 
raison fortej a strong reasm. 

C 



26 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

CHAP. V. 
Of the Marks and Points used in writing French. 

fpHE several marks used in writing French are the 
-*- following. 

A comms, une wirgule, (,) separates the least parts of a 
sentence, and stops the reader's voice till he ean count 
one* 

A semicolon, un point et une virgi.Ie, (;) sep<'ir: 
larger portions of a sentence. At this the reader must 
aft op till he can count two. 

A colon,, deux points, (:) marks the larger divisions, of 
which a sentence is susceptible. At this the reader must 
stop till he can count three. Semicolons and colons are 
sometimes, but improperly, used promiscuously. 

A period, or full point, un pointy (.) is used when the 
sentence is" fully ended, and requires a pause till the reader 
can count four. 

A note of interrogation, ttn point d' interrogation, (?) is 
fcsad in asking a question. 

A note of admiration, un point d' admiration, (!) is used 
when we admire, wish, or wonder : it serves also to ex- 
press some violent passion. 

An apostrophe une apostrophe, (') is set over the place 
where some letter is left out ; as V amour, instead of le 
amour, love *. 

A hyphen, un tiret, ou un trait d' union, {•■) joins words 
or syllables together ; as, par!a-t~il, did he speak ? parle- 
i-elle, does she speak ? 

A cedilla, une cedille, (c) is placed under c, when it is 
pronounced like s, before a, 0, or u. 

A parenthesis, une parenthese, ( ) includes something 
not necessary to the sense, but brought in to explain or 
illustrate it, and is very seldom used. 

A diaeresis, une trema (") parts two vowels coming to- 

* These two vowels, a, e, when the next word begins with « vowel 
or An by not pronounced, are left out in French in the following 
words. 

Le, la, jc, mt, (e, :c f dt, ee, ne> iuc\ /', j\ m\ t y , *', d* , C*»J»\ I**' 



FRENCH TONGWE. 27 

getheij and sgnifies their making two syllables, as Saul 
etoit roi d' Israel, Saul was king of Israel. 

It is likewise placed over e at the end of certain words 
ending in gue, to express that they must be pronounced 
gu y and not as in fatigue. Ex. aigue] the feminine of aigu, 
sharp ; cigue y hemlock e 

There are several other notes used by authors . and 
printers; but it would be needless to trouble the learner 
here with any. 

Obs. I. Le, la, ce, suffer no elision before onze, onzleme, oui; neither 
in the imperative mood, as, taisseos-Ie aller, let him go ; except when 
-followed immediately by en ory, as, laisse&-Py aller, let him go thither, 

Obs. IT. Si suffers an elision only before U or its. 

Obs. III. Lrf, there, and qui, who, are never contracted. 

Obs. IV. e in grande is contracted in some words beginning with 
a consonant, as grand*mere 9 grandmother, a grand 1 peine, with mucii 
ado, &c. 

CHAP. VI. 

Of Accents made use of in writing French. 

A N accent is a note put over a vowd, at the end of a 
^-*' syllable or word, to denote it's sound, quantity, na- 
ture, or signification. 

An accent is either acute, aigu y (') ; grave, grave ( v ^ 
or circumflex, circonflexe, ( A ). 

The first is placed upon e y when it has a slender sound p. 
as in ///, the summer; except in the words of the second 
person plural, because in these, e is joined with z, as vous 
aime% y ye love. 

The second accent is sometimes put upon e, when it 
has an open sound; as in saliere y saltcellar ; in some mo* 
nosyllables, ending with an s, prh ; near, trh y very, &c. ; 
f ?lso at the end of words of more than one syllable, as in 
progress progress; apres, after, It is used in the last case, 
when an s follows. 

This accent is likewise used to distinguish articles, ad- 
verbs, verbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, u* in the 
following words : 

a, has, a, at or ie* 

la? the, , ' la, thtre. 

C 2 



*8 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



<le la, of, or from the. 
rics, tome, of % or from the. 
tp> come cr.. 
cm, or. 



<le la, thence. 
d£s que, at toon at. 
•fa, hither. 
oil, where. 



N. B. Compounds follow the same rule, as, la-haut> 
above ; la-bas y down there, below ; la-detsut, upon that ; 
la-destous, under that, down there; de la % thence; par 
la } that way ; celui-la, cetle-la, that. 

This accent is never placed in the beginning or in the 
middle of words, when an e is followed by a consonant, 
with which it makes a syllable. 

The third is placed commonly upon a long vowel, as 
in age, age; fete, a feast; and particularly upon those 
which were formerly spelt with an s, as in ah/me, an abyss; 
hz notres, ours, &c. 

In same monosyllables, as in mat. a mast. 

At the end of some words ending with /, as in for it y a 
forest. 

In the third person singular of the preterite subjunctive, 
as, au'il farlaty that he might speak ; to distinguish the 
subjunctive from the indicative, il parlay he spoke. 

Observe, that verbs of the first conjugation take a /, 
beside the accent, in the conjunctive mood, and none in 
the indicative : but all other verbs have a / in the indica- 
tive and subjunctive moods, 



Cardinal Num- 


Numerical 


Les Numbres 


bers. 


Letters. 


Cardinaux. 


I, one. 


1. 


un. 


2, two. 


11. 


deux. 


3, three. 


III. 


trois. 


4, four. 


IV.' 


«quatre. 


Sa L#*t. 


v. 


cinq. 


4>, six. 


VI. 


six. 


7, seven. 


VII. 


sept. 


8, eight. 


VIII. 


huit. 


9, nine. 


IX. 


neuf. 


10, ten. 


X. 


dix. 


li, eleven. 


XI. 


ouze. 


12, t<wel*ve. 


XII. 


douze. 


13, thirtten. 


XIII. 


treize. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



** 



14, fourteen. 


XIV. 


quatorze. 


*fs fifteen* 


XV. 


quinze. 


1 6, sixteen. 


XVI. 


seize. 


17, seventeen* 


XVII. 


d ix- sept r 


18, eighteen. 


XVIII. 


dix-huit. 


19, nineteen* 


XIX, 


ditf-neuf. 


20* twenty. 


XX. 


vingt. 


21, twenty -one* 


XXL 


vingt-et-un. 


22, twenty-two* 


XXII. 


vingt-deux. 


and so on to 




jusqu'd. 


30, /A/r/y. 


XXX. 


trente. 


31, thirty. one. 


XXXI. 


trente.et-uru 


32, thirty- two. 


XXXII. 


trente-deux.. 


and so on to 




jusqu'd. 


40 jfrf/j. 


XL. 


quarante. 


41, forty. one. 


XLI. 


quarantc-et-tin. 


$2 ? . forty- tw-7. < 


XLII. 


quaranie-d *a>>. 


2nd so on 13* 




ft&*M > a. 


$0, fifty. 


L. 


ciuquante. 


$h fifij-**?* 


LIV 


cinquante-et-un. 


52.,. fifty- tw&*. 


LII. 


cinquante-deux. 


and so on to 




jusqu'd. 


60, sixty* 


tXi 


soixante. 


61, sixty -one. 


LXI. 


soixante-et-un. 


6 2, sixty -two. 


LXII. 


soixante-deux. 


and so on to 




jutqx'd. 


70, seventy* 


LXX. 


soixante-et.dix. 


7 I, seventy-one* 


LXXI. 


soixante-et-onze. 


72, seventy, two* 


LXX II. 


soixante-et-douze. 


and so on to 




jusqu'd. 


8o, eighty^ 


LXXX. 


quatre-vingts. 


81, eighty. one* 


LXXXI. 


quatre-vingt-un. 


82, eighty ~tvjo*. 


LXXXII. 


quatre. vingt. deux, 


and so on to 




jusqu'd. 


90, ninety. 


XC. 


quatre- vingt-dix, 


*j r , ninety "One, 


XCI. 


quatre. vingt-onze. 


92, ninety. two. 


XCI-I. 


quatre-vingt-douze \ 


and so on to 




jusqu'd. 


J 00, g^ hundred. 


C. 


cent. 


200, /<u>:3 hundred. 


CC. 


deux cents. 


JQO, ?£/%« hundred. 


ccc. 


trois cents* 



c 3 



30 

400, four hundred. 
500, five hundred. 
600, six hundred, 
7 CO, seven hundred, 

800, eight hundred '. 

900 , nine hundred. 

1 000, one thousand. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



cccc. 

D, or I3. 
DC, or I3C. 
DCC, or 

I CC. 
DCCC, or 

l^CCC. 
DCCCC, or 

I3CCCC, 

M, or CI D . 



quatre cents. 
cinq cents. 
six cents. 
sept cents. 

huit cents. 

neuf cents, 

mille. 



These numbers never vary their termination, except 
vn y which makes une in the feminine ; cent, which makes 
cents in the plural ; mille is written mil, when we write 
the date of the year ; in this case cent does not vary ; 

as, 



1796, one thousand seven 
hundred and nwetj^six. 



MDCCXCVI, mil sept- 
cent quatre- vingt. seize. 



The words septante, ectante and nonante, are obsolete 5 buitante and 
newvante have been made use of only by some calculators. The ad- 
vantage of admitting these words, septante, huitante y newvante, which 
preserve their roots, is obvious enough to those who have numbers to 
put down in figures under the telling of another person. Six vingt. 
(six score) was the common appellation for 120 in the last century, 
but has been abandoned: quatre virgt (four score) will probably scon 
experience the same fate. These false numerical appellations are in- 
tirely rejected by mathematicians. 



Ordinal Numbers. 
1st, first. 
2d, second. 
3d, third. 
4th. fourth* 
5th, fifth. 
6th, sixth. 

7 th, seventh. 

8 th, eighth. 

9 th, ninth. 
10th, tenth. 

1 1 th, eleventh. 
1 2th, tvjclfth. 
13th, thirteenth. 



Les Nombres Ordinaux. 

1 e r . premier, M. premiere, F. 

2 d . second, M. seconde, F. 

3 e . troisieme, M. & F. 

4«. quatrieme. 

5 e . cinquieme. 

6e. sixieme. 

7 C . septieme. 

8 e . huirieme* 

9 C . neuvieme. 
]O e . dixieme. 
1 ie. onzieme. 
1 2 C . douzieme. 
13°. treiziesie. 



FRENCH 

•J -4 th, fourteenth-} 
15th, fifteenth. 

16 th, sixteenth; 

17 th, seventeenth* ■ 
I 8 th, eighteenth . 
19th, nineteenth. 
2oth, twentieth. 

2. 1 s t, tuuenty -first* 
2-2(1, tiventy ^second*. 

and so otv&£, 



TONGUE. 



a* 



I4 e . quatorzieme, 
I5 e . quinzieme. 
j6 e . seizieme. 
1 7 C . dix-septieme a 
iS e . dtx-huitieme* 
19°. dix-neuvieme. 
2c e . vingtieme. 
2i & , vin.goet-unie.me. 
22. c l vingt-deaxi&ne* 
H avisi rfe suits* 

i 



Once, 

thrice, or three times, 
four Times, 



une fois. 
deux fois. 
trois fois. 
quatre fois* 



First, or in the first place* premie rement, ou en premier 

lieu, 
second/)', or in the second secondementf ou en second 

flace, lieu. 

thirdly, or in the third place. troisiemement, ou en troisid- 

me lieu, 
fourthly, or in the fourth, quatriemement, ou en qua$» 
place* trie me lieu.. 



The Months of the Years, The Seasons of the Year, 



January, Janvier. 
February, Fevrier. 
March, Mars. 
April, Avril, 
May. Mai. 
June, Juin. 
July, Juillet. 
August, Aout. 
September, Septembre. 
October, Octobre. 
November, Novembre. 
December, Decembre. 



The Spring, le printemps. 
The Summer, Pete. 
The Autumn, Pautomne, 
The V/ inter, l'hiver. 

The Days of the Week. 
Monday, Lundi. 
Tuesday, Mardi. 
Wednesday, Mercredi. 
Thursday, jeudi. 
Friday, Vendredi. 
Saturday, Samedi. 
Sunday , Dimanche* 
c. 4, 



jt A GRAIVfMAR OF THE 

The Four Elements. Of Geography. 



Fire, le feu. 

Air, l'air. 
Earth, la terre. 
Watery l'eau. 

The' Cardinal Pcints. 

The east> \ 'orient, cu l'est. 
The njucstf l'occidenf, ou 

Tones t. 
The north, je nord, ot* le 

septentrion. 
27* jwtf£ A !e raidi, «a k sud. 

The Five Senses. 

Sight, la vue. 
Henri ftg y l'ouie. 
Feeling, le toucher* 
Taste, le gofit. 
Smell, l'odorat. 

The Four Divisions of 
the World. 

Turofe, I 1 Europe. 
Asia } l'Asie. 
Africa y TAfrique. 
Ame*ka y I'Araerique. 

Of the Moon. 

The new moony nouvelle 

lune« 
The first quarter, premier 
quarrier. 

full :noon, pleinc lune. x 
I. nt quarter, dernier 
quartier. 



Terms relating to the Land. 
L 

A continent, un Continent. 

An hi and ', vme lie. 

A peninsula, une presqu'ile. 

An isthmus y un isthme. 

A promontdrjy un promon- 

toire. 
A mountain, unc montagnc. 
A coast, or shore, une cote, 

II. 

Terms relating to Water. 

The Qceav, l'occan. 
The gulf , un golfe. 
A strait, un detroit. 
A channel y un canal. 
A lake, uniac. 
A river, une riviere* 

Of the Weather, 

Heat, le chaud. 

Coldy le froid. 

Rain, la pluie. 

DciVj la rosee. 

Hail, J a grele. 

Snonv, la neige. 

Frost, la gelee. 

Thaw, le dcgel. 

A fog, or mist, un brouillard. 

A storm, un orage. 

A fash of lightning, un eclair. 

Thunder, le fonnerre. 

The rainbrr.v, l'arcen-cicl, 

Th wW, le vent. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 53 

The Ages of Men. The Periods of Time. 



Birth , la naissance. 
Childhood^ l'enfance. 
Youth, la jeunesse. 
Manhood, la virilite. 
Old Age, la viei Hesse. 
Death, la mort. 



Arts and Sciences. 

Divinity y la theologie. 

Philosophy, la philosophic 

Logic, la logique. 

Natural philosophy, la phy- 
sique. 

Physic, la medecine. 

Surgery , la chirurgie. 

Z^-xi;,. le droit,. 

Grammar, la grammaire. 

Rhetoric, la rhetorique. 

Poetry, la poesie. 

Mathematics, les mathema- 
tiques.. 

Astronomy, Pastronomie. 

Chronology, la chronologic- 

Arithmetk, l'arith me tiqqe. 

Geometry, la geometric 

Geography, la geographic 

Surveying, Parpen tagc 

Architecture, Parchitecture. 

Fortification, les fortifica- 
tions. 

Navigation, la. navigation. 

Music, la musique. 

Chemistry, la chimie. 

Painting, la peinture. 

Statuary, la sculpture. 

Dancing, la danse. 

Drawing) le dessin. 



yfo instant, un instant. 

/4 moment, un moment. 

^ minute, une minute. 

-^ quarter of an hour, un 
quart d'heure. 

//^^ #* &?#r, une dernu 
heurc 

^/// ter, une heure, . 

-4 </<9', un jour. 

37»<? morning, le matin. 

Kw, midi. 

Afternoon, Papres.midi, 

T&<? evening, le soir. 

Midnight, minuit. 

^4 fLt-wi, une semaine. 

^ month, un mois. 

A year, un an. 

if* tf^j un siecle. 

Eternity, Teternite. 

7^<? beginning, le commence- 
ment. 

27><? middle, le milieu. 

7^ #>#</, la fin. 

Parts of the Bodyv 

77><? /W^/, la tete.. 
The hair, ,les cheveux. 
The face, le visage. 
The forehead, le front. 
The features, les traits. 
The ryes, les yeux. 
The eyebrows, les sourcils. 
The eyelids, les paupieres. 
T«i nese, lenez. 
The nostrils, les narines.. 
The cheeks,. les-joues. 
27^ Ups,. les levres. . 
27* w^, la Louche. 
c 5 " . 



34 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



The teeth, les dents. 
The gums, les gencives. 
The jaw , la. machoire. 
The throat, le gosier. 
The earSy les oreilles. 
The chin, le men ton. 
The ?ieck y le cou. 
The shoulder:, les epaules. 
The ar?ns, les bras. 
The elbow, le coude. 
The wrist, le pgignet. 
The hand, la main. 
The fingers, les doigts. 
The thumb, le pouce. 
The nails, les ongles. 
The fist, le poing* 
The knees, les genoux. 
7$* /<?^jj les jambes. 
The feet, les pieds. 
27^ i^/j, les talons. 
The hip j la hancke. 

Wearing Apparel. 

A coat, un habit. 
A waistcoat, une veste. 
The sleeves, les manches. 
The buttons, les boutons, 
7^<f button-holes, les kouton- 

mere*. 
The pockets, \z$ poches, 
The fob, un g.ousset. 
The linings la doublure. 
A shirt, une chemise. 
3^* riffles, les manche ttes. 
j4 handkerchief, un mou- 

choir. 
Stockings, des has. 
Carters, des jarretie res. 
£Zw^ 3 des sou lie rs. 
Buckles, clcs boucles. 
./f to, un chapcau, 



A *vig, une perfuque. 

Gloves, des gants. 

yi w^, un manchon. 

A comb, un peigne. 

A sword, une epee. 

Boots, des bottes. 

yf rarg-, une bague. 

A watch, une montre. 

A snuff box, une tabatiere. 

A purse, une bourse. 

Spectacles, des lunettes. 

A petticoat, une jupe. 

^ gown, une robe. 

Linen, du linge. 

.^« apron, un tablier. 

A fan, un eventail. 

Ear-rings y des boucles d'o- 

reille. 
A pin, une epingle. 
^ needle, une aiguille, 
^ pincushion y une pelote. 
Sweet water, eau de sen* 

teur. 
Powder, de la poudre. 
7)6^ powder-box, la boite a 

poudre. 
Ribands, des rubans. 
Jewels, des bijoux. 
Scissars, des ciseanx. 
Pattens, des patins. 
Cloth, du drap. 
Z/j/, de la lisiere. 
Muslin, de la mousseline* 
Lawn, du linon. 
Gauze, de la gaze. 
Buckram j du bongran. 
Dimity, du basin. 
Velvet, du velours. 
Camb/et, du camelot. 
Druggett, du droguet. 
Ratteen, de la raiine. 
Lustring, du tafetas. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



35 



Household Furniture. 

A bed, un lit. 

The curtains, les rideaux. 

A- warming-pan, une bassi- 

noire. 
The bed -clothes, les couYer, 

tures. 
A pillow, un oreiller. 
A mattress, un mate! as. 
A strain-bed, une paillasse. 
A feather-bed, un lit de 

plumes. 
The head of the bed, la. tete 

du lit. 
The tester, le ciel du lit. 
The bed's feet, les pieds du 

lit. 

A house, une maisen. 

Hangi?igs, la tapisserie. 

A looking, glass , un miroir; - 

A chair, une chaise. 

A table, une table. 

-4 carpet, un tapis. . 

^ table-cloth, une nappe. . 

A plate, une assiette. 

ytf napkin, une serviette^ 

^ £*#£, un couteau. 

A fork,. une fouchette. 

A spoon, une cuiller *v 

A salt. cellar, une saliere. 

A dish, un plat. 

at. f une ecuelle. 
^3 basin, < -, 

7 Lun bassm. 

A towel, un essuie-mairw 

^ £<?///<?, une bouteille. 

^4 £/#**, un verre. 

A^ corkscrew, un tire-bou* 

chon. 

JLcandle, une chandelle* 

* r is. pronounced, and m 



^ candlestick, un chandelier, 
^ waxAght, une bougie. 
77v snuffers, les mouchettes* 
^ rto/ <?/" drawers, une com. 

mode. 
A trunk, un cofrre. 
^ ^5A", une boite. . 
^ cradle, un berceau. 
2Hfe fre,le feu. 
T&<r chimney, la cheminee* 
7#* hearth, le foyer. 
7£<? bellows, le soufHet. 
A grate, une grille. 
^ gridiron, un gril. 
7$* tongs y les pincettes-., 
7£<? fire-shovel, la pelle> . 
The poker, \z fourgon. 
7fe tfj&j, les ceridres. 
The flames, la flamrae. 
77?<f smoke, la fumee. 
7!fe wo/, la suie. 
Matches, des allumettes,. 
Tinder, la meche. 
^/ tinder-box, une boite L 

fusil. 
y4 jft/?/, une pierre a fusil. 
7&^ j/^/, le fusil., Je briquet* 
A kettle, un cbaudron, 
^4 ^/, un pot* 
A pot -lid, un couvercle, 
^ flesh-hook, un- crochet. 
A tre*vet., un trepied. 
y^ skimmer, une ecumoire* 
A frying-pan, une poele. 
v£ pudding.pan y une^ tour- 

tiere. 
^ j/5;/, une broche, 
A jack) un tournebroche* 
^ broom, un balai. 
^4 rubber, un torchon, 

ore properly spelt, cuU!he>- 

0-6 



36 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



A dripping-pan, u \t leche- 
frite. 

A thaflng-dish, un rechaud. 

A sieve, un i.amis. 

A washing-tub^ une cuve. 

Pincers , des ten a i lies. 

A nail, un clou. 

A hammer, un mflrteau. 

A cullender, un couloir. 

Herb SjPLANTs^and Fruit, 

Turnips, dts navets. 
Carres, des carrotes. 
Red beets, des betteraves. 
Radishes, des raves. 
Spinage, de* epi nards . 
Cabbages, des choux. 
Cauliflowers, des choux- 

fkurs. 
Artichokes, des artichaux. 
Asparagus, des asperges. 
Lettuce, de la laitue. 
Endive, de la chicoree. 
Celery, du celeri. 
Panky, du persil. 
Rur slain, du pourpier. 
Presses, du cresson. 
Sorrel, de l'oseille. 
Onions, des ognons, 
Gtfrffri, de l'ail.' 
^ballots, des echalottes. 
£-vi/, des porreaux. 
Thyme, du thym. 
Chervil, du cerfeuil, 
fozgr, de la sauge. 
Melons, des melons. 
Cucumbers, des concombrcs, 
Grurds, des citrouillcs. 
Pumpkins, des courges. 
Kettles, dm or ties. 
A<rr#j de la fougcre# 



Thistles, des chardons, 
A flower, une fleur. 
v4 //^/^, une tulippe. 
A violet, une violette. 
y4 ^i*<, un ceillet. 
^ r/civ gilliflower, une £ji- 
rofiee. 

^ P°ppy> un P avot » 
Wild poppy, du coquelicoU 
//?//>■, du houx* 
y^ /r^, un arbie. 
«/? shruby un arbrisscau. 
^ wall-tree, un espalier. 
Brambles, des ronces. 
^ //^r;/, une epine. 
Apples, des pommes. 
Pears, des poires. 
Cherries, des cerises. 
Plums, des prunes. 
Almonds, des amandes. 
Peaches, des peches. 
//£*, des fig ties. 
Chesnuts, des chataignes. 
JValnuts, des noix. 
Hazelnuts, des noisettes* - 
Filberts, des avelines. 
Oranges, des oranges. 
Lemons, des citrons. 
Grapes, du raisin. 
Gooseberries, des groseilles. 
Strawberries, des f^ises. 

Of the Study and the 
School* 

Paper, du papier. 

Blotting paper, du papier 

brouillard. 
Brown paper, du papier gris. 
Gilt paper, du papier dore. 
>4 y//;>r 0/* paper, une main 

dc papier. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



37 



A sheet of 'paper , une feuille 

de papier. 
A ream of pa per > une rame 

de papier. 
A book) une livre. 
A page , une page. 
A leafy un feuillet. 
The margin , la marge. 
The ink, Pencre. 
The inkhorn, Pecritoire. 
Cotton, du coton. 
A petty une plume* 
The niby le bee. 
The slit, la fente. 
A penknife, un canif. 
Dust, de la poussiere. 
Sandy du sable, 
A pounce-boxy un poudrier. 
A lesson, une lecon. 
J Fax, de la cire. 
Wafers, des pains a cacheter. 



<^ seal, un cachet* 

A pocket-book, des tablettes* 

-^ r«/<rr, une regie, 

A writing, une ecriture. 

/f letter, une lettre. 

A syllable, une sy llabe, 

^/ word, un met. 

if* accent y un accent. 

A phrase, un phrase. 

yi sentence, une sentence. 

^ period, une periode. 

y£ theme, un theme. 

^4 translation , une traduc- 

Hon, 
Verses, des vers. 
Pm<?, de la prose. 
i4 */.-*£, un pupicre. 
Parchment, du parchemin. 
Pasteboard, du-carton. 
^ i/e/, un pate. 
A pencil y un crayon. 



' FAMILIAR AND EASY DIALOGUES 

FOR YOUNG BEGINNERS. 



QIR, jour most humble ser- 
vant, 
I have the henour to be yours, 

I hope you are well ? 
To pay my respects to you* 
To obey you. 
How are all at borne P 

They are all well. 

Ready to do you any service. 

At your service. 

And you, Madam, how do 

you do P 
Pretty well. Very well, 



Monsieur, voire tres-hum- 

ble serviteur. 
J'ai Phonneur d'etre le 

votre* 
Votre sante est-elle bonne ? 
A vous rendre mes devoirs. 
A vous obeir. 
Comment Se porte-t-on chez 

vous ? 
Tout le monde s'y porte bien. 
Pret a vous rendre service. 
A votre service. 
Et vous, Madame, comment 

vous portez-vous i 
Passablement bien. Tres- 

bien. 



Is all your family well ? 

Perfectly Weil. 

How is ysur mother P^—your 
father — -year sister P 



You do them much honour ; 
they ure all in pood health, 

I am <very glad to see ysu in 

good health. 
And I to see you. 
I am infinitely obliged to 

you. 
I. humbly thank you, 

I. am much indebted to you. 
I gi'veyou a thousand thanks. 
Madam , you jest ; I do but 

my duty. 
Now I think on it r how is 

your brother P 
Exceeding 'well. 
I am 'very glad of it. 
Dees he learn French P 
Yes, Sir, and my sister like- 
wise. 
Does he go to school P 
He goes to the Jlcademy, and 

my sister is at a hoarding. 

school. 
I shall be 'very glad to see 

the?n at the next holydays. 
Sir, they will not be less glad 

to see you . 

Fnrewely present my best re- 
spects to your father and 
mother. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Tout le monde se porte-t-i: 
bien chez vous ? 

Parfaitement bien. 

Comment se porte Madame 
votre aiere ? — Monsieur 
votre pere ? — Mademoi- 
selle votre sceur ? 

Vous leur faires bien de 
Phonneur ; ils sont tous 
en bonne saute. 

Je suis bien charrne de vous- 
voir en bonne sante. 

Et moi pareillement. 

Je vous suis infiniment 
oblige. 

Je vous semercie tres-hum- 
blement. 

Je vous suis bien redevable* 

Je vous rends mille graces. 

Madame, vous vous mcquez ; 
je ne fais que mon devoir. 

A propos, comment se porte. 
Monsieur votre frere ? 

Parfaitement bien, 

J'en suis bien aise. 

Apprend-il le Francois ? 

Oui, Monsieur, et ma sceur 
aussi. 

Va-t.il a l'ecole ? 

11 va a PAcademie, et ma 
sceur est dans une pen- 
sion. 

Jc serai bien aise de les voir 
aux vacancesprochaines. 

Monsieur, ils ne seront pas 
moins charmes de vous 
voir. 

Adieu, presentcz mes tres- 
humbles respects a Mon- 
sieur votre pete et a Ma- 
dame votre mere. 



FRENCH TONGUE 

Tell them I will come and see 
them some day or other \ 

IVcll, good b'ye. 



{ 

II. 



39 

Dites-leur que j'irai les voir 
un de ces jours. 



Ah ca, au plaisir. 



Ak ea, a 1'honneur. 



Sir, I am overjoyed to meet 

you here. 
Sir, you are very kind, 

Ho-zu have you done since I 
had the pleasure to see 
you P 

Very well ; thank God* 

My mother is skk. 

Is she P indeed I am very 

sorry for it. 
What is the matter with her P 
She has the headach. 
She has the footbath* 
She has a fever. 
She has not been out of doors 

this fortnight. 
I a;r, very serry I have not 

time to see her to day. 

What hinders you P 

Indeed I cannot : I must go 
to Islington. 

She would he very glad to 
see you. 

To morrow, without fail, I 
will do myself the honour, 

I am very sorry to hear she 
is ill 

Do not jail to call to mor- 
row. 

No, no, I vjill not fail* 



de- 



Monsieur, je sols ravi 

vous rencontrer ici. 
Monsieur, vous avez bien de 

la bonte. 
Comment vous etes-vous 

portedepuis que jen'ai em 

le plaisir de vous voir ? 
Toujours tres-bien ; Dieu 

merci. 
Ma mere est malade. 
Elle est malade ! En verite 

j'ei> suis tres-fache. 
Qu'esuce qu'elle a ? 
Elle a ma! a la tete. 
Elle a mal aux. dents. 
Elle a la fievre. 
II j a quinze jours qu'elle 

n'est sortie. 
Je suis tres-fache de n'a- 

voir pas le temps de la 

voir aujourd'hui. 
Qu'est-ce qui vous en em~ 

peche ? 
En verite, je ne puis : il 

faut que j'ailie a Islington. 
Elle seroit bien aise de vous 

voir. 
Demain, sans faute, j'aurai 

cet honneur Ja. 
Je suis tres-fache d'appren- 

dre qu'elle se porte mal. 
Ne manquez pas de venir 

demain. 
Non, non • je n'y manque- 
pa i pas. 



4° 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



/ rely on you. 

Ycu may defend upon me. 



Je cornpte sur vous, - 
Vous pouvcz compter car 
moi. 
Farewell:. I will tell her so. Adieu ; je le hi! (lira*. 

III. 

Let us speak nothing but Ne pari on s que Francois ? 

French, 
Agreed ; it is the best means 

of learning a language. 



Well$ I ei us begin. 

Do you speak French ? 

J speak it a little. 

French is a very useful l*tn- 

It is noiv the universal lan- 

guage. 
The French language is very 

difficult. 
The English is still more so. 

Are you very voell versed in 
the French tongue ? 

Not much ; 1 am beginning 
to learn it. 

Do you understand what you 
read? 

Better than I can speak. 

1 do not vuonder at that: it 
is alvjays easier to under- 
stand a language y than to 
speak it. 

Who teaches you French? 



Mr. A. 

/ know him ; he is a very 

able man. 
}Joiv many times a week does 

he attend yen ? 



J'y consens ; e'est le meil. 

leur moyen d'apprendre 

line langue. 
He bien ; commencons. 
Parlez-vous Francois ? 
Je le parle un peu. 
Le Francois est une langue 

tres-utile. 
C'cst aujourd'hui la langue 

universelle.. 
Le Francois est tres-din> 

cile. 
L'Anglois l'est encore da- 
vantage. 
Etez-vous bien savant dans 

la langue Francoise ?. 
Pas beaucoup; je ne fais que 

de commenccr. 
Comprenez-vous ce que vous 

lisez ? 
Mieux que je ne paile.. 
Je ne nVen etonne pas : il 

est toujours plus facile de 

comprendre une langue 

que de la parler, 
Qui est-ce qui vous enseigne 



leF 



ran9ois 



? 



C'est Monsieur A. 

Je le connois ; c'cst un tres. 

habile homme. 
Combicn de lemons vous 

donnc-t-il par scmaine ? 
6 i 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
As often as I am at leisure. 



4* 



Almost every day. 

Hqtjj long have you been 

learning French? 
Six months. 
Indeed you have made a 

great progress. 
Sir, ycu encourage me to 

make greater. 

You must always speak 
French. 

I am afraid of making blun- 
ders. 

I should be laughed at. 

O no ; do not be afraid of 
being lauglxd at. 



Aussi souvent que j'en ai le 
temps. 

Presque tous les jours. 

Combien y a-t-il que vous 
apprenez le Francois ? 

Six mois. 

En verite vous avez fait de 
grands progres. 

Monsieur, vous m'eficoura- 
gez a en faire de plus 
grands. 

II faut tou jours parler Fran- 
cois. 

J'ai peur de faire des fautcs? 

On se moqueroit de moi. 
Point du tout ; ne craigner 
pas qu'on se moque de 

YOUS. 



IV. 



Where are you gourgP 

I am going to the Park, to 

churchy to the play, to 

Greenwich, t$ Islington, 

Vr. 
Where do you come from ? 
I come from the Park, from 

church, from the play, 
from Greenwich, from Is~ 

Zing ton, &c. 
Was the king at the play ? 
Yet, and the queen too* 
How do you like the English 

language ? 
The English tongue is very 

difficult for Frenchmen to 

learn. 
Do you learn Latin f 
I have been learning it these 

tvjo years. 



Ou aller-vous ? 

Je vais au Pare, a l'eglise, £ 

la comedie, a Greenwich, 

a Islington, &c. 

D'ou venez.vous ? 

Je viens du Pare, de Peglise, 
de la comedie, de Green- 
wich, d'Islington, &c. 

Le roi etoit.il a la comedie? 
Oci, et la reine aussi. 
Comment trouvez-vous la 

langue Angloise ? 
Je trouve que l'Angloii 

est tres. difficile pour ies 

Francois. 
Apprenez. vous le Latin ? 
II y a deux ans que je l*ap. 

p rends. 



42 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



What doyen think of Latin ? 
Sir.) I think that Latin is 
mere difficult than French. 

You are right* 

What French authors do you 
read ? 

I read the Adventures of 
Telemachus, the Age of 
Lewis XlV y the History 
cf Charles XII, king of 
Sweden. 

Do not you read sometimes 
la Fontaine* s Fables? 

Yes, Sir, my master told me 
he was the best author for 
fables. 

What do you learn by heart? 

I learn the article s, the pro- 
nouns, the verbs, &c. 

You pronounce the French very 
well. 

I take a great deal of pains* 

Nothing is to be done without 
pains* 



Que pensez-vous du Latin? 
Monsieur, je pense que le 

Latin est plus difficile que 

le Francois. 
Vous avez raison. 
Quelsauteurs Francois lisez- 

vous ? 
Je lis les A ventures de Te- 

lemaque, le Siecle de 

Louis XIV, PHistoire 

de Charles XII, roi dc 

Suede. 
Ne lisez- vous pas quelquefois 

les Fables de la Fontaine I 
Oui, Monsieur, mon maitre 

m'a dit que e'etoit lemeiU 

leur auteur pour les fables, 
Qu'apprenez-vous par cceur? 
J'apprends les articles, les 

pronoms, les verbes, &c. 
Vo«s prononcez tres-bien le 

Francois. 
Je prends beaucoup de peine* 
On n'a rien sans peine. 



/; it true ? 
Yes, it is true 
Do you believe it ? 
It is but too true. 
Bdieve me on my word. 
I would not tell yeu a lie 
for all the gold in the 
world. 
Did you see it ? 
Why did you not tell it mc ? 

I can assure ysu* 
I believe you* 



Est-il vrai ? 

Oui, il est vrai. 

Le croyez-vous ? 

II n'est que trop vrai. 

Croyez-moi sur ma parole. - 

Je ne voudrois pas vous dire 

un mensonge pour tout Tor 

du monde. 
L'avez-vous vu ? 
Pourquoi ne me l'avez-vous- 

p*s dit ? 
Je puis vous assurer, 
Je vous crois. 



French tongue, 



43 



ou speak in earnest P 
1 speak in earnest, 
U elly be it so, 
I will not oppose it , 
That is not true. 
You are mistaken. 
Did you guess it ? 
Who told it you ? 
■Somebody you know* 

Are you certain of ft ? 

You may be mistaken, 

I do not believe I am mis- 
taken. 

There is no such thing. 

Who doubts it ? 

1 can never dcubt it. 

There is no doubt of it, 

I will lay any thing you 
please. 

I never lay any wager. 

When did you see - him or 
her? 

When did you see them ? 

I saw him last week. 

I saw her last month. 

I have not seen them. 

What do you say f 

I said nothing at all, 

I heard it. 

Do not believe such a story. 

I do not believe it. 

When did you hear it ? 

To day y yesterday^ the day 
befo re yesterday , 

Will you tell it him ? 

I shall never tell it him. 



Do you choose to drink a dish 
of tea f 



Parlez-vous serieusement ? 
Je parle serieusement. 
He bien, a la bonne heure. 
Je ne ra'y opposerai pas. 
Cela n'est pas vrai. 
Vous vous trompez. 
L'avez-vous devine ? 
Qui est.ce qui vous Pa dit ? 
C'est quelqu'un que vous 

connoissez. 
Efes-vous sur de cela ? 
Vous pouvez vous tromper. 
Je ne crois pas que je me 

trompe. 
II n'y a rien de cela. 
Qui est-ce qui en dowte ? 
Je n'en douterai jamais. 
II n'y a point de doute. 
Je gagerai tout ce qu'il vous 

plaira. 
Je ne fais jamais de gageure, 
Quand l'avez-vous vu, or 

vue ? 
Quand les avez-vous vus ? 
Je le vis la semaine passee. 
Je la vis le mois passe. 
Je ne les ai pas vus. 
Que dites-vous ? 
Je n'ai rien dit du tout, 
Je l'ai oui dire. 
Ne croyez pas un tel conte, 
Je ne le crois pas. 
Quand l'avez-vous oui dire ? 
Aujourd'hui, hier, avant- 

hier. 
Le lui direz-vous ? 
Je ne le lui dirai jamais. 

VI. 

Souhaitez-vous prendre une 
tasse de the ? 



4* 

Sir, J am much obliged to you ; 
I never drink any. 



do you 



drink 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Monsieuiy je vous suis trcs- 
oblige : je n'en prends ja- 
mais. 

Quoi ! vous ne prenez ja- 
mais de the ? 

Vous aimez peut-ctre mieux 
k cafe ? 

Savez-vous quelque nou- 
velle ? 

Je n'en sais point qui soit 
digne cje vous etre rap- 
portee. 

On ne parle de rien. 

Quand I'attendez.vous? 

L'vez-vous jamais connu ? 

Tie le connois de reputation. 

Vous en souvenez-vous ? 

Non, Monsieur, je ne m'en 
souyiens pas. 

J'ai la memoire tres-mau- 
vaise. 

Vous oubliez aisement. 

Voulez-vous faire un petit 
tour de promenade ? ; 

De tout moa cceur. 

Ou irons-nous ? 

AUonsau Pare ; nousj ver- 
rons le roi. 

A quelle heure peut-on le 
voir ? 

Vers midi. 

Je serois bien aise de ie 
voir. 

C'es-t un tres-beau prince. 

Je serai bien ai^e dc voir aus- 
si la reinc : tout le monde 
en dit du bien.. 

Avez-vous jamais vu le 
prince de Cialles ? 

Cn dit que e'ei-t, un beau 
jeune prince. 



What! 

tea? 
You like coffee better^ per* 

haps f 
Do you know any news ? 

I know cf nothing worth jour 
while to hear* 

There is no talk of any thing. 
IV hen do you expect him ? 
Didyou ever know him F 
J know him by reputation . 
Dojou remember it f* 
No, Slr } I do not remember 

it. 
I have a very bad memory. 

You forget easily. 

Will you take a little walk ? 

With all my heart. 

Whither shall we go ? 

Let us ga into the Park ; we 

shall see the king there. 
At what 0* clock is he to be 

seen f 
About t twelve o'clock. 
I should be very glad to see 

him. 
lie is a very handsome man. 
J shall be glad to see the queen 

likewise : every body speaks 

well of her. 
Did you ever see tie prince of 

Wales ? 
They say he is a handsome 

young prince. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
VII. 



45 



It is very fine weather. 

Do you 'believe it vuill rain to 
day? 

I do not believe it will cease 
raining all the day long. 

The sky is very clear and se- 
rene. 

This is the best season rf the 
year. 

What season do you like best F 

The summer is the most agree- 
able of all the seasons. 

It is sometimes very cold in the 
spring. 

I do not like vuinter at all. 

Do you not go to the play ? 

I am to go thither this even- 
ing. 

There is a new play. 

There vuill be a great many 
people. 

I have a mind to go thither 
likewise. 

Do : I shall be very glad to 
accompany you. 

Stay a little ; I ivill be with 
you in an instant. 

Finish your business ; I vuill 
stay for you. 

Now, I am ready. 

Let us go. 



[1 fait tr£s-beau temps. 
Croyez-vous qu'ii pleuve 

aujourd'hui ? 
Je ne crois pas que la pluie 

cesse d'aujourd'hui. 
Le ciel est tr£s-clair et tres- 

*erein. 
Nous sommes a present dans 

la meilleure saison. 
Quelle saison aimez-vous da- 
vantage ? 
L'ete est la plus agreable de 

toutes les saisons. 
II fait quelquefois tres-froid 

au printeraps. 
Je n'aime pas du tout l'hiver. 
N'allez-vous pas a la come- 

die? 
Je dois y aller ce soir. 

II y a une nouvelle piece. 
II y aura an grand concours 

de monde. 
J*ai dessein d'y aller aussi. 

Venez : je serai bien aise de 
vous y accompagner. 

Attendez un peu ; je suis a 
vous dans 1 'instant. 

Faites vos affaires ; je vous 
attendrai. 

A present, je suis pret. 

Allons. 



What o'clock is it t 
What o'clock do you belt 

it is ? 
I believe it is not yet late* 



VIII. 

Quelle heure est-il ? 
'icve Quelle heure croyez.vcus 
qu'il soit ? 
Je crois qu'il n'est pas en- 
core tard. 



46 



A. GRAMMAR OF THE 



Guess. 

Nine o'clock* 

It is past ten o'clock. 

It is a quarter after ten. 

It is half an hour after ten. 

It is three Quarters after ten. 

Indeed> I did not think it was 

so late. 
Tune runs swiftly. 



We 



dull 



v e are never dult in good 
company. 

Let us go and take a walk in 
the garden. 

With all my heart. 

Have you any fine flowers in 
your garden ? 

Very, fine ones. 

Will you give me leave to 
gather some ? 

You may gather as many as 
you please. 

Do you choose some pears y ap- 
ples, cherries, &c. 

I a?n not fond of fruit. 

Let lis go home ; it is almost 

dinner-time. 
Are you hungry ? * 

Have you a good appetite ? 
I do not know whether I 

shall be able to eat any 

dinner ; I b reakfasted ve ry 

heartily. 
Eating creates an appetite. 



Devinez. 

Neuf heures. 
II est dix heures passees. 
II est dix heures et un quart. 
II est dix heures ct demie. 
II est onze heures moins un 

quart. 
En verite, je ne croyois pas 

qu'il fut si tard. 
Le temps s'ecoule avec ra- 
pid ite. 
On ne s'cnnuie jamais en 

bonne compagnie. 
Aliens faire un tour au jar- 
din. 
De tout mon cceur. 
Avez-vous de belles fleurs 

dans votre jardin ? 
De fort belles. 
Voulez.vous me denner la 

permission d'eri eueillir ? 
Veus en pouvez eueillir au- 

tant qu'il vous plaira. 
Souhaitez-vons des poires, 

des pommes, des cerises, 

Sec. 
Je ne suis pas grand amateur 

de fruit. 
Allons au logis : il est bieru 

tot temps de diner. 
Avez-vous faim ? 
Avez-vous bon appetit ? 
Je ne sais pas si je pourrai 

diner; j'ai tres-bien de- 

jeune. 

L'appetit vient en mangeant. 



Let us sit-down to table. 
Is dinner tUt'dy ? 



Mettons.nous a tabic. 
Le diner est-il prct { 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



47 



The meat is upon the tabic. 
Sir, you are ceremonious ; 
fray do not make any cere. 

many * 
What do you choose to have? 
What you please. 
Hovj do you like the roast 

meat ? 
It is exceeding good, and very 

tender. 
Sir, if you be dry, call for 

something to drink. 
You do not eat. 
I beg your pardon ; I eat 

'very heartily. 
This is all <we have. 
There is no ?ieed of any thing 

els-e. 
I invited you to dinner, only 

to enjoy your company. 

What do you choose to drink ? 

Sir y your health. 

Madam, 1 harve the honour to 
drink your health. 

Shall I help you to a little lit 
of this leg of mutton p 

I am in 'finitely obliged to you ; 
I have eaten enough. 

No more. 

What shall we do after din- 
ner? 

What the ladies phase. 



On a servi. 

Monsieur, vous faitesdes ce- 
remonies ; de grace, n'en 
faites point. 

Que souhaitez- vous ? 

Ce qu'ii vous plaira. 

Comment trouvez-vous ce 
roti ? 

II est excellent, et tres-ten- 
dre. 

Monsieur, si vous avez soif, 
demandez a boire. 

Vous ne rhahgez pas.. 

Je vous demande pardon ; je 
mange «le bon appetit. 

C'est tout ce que nous avons, 

II ne taut rien de plus. 

• Je ne vous ai invite a diner, 
que pour jouir de votre 
compagnie. 

Que souhaitez -vous boire ? 

Monsieur, a votre same. 

Madame, j'ai l'honneur de 
beire a votre sante. 

Vous servirai-je un petit 
mcrceau de gigot ? 

Je vous suis infiniment 
oblige ; j'ai assez mange. 

Fas davantage. 

Que ferons-nous apres di- 
ner ? 

Ce qu'il plaira a ces dames . 



X. 



We shall have a holy day to 

morrow* 
Shovj me your theme. 
I will shcvj it to you after 

breakfast, 

8 



Nons aurcns demain conge. 

Montrez-moi votre theme. 
Je vous le montr«erai apres 
dejeuner. 



4.8 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Who took my inkstand? 



Give me my penknife. 
I did net see it. 
Do not Hot your paper. 
Who has any wafers ? 

Here, I will give you some. 
They make a great deal of 

?ioise there. 
Sit down in your place, and 

be quiet. 
Indeed, I did not speak a 

word. 
Learn your lesson. 
I knew it perfectly well. 
Will you be pleased to make 

me a pen ? 
This is good for nothing. 
Make your pens yourself 

Why is your theme so ill 

written. 
Because the' paper sinks. 
It is wet ; you must dry it by 

the fire. 
What is the French for . . . ? 
How doyou say in French . . . ? 

Why do you not shut the 

door ? 
I found it open. 
Your stockings have holes in 

them. 
I will get them mended. 
I did not observe it nvhen I 

put them on. 
Tie up your garters ; your 

stockings are about your 

keels. 
Now come and say your Us- 

son. 



Qui est-ce qui a pris mon 

ecritoire ? 
Donnez-moi mon canif. 
Je ne l'ai pas vu. 
Ne faites point de pates. 
Qui est-ce qui a des pains a 

cacheter ? 
Venez, je vous en donnerai. 
On fait beaucoup de bruit 

par-la. 
Asseyez-vous a votre place, 

et soyez tranquille. 
En verite, je ne dis mot. 

Apprenez votre lecon. 

Jela sais parfaitement bien. 

Vous plait.il de me tailler 
une plume ? 

Celle-ci ne vaut rien du tout. 

Taillez ros plumes vous- 
meme. 

Pourquoi votre theme est-il 
si mal ecrit ? 

C'est que le papier boit. 

II est humide ; il faut le faire 
secher devant le feu. 

Quel est le Francois de . . . ? 

Comment dit.on en Fran- 
cois . . . ? 

Pourquoi ne fermez.vous pas 
la porte ? 

Je l'ai trouvee ouverte. 

Vos bas sont troues. 

Je les ferai raccommoder. 
je n'y ai pas pris garde 

quand je les ai mis. 
Attachcz vos jarretieres ; 

vos bas sont ravales. 

A present, venez dire votre 
lecon. 



-FRENCH TONGUE. 



49 



/ have but two words to 

write. 
Give me leave to go ou/ 9 

Go, and come back imme~ 

diately, 
I have lost my pencil. 
You lose every thing. 
You do not take tare cf any 

thing. 
Somebody took it from me. 
Look for it, 

I have looked every where. 
Lend me your book* 
I want it myself. 
D9 not push me; I cmnot 

write. 
Who shakes the table ? 
I did not do it on purpost. 
Weil 9 let us tee* 



Je n'ai que deux mots £ 

ecrire. 
Donnez-moi permission de 

sortir. 
Allez, et revenez dans I'ins- 

tant. 
J' a 1 perdu men crayon. 
Vous perdez rout. 
Vous ne prenez garde i 

rien. 
Quelqu'un me 1'a pris, 
Ghercfaez-Ie. 
Je i'ai cherche partout, 
Fretez-moi votre livra. 
J'en ai besoin mowmeme. 
Ne me poussez pas ; je ne 

puis ecrire 
Qui est-ce qui remue la table f 
Je ne l'ai pas fair expres. 
Ah ca, voyons. 



XL 



It h time to go to bed. 

It grows late. 

2 never go to bed so early. 

At what q* clock do you rise P 

I have no fixed hour. 

You 7nay sit up as long as ycu 

please ; for my party I am 

going tQ bed. 
I am used to go to . led be* 

times. 
Light a candle. 
Where are my slippers ? 
I am going to fetch them, 
Snuff the candle. 
Draw the curtails* 

D 



II est temps de' s'aller coa* 

cher. 
II se fait tard, 
Je ne me ccuche jamais* de 

si benre heure. 
A quelle heure' vous levez. 

vous ? 
Je n'ai point d'heure fixe. 
Vous pouvez vefller tant 

qu'il vous plaira;-pour 

moi, je vais me coucher. 
J'ai coutume de me coucher 

de bonne heure. 
Allumez une chandelle. 
Ou sont mes pantoufles ? 
Je m'ich vais les querir* 
Mouchez la chandelle, 
Tirez les rideaux. 



5° 



A GRAMAR OF THE 



Do not fail to wake me. 

I shall come sooner perhaps 

than you choose. 
No ; do net b* afraid* 
Gentlemen and ladies, I nvish 

you a good night. 
Sir y or Madam, I wish you 

a good night's rest. 



Ne manquez pas de m'eveil- 

ler. 
Je T/iendrai, peut-etre, plus 

tot que vous ne voudrez. 
Non ; n'ayez pas peur. 
Messieurs 'et Mesdames, je 

vous souhaite le bon soir. 
Monsieur, ou Madame, je 

vous souhaite une bonne 

nuit. 



XII. 



What / you are abed still? 

Do you sleep ? 
No ; I am awake, 
lou awake me too early ; it 
it 'very dark yet. 

Your curtains are drawn; 
you do not see the daylight* 

}Iow did you sleep last night P 

I did not sleep a wink all the 
night long* 

No matter ; J shall get up 
presently. 

J am going to bid the ser- 
vant light a fire. 

Bring me some 'water ; I must 
iv ash ??y face* my mouth* 
and my hands. 

IV here are my shoes f 
They are at th*\ d;cr. 
Are they clean f 
Give trie some silk stockings. 

Som< bedy knocks at the door; 
go and i'.e who it is. 



Quo! ! vous etes encore an 

lit? 
Dormez-vous ? 
Non ; je suis eveille. 
Nous m'eveillez de trop 
grand mi tin ; il ne fait 
pas encore jour. 
Vos rideaux sont tires; vous 
ne voyez pas la clarte du 
jour. 
Comment avez-vous dcrrni 

cette nuit ? 
je n'ai pas fcrme l'ceil de 

toute la nuit. 
N'importe; je me leverai 

dans rinstant. 
Je m'en va:s dire au domes- 

tique de faire du feu. 
Apportez moi de l'eau ; il 
faut que je me lave le vi- 
sage, la bouche, et les 
mains. 
Ou sont mes souliers ? 
lis sont a la pcrte. 
Sont-ils nettoyes ? 
Donrtez-moi mes has de so'e. 
On frappe a la porte ; alLz 
voir qui e'e^t. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
/ am not ready to go out. 



5« 



Take care to keep a good fire 

in the parlour. 
Tell Mr. A. I am coming 

douon immediately. 

Sir, I am overjoyed to see 

you in good health. 
I am sorry ' to ba<ve made you 

wait so long. 
Not at ally you jest. 

I et u: po and take a <zvatk. 



Je ne suis pas encore prct a 

sortir. 
Ayez soin de faire bon feu 

dans la salle. 
Allez dire a Mr. A. cpe je 

vais decendre dans Pins. 

tant. 
Monsieur, je suis ravi de 

vous voir en bonne sante. 
Je suis fache de vous avoir 

fait attendre si long-temps. 
Point du tout, vous vous 

moquez. 
Ailons faire un tour de pro- 

menade 



PART IF. 

CHAP. I, 

A short Analysis of the Parts if Speech, 

HPHERE are, in the French language, ten sorts of 
-*- word-s, or parts of Speech, namely, the Article, 
the Substantive or Noun, the Adjective or Adnoun, 
the Pronoun, the Verb, the Adverb, the Participle., 
the Preposition, the Conjunction, and. the Inter- 
jection. 

J. The Article is a word prefixed to substantives to 
point them out, and to -show how far the signification 
extends ; as, the study of history is useful and agreeable ; 
V elude de Vhistoire est utile et agreable : the nature of 
man is unknown to man; la nature de Vhomme cat inconnue' 
a I homm?z A bad man is ungrateful toward God and 
toward men ; un mechant homme est ingrat enters Dieu et 
enters les hommes : A prince is not always so happy as the 
people believe : un prince n* est pas toujour s aussi hexreux que 
ie Peuph croiu 

D 2 



56 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Grammarians admit of two sorts of articles; 

The definite (the) /?, m. la y f. Tor the sirgular ; les, 
plural for both genders. 

The indefinite {a or an) nn> m. une, f. for the singu- 
lar, des instead of quelques, ptusieurs, for the plural. 

The definite article, 1st. restrains the signification of a 
general appellation; as Y etude de I'htstoire est utile et 
agreable. La nature de Vhomme est inconnue it I' bom me. 

2dly. Indicates the gender and number of substantives ; 
and for this reason is used in French before a noun taken 
( in it's widest sense ; as Y etude orne V esprit ; study adorns 
the mind : la nature a beaucoup d'observateurs, mais elle 
a pen de confide ns ; nature has many observers, but 
she has few confidants. Les prince* ne sont pas toujour* 
aussi heureux que le peuple croit : princes are not always 
so happy as the people believe : les exemples intruisent 
plus que les preceptes ; examples instruct more than pre- 
cepts. 

Substaatives in French having no termination to distinguish suffi- 
ciently the plural from the singular, it has been necessary to prefix a 
particle, in order to denote the number of the things spoken of; and 
the article, which, as we have shown, limits the general signification 
»f nouns, is also adapted to point out their gender and number. 

The indefinite article is used in a vague sense, and re- 
strains the signification of a general appellation to one or 
several objects in an indefinite or partitive sense ; as, uti 
prince n'es pas ioujours aussi heureux que le peuple croit. Nous 
*vayons quelquejbis des princes tres-malhcureux ; we sometimes 
see princes very unhappy. Un bom me de genie est sujet, 
comme un autre hotnme, a commettre des ernun et des fames • 
a man of genius is subject, like another man, to commit 
(some) errours and faults. 

II. A Substantive, or noun, is a word which ex- 
presses the name of any thing that exists, or that we con- 
ceive to be existing; as, the earth, — a house, — man, — 
Peter, — virtue,* — prudence. La terre, — une ?naison y — 
Vhommty — Pierre i-i—vertu, — prudence. 

To Substantives belong gender, numher, and case. 
The Gender is either masculine or feminine ; as, le pere y 
la mere ; le jardin y la maison There is no neuter in the 
French language. 3 



FRENCH TONGUE, £3 

The number is either singular of plural'. 

The singular signifies one thing ; as, le fere, la mere ■.— 
The plural more than one; as, let fires, les meres. 

The case signifies die different states, or the different 
ci re u instances of a noun. 

A noun in a proposition is to be considered either as subject or ob- 
ject, that is to say, as governing or governed. The governing case, 
. called also the nontinaii've, expresses the subject of the verb, and is 
placed in French, as it is in English; before the verb, except in asking 
a question. <- 

II J. An Ad-jectivs is a word added to 2 substantive* 
to express It's quality; as, a diligent scholar, un tether. 
diligent. In French the adjective is declinable, and 
agrees in gender and number wiih the substantive, to 
wliich it is joined or refers; as, un petit homme, nut pe- 
tite femme ; a little man, a little woman. 

The feminine Gf adj£*ives is formed by adding an e (called mute 
or femin-ne) to the masculine gender 5 as, ft" petit homme, une petite 
femme; but if the primitive masculine end with an e mute, then there 
is no alteration, and the feminine is like the masculine y as, un champ 
fertile, une terre fertile. See chap. Ill, page 60. 

IV. The Pronoun supplies the place of a noun, and 
prevents the unpleasant effect of a frequent repetition ; 
as, j'ai 'vu vion frere, ll e'toit tres-malade ; instead of 
mon frere ctoit tres-malade, I saw my brother, he was very 
sick ; instead of my brother Was very sick. 

Pronouns are of six kinds, viz. personal, possessive, 
demonstrative, relative, interrogative, and improper or 
indefinite. 

The personal pronoun is used instead of the name of a 
person ; as, je, tu, il, m. ; tile, f. ; for the singular ; nous, 
n/ozts, ils, m. ; el les, f. ; for the plural. 

The possessive pronouns mark possession ; they are of 
two sorts, conjunctive and absolute. 

The conjunctive pronouns are used only with substan- 
tives ; as, moir 3 ma, mes ; ton, la, tcs ; son sa, ses ; uotre y 
uos ; <zotre* <vos; leur, leurs. 

The absolute' pronouns are used by themselves, their 
substantives being understood, as, le mien, la mienre, les 
miens, les ihiennes; le tien, ' la tienne ; les tiens, \t% iien~ 

D 3 



54 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

nes ; le sien y la sienne ; les siens, les siennes ; le noirc y la notre > 
les notres ; le voire, la voire, les votres ; le &#/-, la A*«r, 
les leurs. 

The demonstrative pronouns are used to particularise 
persons or things, as if pointed at by the ringer. 
, The relative pronouns r&fer to persons or things spoken 
of in a former part of a sentence. 

The interrogative pronouus are used in asking ques- 
tions. 

The indefinite pronouns are used in a vague sense ; as, 
toht, qndque y chaque, See, 

V. A Verb is a word which signifies to be or to do ; 
as, Thomas est studieux, Thomas is studious ; Thomas emdie, 
T h o ma s studh s . 

The proper definition of the verb is, that it is a word which signi- 
fies affirmation ; for its proper office is., to affirm some attribute .or" the sub- 
ject (or ncminttive) of the proposition. But if we join its principal 
accidents, it may thus be denned: a word which signifies affirmation 
with the designation of the person, number, and time: winch definiticn 
agrees properly with the verb substantive to le (etre). But, since men 
have frequently united certain attributes to the affirmation, for the 
sake of brevity, the verb (active or neuter) may be again defined 
thus ; a word signifying the~ affirmation of s^me attribute, ivitb the desig- 
nation ef person, number, and time. 

Verbs are divided, fust into regular and irregular, per- 
sonal and impersonal. 

"When a verb follows the rule of its conjugation, it is 
called regular; but if it deviate from ir, it is called irre- 
gular. 

Personal verbs are those which are conjugated, with the 
personal pronouns, je, tu, i/ 3 elle, &c. 

Impersonal verbs are those which a re % conjugated only in 
the third person singular with the pronoun if, ir. 

Secondly, verbs are divided into active, passive, neuter, 
and pronominal. 

The active verb marks the action of its subject, or no- 
minative case ; and makes good sense with "the accusative 
of it's object, or the thing on which it nets ; as, je mange 
du pain, I eat bread; tu bois de la bjere s thou drihkest 
beer ; il chante wie chanson y he sings a song. 

The passive verb marks the passion or suffering of its 
subject ; je suit aime\ I am loved ; tu ei /#*/> thou art 
punished ; il est ba7ini } he is banished, 



FRENCH TONGUE, $5 

A neuter verb is a word denoting the action of It's sub- 
ject or nominative, which action remains in the subject, 
and does not with propriety admit an accusative alter' it - 9 
as, Je dors, I sleep j il cdurt, he runs, 

The pronominal verbs receive their name from being 
conjugated with a double pronoun, as je me refens, I re- 
pent. 

There are also two auxiliary or helping verbs, &re s tor 
be, and avoir, to have ; these are called auxiliary, from 
their helping in the conjugation of other verbs. 

Four things are to be distinguished in verbs ; the mood, 
the tense, the number, and the person, 

The mood expresses the different manner and uses made- 
of a Verb positively, conditionally, or in an unspecified 
manner. There are five moods, infinitive, indicative, con- 
ditional, subjunctive, and imperative. 

The infinitive is the root of the verb : it expresses the 
aclioa or passion in an indefinite sense, without any parti- 
cular circumstance of time, number, or person. 

The indicative expresses the action ox passion in a di- 
rect and positive manner, in. a time, present, past, or future. 
We shall have a more precise idea of the indicative in com. 
. paring it with the subjunctive mood. 

The conditional expresses the action or passion with de- 
pendence on a condition » 

The subjunctive is a manner of expressing the action 
or passion with a modified affirmation or negation, always 
supposing another verb, which it follows, or to which it - 
belongs, or some conjunction by which it is governed*. 

* The differences between the indicative and the subjunctive are; 
chiefly: I. The tenses of the subjunctive affirm or deny indirectly, al- 
ways supposing another verb affirming or denying directly; as in this 
phrase : I will have you do your duty, je veui que voits lassie z votre 
devoir. Je veux is a direct affirmation, and independent of any other; 
whereas que vous fassiez voire devoir is but an indirect affirmation, and 
depending- on the first. 2. The tenses of the subjunctive are so depend- 
ing on the words or conjunctions that are before them, that they pan- 
not be separated from them without having an undetermined sentie, 
consequently do not make a simple affirmation. So if from the fore- 
going example you take awayjV vzux que, what follows, vousfa&sie* 
<votre devoir, has no determined sense, and could not be put in the be- 
ginning of a phrase : whereas the tenses of the indicative may be se- 
parated, and make by themselves, without the help of the conjunction* 
a clear, and determinate sense ; as, I believe we shall have some ram, £ J 

» 4 



f« A GRAMMAR OF THE 

The imperative expresses the action or passion by com* 
inands, prohibitions, desires, &c. 

The future tense has sometimes the signification of the 
Imperative mood, when it commands or forbids; as, thou 
?;hak love the Lord thy God, tu aimeras le Seignior ton 
Dieu* 

The- tenses express the period of time, in which an ac- 
tion or passion is, was, or shall be. They are properly 
three, the present, the past, the future. 

Each tense has two numbers, singular and plural ; and 
each number has three persons. 

VI. AParticipib partakes something of the nature 
©f a verb, and something of an adjective. 

Beside the quality or attribute, which is the property of the adjec- 
tive, the participle expresses iinie, together v/ith a consideration of 
acting, or being acted upon ; whence che particle present or active aud 
tHe participle past 'Qrfassiwe, as, 

Lei Bmmes craig-nant Dieu. Dieu craint/w Us hommeu 

VII. An Adverb marks the difference and circum- 
stance of an action or passion. 

VIII. A Pbeposition is a w&rd placed before those 
nouns and pronouns which it governs, or before some verb^ 
in order to connect words one with another, and to show 
the relation between them. 

IX. A Conjunction serves to connect one word with 
another, and sentences with sentences. 

X. An Interjection expresses the emotions or pas* 
sions of the soul, as joy, grief, admiration, &c. 

The last four parts of speech are undeclinable. 

CHAP. II. 

Of Genders. 

HpO give rules for knowing the Gender .of Substan- 
tives would be useless and puzzling. The best and 
ersiest way i-s to iearn them in a dictionary. And, in- 

^t$e nous aurons de Li pfu'r; take away,/* axis %uc y what follows, 
de Li hluie, has a deterauped b^nsr, and is u with* 

Ell rord. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



57 



deed, rules would be of no advantage to the learner.- 
However, as some substantives are of the masculine gen- 
der in one sense, and of the feminine in another, it wild 
not be amiss to give a list of these. 



MASCULINE. 



FEMININE. 



un aigle, an eagle. 

un aire, an eyry, or nest of a 
bird of prey. 

un a une, ah alder tree. 

un barbe, a barb, (a horse.) 

un Basque, a Basque, fa man 
of Biscay.) 

un coche, a stage coach* 

un comet te, a cornet of a 
troop of horse. 

un couple, a married cou- 
ple. 

un cravate, a Croatian sol- 
dier. 

un delice, a pleasure , delight,- 

un espace, a space, a dk~ 
tance. 

un enseigne, an ensign, (an 
officer.) 

un exemple, an example* 

le fin d'une affaire, the main,. 

or chief part of a business. 
le foudre de Jupiter, Jupi-. 

ter's thunderbolt. 
un garde, one of the guards, 

le grefFe, the rolls. 

un guide, a guide. 

un ii v re, a book. 

le ,:ueule, gules (in heraU 

dry.) 
un iris, iris, (a plane.) 
un lout re, a sort of hat* 



les aigles Romaines, the Ro- 
man eagles. 
une aire, a threshing-floor* 

une a une, an ell. 
une barbe, a beard. 
une basque, a skirt, 

une coche, a soiv.- 

une cornet te, a woman's 

night cap. 
une couple, a pair (two 

things toge/her.) 
une cravare, ( a cravat or 

neckcloth. 
des delices, delights. 
une espace, a space used by 

printers. 
une enseigne, a sign. 

une exemple, a copy for 

writing. 
la fin d'une affaire, the end 

of a business. 
la foudre, thunder. -. 

une garde, a guard ; .also a 

sick person's nurse. 
une greffe, a graft of a tree. 
une guide, a rein.- 
une livre. a pound. 
la gueule, the mouth of a 

dog, cat, lion, &c. 
une iris, Iris ) rainbow.. 
une loutre« an otter / 



d 5" 



5t A GRAMMAR OF THE 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 



un manoeuvre, a labourer. 



un manche, a handle. 
un me moire, a bill, a memo- 
' randum. 

un mestre de camp, a colonel 
of horse, 

un mode, a mood, (a philo- 
sophical term.) 
un mole, a mole, a pier. 



un moule, a mould. 

un mousse, a cabin-boy. 

un office, an office for busi- 
ness. 

le grand- oeuvre, the philoso- 
pher's stone. 

un page, a young page. 

un paillasse, a clown. 

un palme, a hand's breadth. 

Paques, Easter Sunday, 
un parallele, a comparison, 
un pendule, a pendulum, 

un periode, a period, a 

course, degree. 
person ne, no body, any body. 
un pique, a spade, (at cards.) 
un pivoine, a buljinch. 
un poele, a stove, a pall. 
un pi a ne, a plane - 1 ree, 
le pontc, ponto (at cards.) 
un po^.te, a post, an employ* 

meut. 
k pourpre, the purples, 
3 



la manoeuvre, the working 
of a ship ; in the plur. the 
rigging of a ship. 

uue manche, a sleeve, 

la memoire, memory. 

la mestre de camp, the first 
compa?iy of a regiment- of 
horse. 

une mode, a fashion, 

une mole, a mole (formless 
concretion of extravatated 
blood.) 

une moule, a muscle. 

de la mousse, moss. 

une office, a buttery. 

une ceuvre de piete, a work 

of piety. 
une page, a page of a booh, 
une paillasse, a straw-bed. 
une palme, a branch of a 

palm. tree. 
La Paque, the Passover. 
une parallele, a paral/d line* 
une pendule, a pendulum - 

clock. 
une periode, a period (in 

discourse.) 
une personne, a person* 
une pique, a pike. 
une pivoine, a fiony. 
une poele, a fry ing-pau, 
une plane, a puine, 
la ponte, laying of eggs, 
la peste, the post, the pest 

office. 
la pourpre, the purple, (mark 

of rGydtyy) 13c. 



FRENCH TONGUE. & 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

d'un beau pcurpre, of a fine de la pourpre Tyrienne, Ty* 

purple colour* rian purple, 

tin quadrille, quadrille (a une quadriile, quadrille , (a 

game at cards,) troop of a horse far a tour~ 

nament.) 

un quatrierae, a fourth part, une quatriSme, a quarter or 

sequence of four cards at 
piquet. 

le reclame, the sign to call la reclame, the catch-vuord* 

back a haivk. 

un satyre, a satyr, a heathen une satife, a satire (in poe~ 

demigod, tr J'J 

le soide, the balance of an la solde, soldier* $ pay * 

account, 

un somme, a sleepy a nap, une somme, a sum* 

un souris, a smile. une souris, a mouse* 

un triomphe, a triumph* une triomphe, a trump at 

cards, 

un trompette, a trumpeter, une trompette, a trumpet, 

un tour, a turn, a trick. une tour, a tower,, 

un teneur de livres, a book, la teneur d'un acte, the tenor 

keeper, or contents of voriting. 

un vase, a jar> a vessel, a la vase, mud. ooze. 

vase. 

un vigogne, a hat made cf de. la vigogne, vicuna, the 

vicuna wool, vucol of :he Peruvian sheep, 

tin vcile, a veil. une voile, a sail* 

The following Substantives are 

Rather Masculine. Rather Feminine, 

amour, love. absinthe, wormwood. 

• amours, cupids. amours, intrigues, 

bronze, bronze. alcove, an alcove. 

caque, a cag or barrel, 
cioaque, a common se<tver } or epitase, the epitasis } or plot 
link. of a play, 

epitaphe, epitaph, 
D 6 



6o A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Rather Masculine, Rather Feminine. 

Comte, country. hymne *, a hymn. 

duche, u duchy. enigme, a riddle. 

episode, an episode. idyle, an idyl. 

, . , t . 7 t . \ anagram me, an anapram* 

epuhalame, an epiihalavmm. < * . ° . * 

r * I epigramme, an epigram. 

orgue, an organ. orgues f , organs. 9^ . 

amulette, an a?nukt. pafallaxe, parallax* 

sphinx, a sphinfe. theriaque, treacle.- 

holocauste, a burnt sacrifice. horloge, a clock. 

horoscope, a forosc&pe. equivoque, an equivocation* 

• According to the French Academy, t^ls word is feminine 
when, we speak of hymns in churches, otherwise it is masculine. 

+ This word is masculine in the singular, according to the Frznch 
Academy. 

. CHAP. III. 

Of the Formation of the Feminine Gender ef 
Adjectives. 

GENERAL RULE. 

A DJECT1VES take an e mute for the formation of 
Si>.. (fagix feminine; as^V aime, aimee ; ecrit, ecrite ; con- 
stant, cQHttanie*. Adjectives ending with an e mute 

EXCEPTIONS, 

* Favori, faverlfe'\ benin, ' henigne; malin, mal\gne\ frais, frakbe i 
fpais, epahse. 

j. Grec, Grecque ; Tare, Turyue; public, pubiique; caduc, caduque. 

2. Civil, cvllc; subtil, subtile, pueril, puerile. 

3.. Vieux, vie'dle; anterieur, posterieur, citerieur, ulterieur, inte- 
xleur, ezterieur, majeur/ mineur, supcrieur, inferieur, meilleur, follow 
the general rule. 

4. Ras, rase; clos, close. 

5. Secret, secrete; complet, complete ; discret, discrete, inquict, />- 
quit"', re plet, nj>leU \ devot, devote. 

6. Jaioux, jahvsc; roux, rensse. 

N. B. The Frinch Academy write first, cru, raw > nu, ntiked \ 
vert, greeny and not cruel, nud, vertf. Secondly, benit, and beni. 
hie sed, holy, both foiiow the general rule. Thirdly, tots, and not tort, 
twhtedf wrung, Tr\is adjective makes in it's feminine both tone, and' 
to'se ; for we say, une colonne tone, at la sole torse, and popularly we say? 
une )»mlc Urti y une bcucbe (orte, une gutuk torie, 



TRENCH TONGUE. 



S\ 



have no Variation in their feminine, without exception ; as 5 
admirable, m. admirable , f. ; aimable, m. amiable, f. 

Other adjectives form their feminine according to their 
termination, as in the following Concise Table. 



4w Adjectives ending 


form their Feminine, 


iri^V 




in 


P* (if* 




che. 


A 




ve. 


g> 




gUe# ^ 


el, eilj oly uly 


m 


elle, erne, ille, olle, ullev 


Oily 




onne. 


ie?ty 




ienne. 


e " r> } (3) 

eux, J KJf 




euse. 


iiiy es, os> (4) 




asse, esse, osse.- 


4&t 

ef, ot 9 




oute. 




ette, otte.- 


eaiiy 




elle. 


OUy 




olle. 


GUX, ( 6) 




ouce. 


ClUXy 




ausse. 



CHAP. IV, 
Of the Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 

GENERAL RULE. 
"l^TOUNS in general form their plural by adding an s 
-*-^ to the singular ; as homme, hommes *. 

Polysyllables ending in nt in the singular, form 
their plural by changing the final / into s ; as, enfant, 
enfans\ but monosyllables follow the general rule. 

Nouns ending in s, x, or z, are alike in both numbers, 
No-uns ending in ail, oral, change ail and al inro auxy 
in the plural; as, travail, travaux ; cheval, che<vaux\. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

* Tout makes tout, 

+ Ail, aulx. 

Balj cat-naval, heel, paf r regal, arui proper names ending in dt\ YMn- 
■wist these nouns, atUraxl, carnaxl, detail, e-ventail, mail, efrowvantaiL, gou- 
"jtmdily portall, se'rril, follow the general rule. 



6* A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Nouns ending in au y eu y eau> /V.v, nnd ou, make their 
plural by adding an x to their singular*. 

N. B. CEil makes jeux ; a'ieul, dieux ; geiitiihomme, 
getrtilshommes ; monsieur, messieurs; madame, ?nesdames ; 
monseigneur, messeigneurs ; ciel, heaven, makes cieux+ 
However, we say, des crels de lit, cesrers of beds; les 
ciels d'un tableau, the sky of a picture ; des arcs-en-Qltl, 
rainbows. 

CHAP. V. 

Of the Declension of Nouns. 

A S the nominative in nouns is like the accusative, the 
""- genitive is like the ablative ; we shall call the nomi*. 
nanive the first case, the genitive the second case, and the 
dative the j£yn£ ease. 

Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and begin. 
Ring with a consonant, are thus declined, 

SINGULAR. 

ist. le livre, the book. 

2d. du livre, of or from the booh 

3d. au livre, to ihe book* 

PLURAL, 

Ies livres, the books. 

des iivres, of or from the books. 

aux Hvres, to the books. 

Nouns substantive of the feminine gender, and begin* 
fling with a consonant, are thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 

ist. la table, the table. 

ad. dek Cable, of ov fro the table. 

3d. a la table, to the table. 

* filar, trou, chu 9 couj matQu, ficw, 6&tfj fou, and &*/ £tfr«V, fcllovr 
the general rule. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 65 

PLURAL. 

les tables, the tables, 

des tables, cf or from the tables, 

aux tables, to the tables. 

Nouns substantive of either gender, beginning with a 
<VQ~ivel, or an h mute, are thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 

I St. Phomme, the man, 

2d. de Phomme, of ox from the man. 

3d. Phomme, to the man. 

PLURAL. 

les hommes, the men, 

des hommes, of ox from the men* 

aux hommes, to the men. 

Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and begin- 
ning with a consonant, are thus deelined with the indefi* 
nite article : 

SINGULAR. 

1 st. un miroir, a loeking-glast. 

2d. d'un miroir, of ox from a looking-glass* 

$d. a un miroir, to a looking-glass. 

PLURAL. 

des miroirs, looking-glasses. 

de m-roirs, of ox from looking-glasses, 

a des miroirs, to looking. glasses. 

Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and bee-fn- 
ning with a vowel, ax an h mute, are thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 

1st. un accident, an accident. 
2d. d'un accident, of ox from an accident* 
. 3d. a un accident, to an accident* 

PLURAL, 
des accidens, accidents. 
ePaccidens, of ox from accidents* 
a des accidens, to accidents. 



64 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Nouns substantive of the /emmme gender, and begin- 
ning \yith a consonant, thus : 

SINGULAR. 

isf. une peine, a pain. 

2d. d'un peine, of ot from a pain. 

3d. a une peine, to a pain. 

PLURAL. 

des peines, pains. 
de peines, of t,r from pains* 
a des peines, io pains. 
Nouns substantive beginning with a vowel, or a; 
mute, and of the feminine gender, thus : 

SINGULAR, 
isf. une aiguille, a needle. 
2d» d'une aiguiLe, of ox from a needle. 
3d. & une aiguille, to a needle. 

PLURAL, 
des aiguilles, needles. 
d * a i g u i 1 -I e s , of c r from needles. 
a des aiguil.es, to needles. 
But in the plural' number, when a noun substantive of 
either gerder is preceded by an adjective beginning with a ' 
consonant, it is thus dec-lined : 

PLURAL. 
1st, de malheuretrx accidens, unhappy accidents. 
id. de maiheureux accidens,- of unhappy accidents. 
3d. a malhcureux accidens, to unhappy accidents. 
Before an adjective beginning; with a vcwcl y or an h mute, 
thus : 

1 s t . d * i n d ) g n e s a m i s , * nwo rt hy f iend t s . • 
2d. d'indignes amis, ofoijfrom unworthy fn. 
3d. a d'indignes amis, to unworthy frn 
Proper names of men, women, cities^ villages, &C.j take 
no articles before them ; but in the 2d and 3d cases they 
take the prepositions de and a, thus : 
- 1 st. Jean, Jfot 

7. d . d e }c :\i y of or from Johrf* 
3d. a Jean, to John, 



FRENCH TONGUE. 6j 

When they begin with a <vo<wel 9 or an h mute, thus ; 

ist. Alexandre, Alexander. 

2d. d' Alexandre, of ox from Alexander. 

3d. a Alexandre, to Alexander. 

Observe : Some in English, expressed or understood 
before a noun taken in a partitive sense, is expressed in 
French by du y de la, de /', for the singular, and des for 
the plural, or de for both genders and numbers, in the 
following manner ; 

When the word of the masculine gender begins with a 
consonant i thus : 

I St. du sel, some salt. 

2d. de sel, of ox from seme salt. 

3d. a du sel, to some salt. 

When the word, either masculine or feminine, begins 
with a wwel, or h mute, thus : 

1st. de Pargenf, some money. 

2d. d'argent, of or from some money* 

3d. a de Pargent, to some monty. 

1st. de Phuile, some oil. 

2d. d'huile, of ox from some oil. 

3d. a de l'-huile, to some oil. 

When the noun is feminine, thus . 

1st. de la salade, some sallad. 
. 2d. de salade, of ox from some sallad. 
3d. a de la salade, to sgme sallad. 

Before an adjective of either gender or number, thus ;. 

s 1 st. de bon pain, some good bread. 

2d. de bon pain, of ox from some good bread. 
3d. a de bon pain, to some good bread. 



66 A, GRAMMAR OF THE 



CHAP. VI. 

Of Pronouns. 

THE construction of the pronouns being the most 
difficult part of our language, I shall here, for the 
sake of perspicuity, nearly follow the denomination which, 
other grammarians have given them, though many of the 
pronouns may be looked upon as adjectives. 

SECTION I. 

Of Personal Pronouns. 

These are of two kinds: conjunctive and disjunctive. «~ 
The first generally prpcede the verb; the second commonly 
follow the verb. The first takes no preposition before 
them ; the second takes in their second case the preposition 
de } and commonly in their third case the preposition a. 

The Conjunctive Pronouns. 

All nouns and pronouns, as we have hinted before, 
have three cases : the first answering to the Nominative 
and Accusative; the second to the Genitive and Ablative; 
the third to the Dative. The three cases of the conjunc- 
tive personal pronouns alone, and the three cases ot the 
third person indeterminate, when they take no preposi- 
tion before them, do not answer the three cases of other 
nouns; therefore we shall call the first the Nominative 
case, the second the Dative case, and the third the Accu- 
sative case. 

The first Person. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL* 

Norn. Je, /. Nom. nous, <we. 

Dat. me, to me. Dat. nous, to us, 

Ace. me, me. Ace. nous, us. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 67 

The Second Person. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL, 

Nom. tu, thou. Norn. vous r ycu, ye, 

Dat. te, to thee. Dat. vous, to you. 

Acc. te, thee. Ace. vocs, you. 

The Third Person Masculine. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Nom. il, he ot it. Norn. Us, they. 

Dat. lui, to #£»*, or to it. Bar. fetrr, to them, 

Acc. le, Z//i7 or it. Acc. les, ?&a?r. 

The Third Person Feminine. ^ 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Nom. e)k, she or it, Nom. cileSj they. 

Dat. lui, to her cr fie it, Dat. leur, /a *&/». 

Acc. la^ ^r or *"/. Acc. les, them. 

The Third Person indeterminate. 

Nom. on, one *, they, or people. 

Dat. se, to one's self** to himself \ to herself, ts it sdj \ t3 

themselves, or to one another. 
Acc. se, one's self*, himself herself, itself themselves, one 

another. 

The third Person supplying and governed. 

1st. !e, if, so. 

2d. en, of him, cfher, of it, some, cf them, from the m, by them, 

nviib them. 
2d. y, to it, there^ therein, in it, in them, clout it, OX 

them. 

. The Du]unctiv£^xcriQuns. 
The First Person, 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

i St. moi, /, me. 1st. nou~, ive, us. 

2d. de moi, of or from me, 2d, de nous, of or from us, 

3d. a moi, moi, to me. 3d. a nous, nous, to us, 

* The use of one in this sensv aa ^ of z*e % s :e/f t is a vv-garism. 



68 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

The Second Person. 
1st. toi, thou, thee, ist* vous, you, ye, 

*d. de toi, of ox from thte. 2d. de vous, of or from y oft ^ 
3d. a toi, toi, to thee. 3d. a vous, vous, to you. 

The Third Person Masculine. 
1st. lui, £;>?, £*5 or//. 1 St. eux, /^-, them. 

2d. de \i\\> of or from hi?/?, or if. ad. d'eux, of or from them, 
3d; a lui, lui, re £//w or //. 3d. a eux, leur, to them. 

The Third Person Feminine. 
1st. elle, she, her, or it. 1st. elles, //^j, /Z'f/w. 

zd.d'ellej^/'or/r^^^r, ©r/V. 2d. de toi, of (\; from them, 
3d. aeife, iui, to her or it. 3d. a elles, leur, to them,. 

The Third Person indeterminate. 
1st. SOI, himself, herself, or r/j*jj£ 
2d. de soi, of or from himself, herself, or itself 
3d. a soi, to himself or itself. 

Note: Their compounds have the same cases as their 

siinples ; as, 

moi-meme, myself nous-memes, ourselves. 

toi.meme, thyself* * [yourselves. 

, . a ,r% "iv* vous-memes, < ' 7/ . 

lu<-meme, himself. ' \ yourself. 

elle-meme, A^fc eux-memes, V,^/^ 

fioi-meme, Gne s self, elies-memes, J 

SECTION II. 
0/ Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns* 

SING* PLUR. 

MAS. FEM. 

1st. mon, ma, mes, my. 

2d. de mon, de ma, de hies, gf or from ry.] 

3d. a mon, a ma, a mes, to my. 

After the same manner are declined* 

ton, ta, tcs, thy. 

son, sa, ses, his or X*rj r7 ^ 

notice, nos, <fur \ votre, vos, your \ leur, leurs, flfcw* 



FRENCH TONGUE 69 

Observe, first, the conjunctive pronouns come always 
before a noun to which they are joined. 

Observe, secondly, the following absolute possessive 
pronouns, being used bj themselves, are declined with the 
definite arucie, thus : 

Of Absolute Pronouns. 



SING 


. 


PLUR. 




MAS 


FEM. 


MAS, 




1st. Je mien, 
zd. du mien, 
3d au men, 


la mienne, 
de la m enrie, 

a la mienne, 


les miens. 1 
des > F. > 

ajx ; miennes. J 


1 mme. 
- of mine. 
\ to mine* 



After the same manner, are declined, 
le tien, !a tienn es tiens, les tie-^es, thme. 
Je sien, la sienne, J . . es sie .nes, bis others* 

le noire, la \o re, {es no'"^ ours. 
le v&tre, Ja -cr-re, les v6 res, jours. 
le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs* 

SECTION II. 
Of Demonstrative Pronouns. 

SING. SI V G. 

MASC. FEM. 

I St. ce, or cet , before a vowel, cette, this or that. 

2d. de ce, or de cet. de certe, of ox fr;m this ok that % 

3d. a ce, or a cet. a cette, to this or that. 

PLUR. 

M. and F. 

1 st. ccs, ., these or those. 

id. e'e ceij cf ox from these or /£^ # 

3d. a ces, //? flfcfj* or those. 

After the same manner is declined, 
sing; plur. 

M. celui, F. celle, *& M. ceux, F. celles, those, 

N, B. The foregoing demonstrative pronouns are used 



70 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

speaking of persons or things. Qeti and cela are used 

speaking of things only. 

ist. ceci, this. cela, that. 

ad. de ceci, of or from this, de cela, of ox from that. 

3d. a ceci, to this. a cela, to that. 

SECTION IV. 

Of Relative Pronouns. 
Most Pronouns in French have a relative signification; 
but those which are properly so called are the fellow ing ; 

sing, and plur. 

1st, qui, que, who, <whom, or which. 

2d. de qui, or dont, of whim, or whose. 

3d. a qui, to whom. 

1st, quoi, qui, que, what. 

2d. de quoi, or dont, #f what or which. 

3d. a quoi, to what. 

»ING. MASC. SING. FEM. 

1 st. lequel, laquelle, which. 
2d. duquel, de laquelle, of which. 
3d. auquel, a laquelle, to which. 

FLUR. MASC. PLUR. FEM. 

1st. lesquels, ksquelles, which. 

2d. desquels, desquelles, of which or whose. 

3d. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

SECTION V. 

Of Interrogative Pronouns. 

1st. qui, who, or whom. que, what. 

2d. de qui, of ox from whom, de quoi, of ox from what. 

3d. a qui, to whom. a quoi, to what. 

After the same manner is declined. 

SING. PLUR. 

M. quel F, quelle, M. quels, F. quelles, what, 

This pronoun is always followed by a substantive. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 71 

"SING, MASC. SING. FEM., 

1st. lequel, laqueile, whiclr, 

2d. duquel, de laqueile, of or from which, 

3d. auqael, a laqueile, to which. 

PLUR. MASC. PLUR. FEM. 

1st. lesquels, lesquelles^ which. 

2d. desquels, desquelles, of ox from which, 

3d. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

SECTION VI. 

Of Indefinite Pronouns. 

SING. PLUR. 

masc. and fem. masg. and fem. 

15 1. quelque. quelques, some, 

l J. de quelque, de quelques, of or from some* 

3d. a quelque. a quelques, to some. 

After the same manner are declined, 

quelqu'un, masc. sing. ; quelqiPune, fem. sing.; quelques- 

uns, masc.pl.; quelques-unes, fem. pi. ; some y somebodj. 
chaque, chacun, chacune, every, each. 
quiconque, qui que ce soit, whoever. 
pas un, aucun, nul, pe^onne, nobody. 
rien, nothing ; piusieurs, many. 

SING. MASC. SING. FEM. 

1st. Pun Pautre. Tune Pautre, one another. 

id. l'un de Pautre. Pune de Pautre, of one anoth-.r, 

3d. Pun a Pautre. Pune a Pautre, to one another. 

PLUR. MASC. PLUR. FEM. 

ks uns les autres. les unes les autres, one another . 

les uns des autres. les unes des autres, of one another. 

Its uns aux autres. les unes aux autres, to one another, 

SING. MASC. SING. FEM. 

1st. Pun et Pautre. Pune et Pautre, both. 

2d. de Pun et de Pautre. de Pune et de Pautre, of both , 

yd. a Pun et a Pautre. a Pune et a Pautre, to -both. 



7 r 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



PLUR. MASC 

les uns et les autres. 
des uns et des autres, 
aux uns et aux autres. 

SING. MASC. 

ist. Tun ou I'autre, 

2d. de l'un ou d? I'autre. 

3d. a Tun ou a I'autre. 

PLUR. MASC. 

les uns ou ies autres. 
des uns. ou des autres. 
aux uns ou aux autres. 



PLUR. FEM. 

les unes et les aut«es, both, 
des unes et des autres, of both •. 
aux unes et aux autres, to both. 

SING. FEM. 

Tune ou I'autre, either. 

de l'une ou de I'autre, of either. 

a Tune ou a I'autre, to either. 

PLUR. FEM. 

les unes ou les autres, either. 
des unes ou des autres, oftither. 
aux unesou aux autres, to either. 



SING. MASC. SING. FEM. 

ist. ni l'un ni 1* ititre. ni l'une m i'autre, neither. 

2d. ni de l'un ni de i'autre. nide l'une ni de i'au're, fueith. 
3d. ni a Tun ni a I'autre. ni & l'une ni a I'autre, to neither* 



PLUR. MASC. 

ni les uns ni les autres. 
ni des uns ni des autres. 
ni aux unsni aux autres. 



PIUR. FEM. 

ni les unes ni les autres, neither. 
ni des unes ni des autres, ofneith. 
ni aux unes ni aux autres, to nei 



CHAP. VII. 



OF VERBS. 



Preliminary Observations. 

i # A LL personal verbs are conjugated with these pro- 
-*-*• nouns, yV, tu, //, or elle y for the singular, and not/s, 
wous, ihy or elles, for the plural. 

2. All pronominal verbs are conjugated with these pro- 
nouns, je me, tu te y il se y or elle se ; nous nous, *vous vcuSy ils se, 
or elles se ; e y in ?ne y te y se y is omitted, and an apostrophe, 
is put in it's place, when the following word begins with 
a vowel. 

3. All active verbs are conjugated in this manner when 
the action returns upon the agent that produces it. It is 
properly what is called a reflected verb. 



French tongue. 73 

4. Reflected verbs, in a reciprocal sense, are used in 
the plural only ; as, ils se contrarient, they contradict one 
another. 

5. All active verbs are conjugated in their compound 
tenses by the help of the auxiliary avoir, as is likewise the 
verb etre. 

6. Reflective and reciprocal verbs are always conju- 
gated in their compound tenses by the help of etre ; as are 
also these following verbs, alter, ahorder, arriver, accourir, 
deceder, \descendre, entrer, monter, mourir, naitre, partir, 
retourner, sortir, tomber, <venir, and their derivatives, ex- 
cept when used actively. 

7. In all the verbs of the first conjugation, terminating 
in ger, e is retained through all the tenses and moods 
whenever g is to be followed by a or 0; as manger, to eat, 
mangeant) eating ; nou: mangeons, we eat. 

8. The compound regular and irregular verbs commonly 
follow the conjugation of the simple, from which they are 
derived^ 

9. The termination of the tenses B, D, E, f see page 7%) 
is the same in all v«rbs, both regular and irregular. 

10. Custom requires, that an s should be added to the 
second person of the imperative mood in verbs of the first 
conjugation, when they are followed by the particles en 
andj; as, disposes-en; penses-y ; *vas-j ; the latter takes 
t y when it is followed by en ; as, -ua-t'e?i. 

Conjugation 
Of the auxiliary verb AVOIR, to have* 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Avdir, to have. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST, 

Ayant, hiving. | Eu, had. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



j'ai, / have,- 
tu as, thou hasty 
II * he has. 



Nous avons, e we have, 
vous avez, jou hn<oe% 
ils + onr, they ha<vz. 



* Oc tile, she, in the third person singular of all verbs. 

•f 0/ §lks% for the feminine, in all verbs in the th'rd pe;soa plum. 

E 



7* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 
Imperfect. 



J'avois, / had, 

tu avois, thou hadst, 

il avoir, he had. 



Nous avians, <we had % 
vous aviez, ym had, 
ils avoient, they had. 



J'eus, / hady 

tu ens, thou hadst, 

£1 eut, Z>* i?^/. 



J'aurai, I shall or w/7/ 
tu auras, thou shall 
il aura, fo shall 



Preterit. 

Nous eumes, aw had, 
vous eufes, jo# £#</, 
ils euient, they had. 

Future. 

Nous aurons, ii-e shall 
vous aurez, you shall 
ils auront, they shall 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



u 



I 



SINGULAR. 

J'surois, / should* 
' t'u ,11 u Toh,-thou shouldst 
il auroir, he should 



PLURAL. 

! Nous aur ions, *ve should*) . 
us auriez, you should > £ 
auroient, tkej should ) S 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. 

Aye, have thou y 



1 C ! N ° l 
> ? j vou 

J ^ ils c 



qu'il ait, let him have, 
qu'eile ait, let her ha+ve. 



PLURAL. 

Ayons, let us have, 

ayez, hasueytm, \_thcvi have. 

qu'ils, or qu'elles aient, let 



que SINGULAR. 

J 'aye, that I may 
tu ayes, thou may est 
il ajtj he may 
que 

J'eusse, that J insight \ 
tu eus€e«j thm mightest 
l\ ear, be might 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

que PLURAL. 

Nous ayons, v:e ??wy 
vous ayez, y u may 
iis aient, they ,.. 
Preterit. 

Nous eussions twe might 
VOUS I 

ils eussent, they mh 



i 



* Or I could) iwu'tl, or might bjfct. 

f 0r I bsd or ccv/d, wJmld or j£i?k/</ £j,r*. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 7J 

H**, to have the compound tenses, you need onrf add, 
after each person, the participle past, ex, for the French, 
and had, for the English, through all the tenses and moods; 
■&bj'ai eu, I have had, and so on. 

Conjugation 

Of the auxiliary verb ETRE, to be* 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Etre, t7 be. 

PARTICIPLES. 
P HE SENT, PAST. 

Etant, being. j Ete, been. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

PLURAL 

Nqiis somraes, we are? 



SINGULAR. 

Je suis, / am, 
feu es, tkzu art, 
il est, he is. 



vous etes, you are t 
iis sont, thej are. 

Imperfect. 

Nous etions, we were, 
j vous eriez, you were^ 
ils etoienf, they were. 

Preterit. 

I No us fumes, we were) 
vous futes, you were, 
ils furent, they were. 
Future. 

Nous serons, w? shall 1 
vous serez, you shall >^° 
il seront, they shall J 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL, 



J'etois, I was, 

tu etois, thou watt, 

i! etoit, he was. 

Je fus, / was, 
tu fus, thou wast, 
il fut, he was. 

Je serai, I s bill ox will 
tu seras, thou shatt 
il sera, he shall 



H 



Je serois, / should 
tu serois, thou shouldst 
\\ seroit, he should 



1 1 Nous serions, we should 1 
V^ vous seriez, you should >^ 
j [ils seroientj they should J 



: 6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Sois, be thou, \ Soyons, let us be 3 

qu'il soit, let him be % 1 soyez, be you, [them be. 

ou'elle soit, let her be. \ qu'ils or qu'elies soient, let 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Pr esent Tense* 
que singular. que plural. 

je sois, that I may 1 I Nous soy Ons, vje may 1 
t u sois, thou may st > * J vous soyez, you may > C 

1 1 soit, he may J | il soient, they may J 

que Preterit. 

Je fusse, that I might I Nous fussions, voe might 1 

tu fusse, thou mightest | j* I vous fussiez, you might >£ 

il fut, he might j ] lis fussent, they might J 

The compound tetis«s of this verb are formed by the 
help of the auxiliary verb avoir through all its tenses and 
moods, by adding, after «ach persen and tense, ete for the 
French, and been for the English ; asj'ai ete\ I have been, 
&c. ; j'xtvois ///, I had been, &c; and so on. 

Observe, rst, the compound tenses of all other verbs, 
both regular and irregular, are formed by the help of these 
two auxiliary verbs, by adding the participle past of the 
verb you are conjugating, after each tense and person of 
the auxiliary verb. For example, to find all the compound 
tenses of the verb parler, to speak, its past participle be- 
ing parley you need only put parley after the simple tenses 
of the verb avoir. 

Observe, 2dly, those veibs that are conjugated by the 
help of etre are only compounded of the simple tenses of 
that auxiliary verb; that is, the compound tenses of the 
verb etre do not serve for the compound of others ; but 
the compound tenses of the verb avoir may serve, though 
seldom, for the compound of others : consequently, verbs 
conjugated by the help of avoir are sometimes compounded 
of it's compound tenses, and those conjugated by the help 
of etre are only compounded of its simple tenses. The 
reason of it may be, because the compound tenses of the 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



77 



verb etre are formed by the help of the verb avoir, which 
reflective, and some neuter, verbs will not admit. Except 
from this observation verbs used passively, which are con- 
jugated by the help of etre in all its tenses, both simple 
and compound. 

N. B. For what verbs are conjugated by the help of 
avoir or the help of etre — see Preliminary Observations \ 
p. 73, Art. 5 and 6. 

Conjugation of regular Verbs. 

It is very indifferent how many conjugations we adrnir, 
Some admit four, others tea or eleven. We shall reckon 
six. 



f aimer, to love. 
\ punir, to punish. 
J devoir, to owe. 

vend re, to sell. 

traduire, to translate. 

joindre, to join. 



ISt. - 


v er 


2d. 


)ir 


3^. 1 


e-voir 


4 th. j 


re preceded by d 


5th. 1 


[ re preceded by ui 


6th.-- 


' re preceded by ind. 



■ as 



TERMINATIONS of the PRIMITIVE TENSES of 
the REGULAR VERBS. 

Infinitive. Participle Participle Present of Preterit 
Present. Passive- the Ind. of thz hi 









M. 


F. 






ist* conj. 


aim- 


er -ant 


~e 


ee 


~e 


-ai 


zd. conj. 


pun- 


ir miss ant 


ml 


ie 


-is 


-is 


3d, conj. 


d- 


e<voir -evant 


-u 


ue 


m9lS 


-us 


4th. conj. 


vend- 


re -ant 


•u 


us 


-J 


mIS 


5th. conj. 


trad. 


nire -uisant 


-uit 


uite 


-uis. 


muisis 


6th. conj. 


jo. 


indre mignant 


Jnt 


inis 


•ins 


.ignis. 



7* A GRAMMAR OF THE 

-Unvariable TERMINATIONS in all the 
CONJUGATIONS. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 





SINGULAR. 


Present Tense. 


p l u a 


AL. 


A. 




Variable 


.OTIS 

Imperfect. 


-ez 


-ent 


B. 


~0/J 


-0/J 


rotl - ions 
Preterit. 


-ic%. 


-dent 


i. 


) "*' 


-tff. 


ma -ames 


-Ms 


-event 


•€ ?' 


f -/i 


-J$ 


~ii -imes 


-lli'S 


-ire tut 


w # 

3- 


) .Us 


-US 


.lit -lanes 


* uies 


mtirent 


4- 


-ins 


~,int <4nmes 


-tntis 


mi invent 








Future. 






D. 


*rai 


-ras 


* ra - rons 


-nz 


'tont 






CONDITIONAL MOOD. 


i 


E. 


•roil: 


mTOU 


-roit -rims 


-rkz 


-rcient 






SUBJU 


NCTIVE MOOD. 








P 


resent Tense* 






F. 


J$ 


?#l 


-e 'ions 
Preterit. 


~iex 


~ent 


i, 


\ ~\ -asse 


masses 


-at -ass ions 


-assk-z 


-assent 


3 


, f -isse 
. £ -usse 


misses 

-usses 


-it missions 
-lit -ussions 


-issiez 
-ussiez 


missent , 
-ussent 


4 


. J -iuiie 


-ii/sses 


mint -in.sions 


-iussicz 


minsscnj 



INFFNITIVE MOOD. 

Participle Present. 

. IL manU 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

K* Variable - u •*» 

First Conjugation. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

AlM-ER, to 
PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT, PAST, 

Aim-ant, hving, | Aim-c, loved. 



ent. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



19' 



INDICATIVE MOOD, 



SINGULAR. 

J 'aime, / love* ', 
tu aimes, thou lovest } 
ii aime, he loves. 



J'aimoiSy / did live, 

tu a i mo is, thou didst love, 
\\ a i molt, he did love. 



J'aimai, I loved \ 

tu aimas, thou loved ft > 

il aima, he loved. 



Present Tense 



PLURAL. 

* Nous ai mons, nve love, 
vous aimez, you love, 
ils aiment, they Jove, 

Imperfect. 

Nous aimions, vje did love? 
vous aimiez, you did love, 
ils aimoient, they did love. 

Preterit. 

Nous ai Biames, *we loved, 
vous airiiates, you loved, 

ils aime rent, they loved, 

♦ 

Future. 



J'aimerai, I shall or *wil}}m)e y Nous aimerons, <we shall love. 



tu aimeras, thou shah love, 
il aimera, he shall love* 



vous aime fez, you shall love, 
ils aimeront, they shall love* 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



SINCULAR* 

J'aimerois, / should love, 
tu aimercis, thou should st love, 
ii aimeroitj he should low. 



PLURAL. 

Nous aimefiohs hxde sh. love, 
vous a i m er i e 2 , \ ou s h ould love r 
ils aimeroient, they sho. love* 



IMPERATIVE- MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

Aime, Lve thou j, 
qiril aime, let him love, 
qu'elle aime, let her love. 



PLURAL* 

A i mons, let us love, 

aimez^ love you, 

qu'ils a i meat, let them love. 



* Or I do love, or I am lov'irg, which is to be observed in all other 
verbs. 

t Or, 1 ivas loving, or J zuas used to love, or J ssal to love. It is the 
same in all other verbs. 

t Or, do thou love^ and likewise in all other verbs. 

* 4 



I* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



que SINGULAR. 

J'aime, that I may love, 
tu aimes, thou mayst lo<ve, 
il aime, he may love, 

que Preterit. 

J'aimasse, that I might love, 
tu aimasses, thou mighiest love, 
il aimat, he might love* 



que plural. 

Nous aimions, <we may Urue> 

vous aimiez, you may love, 
ils aiment, they may love. 



Nous aimassions, ive mi. lo<ve % 
vous aimassiez,j0# mig, love, 
ils aimassent, they might love. 



Second Conjugation. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pun-ir, to punish, 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST* 

Pun-issant, punishing. | Pun-i, punished* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

Je punis, / punish, 

tu puiUSj thou punishes t, 

II punit_, he punishes. 



PLURAL. 

Nous punissons, five punish, 
vous punissez, you punish, 
ils putiissentj they punish. 



Imperfect. 
Je punissois, / did punish, I Nous punissions., ive did } ^ 
tu punissois, thou didst punish, vous punissiez, you did 
il punissoit, he did punish. \ ils punissoient, they du 
Preterit. 



did ) <J 
did \% 
did ) 5, 



Je punis, / punished, 
tu punis, thou punishedst 9 
ii pun it, he punished. 



Nous punimes, ive punished, 
vous punites, you punished, 
ils punirent, they punished. 

Future. 
Je punirai, I shall funish, 
tu puniras; thou shalt punish, 
il punira, he shall punish* 



re. 

Nous puniroi s, w* shall ^ <£ 
vous punirez, jtf// j/w// > g 
ils puniront, they shall j <, 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



Si 



SINGULAR. 

Je punirois, / should -j 
tu punirois, thou shouldst J 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PLURAL. 



Nous punirfons, we sho. 
il puniroit, he should J <§, | fls puniroient, they sho," 



<i 



vous puniriez,j0» shou 



Is 



IMPERATIVE MOOLX 



SINGULAR. 

Punis, punish thou, 

qu'il punisse, let him punish , 

qu'elle punisse, let her punish. 



PLVRAL. 
Punissons, let us punish, 
punissez, punish you, [nish 
qu'ils punissent, let them pu~ 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



it 



que SINGULAR. 

Je punisse, that I may 

tu punisses, thou mayst 

il punisse, he may 

que 

Je punisse, that I might ^ ^' 

tu punisses, thou mightest * '§ 

il punit, he might 3 5. 



que PLURAL. 

Nous punissions, we may -^ <J 
vous punissiez, you may \ "? 
ils punissent, they may J 
Preterit. 

JNous punissions, we mi 



* 
-**■ 



vous punissiez, you might > '5 

ht 3 & 



ils punissent y they might 
Third Conjugation, 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

D-EVOIR, to owe. 
PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. P,A3To 

D-evant > owing. | D-u, owed-* 

INDICATIVE MOOD; 

Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

Je dois, / owe, 
tu dois, thou owest, 
i\ doit, he owes. 

Je devois, I did owes, 
tu devois, thou didst owe, 
il devoit, he did owe. 



PLURAL. 
Nous devons, we owe y 
vous devez, you owe, 
ils do i vent, they owe 9 

Imperfect. 

Nous devions, we did owe, 
vous deviez, you did owe, 
ils devdient, they did ewe, 
5 



%z 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



SINGULAR. 

Jc duSj / owed, 
tu dus, thou owedst> 
il duty he owed* 

Je d'evrai, / shall owe, ■ 
tu devras,. fhou shah owe, 
il devra, he shall owe. 



Preterit. plura«l, 

Nous dumes, we owed, 
vous dutes, you owed, ' ■ 
ils durent, they owed'. • -. 

Future. 

Nous devrons, <wc shall owe, 
vous devrez, you shall on.ve> 
ils devront, they shall owe, 

CONDITIONAL MOOD, 



SINGULAR. 

Je devrois, / should owe, 
tu devrois* thou shouldsf owe, 
il devroit,. he should owe. 



PLURAL. 

Nous dev rions, we should owe, 
vous devriez, you should owe> 
ils devroient, they should ewe* 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Dois, owe thou, 

qu'il doive, hthim owc y 

qu'elle doive, let her owe* 



Devon s, let us owe, 

devez, owe you, 

qu'ils doivenr, let them m>* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que singular. que plural. 

Je doive, ihaf I ?nay owe, [ Nous devious, we may owe t 
tu doives, thou .may est owe 7 . vous devicz,,you may owc D 
il doive, he may owe*. j ils doivent, thty ?nay\owe % 

que Preterit. 



Je dusse, that I might owe y 
tu dusses, thou Slightest owe,. 
il. diit, he might owe. 



Nous dussions, we might owe 
vous dussiez, you might owe 3 
ils dussent, they might viva* 



Fourth Conjugation; 
INFINITIVE MOOD,. 

Ven-dre, to sell. 

PARTICIPLES. 
FfcESINT. PAST. 

Ven-dant, selling, \ Ven.du, sold* 



SINGU.LAR. 

Je vends, / sell, 

tu vends, thou sellest, 

il vend, he sells. 

Je vendois, 2 did sell, 
tu vendois, thou didst sell, 
il vendoit, he did sell.. 

Je vendis, / sold, 

tu vendis, thou soldesi, 

il vend it, he sold. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 8j 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Preseat Tense. 

PLURAL. 

Nous vendons, <we sell, 
vons yendez, you sell, 
ils vendenr, thy sell. 

Imperfect. 

Nous vend ions, *we ctictsetFy 
vous vendi.cz, you did s<il> 
ils vendoient, they did sell.. 
Preterit.. 

Nous vendimes, <vjs sold,. 
vous vendues, you sold, 
il vendirent, they sold. 
Future.' 



Je vendrai, T shall sell, 
tu vendras, thou shah sell, 
il vendra, b* shall sell. 



Nous vendrons, <we shall stllL 
vous vendrez, you shall- sel\ 
ils ' y endron t, they shall sell* 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

Je vendrois, / should sell, 
tu vendrois, then shonldst sell, 
11 Vend mi t, he should sell. 



PLURAL. 

Nous vendrions, <vue should sell r . 
vous vendriez, you should sell ^ 
ils vendroient,.//^- shcu-ld selh. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR.. 

Vends, sell thfa 9 

qu'ii vende, let him r ell, 

qu'elle vende, ht her sell, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense., 
que singular. que plural. 



PLURAL. 

Vendons, let us sell,, 

vendez, sell you. 

qu'ils vendent, let. them sell*. 



J-e vende, that I may sell^ 
tu vendes, thou may est sell, 



ii vende, he 
que 



stlL 



No us ve nd I o r i s , *we may sell^ 
vous vendiez. you- may sell^ 
ils vend en r j. tb^y may. sell. 
Preterit.. 



Jc'vendisse, that I might sell. 
t li Vi -ndisses-j thou might est sell, 
ii venal/,, be viight Silk 



Nous-vend is si on s^aw wig. sell 1 
vous vendisi,iez> j^./ might sell ^ 
| iis Yznd'iMznV,.ibeymigbtcs£ll^ 



B 6) 



84 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Fifth Conjugation. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Trad-uire, to translate* 

Participles, 
present. past. 

Trad-uisant, translating. | Trad-uir, translated. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Je traduis, / translate , I Nous traduisons, <we transl. 

tu traduis, thou translate st, I vous traduisez, you translate, 
il traduit, he translates. | ils traduisent, they translate* 

Imperfect. 
Je traduisois, I did •}<; | Nous traduision«, at^/V/ j .^ 



tu traduisois, thou didst > § vous traduisiez, you did s 
il traduisoit, he did J £ | ils traduisoient, they did * £ 

Preterit. 
Je traduisis, / translated, 1 Nous traduisimes, <we \ ^ 
tu traduisis, thou translatedst, I vous traduisites, you 
il traduisit, he translated* | ils traduisirent, they J £ 

Future. 

Noustraduirons,iivj&tf. -* . 
vous traduirez, you shall \ 



Je traduirai, / shall -j 
tu traduiras, thou shah > 8 



il traduira, he shall 3 £ 



ils traduiront, theyjhallj £ 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je traduirois, / should «* ^ 
tu traduirois, thou should. C | 
il traduiroit, he should j £ 



Nous traduirions, *ute sh. -^ ^ 
vous traduiriez, you sh. \ | 
ils traduiroient, they sh. J £ 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Traduis, translate thou, 
qu'il traduise, let him trausl. 
qu'elle traduise, It her tran. 



Tradaisons, let us translate, 
traduisez, translate you, 
qu'ils traduisent, let them tr. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 85 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que singular. que plural. 

Je traduise, that I may 1 <r I Nous traduisions,«utf#tt7. 1 ^ 
tu traduises, thou may at \ | vous U aduisitz, you may I § 
il traduise, he may J £ | ils traduisent, they may J £ 

que Preterit. 



Je traduisisse, that I mi. "| ^ I Noustraduisissions, <we > , 
tu traduisisses, thou mi. \ § vous traduisissiez, you \ 
il traduisit, he might J £ | ils traduisissent, they m. J 

Sixth Conjugation. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Jo-INDRE, to join, 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

J«.ighant,/0/>»z?£. | Jo-int, joined. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je joins, I join, 
tu joins, thoujoinest, 
il joint, he joins. 



Nous joignons, njoe join, 
vous joignez, you join, 
ils joignent, they join. 



Imperfect. 



Je joignois, / didjoin,^ 
tu joignois, thou didst join , 
il joignoit, he did join. 



Nous joignions, we did join, 
vous joigniez, you did join, 
ils joignoient, they did join. 



Preterit. 



Je joignis, I joined \ 
tu joignis, thoujoinedst, 
il joignit, he joined. 



Nous joignimes, ive joined, 
vous joignites, you joined, 
ils joignirent, they joined. 



Future. 



Je joindrai, / shall join , 
tu joindras, thou shalt join, 
li joindra, he shall join* 



Nous joindrons, *we shall join, 
vous joindrez, you shall join, 
ils joindront, they shall join. 



SS 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

Je joindrois, / should join, 
tu joindrois, th:u shouldestjo. 
il joindroit, he should join* 



PLURAL. 

Nous joindrions ive sh. jom % 
vous joindriez, you sh. join, 
ils joindroient, they sh.jouu 



/IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Joins, Join thou, . . 
qu'il joigne, let him join, 
qu'eile joigne, let her join. 



Joignons, let us join, 

j oignez, join you y 

qu'ils joignent, let them join* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



que SINGULAR. 

Je joigne, that I may join , 
tu joignes, thou m ay est join y 
il joigne, he may join. 



Present Tense. 

que PLURAL. 

Nous joignions, <zve may join* 
vous joigniez, you may join y 
ils joignent, they may join. 



que 



Preterit. 



Je joignisse, that Imightjoin^ 
tu joignisses, thou mightestjo. 
i\ joignit, he might join. 



Nous joignissions, <wemi. jo, 
vous \oigu\^\tz y you-mig join, 
ils joignissent, they mi 'g. join \ 

Conjugation of Reflected Verbs. 
A Reflected Verb, as I have hinted before, has always 
9e before it's infinitive ; as, se repentir, to repent ; but it 
is generally an active verb, the action of which returns 
upon the agent that produces it. The following example 
of the first conjugation will be sufficient, to teach how to 
conjugate any reflected verb. 

INFINITIVE MOOD.. 
Se Lever, to rise, 

PARTI.CIPL'SS. 
PRESENT. PAST* 

Se levant, rising. | Lc^ e, risen. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PI UR AL. 



Je me leve, / tMe% 

tu te I eves, tbtu ristst,. 

il se leve, he ritu* 



Nous nous levonsj ace rfse s 
\ vous V()i s* t l fc#, 

ib se 10 vent, tbtj rise* 



TRENCH TONGUE. 
singular. Imperfect. plural. 



37 



Je me levois, / did rise, 
tu te levois, thou didst rise, 
ii se levoit, Ife did rise. 

Je me levai, / rose, 

tu te levas, thou didst rise, 

il se leva, he did the. 



Je me leverai, / shall rise, 
tu te lever as, thou shalt rise, 
il se levera, he shall rise. 



Nous nous levions, <we did ri. 
vous vous leviez, we did rise, 
iis selevoient, they did rise. 
Preterit. 

Nous nous levames, *we rose, 
vous vous levates, you rose, 
ils se leverent, they rose. 
Future. 

[rise, 
Nous nous leverons, *we shall 
vous vous leverez, you sh. ri a 
ils se leveront, they sh. rise* 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

Je me leverois, / should rise, 
tu te leverois thou shou. rise, 
\\ se leveroit, he should rise. 

1MPERATIV 



plural. [rise. 

Nous nous leverions, ^we sh. 
vous vous lev criez, you. sh.rise r 
ils se leveroient, they sh. rise* 



SINGULAR. 

Leve-toi, rise thou, 

qu'il se leve, let him rise, 

qu'elk se leve, let her rise. 



PLUR A L . 

Levons-nous, let us rise, 
levez-vous, rise you,. 
qu'ils.sc levent, let them rise. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
Present Tense. 



SINGULAR, 



que 

Je me leve, that I ?nay rise, 
tu te leves, thou may est rise, 
il seleve, he may rise. 



PLURAL. 

que. [r/se r 

Nous nous levions, nve 7nay , 
vous vous leviez, you may ru 
ils se levent, they may rise. 



que 

Je me levasse, that I might ri. 
tu te lev asses, that Tightest ri. 
il se lev at, h? might rise. 



Preterit. 

[rise, 
Nous' nous levassions-, we mi.. 
vous vous lev assiez,y oumi.ri. 
ih'seievassent,-.^^ mi. rise. 



£ There are neuter verbs, which become reflected by the 
addition of the panicle en iiximed lately, after the double 



si 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



pronouns, s'en aller, to go away ; s'en retourner, to re- 
turn. 

A reciprocal verb, which is by no means to be confounded 
tvith a reflected one, is used in the plural only, and conju- 
gated like reflected verbs with a double pronoun. 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs, alphabetically *♦ 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

A B SOU D RE, to absolve. 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Absolvant, absolving. \ Absous, absolved. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR* 
J'absous, / absolve , 
la absous, thou absolvest, 
il absent, he absolves. 



PLURAL. 

Nous absolvons, <we absolve, 
vous absol vez,^0# absolve, 
ils absolvent, they absolve. 



J'absolvois, / did absolve, 
tu absolvois, thou didst absol. 
il absolvoit, he did absolve. 



Imperfect. 



Nous absol vions, <we did abs. 
vous absolviez,^0**fo/ absol. 
ils absol voient, they did absol. 



Future. 



J'absoudrai, I shall | £ 
tu absoudras, thou shah >*^ 
il absoudra, he shall J *| 



Nous absoudrons,<u* sh. "I ^ 
vous absoudrez, you sh. >"g 
ils abseudront, theysh* J 






CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

J *absoudrois, / should 
tu absoudrois, thou sho. 
il ahsoudroit, he should 



J «5 



PLURAL. 

Nous absoudrions 
vous absoudriez 
ils absoudroien 



lL. 

:ions, nve s. 1 £ 
iez, ycu sh. >*j 
mt,thtysh. J *§ 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



Absous, absolve thou, 

qu'ii absolve, let him absolve. 



PLURAL. 

Absolvons, let us absolve, 
absol vez, absolve jcu, 
qu'ils absolvent, le them abs. 



* When a tense is not conjugated at length, you will find a reference 
to the proper tense in the tabic el" termination vp« 7 8. 

5 



que PLURAL. 

Nous absolvions, <we m. 1 s£ 
vous absolviez, you may >"*§ 
ils absolvent, they may J *§ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOODv 

^ije SINGULAR, 

J ' absolve y that I may 1 C 
tu absolves, thou mayest >^ 
i\ absolve, he may J *| 

Abstraire, to abst ratty like traire. 

ACCUEILLIR, to receive, like cueillir. 

ACCOURIR, to run to y like courir* 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
A C £U E R I R, to acquire. 
PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST* 

Aequerant, acquiring. | Acquis," acquired, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

J'acquiers, / acquire > 9 

tu acquiers, thou acquired, 

il acquiert, he acquires. 



J'acquerois, I did 

tu acquerois, thou didst 

il acqueroit, he did 



PLURAL. 

Nous acquerons, <we acquire,. 
vous acquerez, you acquire, 
ils acquierent,*/^ acquire. 

Imperfect. 

Nous acquerlons,<w^ did 1 £ 
vous acquerie2;,j0# did V 'S 
ils ac/7 ueroient, they did J ^ 
Preterit. 

acquimes, nve acquired, 
vous acquites, you acquired, 
ils acquirent, they acquired, 



J - 



J'acquis, I acquired, 

tu acquis, thou ac quired st, 

il acquit, be acquired. 

Future. 
J'acquer-rai, I shall acquire. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
J'acquer-rois, I should acquire. See p. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Acquerons, let us acquire. 



Acquiers, acquire thou. 
qu'il acquiere, let him acqui. 



acquerez, acquire you, 
qu'ils acquierent, let them ac. 



90 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



que SINGULAR. 

J'acquiere, / may 



tuaequieres, thou mayest 



il acquiere, he may 
night 




que 

J'acquisse, I mi^ 

tu acqnisses, thou might 

il acquit, he might 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

PLURAL. 

Nousacqnerions, tvern. "] £ 
voos acqueriez, you may I g^ 
ils acquierent, they may J ^ 
Preterit. 

Nous acquissionsji^f mi 
I vous acquissiez, you ?ni 
^ j ilsacquissent, thtymigh, 
Admettre, to admit y like met t re. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 



i 



:! 



PRESENT 

Allan t, going. 



Aller, to go. 

PARTICIPLES. 

'PAST. 

J Alle, gone. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

Je vais, I go, 

tu vas, thou goest, 

il va, he goes. 

J'allois, I did go, 

tu allois, thou didst go, 

il alloit, he did go. 

J'allai, / went, 

tu alias, thou <uutntest, 

il alia, he ivent. 

J'irai, / shall go, 
tu iras, thou shaft go, 
il ira, he shall go. 



PLURAL. 

Nous allons, *ive go p 
vous a\\zx,you go> 
ils vonr, they go. 
Imperfect. 

Nous all ions, <ive did go ± 
vous M\tz,you did go, 
ils alloient, they did go. 
Preterit. 

Nous allames, <zve <went^ 
vous a Hates, you <zueut, 
ils alle rent, they *wext. 
Future. 

Nous irons, e we shall go > 
vous irez, jou shall go. 
ils iront, they shall go* 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

SINGUXAR. PLURAL. 






J'irois, / should go j 

tu irois, thou shouldest go, 

il iroit, he should go. 



Nous irions, <we should go,. 
vous iriez, you should go, 
ils iroient, they should go. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Allez, let us go, 



91 



Va, go thou, 

qu'il ailie, lei him go. 



allez, go you, 

qu'iis aiiknt, let them g9> 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 



one SINGULAR. 

j*dille. I may go, 
tu allies, thou mayest go, 
ii ailie, he may go, 

que 

J'allasse, I might go, 

tu allasses, thou mightest go, 

il allat* he might go. 



PLURAL. 

Nous alliens, we may go y 
vous alliez, you may go, 
ils -aiilent, they may go* 

Preterit. 

Nous allassions, we might go f 
vous allassiez, you might go % 
ils allassent, they might go* 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

S'Asseoir, to sit dewn. 
PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

S'Asseyant, sitting down. | Assis, sat down* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 

SINGULAR. PLURAL, 

[down* 
Nous nous asseyons, we sit 



Je m'assieds, / sit down, 
tu t'assieds, ihsu sittest down, 
il s'assied, he sits down. 



Je m'asseyois, / did sit douon, 
tu t'asseyois, thou didst sit do. 
il s'asseyoit, he did sit down. 



vous vous asseyez ycu sit d 9 
ils s'asseyent, they sit down* 

Imperfect. 

["«/ down* 
Nous nous asseyJons, we did 
vous vous asseyiez, you did 
ils s'asseyoienr, they did ui d. 



Preterit. 



Je m'assis, I sat down, 

tu t'assis, thou sattest down, 

il b'assit; he sat down. 



Nous nous assimes, we sat do* 
vous vous assites, you sat do. 
ils s'assirent, they sat down* 



92 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Future. 

SINGULAR. 

Je m'assierai *, I shall sit do. 
tu t'assieras, thou sbalt sit do. 
il s'assiera, he shall sit down.. 



PLURAL. [sit dozvn r 

Nous nous assierons> we shall 
vous vous assiereZyjou sha . sit 
, il s'assieront, they sh. sit do.. 



* Or, Je nfaueyeral, according to the French Academy, 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



[down, 
Je m'assierois *, / should sit 
tu t'assierois, thou sbo. sit do. vous vous assieriez, yon sho, 



il s'ass&roit, he should sit do. 



PLURAL. 

[sit deivn 3 
Nous nous assierions, i»e sh. 



ils s'assieroient, they sh.sit. d^ 



* Or, je tri'esseyerris.—'lb'id, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



Assieds.toi, sit thou down, 
qu'il s'asseye,/*/ him sit down. 



FLURAL* 

Asseyons-nous, let us sit down 
asseyez-vous, sit (you) down, 
qu'ils s'asseyent, let the. sit d» 



SINGULAR. 

que 

Je m'asseye^ / may sit down, 
tu t'asseyes, thou mayst sit do. 
il s'asseye, he may sit down. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

PLURAL. 

[sit down, 
Nous nous asseyions, we may 
vous vous assey \zz,you may s. 
il s'asseyent, they may sit do. 

Preterit. 

[sit doivn. 
Nous nous assissions, we mi* 
vous vous assissiez, you mi. 
il s'assissent, they mig. sit do. 



que 

Je ra'assisse, that I mig. sit d. 
tu t'assisses,/^*/ mightest sitd. 
il s'assit, he might sit down. 

Obs. Grammarians do not agree about the orthography 
of this verb : it has been conjugated according to the 
French Academy. 

ApprendrEj to learn, like prendre. 
A 8 s a i l L I R , to assault, like trcssaillir* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Battre, to beat. 



9J 



Battant, beating* 



PARTICIPLES. 

j Battu, beaten. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR, PLURAL. 

Je bats, / beat, I Nous battons, we beat-,\ 

tu bats, thou beatest, vous battez, you beat, 

il bat, he beats. ils battent, they beat. 

Imperfect. 
Je batt-ois, I did beat. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je battis, / beat, Nous battimes, nve beat, 

tu battis, thou beatest, vous battites,j>ou beat) 

il battit, he beat* ils battirent, they beat. 

Future. 
Je batt.rai, .1 shall beat. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD, 

Je batt-rois, I should beat. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Battons, let us beat. 



Bats, beat thou, 

tju'il batte, let him beat. 



battez, beat you, 

qu'ils battent, let them beat. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 



/jue SINGULAR. 

Je batte, that I may beat, 
tu battes, thou mayest beat, 
il batte, he may beat. 



PLURAL. 

Nous battions, <we may beat, 
vous battiez, you- may beat, 
ils battent, they may beat. 



■que 



Preterit. 



Je batrisse, that I might beat, 
tu battisses,/£?ft mightestbeat, 
il battit, he might beat. 



Nous battissions,**;*' mi. beat, 
vous battissiez, you might be. 
ils bzxtissent, they might beat. 



9* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



INFINITIVE MOOQ. 
Bo I re, to drink. 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Buvant, drinking. | Bu, drunk. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 



SINGULAR 

Je hois, / drink ) 

tn bois, thou drinkest, 

il boit, he drinks. 



PLURAL. 

' Nous buvons, <ive drink, 
vous buvez, you drink , 
ils boivent, they drink. 
Imperfect. 
Je buv-ois, / did drink. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit, 
je bus, / drank. Nous bumes, w* drank, 

tu bus, /&<;# drankesty vous butes, j>b# drank, 

il but, £f drank. | ils burent, /£<?>' drank. 

Future. 
je boi-rai, I shall drink. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je boi-rois, / should drink. Seep. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

Bois, drink thou, 

qu'ii boive, let him drink. 



PLURAL. 
Buvons, let US drink , 
buvez, drink yen ^ 
qu'ils boivent, /*/ them drink* 



que 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



je boive, / may drink, 

tu boives, thou may est drink, 

il boive, he may drink , 



Nou s buy ia n s ; -us ma y drht , 
vous buviez, you may drinky 
ils boivent, ihey may drink. 



que Preterit. 

Je busse, / might drink, I Nous bussions, <ive might dri. 

tu busses, thou migfote&t drink) j vousbussiez, you might* 

il but, he might drink > j iis b.M&sentj th • drink. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

EouiLLIR, to boil. 
Participles. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Bouillant, boiling. j Bouilli, boiled. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 



9* 



PLURAL. 

Nous bouillons, -jue boil, 
voiis bouiilez, you boil, 
ils bouiiient, they boil. 
Imperfect. 

See page 78. B. 
Preterit. 

Nous bouilJimes, ewe boiled, 
vous bouiliires, you boiled, 
ils bouillirent, they boiled. 
Future. 
Je bouiiii-rai, I shall b:il. See page 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je bouilli-rois, I should boil. See page 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PLURAL. 
Bouillons, let us boil, 
bddillez, boil \ou y 
qti*iis b^u'llent, let them boil. 



SINGULAR. 
Je bous, / boil, 
tu bous, thou boil est, 
il bout, he boils. 

Je bouill-ois, / did boil. 

Je bouUlis, / boild, 

tu bouiliis, ifyou boiledtt, 

il bouillit, he boiled. 



SINGULAR. 



Bous, boil thou, 

qu'ii bouilie, let him boil. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tens", 
que singular. ( • riURAL, 

Je/ bouili-:', I may Vfji?, \ Nous bqu\llionsj ^wemayboil^ 

tu bouides, thou ma\-fl joil, J vous bouilliez, ycu way bo;/, 
il bouilie, he may boil. J ils bouiiient, they may boil. 

que 'Pret.rit. 

je bouiilisse, 1 might bo : l, I Nous bouillissicns, nve m. bo. 
tu bouillissQSj^^iw [hi. boil, 1 vous bopiilisiez, you might b. 
il bouiilir, be might b il. \ ils bouillissent, they might b. 

This verb is seldom u edj excep r In the third persons 
singular and plural ; and instead of bomllir de la <viande> to 
boil meat, we siy, /aire boudlir de la <viaude. 



^6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

CirconCIRE, to circumche . 
This verb is not of great use. It is conjugated like lire, 
to read, except in both the preter tenses, and in the past 
participle, where it makes je circoncis, je ch-ccncisse, cir- 

CGUCii. 

Com? Rend RE, to under standf like prendre. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Conclure, to conclude* 
Participles, 
present, past. 

Concluant, concluding. | Conclu, concluded. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Nous concluons, ive conclude , 
vous conclue z, you conclude •, 
ils concluent, they conclude. 



Je conclus, / conclude^ 
tu conclus, thou concludest, 
il conclut, he concludes. 

Imperfect. 
Je conclu-ois, 1 did conclude. Seep. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je conclus, ] concluded, I Nous conclumes,^<?<:<wr /#</?, 

tu conclus, thou condudtst, vous conclutes, j0« concluded, 
il conclut, he concluded. | ils conclurent, they concluded. 

Future. 
Je conclu-rai, I shall conclude. Seep. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

Je conclurois, / should conclude. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Concluons, let us conclude, 
Conclus, conclude thou, 
<j j'il conclue, Jet him conclude , 



concluez, conclude you, 
qu'ils concluent, let them con. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



que 

Je conclue, that J may conclude, 
XUCO\\c)u?s,fheu may st conclude, 
il conclue, he may conch de. 



[conclude, 
Nous conditions, ive may 
vous concluiez, you may c^.'u 
il-e concluent, they may cone 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



91 



Preterit. 



SINGULAR. 

que [conclude, 

Je concludes, that I might 
tu conclusses, thou mightest c. 
il cenclih, he might conclude. 



PLURAL. 

[conclude* 
Nous conclusions, ive might 
vous conciussiez,^0K might c m 
ils conclussent, they might cm* 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

CONFIRE, to pickle* 
PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST, 

Confisant, pickling. \ Confit, pickled* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

Je confis, I fickle T 
tu confis, thou picklest, 
il confit, he pickle i. 



PLURAL. 

Nous confisons, <we frc'klr, 
vous confisez, you pickle % 
ils confisent, they pickle* 

Imperfect. 



Je conn's- ois, I did pickle. See p. 78. 
Preterit. 



B, 



Je confis, / pickled, 

tu confis, thou pickle dst } 

il con fit, he pickled. 



Nous conflmes, we pickle d* 
vous confites, you pickled, 
ils confirent, they pickled. 

Future. 
Je confi-rai, / shall pickle. See page 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD, 
j^ confi-rois. / should pickle. See page 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



Confis, pickle thou, 

qu'il confise, let him pickle. 



PLURAL. 

Confisons, let us pickle, 

confisez, pickle you, 

qu'ik confiaent, let tkempiJk* 



9« 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Je confise, that I may pickle , Nous confisions,iy<? may pic 'k. 
tu-confises, thou mayst pickle, vous confisiez, you may pick. 
il confise, he ?nay pickle. \ iis confisent, they may pickle. 

Preterit, 

[pickle. 



que 

Je confisse, that I might pick 
tu confesses, thou mightst pick 
il confit, he might pickle. 



Nous confissions, we night 
vous conrisbiez, you might pi. 
ils confissent, they might pic % 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

CoNNOlTRE, tO knOW. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Connoisant, knowing. | Connu, known. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Je connois, / know, [ Nous connoissons, we knew, 

tu connois, thou knowest, vous connoissez, you know, 

il coiinoit, he knows. ils connoissent, they know. 

Imperfect. 
Je eonnoiss-ois, I did know. See page 78. B. 

Preterit. 



Je connus, / knew, 

tu connus, thou knewest, 

ii connut, he knew. 



Je connoitrai, I shall know, 
wnoxiVJSythoT/shaltknow, 
I a, he shall know. 



Nous connumes, we knew, 
vous conmnes, you knew, 
ils connurent, they knew. 

Future. 

\know % 
Nous connoitrons, we shall 



vous connoitreZjjytf* shaltkno. 
ils connoitront, >/•£>• shall kno. 



99 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Nous connoitrions, ave should 
vous connoitneZyjcu sho. ktt* 



J e connoitrois, I shout, know, 
tu-connoitrois, tbousfo know, 



il connoitroit, he shou. know, lis connoitroient, tkej sh. kn* 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PLURAL, 

Connoissons, let us knovj, 
connoissez, knovjyou, 
qu'ils c'onnoissenr, let them k c 



SINGULAR. 



Oonnois, knovJ thou, 

qti'il connoisse, let himkno<w. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 



SINGULAR. 

q e [know, 

]e connoisse, that I may 
ta connoisses, thou mayst kn. 
il connoisse, he may know. 

Preterit, 
qpe {knvw, 

Je connusse, that I might 
tu connu&sesj -thou mi. know, 
il connut, he might k/ioiv. 



PLURAL. 

[kno<iu 9 
Nous Connoissions, we may 
vous connoissiez, you may zn. 
ils connoissent, they may kno. 



£xno<zt*) 
Nous connussions, nxe might 
vous connussiez,j^ mi. kno. 
ils connussent, they mi. hiovj* 

C o m qtr e'r I R , to conquer, like acqutrir. 
Consentir, to consent, like sentir. 
Contenijl, to an tain, like tenir. 

Co NT RED IRE, to gainsay. 
This verb is conjugated like dire, except in the second 
person plural, where it makes vous contredisex. 

Contrevenir, to infringe, 1 ike venir. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Convaincre, to convince* 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Convainquantj convincing. | Convaincu, convinced* 

F Z 



100 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



PLURAL. 



Je eonvaincs, I convince) 
tu eonvaincs, thou conv incest, 
il convainc, he convinces. 



[vince 9 
Nous convainquons, vue con- 
vows convainquez, jou conv. 
ils convainquent, they conv* 



Imperfecta 

\yinee, 
Je conraincfuois, / did con- 
tu con vain quois, thou didst c. 
il convainquoit, he did conv. 



[convince^ 
Nous convainquions, we did 
vous convainquiez, you did c. 
ilsconvainquoient, they did c. 



Preterit. 



Je convainquis, / convinced, 
tu convainquis, thou convin. 



\vinced, 
Nous convainquimes, voe cou- 
vous convainquites, you con. 



II convainquit, he convinced, ils convainquirent, they con* 

Future. 

\yince, 
Je convaincral, / shall con- 
tu convaincras, thou shalt co. 



il convaincra, he shall conv. 



[convince^ 
Nous convaincrOns, vue shall 
vousconvaincrez, you sh. co* 
ils convaincront, they sh. xo. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

[convince, 
Je convainc rois, / should 
tu convaincrois, thou she., con. 
il convainuroit, he should con. 



nURAL. 

[convince, 
Nous convaincrions, qve sho. 
vous convaincriez, yon sho. e. 
ils convaincroient, tbty sh. co. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



Convaincs, crivince thou, 
cju'il convainque, let him con. 

7 



PLURAL. 

Convainquons, let usconvvice 9 
convair.qucz, convince you. 
qu'ii convainquent, let th. co. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



is* 



SINGULAR. 
«JUe [convince) 

Je convainque, that I may 
tu coiwinques, tko.masyt co. 
il convainque, he may convu 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense* 

PLURAL. 

[convince f 
Nous convainquions, we may 
vous convainquieZjjtf^/Tz^ c* 
lis convainquSnt, they m. con. 



Preterit, 
que [convince, 

Je convainquisse, / might 
tu convainquisses, thou mh r r 
il convaiuquit, he might con. 



[might convince r 
Nous convainquissions, we 
vous convainquissiez, you m* 
ils con vainquis sent, they m. <* 



Convenir, to agree , like venir. 
Cor romp re, to corrupt y like romfre* 

INFINITIVE MGOLX 
Coudre, to sew. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST, 

Cousantj sewing. ■ ] Cousu, sevsed* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Nous cousons, we'tew y 
vous cousez, you sew, 
ils cousent, they sew.- 
Imperfect. 

See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 

Nous cousimes, vjc sewed, 
vous cousites, you sewed, 
ils cousirent, they sewed. 

Future. 
Je coud-rai, I shall shew. See p. 78. D. 

* 3 



Je couds, / sew, 

tu couds, thou s&west, 

il coud, he sews, 

Jecous.ois, I did sew. 

Je cousis, I sewed, 

tu cousis, thou sewedst, 

il cousit, he sewed. 



105 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je coud-rois, I should se*w< See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

SINGUEAR. PLURAL 

Cousons, let us sew, 
Couds, sew thou, 
du'il couse, let him sew 



eouseZj sewyou, 

qu'ils cousent, let them sew. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



que SINGULAR* 

Je couse* that I may sew % 
tu co uses, thou mnyst sew, 
il couse, he may sew* 



que 

Je cousisse, that I might sew, 
tu co.us.issesi/^02 mightest s?w, 
il cousit, he might sew* 



PLURAL.. 

Nous cousioilSj we may sew, 
vo,us,cousiez, you may sew, 
ils cousentj they may sew. 
Preterit. 

[sew, 
Nous cousissions, we might 
vous cousissiez,j0# mig. sew, 
iis cousissent, they might stw* 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Courir, to run. 

PARTICIPLES, 
PRESENT. PAS** 

Courant, running. | Couru, run. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

PLURAL. 

Nous courons, we run, 
vous courez, you run, 
ils courent, they run. 

Imperfect. 

See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 

Nous couriimes, we ran, 



SINGULAR. 

Je cours, / run, 

tu cours, thou run nest, 

il court, he runs. 

Je cour-ois, / did run. 



Je courns, / ran, 

tu courus, thou tannest % 

il couru t, he ran. 



vous courutes, you ran, 
ils coururent, they ran* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 103 

Future. 
Je cour-rai, / shall run. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je cour-rois, / should run . See p. 78. E, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Courons, let us ru?i> 



courez, run you , 

qu'ils courent, let them run. 



Cour$, run thou, 

qu'il coure, let him run. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je coure, that I may run* 
tu couresj tht>u mayst run, 
il coure, he may run* 



que 

Je courusse, that I might run, 
xucourusses, thtumrghu st run, 
il courut, he might run. 



Nous courions, <we may rux, 
vous counez, you may run, 
ils CQ\H£'Mythey may run. 
Preterit. 

[run, 
Nous courussions, we might 
vous courussiez, \ou might r. 
lis courus^ent, they might ran* 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
C o u v R 1 r, to cover. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Couvrant, covering. j Couvert, covered". 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je couvre, / cover, 

tu couvres, thou coverest, 

il couvre, he covers, 

Imperfect. 
Je couvr-ois, I did cover. See p. 78. B 

F 4 



Nous couvrons, voe cover y 
vous couvrez, you cover, 
ils couvrent, they cover* 



J04 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



singular. Preterit. plural. 

Je couvrisj / covered, Nous couvrimes, vue covert 

tu couvris, thou coveredst, vous couvrites, you covered > 

il couvrit, he covered. ils couvrirent, they covered* 

Future. 
Je couvri.rai, I shall cover. See p. 78. D. 
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je couvri-rois, I should cover. See p. 78, E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PLURAL. 

Couvrons, let us cover, 

couvrez, cover you, 

qu'ils couvrent, let them co<P, 



SINGULAR, 



Couvre, cover thou, 

qu'il couvre, let him cover. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

je couvre, that 1 may cover, Nous couvrions, we may cov> 

tu couvres, thou mayst cover, vous couvriez, you may cover, 

il couvre^ he may cover. ils couvrent, they may cover. 

Preterit. 

[cover, 



que 

Je couvriase, that J might 
tu couvrisses, thou mi. cover, 
ilcouvrit, he might cover. 



[cover, 
Nous couvrissions, ive might 
vous couvrissiez, youmigktco» 
ils couvrissent, they might co* 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT, 

Croyant, believing. 



Croire, to believe. 
PARTICIPLES. 

PAST. 
I Cl'U, believed. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je crois, / believe, 
t« crois, thou bclievcst, 
il croit, he helivcs. 



Nous croyons, ive believe^ 
vous croycz, you believe, 
ils croient, thty believe* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



10; 



Imperfect. 
Je croy-ols, I did believe. See p. 78. 
Preterit. 



B. 



Je cms, / believed, 
tu crus, thou believedst, 
il crut, be believed* 



Nous crumeSj <we believed, 
yous emits, you believed \ 
ils crurent, they believed* 
Future. 
Je croi-rai, / shall believe. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

Je croi-rois, I should belieeve. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. 



Crois, believe thou, 

qu'il croie, let him believe. 



PLURAL, 

Croyons, let us believe,- 
croyez, believe you, 
qu'il-s-croient, let them belie* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

que singular. plural, [lieve, 

Je croie, that I may believe. Nous croyions, <we may be* 



vous croyieZj ysu may belie, 
ils croient, they, may believe* 



\lieve. 
Nous crussions, vue might be* 
vous crussiez, you might beU 
lis crussent, they might belie. 



tu croiesj thou mayst believe, 
il croie, be may believe. 

Preterit, 
que 

Je crusse, that I might belie 
tu crusses, thou mightest belie, 
il ciut, be might believe, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

CroitrEj to grow* 
participles. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Cyissant, growing. | Cru, grown. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



singular. 
Je crois, I grovu, 

tu crois, thou grace sty 
il croit, he groiys* 



plural. 
Nous croissons, <we grew, 
vous croissez, you grow, 
ils croissent, they gravis 



io5 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Imperfect. 
Je croiss^ois, I did grow.. See p. 78. B. 



Preterit. 

Nous crumes, we grew^ 
vous crutes, you grew, 
ils crurent^ they grew*. 

Future. 
Je eroit-raij I thai! grow. See p. 78. D. 



Je cms, I gre<vj, 

tu crus, thou grewesty 

il crut, he grew.. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je'croiUrois, I should grow. See p. 78. E* 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



€rots, grow thw, 

qu'il croisse, let him grow, 



PLURAL. 

Croissons, let us grow* 

croissez, growyoit) 

q-u'ils croissent, let them gro* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



que SINGULAR. 

Je croisse, that I may grow, 
tu croisses, thou may st grow, 
il croisse, he may grow*. 

que 

Je crussej that I might grow, 
tu crusses, thou might st grow, 
ll crut, he- may grow. 



PLURAL. 

Nous emissions, we may gn. 
vous croissiez^^w^v^roxt;, 
ils croissent, they may grow. 

Preterit, 

Nous crussions, we mi. gro, 
vous crussiez, you might grc* 
ils cryssent, they might grow* 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Cueillir, to gather.. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PA-9T. 

Cueiilant, gathering. \ Cueilli, gathered* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



102 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR., PLURAL. 



Je cueille^ I gather, 

tu cueilles, thou %atherest, 

il cueille, be gathers. 



Nous cueillois, <w? gather^ 
vous cueillez, you gather^ 
ils cueillent, they gather. 



Imperfect. 
Je cueilLois, I did gather. See p. 78. B^ 
Preterit. 



Nous cueilKmes, <we gathered*^ 
vous cueillites, you gathered,. 
ils cueillirent, they gathered* 



Je cueillis, 1 gatherea, 

tu cueillis, thou gatheredst, 

il cueillit, he gathered'. 

Future. 
Je €ueille-rar r I shall gather. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je cueille-rois, I should gather. See p. 78. E 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR... 



Cueille, gather thou,. 

qu'il cueille, let him gather. 



PLURAL.- 
Cueillons, let us gather^ 
cueillez, gather you, 
qu'ils cueillent, lettb. gathers 



que SINGULAR. 

Je cueille, that I may gather \ 
tu cueilles, thou may st gatb, 
il cueille, he may gather. 



tber. 



que* ^gathi 

je cueillissesj that 1 might 



tu cueillisses, thou might < t ga. 
]i. Cueillit, he might gather. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Terwe. 

PLURAL.- 

Nous cneillions, *we m.gath*- 
vous cueilliez,_V3«#z. gather 3 > 
ils cueillent, they may gather v 

Preterit, 

feather* 
Nous cueiilissions^'u^ might 
vous cueiU\&s\ez f you-m* g atb m . 

ils cueillissent,./^ m. gathv 



T 6 



tot A GRAMMAR OF THE 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
De'qhoir, to decay, to decline. 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Decheant, decaying. | Dechu, decayed. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Peesent Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je dechois, / decay, 

*4i dechois, thou decay est 9 

tu dechoit, he decays. 



Nous dechoyons, r we decay, 
vous dechoyez, jw« decay, 
ils dechoient, they decay. 



Preterit. 



Je dechus, / decayed, 
tu dechus, thou decayedst, 
il dechu t, he decayed. 

Future. 
Je decher-rai,. / shall decay. See p. 78. D 



Nous dechumes, <voe decayed^ 
vous dechutes, you decayed, 
ils dechurent, they decayed* 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je decher-rois, / should decay. See p. 78. E» 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense # 

gilC SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Je dechoie, that I may decay, j Nous dechoy ions, we mayde. 



vous dechoyiez, you may de* 
ils dechoient, they may decqy* 



tu dechoies, thou mayst decay, 
il dechoie, he may decay. 

Preterit. 

Je dech-usse, I might decay. See p. 78. G. $. 

De'couvrir, to discover, like cowvrir. 
Dk'mettre, to remove, like ?nettre. 
De'sapprendre, td unleaw, like prendre* 
Dessert 1 r, to take away, like servir. 
Df/tenir, to detain , like tenir. 
D E T e n l R , to become, like w;;>. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Dire, to say> or tell. 

PARTICIPLES,- 
PRESENT. PAST* 

Disant, saying. \ Dlt, said. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense* 

PLURAL. 

Nous disons, njoe say T 
vous dites,_ytf# say, 
ih- disent r they say. 

Imperfect. 

See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 

Nous dimes, <we said), 
vous dites, you said y , 
ils direnty they said.. 

Future; 
Je di~rai, / shall say. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD.. 
Je di-rois, / should say* See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



109 



SINGULAR, 

Je dis, / say, 

tu dis r thou sayesiy 

II dit, he says. 



Je dis-ois, / did say. 

Je dis, / said, 

tu diSj thou saidsty 

il dit, he said. 



SINGULAR. 



Dis, say thou, 

im'il dise, let him say. 



PLURAL, 
Disons, let us say, 
ditQSySayyoUy 
qu'ils disent, let them say* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 



«me LINGULAR. 

Je dise, that I may say, 
til discs, thou may st say, 
il disc, he may say. 



PLURAL. 

Nous disions, ive may say. 
vous disiez, you ?nay say, 
ils disent, thoy may say. 

que Preterit. 

Je d-isse, that I might say. See p. 78. G. 2. 

Redire is conjugated after the same manner# 



no A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Disconvenik, to disagree, like venir*. 
DisCOURlR, to converse, like courir. 
Dissoudre, Jo dissolve, like absoudre* 
Distrairje, /a distract* like train.. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Dor MIR, to sleep. 

PARTICIPLES, 
PRESENT. PAST, 

Dormant* sleeping. | Dormi, slept. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

STNGULAR. PLURAL. 

Je dors, / sleep. Nous dormons, *we sleeps 

tu dors, thou sleepest, vous dormez, jou steep,. 

il dort, he sleeps. iJs dorment, they sleep*. 

Imperfect. 
Je dorm-ois, I did sleep. See p. 78. B^ 

Preterit. 
Je dorm-is, I slept. See p. 78. G. 2. 

Future. 
Je dormi-rai, r shall sleep. See p. 78. D'. 
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je dormi-rcis, I should sleep. Seep. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Dormons, lei us sleep, 



Dors, sleep thou, 

qu'il dorme, let him sleep. 



dormez, shep you. 

qu'ils dorment, let them shep* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense 

que SINGULAR. PLURAL,. 



Nous dormions, ive may sleep, 
vous dormiez,^« may shep i 
ilb dorment, they may sleep,. 

que Preterit. 

Je dorm-isse, that- 1 might sfcrp. See p. 78, G* z» 



Je dorme, that J may shep, 
tu dormes, thou majvst sleep, 
il dorme, he jnay sleep. 



FRENCH TONGUE, u.i 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 
Ecrtre, to write \ 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST* 

£crivant, -writing. J Ecrit, written. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense 

SINCITLAR. PLtTRAr# 

J'ecris, I write, I Nous ecrivons, we write?, 

tu ecris, thou writest, , vous ecrivez, you write, 

il ecrit, be writes. [ ils ecrivent, they write*. 

Imperfect. 
]'zcTiv-ois, I did write. See p. 78. B, 

Preterit. 
y€cri-Y.is h I wrote*. See p. 78. C. 2.. 

Future. 
J'ecrLrai, / shall write. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD., 
J'ecri-rois, / should write. See p. 78. E, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR, PLURAL. 

Ecrivons, let us write, 



ecrivez, write you, 

qu'iis ecrivent, let them write, 



Ecris, write thou, 

qu'il e.crive, let him write. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,. 
Present Tense.. 

que SINGULAR.. PLURAL. 



y&crive.jhat. I may write, 
tu ecrives, thou nuiyst write, 
il ecrive, he may write. 

que Preterit. 

J'ecriv-isse, that I might write*. See p. 7$. G. 2* 



Nous ecrivions, we may write 
vous ecriviez, you may write p . 
ils ecrivent, they may write. 



tit A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Emouvoir, to stir up, like mowed r. 
Encourir, to incur, like courir. 
Endormir, to lull asleep , like dormir. 
S'e QUERIR, to inquire, like acquerir. 
S'entremettre, to intermeddle, 1 i ke mettre* 
Entreprfndre, to undertake, 1 ike prendre. 
Entretenir, to entertain, like tenir. 
E ntr ' o u v r i r , to open a li. tie, like ouvrir. 

Envoy er, to send. 
This verb is irregulir in two tenses only, <viz+- 
Future. 
J'enver-rai, / shall send. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD.. 
J'enver-rois, / should se?id. ^ce p. 78. E. 

The other tenses are regular. It's compound renvoyer, 
to send back, is likewise irregular only in the two tenses 
above. 

EQUIVAX.OIR, to be of equal Value, liae *valoir. 
Exclure, to exclude. 
This verb is conjugated like conclure, except in the 
participle past, where it is spelled exclu^ exclue y ox exclus^ . 
excluse. 

Extra 1 re, to extract, like traire, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Fa 1 RE, to do, or to make. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Faisant, {pron. fes ant) doing. | Fait, def/e. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINCULAR. PLURAL. 

[*we do, 
Je fids, / do, Nous famous, [pron % fesans) 

tu fais, thou doest. vous faitcs, you do, 

il fcit, h'c does. J.ils font, they do. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



tij 



Je fis, / did, 

tu fis, thou didst, 

il fit, he did. 



Imperfecta 
je fais-ois, (/►>$;*. fesois) I did do * See p. 78. B* 

Preterit. 

Nous fimes, oi;^ <//</, 
vous fites, you did* 
il firent, they did,. 

Future. 
Je fe-rai, I shall do. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je fe-rois, I should do. See p. 7$. E» 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR, 



Fa is, do thou, 

qu'il fasse, let him do. 



PLURAL. 

Faisons, [pvon % fesons }/?///* <&<>. 

faites, do you, 

qu'ils fassent, /<?/ /&7* d>. 



que 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLUK.AL. 



Je fasse, that I may do, 
tu fasses, thou mayst do. 
il fasse, he may do. 

que 

Je fisse, that I might do, 
tu fisses, thou mightst do, 
il fit, he might do. 



Nous fassions, nve may de 9 
vous fassiez, you may do, 
lis fassent, they may do. 



Preterit. 



Nous fissions, <we might dt* 
vous fissiez, you might do,. 
ils fissent, they might do*. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
FuiR, to flee. 
PARTICIPLES. 
HRESENT. PAST, 

Fuyant, fleeing. j Fui, fled. 



j i 4 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

Je fuis, I flee, 

tu fuis, thou flee sty 

ll fuit, h* flees. 



PLURAL. 

Nous fuyons, *we flee 9 
vous fuyez, you flee, 
ils fuient, they flee* 



Je fuy-ois, / did flee. 



Imperfect. 
See p. 78. B. 
Preterit. 
Je fu-is* I fled '. See p. 78. C. 2. 

Future. 
Je fui-rai, I shallflfc. See p. 78. 

CONDITIONAL 

Je fui.rois, / should flee. See p. 7 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 



D. 

MOOD. 
3. E. 



SINGULAR. 



FuiS, flee thou 9 

qu'il iuie, let him flee. 



PLURAL. 
Fuyons, let us flee y 
fuyez, fleeyouy 
qn'ils fuient, let them flee*. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



que SINGULAR. 

Je fuie, that 1 may flee y 
tu tuies, thru may st flee , 
il fuie, he may flee. 



PLURAL. 

Nous fuyionSs <we may flee + 
vous iuyiez,^* may flee y 
ils tuient, thy mayflte. 

que Preterit. 

Je fuisse, that I might flee. See p. 78. G. 2. 

Hair, to hate* 

This verb is regular: it's irregularity falls only upon 
the pronunciation of its first, second, and third person 
singular of he present tense of the indicative mood, and 
of the second person of the singular in the imperative 
wood. Thus we write and pronounce in one syllable, Je 



FRENCH TONGUE. 2 1 3 

hah, I hate; tu hais, thou hatest ; il baity he hates \ hais y 
hate thou ; whereas, in all other tenses, a is pronounced 
separately from the following 7, and makes the syllable by 
itself; as, nous haissonSy we hate; *vous haissez, you hate ; 
ill baissent, they hate. 

Inter rom pre, to interrupt, like romp re. 

INFINITIVE MOOD* 

Lire, to read* 



PARTICIPLES. 



FRESENT. 

Lisant, reading. 



PAST. 



I Lu, read. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 



PRESENT, 

Je lis, / ready 

tu lis, thou readest 9 

il lit, be read** 



PAST. 

Nous lisons, <we ready, 
vous lisez, you ready 
ils lisent, they read. 



Imperfect, 
Je lis.ois, 1 did read* See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je lus, / ready Nous lumes, we ready 

tu his, thou readesty vous lutes, you ready 

il lut, be read, il lurent, they read, 

Future. 
Je li-rai, I shall read. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je li-rois, I should read. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. 



Lis, read thou y 

qu'il lise i let him read. 



PLURAL, 
Li sons, let us read 4 
lisez, read you , 
qu'ils lisent, let them read* 



iiS 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



que ' SINGULAR, 
Je Use, that I may read, 
tu Uses, thou may st read, 
il lise, he maj read* 

que 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

PLURAL, 

Nous lisions, <we may read r , 
vous lisiez, you may ready 
ils iiseut, ih^y may read. 

Preterit. 



Je lusse, that I might read, 
tu lusses, thou mightest ready 
il lut, he might read. 



Nous lussions, ive might ready 
vous lussiez, you might ready 
ils lussent, they might read. 

Maintewir, to maintain y like tenir. 

Maud i re, to curse. 

This verb is conjugated like dire 9 except in the second 

person plural, where it makes, vous maudissez. It doubles 

also the s in all the other tenses and persons ; as maudis- 

iant* nous maudissonSy je maudis'sois y que je maudisse* 

M£ D I R E , to slander* 
Thia verb is conjugated like dire, except in the seconcfc 
person plural, where it makes vous me'disez.. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Mentir, to lie* 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Mentant, lytugy | Menti, lied. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



5INGULAR. 

Je mens, / lie, 

tu mens, thou liesty 

il menr,. he lies. 



Je ment-ois, / did lie. 



PLURAL. 

Nous men tons, ive lie, 
vous mentez, you lie r 
ils mentent, they lie. 

Imperfect. 

B. 



See p. 78 
Preterit. 
Je ment-is, / lied. See p. 78. C. 2. 

Futuie. 
Je menit-rai, / shall lie. See p. 78. D» 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je menti-rois, / should lie. See p. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVF MOOD- 



"7 



SINGULAR. 



Mens, Ik thou, 

qu'il mente, let him lie. 



PLURAL. 

Mentons, let us lie, 

mentez, lie you, 

qu'ils mentent, let them lit. 



•que 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PXUItAL. 



Nous mentions, <we may lie, 
vous mentiez, you may lie, 
ils men tent, they may lie* 



Je mente, that I may lie, 
*u mentes, thou mayst lie, 
il mente, he may lie. 

<que Preterit. 

Je ment-isse, that I might lie. See p. 78. G. 2. 
: S E M e P R E n d R E , to mistake, like j5 rendre. 
MiisoFFRiR^, to underbid, like offrir. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Mettre, to put. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Mettant, putting. | Mis, put. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. FLURAL. 



Je mets, I put, 

tu mets, thou put test, 

il met, be puts* 



Nous mettons, nxe put^ 
vous mettez, you put, 
ils mettent, they put* 



Imperfect. 
Je mett.ois, / did put. Seep. 78. B. 

Preterit. 



Je mis, I put, 

tu mis, thou puftes-t, 

il mitj he Jut. 



Nous mimes, <we puf 9 
vous mites, you put, 
ils mirent, they put. 



xt-g A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Future. 
Je mett-rai, I shall put. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je mett-rois, / should put. See p. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 



Mets, put thou, 

qu'il mttte, let him put. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

Present Tense. 



PLURAL, 

Mettons, let us put, 

mettez, put you, 

qu'ils metttnr, let them put 



que SINGULAR. 

le mette, that I may fut % 
tu mettes, thou mayst put } 
il mette, he may put. 



PLURAL. 

Nous mettions, ive may put, 
vous mettiez, you may put, 
ils mettent, they may put. 



que 

Je misse, that I might put, 
tu misses, thou mightest put, 
il mit, he might put. 



Preterit. 



Nous missions-, ive might put, 
vous missiez, you might put, 
ils missent, they might put* 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



MoUDRE, to grind. 



PRESENT. 



PAST. 



Moulant, grinding. \ Moulu, ground. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

Je mouds, I grind, 

tu mouds thou griudest, 

il moud,' he grinds. 



PLURAL* 

Nous moulons, <ive grind, 
vous moulez, you grind) 
ils moulent, they grind. 



Imperfect. 



Je moul-ois, I did grind. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je moul-us, I ground. See p. 78. C. 5. 

Future. 
Je moud-rai, I shJ! grind. See p, 78. D. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 119 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

Je moud-rcis, I should grind. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Moulons, let us grind % 



Mouds, grind thou, 

qu'il moule, let him grind. 



moulez, grind jou, 

qu'ib mouhnt, let them grind. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

C[lie SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Nous mou\ions,ive may grind, 
vous mouliez, you may grind, 
ils moulent, they may grind* 



Je moule, thai I may grind, 

tu moules, thou mayst grind, 

il moule, he may grind. 

que Preterit. 

Je moul-usse, that I might grind. See p. 78. G. 3. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Mourir, to die. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Mourant, dying. I Mort, dead. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Nous mourons, ive die, 
vous mourez, yen die, 
ils meurent, they dk* 



Je meurs, / die, 

tu meurs, thou diest, 

il meurt, he dies* 

Imperfect. 
Je mour.ois, I did die. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit, 
Je mour-us, / died. See p. 78. C. 3. 

Future. 
Je mour-rai, I shall die. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je mour-rois, / should die. See p. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Mourons, let us die y 
Meurs, die thou, 
qu'il meure, let kirn die* 



mourezj die you, 

qu'ils meurent, let them die* 



sac* A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

^Tje SINGULAR, PLURAL. 



Nous mourions, vue may die, 
vous mouriez, you may die^ 
ils meurent, they may die* 



Je meurc, that I may die 9 
tu meures, thou mayst die, 
il meure, he may die. 

que Preterit. 

Je mour-usse, that I might die. See p. 78. G. 3. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

MouvolR, to move. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST, 

Mouvant, moving. \ Mu, moved. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

J* mens, / move, f Nous mouvons, vue move^ 

tu meus, thou movest, J vous mouvez, you move, 

il meut, he moves. J ils men vent, they move* 

Imperfect, 
Je mouv-ois, I did move. See p. j3. B. 

Preterit. 
Je m-us, / moved. See p. 7&. C. 3. 

Future. 
Je mouv-rai, I shall movs. See p. 73. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je mouv-rois, I should move. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Mouvons, let us move, 
Meus, move thou, meuvez, move you, 

•qu'il raeuve, let him move, qu'ils meuvent, let them move* 



FRENCH TONGUE. .12 1 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

^fte SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je me uve, that I may move, 
tu meuves, thou mayst move, 



Nous mouvionsjot^ may move, 
vous mouviez,jw# m&ymove t 



il meuve, he may move. ] ils meuvent, they may move. 

-. 
que Preterit. - 

Je m-usse, that I might move. See p. 78. G. J, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Naitre, to be born* 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Naissant,- being bom. \ Ne, born. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR, PLURAL. 



m 



Je nais, / am born, 
tu nais, thou art bom, 
\\ nait, he is born. 



Nous naissons, <we ere bom, 
vous naissez, you are born, 
ils nais sent, they are bom* 



Imperfect. 
Je naiss-ois, I was born. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 



Je naquis, / was bom, 
tu naquisj thou wast bom, 
il naquir, he ivas bom. 



Nous naquimes,'^ <zvere born^ 
vous naquites, jouvuere bom, 
iisnaquirent, they were born. 



Future. 
Jenatt-rai, I shall be bom. See p. 78. D, 

G 



122 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je nalt-rois,, I should be bom. See p. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Nais. be thou born* 

<ju'il naisse, let him be born. 



Naissons, let us be born, 

naissez, be you born, 

qu'ils naisscnt, let th. beborn m 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



que [bom, 

Je naisse, that I may be 
fa naisse, thou mayst be born, 
i\ naisse, he be born* 



[born, 
Nous naissions, ive may be 
vousnaissiez, you may be bom, 
ih naissent, they may he born. 

Preterit. 



born. 



[be bo 

Nous nacjuissions, *ve might 
vous naquissiez, you might be 
ils naquissent, they might be 



<pe [horn y 

Je naquisse, that I might be 
in naquisses, thoumightst be b. 
i\ naquir, he might be born. 

Obtenir, to obtain, like tenir. 
Offrir, to offer, like cowvrir. 
Omettre, to omit, like mettre. 
Ouvrir, to open, like cowvrir* 

OuiR, to hear. 

This verb is very seldom used, except in the past parti- 
ciple, and before dire; as, Je V ai oui dire, I heard it. — 
In this case it is conjugated by the help of a<voir, through 
all its tenses. Instead of the verb ouir, we make use of 
entendre. 

Paitre, to graze. 

This verb k conjugated like naitre, but the two preter 
tenses arc wanting; while rcpattre, its compound, though 
little used, has them all. — See Refaiire. 

P a r c o u R 1 r, to run <rver, like Qourh\ 



FRENCH TONGUE. ■ i Z$ 

Pargitre, to appear. 

This verb and its compound are conjugated like croftr*. 

Partir, to go away, like mentir. 
Parvenir, to atta in, like <venir. 
Permettre, to permit y like mettre. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Plaire, to please. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Plaisant, pleasing. I Plu, pleased* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Nous plaisons, nue please $ 
vous plaisez, you please, 
lis plaisent, they phase* 



Je plais, / p/ease 9 
tu plais, thou pleases t 9 
il plait, he pleases. 

Imperfect. 
Je plais-ois, I did please. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 

Nau s pi a m es , n ue p lea tcd t 
vous pliites, yon pleased^ 
ils plu rent, they pleased.. 

Future. 
Je phi-rai, I shall please. Seep. 78. D. 



Je plus, I pleased, 
tu plus, thou pleased sty 
il plut, he pleased. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

Je plai-rois, I should please. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

PiaiS Ons, let us p lease., 



Plaise, please thsu, 

qu'il plaise, let him please. 



plaise £, please you, 

qu'i Is plaisent, let 1 hem plea ^ 



c z 



**4 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



que 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je plaise, that I may f lease, 
tu plaises, thou may st please, 
il plaise, he may please. 



Nous plaisions, <we may please, 
vous plaisiez, you may please, 
ils plaisent, they may please. 



que 



Preterit. 



Je plusse, that I might please, 
tu plusses, thou mightst please, 
il plut, he might please, 



Nous p\ussion$,<we might plea. 
vous plussiez,^ -ou might please 
ils plussent, they might please. 

Poursuivre, to pursue, like sulvre. 
Pourvcir, to provide. 

This verb is conjugated like pre'voir, except in the pre- 
ter tenses, where it makes, Je pourvus Je pourvusse* 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Pou voir, to be able. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Po^vant, being able. > | Pu, been able. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



SIXGULAR. 

Je puis *, / am able, 
tu peux, thou art able, 
il pent, he is able. 

Imperfect. 
Je pouv-ois, 1 was able. See p. 78, B. 

Preterit. 



PLURAL. 

Nous pouvons, ive are able, 
nous pouvez, you are abk, 
, ils peuvent, they are able. 



Je pu% / iv as able, 
tu pus, thou wast able, 
il put, he ivas able. 



Nous pumes, we were able, 
VOUS putcs, you were able, 
ils purentj they were able. 



* J c peux may be used in conversation and in poetry, accord'ng to 
the French Acadi my. 

5 



FRENCH TONGUE. , 12 < 

Future. 
Je pour-rai, I shall be able. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je pour-rois, / should be able. See p. 78. E. 

The IMPERATIVE MOOD is Wanting. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

que SINGULAR. PLURAL. £*£&« 



je puisse, that I may be able, 
tu puisses, thou mayst be able, 
il puisse, he may be able. 



que 

Je pusse, that I might be able, 
tu pusses, thou might st be able y 
il put, he might be able. 



Nous puissions, *we vuiy be 
VGUspuissiez,^'^ may be able** 
ils puissent, they may be able. 

Preterit. 

{able, 
Nous pussions, w might be 
vous pussiez, you might be ah. 
i!s pussent, they might be al. 



Pre'dire, to foretell. 
This verb is conjugated like dire, except in she second 
person plural, where it makes vous predisez. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Prendre, to take. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT, PAST. 

Prenant, taking* | Pris, taken. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je prends, / take, 
tu prends, thou takest, 
il prend, he takes. 



Nous prenons, <uue take, 
vous prenezjjtfa take, 
ils prennent, they take. 
Imperfect. 
Je pren-ois, / did take. See p. 78; B. 

Preterit. 

Nous primes, <we took, 



Je pris, I took, 
tu pris, thoutcokest, 
il prit, he took. 



vous prites, you took, 
ils prirent, they took. 
c 3 



126 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

# 

Future. 
Je prend-rai, / shall take. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je prend-rois, i T should take. See p. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR* PLURAL. 

Prenons, let us take, 



prenez, take you, 

qu'ils prennent, let them take. 



P rends, take thou, 

qu'il prenne, let him take. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 

lie SINGULAR. PLURAL 



e prenne, that I may take, 
tu prennes, thou moyst take, 
il prenne, he may take, 



Nous prenions, <we may take, 

vous preniez,_j>0# may take, 

ils prennent, they may take. 



que Preterit. 

Je prisse, that I might take, ] Nous prissions,itv might take, 



vous prissiez,j0/< might take,, 
ilsprissent, they might take* 



tu prisses, thou mights take, 
il prit, he might tah, 

Pressentir, to foresee, like sent jr. 
Pre'valoir, to prevail. 

This verb is conjugated like vcdoir, except in the sub* 
junctive, where it makes que je pre vale, tu pre vales, &q, 

Pre'venir, to prevent, like venir. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pre'vocr, to foresee. 
PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. past. 

Prevoyant, foreseeing. | Previa, foreseen. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Jfc prevois, I foresee, 

tu prevois, thou foresee st, 

il prevoit, he foresees. 

Imperfect. 
Je prcvoy-ois, / did foresee. See p. 78,8, 



Nous prevovons, ivt foresee, 
vous prevoyez, you foresee, 
ils prevoient, theyfonsee. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 127 

Preterit. 
Je prev-is, /foresaw. See p. 78. C. 2* 

Future. 
Je preroi-rai, I shall foresee* See p. 78. D* 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je prevoi-rois, I should foresee. See p. 78. E* 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Prevoyons, let us foresee -, 
prevoyez, foresee you, 
qu'ils prevoient, let themfo* 



Prevois, foresee thou, 

qu' il pr e voie, let him foresee 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SIKCWLAR. PLURtAL. 



[foresee^ 
Nous preVoyions, nve may 
vous prevoyiez, you may fo* 
ils prevoient, they may fores* 



que [see, 

Je pre voie, that I mayfore- 

tu prevcies, thou may st fores. 

il prevoie, he may foresee* 

que Preterit. 

Je prev-isse, that I might foresee* Seep. 78. G. 2* 

Promettre, to promise, like mettre* 

Provenir, to proceed, like venir. 

Sh Rasseoir, to sit down again \ like asseohr* 

Recowrir, to have recourse, like courir, 

Recuuvrir, to cover again, like cowvrir* 

Recueilljr, to reap, 1 i ke cueillir. 

Rrmettre, to replace, like mettre. 

Repaitre, to feed. 

This verb is conjugated like naltre, exeept in the two 
preter tenses, and in the past participle, wherein it make* 
Je repus* * . . Je repusse, . . . repu, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Repentir (Se), to repent* 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Se Repentant, repenting* \ Repenti, repented. 

G 4 



12$ 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense 

SINGULAR, PLURAL. 



\pent, 

Nous nous repentons, <we re. 
vous vous repemez,j<?# repe. 
ils se repentent, they repent* 



Je me repens> / repent, 

tu te repens, thou repentest, 

il se repent, he repents. 

Imperfect. 
Je me repenuois, I did repent. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je me repent-is, / repented. See p, 78. C. 2. 

Future. 
Je me repenti-rai, / shall repent. See p. 78.- D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je me repenti-rois, I should rtpent. See p .78. Et 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Repentons-nous, let us repc,tt> 
repentez-vous, repent you, 
qu'ils se repentent, let them r. 



Repens- 1 01, repent thou, 
cm'il se repente, let him rep 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



^ue \,p en U 

Je me repente, that I may re. 
tn te repentes, thou mnyst re. 
ils se repente, he may repent. 



[may repent, 
Nous nous repentions, ive 
vous vous repentiez, you may 
ils se repentent, they may re. 



que Preterit. 

Je me repent-isse, that I might repent. See p. 78. G. 2, 

Rkprendiie, to take again, like prendre. 
R E Q U e'r I R, to request, like aenne'rir. 

5 



FRENCH TONGUE, 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Ri'sot/DRE, to resolve. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Resolvant, resolving. | Resolu*, res 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



129 



SINGULAR. 

Je resous, / resolve, 
tu resous, thou re solve st, 
i-1 resout, he resolves. 



PLURAL* 

Nous resolvons, *ve resolve^ ; 
vous resolvez, you r-ejolvc, , 
ils resolvent, they resolve* 



Imperfect. 
Je resolv-ois, / did resolve. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je resol-us, I resolved. Seep. 78. C. 3. 

Future. 
Je resoud-rai, / shall resolve. See p. 78. D. ., 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je resoud-rois, I should resolve. See p. 78. E. . 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Resolvons, let us resolve, , 
Resorts, resolve thou y 



qu'il resolve, let him restive. 



resolvez, resolve you , 

qu'ils resolvent, Ijet tfam reso. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 



je resolve, that I may resolve, 
tu reso) ves, thou may it resolve y 
il resolve, he may resolve. 



PLURAL. 

[solve, 
Nous resolvions, <we may rc~ 
vous resoMez, you may reso. 
ils resolvent, they may resolve. 



* We say, likewise, wwj, speaking of tilings which may be re- 
solved into others. It is never used in the feminine gender, according' 
to the French Academy 3 thus we say, un brouillard resous en ^!uh 
- feg resolved into vain.. 

€ ' 5 



ija A GRAMMAR OF THE 

que Preterit. 

Je resol-usse, I might resolve. Seep. 78. G. 3. 

Rissentir, to feel y like mentir. 
Ressortir, to go out again , like mentir* 
Retenir, to retain y like tenir. 
Revenir, to return , like vmik, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
REVeTiR, to invest. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Revetantj investing. \ Revet*, invested. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Nous re ve tons, ive invest^ 
vous revetez,^0# invest , 
ils revetent, they invert*. 



Je yevets, / invest, 

tu revets^ thou invested, 

il revet, he invests. 

Imperfect. 
Je revet-ois, I did invest. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je revet-is, I invested. Seep. 78'. C. 1* 

Future. 
Je reyeti-rai, / shall invest. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je reveti-rois, I should invest. See p. 78* R. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Revetons, let us invest, 
Revets, invest thou? 
qu'il rev etc, let him invest. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



r e v t te 2L, invtst ycu ,. 

qu ils revetent, let them inv* 



Je revete, that I may invest, 
tu revctcs, thou tnuyst invest, 



ii revere, he may invest. [ ils ievetcnt, tkejf may invest* 



Nous re v£ (ions, vce may tnv.. 
vous rev ci iez , 1 cu may. itrvtsty. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

que Preterit. 

Je revet-isse, that I might ivvest. See p. 78, G. 2* 

Re voir, to see again, like w, 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Rire, to laugh . 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Riant, laughing. \ Ri, laughed, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



ijl 



SINGULAR. 

Je rjs, / laugh> 

tu ris, thou la ugh tity 

il rit, he laughs. 



PLURAL. 

Nous rions, we laugh % 
vous riez y you laugh, 
ils rient, they laugh. 
Imperfect. 
Je ri-ois, I did laugh. Seep. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je ris, / laughed, I Noas rimes <we laughed^ 

tu ris, thou laughedstj ' vous rices, jou laugh ed v 

il rit, he laughed* \ ils rirent, they laughed^ 

Future.. 
Je ri-rai, I shall laugh. See p, 7&. E. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD;. 
Je ri-rois, / should laugh. See p. 7.8. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. 



Ris, laugh thou, 

qu'il rie, let him laugh. 



PLURAL. 
Rions>. let us laugh, 
riezi, laugh you, 
quails rient,, let them, laughs 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



que SINGULAR. 

Je rie, / may laugh, 
tu ries, thou mayst laugh t , 
il lie, he may laugh. 



PLURAU 

Nous r-iions, e we may k>ughy 
vous riiez, you may laugh, 
ila rient, they may laugh* 

e 6 



'3* 
que 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 
Preterit. 



SINGULAR. 



PLURAL. 



Je risse. that I might laugh, 
tu risses, thou mightst laugh, 
ll lit, he might laugh. 



Nous rissions, we might langht 
vous rissiez, youir.ight laugh, 
ils rissent, they might laugh. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

RoMPREj to break. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Rompant, breaking. | Rompu, broken. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



singular. 
Je romps, / break, 
tu remps, thou breakest, 
il rompt, he breaks. 



PLURAL. 
Nous rompons, <we break, 
vous rcmpez, you break, 
ils rompent, they break. 

Imperfect. 

B. 



D. 



Je romp-ois, I did break. See p. 78. 

Preterit. 
Je romp-is, / broke. See p. 78. C. 2 

Future. 
Je romp-rai, I shall break. See p. 78 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je romp-rois, / should break. Seep. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL 

Rompons, let us break, 
Romps, break thou, 
qu'il rompe, let him break 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

-ye SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



rompez, breakyou, 

qu'ils rompent, lei them break. 



le rompe, that I may break , 
tu rornpes, thou mayst break, 
\\ rompe, he may break. 



NousrompionSjiivzvrfv break, 
vous xomjpitz, you mny break, 
ils rompent, they may break. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



l 3?> 



que Preterit. 

Je romp-isse, that I might break. See p. 78* G. 2. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
S a voir, to know. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST* 

Sachant, knowing. | Su, known. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Je sais, / know, J Nous savons, we knew, 

tu sais, thou knowest, vous savez, you know, 

iJ salt, he knows. ils savent, they know. 

Imperfect. 

Je sav-ois, I did" know. See p, 78. B. 

Preterit. 



Je sus, / knew, 

tu sus, thou k newest, 

\\ sut, he knew. 



Nous surpes, we knew, 
vous sutes, you knew, 
lis surent, they knew. 



Future. 
Je saurai, / shall know, j Nous saurons, <we shall know, 

tu sauras, then wilt knew, vous saurez, you will know, 
il saura, he will know. \ ils sauront, they will kjisw. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Je saurois, / should know, J Nous saurions, wesho. know, 
tu saurois, thwwouldst know, vous saurie7.,you would know, 
il sauroit, he would know. ils sauroient, they wo. know. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Sachons, let us know, 



Sache, kntw thou, 

qn'il sache, let him know* 



sachez, know you, 

qu'ils. sacbent, let them fW&r% 



134 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



que 

Je sache, that I may know, 
tu saches, thou mayst kuonjUy 
il sache, he may know. 

que Preterit. 

Je susse, that I might kuoiVy 
tu susses, thou might st kno<w y 
ils Sut, he might know* 



Nous sachions, ive may \mru> 9 
vous sachiez, y%u may kno e w % 
ils sachent, they may know. 



Nous sussions, <we mig. hiow 
vous sussiez, you might know, 
ils sussent, they might kno<w* 



Secourir, to succour y like cou rir. 

Sentir, to feel \ 
Servir, to serve* 

Je sersy tu sers y il sert, imperative mood second person 
singular, sets ... in other tenses follows the same varia- 
tions as ir in mentir. 

Sortir, to go cut. 

These three verbs are conjugated like mentir, 

S o U F F R I R , to suffer y 1 ike couvrrr. 
Soustraire, to subtract, like traire* 
Soutenir, to support y like ten+r. 
Se Souvenir, to remember, like ntenir* 

Suffire, to suffice. 

This verb is conjugated like lire y except in the two 
prefer tenses, and the past participle, where it makes Jt 
suffis , . . Je suffsse . . suff. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Suivre, to follow. 
participles, 
present. past. 

Suivantj following^ [ Suivi, feffewed* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



ns 



SINGULAR. 

Je suis, / follow, 

tu suis, thou fol lowest) 

il suit, he follows* 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

PLURAL. 

Nous suivons, we folhw % 
vous suivez, you follow , 
ils suivent, they follow. 

Imperfect. 
Je suiv-ois, I did follow. Seep* 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je suiv-is, I followed. See p. 78. C. 2. 

Future. 
Je suiv-rai, I shall follow. Seep. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je suiv-rois, I should follow. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR, PLURAL. 

Suivons, let us follow, 



Suis, follow thou, 

qu'il suive, let hirz follow. 



suivez, followyou, 

qu'ils suivent, let us follow* 



que 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Nou s s u i v ions , we mayfollowy 
yous suivlez, you may follow, 
ils suivent, they may follow . 



Je suive, that I may follow, 
tu suives, thou may st follow, 
il suive, he may follow. 

que Preterit. 

Je suiv-isse, that I might follow. Seep. 78. G, 2» 

SuRPRENBRK, to su r prise, like prendre . 
S u r s e o 1 R , to adjou *n % 1 i ke aPteoir. 
Sukvenir, to eime upo?2 , like veuir. 
Survivre, to survive, 1 i ke wvre. 

T A 1 r e , ( S E ) to hold the tongue \ 

This verb is conjugated like flaire* 



IS* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Te'nir, to hold. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST, 

Tenant, holding. | Tenu, held. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. • 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je tiens, / hold, 

tu tiens, thou holdestj 

il tient, he holds. 



Nous tenons, nve hsld, 
vous tenez, jou hold, 
ils tiennent, they hold. 



Imperfect. 
Je teruois, I did hold* See p. 78. B, 

Preterit. 
Je tins, / held, 
tu tins, thou h eldest, 
il tint, he held. 



Nous tinmes > nve held y 
vous tintes, you held, 
ils tinrent, they held. 



Future. 
Je tiend-rai, I shall hold. See p. 73. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD 
Je tiend-rois, I should hold. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. 



Tiens, hold thou, 

qu'il tienne, let him hold. 



PLURAL. 

Tenons, let us hold, 

teuez, held you, 

qu'ils tiennent, let them hold. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

que SINGULAR. PLURAL, 



Je tienne, that J may hald, 
tu titnnes, thou may it hdd, 
il tienne, be may held. 



Nous ten ions, ive may / 
vous.teniez, you may held, 
ils tienrenr, they rry ! 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



37 



que 



SINGULAR. 



Preterit. 



PLURAL. 



Je tinsse, that I might hold, 
tu tinsses, thou mightst hold, 
il tint, he might hold. 



Nous tinssions, we might hold, 
vous tinssiez, you might hold, 
ils tinssent, they might held. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Traire, to milk. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Trayant, milking. | Trait, milked. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL." 

Je trai8| / milk } Nous trayons, we milky 

tu trais, tbm milfast, vous trayez, you milt, 

il trait, be milku ils trayeiv, they milk, 

Imperfect. 
Je tray-ois, I did milk. See p. 78. B. 

Future. 
Je trai^rai, I shall milk. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

Je trai-rois, I should milk. See p. 78. T. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

T rayons, let us milk, 
Trais, milk thou, 
qu'il traye, let him milk. 



trayez, milkyou, 

qu'ils trayent, let them milk* 



que 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je traye, that I may milk, 
tu trayes, thou mayst milk, 
il traye, he may milk. 



Nous tray ions, nxe may milk, 
vous trayiez, you may milk, 
ils trayent, they' may milk. 



ij& A GRAMMAR OF THE 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

TRESSAILLIR, to start. 
PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

Tressaillant, starting. \ Trassailli, started. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense* 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je tressaille, / start) 

tu tressailles, thou siartesty 

il tressaille, be Harts* 



Nous tressaillons, <u* start, 
vous tressaillez, you start, 
ils tressaillent, they start* 



Imperfect. 
}e tressaill-ois, I did start. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je tressaill-is, I started. See p. 78. C. 2. 

Future. 
Je tressallli.rai, I shall start. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je tressaillurois, I should start. See p. 78. E. 

The IMPERATIVE MOOD is wanting, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

[start. 



que 

Je tressaille, tlwt I may start, 
tu tressailles, thou may st start y 



Nous tressail lions, nve maj 
vous tressailliez,joz< may sta. 



ii tressaille, he may start, \ ils trcisaillentf they may start* 

que Imperfect. 

Jc UessailUisse, that might start. See p. 78. G. 2. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 139 

Vaincre, to vanquish. 

This verb is conjugated like convaincre ; but it is sel- 
dom used in the singular of the present tense of the indi- 
cative mood. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

V a l o i R, to be 'worth. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Valant, being worth. \ Valu, been worth* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je vaux, / am worthy 
lu vaux, thou art worth, 
il vaut, be is worth* 



Nous valons, we are worthy 
vous valez, you are worth, 
ils valent, they an worth* 



Imperfect. 
Je val-ois, 2 was worth. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit, 
Je val-us, / was worth. See p. 78. C. 3. 

Future. 
Je vaud-raij I shall be worth. See p. 78. D. 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je vaud-rois, J should be worth. See p. 78. E 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Valons* let us be worth t 
Vaux, be thcu worth, 
qu'il vaille, let him be worth. 



que 

Je vaille, that I may be worth, 
tu vailles, thou may st be worth, 
il vaille, he may be worth. 



valez, be you worth, 

qu'ils vaillent j let them be wo, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

\worth % 
Nous valions, we may be 
vous val iez j.j'00 may be worthy 
ils yz'illent, thy may be war tfjt 



140 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



que Preterit, 

Je val.usse, that I might be -u.orth. See p. 78. G. 3. 

Venir, to come. 

This verb is conjugated like tenir. See p. 136. 

VeTiR, to tlofhe, like revkir. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Vivre, to live* 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

Vivant, living. | Vecu, lived. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



SINGULAR. 

Je vis, / live, 

ta vis, thou live st) 

il vie, hi lives* 

Je viv-ois, / did live. 

Te vecus, / lived, 

tu vecus, thou livedst, 

il vecut, he lived. 



PLURAL. 

Nous vivons, voe live, 
vous vivez, you live, 
ils vivent, they live. 
Imperfect. 
See p. 78. B. 
Preterit. 

Nous vecumes, <we lived^ 
vous vecutes, you lived, 
il vecurenr, they lived. 
Future. 
See p. 73. D. 



Je viv-rai, I shall live, 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je viv-rois, / should live. See p. 78. E. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. 



Vis, live thcuy 

qu'il vive, let him live. 



PLURAL. 

Vivons, let us live, 

vivez, live you, 

qu'ils vivent, let them live. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



que SINGULAR. 

Je vive, that I may live, 
tu vives, then mayst live, 
il vive, he may I've. 



PLURAL. 

Nous vivions, we may live^ 
vous viviez, you may live, K 
ils vivent, they may live. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



141 



que 



SINGULAR. 



Preterit. 



PLURAL. 



Je vecusse, that I might live, 
tu vecusses, thou mightst live, 
i\ vecut, he might live* 



Nous vecussions, we might li. 
v ous v ecussizz, you might live, 
ils vecussent, they might live. 



Voir, to see. 

This verb is conjugated like prevoir, except in the fu- 
ture, where it makes Je verrai ; and in the conditional, 
where it makes Je verrois. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
VouloIr, to be willing, 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT.* PAST. 

Voulant, being willing. J Voulu, he en willing, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



Je reux, / am willing, 
tu veux, thou art willing, 
II vein, he is willing* 



Nous v©ulons, we a re willing, 
vous voulez, you are willing, 
ils veulent, they are willing. 

Imperfect. 
Je voul-ois, I was willing. See p. 78. B. 

Preterit. 
Je voul-us, I was willing. See p. 78. C. 3. 

Future. 
Je voud-rai, / shall be willing. See p. 78. D, 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Je voud-rois, 1 should be willing. See p. 78. E. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Veut lions, let us he willing, 



Veuille, be hou wilting, 
qu'il veuille,/^/ him be willing. 



\ e u i 1 1 e z , be you willing, 
c^u'ils veuillem, let them be w. 



Hi A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

SINGULAR, PLURAL, 



que [ling, 

Je veuille, that I may be wil- 
tu veuilles, thou majst be ivi. 
il veuille, he may be willing. 



[*wil!ing 9 . 
Nous voulions, nve may be 
vous vouliez, you may be iv. 
lis veuillent, they may be «u>. 



que Preterit. 

Je voul-usse, that I might be willing. See p. 78. G, 3. 



Particular Observations upon some Verbs> chiefly De* 
fective, and their Manner of being conjugated, and 
used ; in Alphabetical Order. 

A SSORTIR, to suit, to match: this verb is regular, and 
•^•*- conjugated like funir: so is ressortir, when it signifies 
to be under the jurisdiction of a court ; but, when it 
signifies to go out again, it is irregular, and conjugated 
like mentir. 

Braire, to bray: this verb is used only in the following 
tenses, il brait y it braira, it brairoit* 

Bruire, to bluster: this verb is used only in the infini- 
tive, and in the third person of the imperfect tense, indi- 
cative mood, both singular and plural, il bruyoit, ils 
bruyoient ; as, let <veuts bruyoient, the winds blustered* 

Eruyanty having both genders and numbers, is by no 
means the participle of this verb, but an adjective \ as, let 
Jfstt bruyanSy the blustering waves. 

Choi-r, to fall: this verb is hardly fcstd) but in the 
infinitive mood, and in the participle past, chu. Instead 
of the feminine ehue, we formerly made use of chutc y which 
is still use-a in these proverbial manners of speaking, cbtrcbet 
chape-chutc, trouper cbapeJ(lmte y to look for, or to rind 
some occasion, to make an advantage of the negligence or 
misfortune of somebedv. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 143 

Clorre, to close: this verb is used only in the three 
persons singular of the present tense, indicative mood, 
je clos, tu clos, il clot; in the future, je clorrai; in the 
conditional, je clorrois ; and in the participle past, clos* 
This verb is sometimes neuter in the third person singular, 
as, la parte ne clot pas bien ; il y faut mettre de la lisiere y 
-elk dorr a mieux ; the door does not shut close ; you must 
put some list to it, it will shut closer, 

Df.faillir, to decay^ to grow fai?it or weak : this verb 
is used on y in the plural number of the indicative mood, 
present tense, nous defaillons y <vous defaillez, ils defaillent ; 
in the imperfect and preterit tenses, both singular and 
plural, of the same mood, je defailloisy &c, je defaitlis, 
Sec. ; in all it's compound tenses, j'ai defailli, &c. ; and 
in the infinitive mood. Instead of this verb, it is always 
better to make use of tomber en defaillance* This verb 
likewise signifies to fail, to want ; as, toutcs chases com- 
mencement a leur defaillir y they begin to want every thing ; 
but in this sense it grows obsolete ; it has no participle 
active in either sense. 

Demouvoir, to make to desist, (a law term :) this verb 
is used only in the infinitive mood ; as, rien ?ie Pa pu de- 
mouvoir de ses pretentions : nothing could make him give up 
his pretensions. 

Echo 1 r, to fall out, to chance: this verb is conjugated 
like dechoir, see page 108 ; but it is only used in the third 
person singular of the indicative mood, present tense, in 
the preterit and future tense, of the said mood, in the 
conditional, in the preterit tense of the subjunctive mood, 
in the participle past, and the participle of the present, 
wherein it niakes echtant. 

Eclorre, to be hatched : this verb is used only in the 
third person singular and plural of the present tense, indi- 
cative mood, // e'clot, ih eclose?it ; in the future, il cclorra, 
ils eclorr on t ; in the conditional, if eclorroit, ils eclorroient ; 
in the present tense, subjunctive mood, iljclose, ils eclosent ; 
and in the participle past, wherein it makes e'efos. This 
verb, in it's compound tenses is conjugated with the 
auxiliary verb etre ; and is sometimes used in a figurative 
sense, speaking of our thoughts, designs, &c. ; which 
begin to be discovered, after having been some time hidden; 

3 



i 4 4 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

as, tet desseins echrront quelque jour ; his designs will one 
day come to light. 

Emouvoir, to stir zip, to move: this verb is conju- 
gated like mmevoir : it is used both in a proper and figu- 
rative sense : in the first, it is said of the most subtile 
parts of the body, as humours, vapours, blood, &c. : as, 
le soldi emeut les <vapeurs, the sun stirs up the vapours ; 
in the second it is applied to whatever may cause a motion, 
or excite a passion, &c, as, e'est un homme que rien 
n'emeut, he is a man whom nothing moves. This verb is 
likewise used in a reflective sense ; as, il s f emut une grande 
tembtte, there arose a great tempest. 

Enclorre, to enclose, is conjugated like clorre, and 
used in the same tenses. 

S'Ensuivre, to ensue, to follow: this verb is conju- 
gated like saivre, in all it's tenses and moods, but used 
only in the third person singular and plural. 

Faillir, to fail: this verb is conjugated in the present 
tense, indicative mood, je faux, tu faux, il faut, nous 
faillons, <vous faillez, ils failUnt ; in the preterit tense of 
the same mood, jefaillis, Sec. ; and in the participle active 
faillant ; as, arrvver a jcur full ant, to arrive at the close 
of the day. This verb is seldom used ; however, we still 
make use of the past participle; as, s*il a failli, il font 
qu*il soit puni ; if he have done amiss, he must be punished. 
We likewise say in conversation, le coeur me faut, my 
heart fails me *. 

Falloir sometimes signifies to want, to come short, 
to be far from ; as, il s'en faut heaucoup, there wants a 
greit deal o£ it, it comes far short of it : in this tense it 
is preceded by s y en, and conjugated only in the third person 
singular, both in it's simple and compound tenses ; as, il 
s'en faut, falloit, fallut, faudra, faudroit, faille, fallut ; 
il s'en est fallu, &c. 



* The authors of the Dictionary of Trevoux ha\ f.-.'.'ira in the 
future tense; and they seem to be in the right. However, we say, 
son ami re lul faudra pas au beiein, his friend will n< .ting to him 

in time of need 5 << hut then it is rather the futur 

which, though different from the verb failiir, ha. , : the same 

signification. '* DicTiohnairf. di i Tr£V9UX« 



FRENCH TONGUE. t 4 j 

Ferir, to strike: this verb is used in the infinitive 
mood only in this phrase, sans coup ferir, without strik- 
ing a blow. The past participle, feru, is still used in the 
two following expressions, speaking in jest ; il est fern 
centre un tel; he is indiposed towards such a person; il 
estfe'ru de cettefemme ; he is smitten with this woman. 

Frire, to fry : this verb is used only in the three per- 
sons singular of the present tense, indicative mood, jefn's, 
tu fris, U frit ; in the future tense singular and plural, je 
friraiy &c. ; in the conditional, singular and plural, je 
frirois, Sec. ; in the imperative mood, second person sin. 
gula,/r/j; and in the past participle, frit 

Gesir, to lie: this verb is quite obsolete, even in the 
infinitive mood; however, we still say, git, nous gissons, ih 
% gissent, il gisscit : as, tout git en cela ; the whole business 
lies in that point ; ci-gh, here lies. 

Luire, to shine: this verb is conjugated like traduire, 
except in the past participle, where it makes lui ; and so 
is it's compound reluire. These two verbs want the pre- 
terit tense of the indicative and subjunctive moods. 

Nuire, to hurt: this verb, in all it's tenses and moods, 
is conjugated like traduire, except in the past participle, 
where it makes nui. 

Pleuvoir, to rain; this verb is used only in the third 
person singular, and sometimes in the plural, — il pleut, il 
plewvoit, il plut, il plewvra, il plewvroit, il pleuve, il plut 3 
plu ; les fleches pleuvoient de tsutes parts. * 4 

Promouvoir, to promote: this verb is used only in the 
infinitive mood, and in the past participle, promu. 

Querir, to fetch: this verb is used only in the infini- 
tive mood, with the verbs eller, <venir, and envojer : as, 
allcz querir, go and fetch. 

R v avoir, to have again: this verf) is used only in the 
infinitive mood. 

Refartir: when this verb signifies either to go away 
again, to set out again, or to reply, it takes no accent upon 
the first syllable, is irregular, and conjugated like partir ; 
but when it signifies to share, or to divide, it takes an acute 
accent upon the first syllable, is regular, conjugated like 
funir 9 and scarcely used, but in a few expressions, cspeak- 

H 



* 4 € A GRAMMAR OF THE 

ing of an estate, money, &c. : as, repartir une somme d*ar« 
gent ; to divide a sum of money. 

Ressortir, see Assortir, page 142. 

Saillir: when this verb signifies to gush out, it is re- 
gular, and conjugated like, punir ; but when it signifies 
to jutouty it is irregular, wants the past participle, and is 
used only in the infinitive mood, and in the thiid person 
of some tenses ; as ce balcony C£tte corniche, saille trop, 
saillera trop, sailleroit trop. In this sense it likewise 
wants the participle of the present, though we say in 
Fortification, angle saillant ; and in Architecture, corniche 
saillante ; but then saillant is an adjective, 

S-eo-i-R, to fit well, to become: this verb is never used 
in the infinitive mood, but only in the third person sin- 
gular and plural of the following tenses, il sied, ils sieent ; 
il seyoit, ils seyoient ; il sie'ra, ils sieront ; il sieroit, ils sieroient. 
This verb is still used in the participle of the present ; 
as, .cette ^ouleur wous seyant si bietty <vous auri,% tort d'en 
porter d' autre; since this colour becomes you so well, 
you would be in the wrong to wear any other : but it is 
better to avoid it. Sometimes it is used impersonally ; 
as, il sied mal a un homme de • . . ,• it does not become a 
man to . . . This verb in the sense of to sit do*wn is 
obsolete; however in Chancery or Law, we still make 
use of the participle of the present seant, and the parti- 
ciple of the past sis: the former is applied to a person or 
persons who are sitting or residing; as le Roi scant en son 
lit de justice, the King sitting on his throne ; le Farlement 
est scanty the Parliament is sitting ; the latter signifies 
situate ; as, un heritage tis a * • • , an estate situate . . . ; 
une maison sise rue St. Paul, ahouse situate in St. Paul's Street, 

Sortir : when this verb is used in Law, and signifies 
to get , to obtain, it is regular, and conjugated like punir; 
biit it is used in a few tenses ; as, cette sentence sortira 
son plein et entier cjfct ; this sentence will take effect ; 
j'entends que cette clause sortisse son pit in et entier effet, 
I expect this clause to take effect. 

Soudre (une question,) to sohe or resolve (a question.) 
This verb is used only in the infinitive mood, but it is ob- 
solete, and we make use ofrc'soudre. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 147 

PART III. 



THEORY joined to PRACTICE. 

THE FORMER CONTAINING TH-E 

R.ULES OF THE FRENCH SYNTAX,* 

WITH MANY 

NEW OBSERVATIONS: 

THE LATTER, THE 

Rules and Observations exemplified Separately, 

FOR THE 

SCHOLARS PRACTICE, 

AFTER EACH PART OF SPEECH. 



CHAP. I. 
Rules and Observations upon the Article* 

1. npHE definite article is used before the common 
-*- nouns, denoting an individual dhtinction, or a 
totality of objects : as the spring is an agreeable season, 
le printemps est tine sat son agreable: men are mortal; le$ 
hommes sont morte/s. 

2. The indefinite article is used before nouns taken in 
an indefinite and indeterminate sense, or in a sense which 

h 2 



i+8 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

does not denote either an individual, disc: ction or a 
specific totality; as, learned people have approved his 
work ; des ya<vans ant approwve son ouvrage. See Rule 
18. 

3. All common noun substantive take the definite ar- 
ticle ; also names of kingdoms, rivers, provinces, moun- 
tains, &c, unless in the sense of remaining in, going to, 
or coming from ; in this case we make use of the pre- 
positions en and de : as I am going to France ; je <vais 
en France: He is arrived from ^Flanders, il e it arrive de 
Flandre. They live in Italy, ik demeurent en Italie* 

4. When a superlative follows immediately it's substantive, the de* 

finite article is always put before the superlative in the first case, and 

agrees with the substantive in gender and number ; as, he is the most 

learned man ; c'est I'bomme le plus savant. You speak of the most 

. learned man t vous parley de Vhotnme le plus savant. 

Except when un or ur.c is followed by a substantive; in this case 
the definite article is commonly used in the second case plural ; as, 
he is one of the most learned men ; c*est un bomme des plus savam y or 
ftsfun des hommes Us plus savansy or c*est un des plus savans bommes. 

5. Adjectives used substantively take the article ; as, 
idle people are despised : les paresseux sont me'prises. 

6. Nouns of measure, weight &c, of things bought 
or sold, take the definite article, rendered in English by a 
or an ; as, ten crowns a bushel ; dix ecus le boisseau. 

7. When a substantive, having the definite article be- 
fore it, is preceded by tout, the article is kept, in the 
first case, through all the cases of tout ; as, all the world ; 
tout le monde ; of all the world, de % tout le monde ;' to all 
the world, a tout le monde* 

8. Some adverbs or prepositions, used substantively, 
require the article ; as, the inside, le dedans ; tlie outside, 
le dehors 1 the upper part, le dessus; the under part, le 
dessous. 

9. Obs. The definite article is put before the name of the Italian 
authors according to their syntax j as, Tasso y le Tasse; except Ra 
JMicbel-Ange, Pcirarque, Bocace, Santtaxar 9 and some others ; and those 
who have written in Latin, as Sadolet, Mmnucey Baroni*s t Sec. 

Proper names in the plural take the definitive article, ihough they 
have none in the singular, as U% li::n.rc, lis Vvrfjk % &c. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 149 

10. Obs. After the verb jouer, to play, we make use of the definite 
article in the second case, speaking of musical instruments 5 as, jouer 
du 'vision, de la guit-are ; and speaking of games at cards, or bodily 
exercises, we make use or the same article in the third case; as, jotter 
aux cartes, a \a paume , and after joueur, a player, we make use of the 
preposition de in both instances; as, un joueur de *vioJon y de guitare 9 
de cartesy de paums. 

11. Gbs. The adverb bien, used for beaucoup, much, requires after ifc 
the definite article in the second case: as, he has much money; il a 
bien de V argent : but beaucoup, and likewise all the adverbs of quantity, 
as, peu, moms, trcp, &c. take the preposition de\ as, il a beaucoup d'tfr- 
vem ; unless it is determined and specified by a relative pronoun that 
follows it ; as, il a defense beaucoup de V argent que *vous lui a<vie% donney 
he has spent a great deal of the money that you gave him. 

12. Obs. Some names of countries, contrary to the exceptions of 
the third rule, retain their article even in the sense of remaining in, 
coming to, or going from. These names are particularly those of re- 
mote countries, *ri% s of America, Asia, and Africa, to which we may 
join la Marche, le Perche, le Maine, &c. provinces in France; le Man- 
touan, le Mi/anois, le Parmesan, &c, divisions of Italy. 

13. Obs. No article is used before cardinal numbers, except first, 
when the nouns to which they are joined have a fixed number, either 
by themselves 5 as, les quatre salons, the four seasons ; or by a relation 
to something else expressed by the circumstances of the discourse ; as, 
les de-ux lettres que je vous ax ecrites, the two letters which I wrote to 
you. Secondly, speaking of cards, or the day of the month, as, le dix ; 
le neuf . . de Janvier, de Fe'vrier, . . de cceur, de pi^ue, &c. 

14. No article is used before proper names, particular 
places, towns, or .villages, &c, except, first, le Mans, 
le Cdtelet, la Fere, la Ferte', le Havre de Grace y la RoJ 
chelle, le Quewoy y Sec. cities, in France, to which add le 
Caire> Cairo, la Haye y the Hague. 

Secondly, some nouns, when they denete an individual 
distinction, or a particular appellation, V Athalie de 
Racine, la Me'rope de Voltaire, speaking of two plays 
©f these two authors. 

15. No article is used before nouns immediately fol- 
lowing certain verbs, or prepositions, with which they 
form a kind of adverb ; as, avec amitie y with friendship ; 
sans dedainy without disdain : par depit y through spite, 
avoir ewvie y to have a mind to. 

Except, when these nouns are followed, first, by the re- 
lative pronouns qui, que, lequel, &c, secondly, by a super- 
lative ; thirdly, -by a noun in the second case. 

16. No article is used after the preposition en y except 
in a very few cases, which will be noticed in the obset* 

» 3 



j 5 o A GRAMMAR OF THE 

vations about prepositions ; whereas dans always requires 
an article after it, unless it is followed by a conjunctive 
possessive pronoun, and likewise by a demonstrative, or 
indefinite pronoun : as, dans ma chdmbre, in my room ; 
dans cette circonstance, in that circumstance ; dans quelques 
moment, in a few moments. 

17. No article is used before a noun, which follows 
Immediately the name of a particular place, to which it 
belongs : as, I was born in London, the capital fity of 
England; Jfe suis ne a Londres, ville capitale d*Angle- 
terre. Neither is the article used after the verb hre : 
as, il est medecin, he is a physician, and not il est un 
medecin: unless in the exceptions of the 15th observa- 
tion, and unless the verb be preceded by cei as, e'est un 
midecm^ 

18. The indefinite articles du, de /*?, des, a du, a de la, 
a des, are used according to the second observation, and 
answer to some, either expressed or understood before a 
substantive. 

19. Obs. When the adjective goes before it's substantive, we use, 
instead of the foregoing indefinite articles, de for the first case, Jt de for 
the third case ; as, voila de ben pain, that is good bread ; njoila de belles 
dames, those are fine ladies; and not, du ben fair, des belles dames. 

N. B. There are some substantives in the plural, with which we u*« 
^*ta, not de, though preceded by their adjectives. This is, the case when 
the adjective and substantive make but one idea, and the adjective is 
used only to render the signification of the substantive complete : such 
are belles-lettres, beaux -ei frits, grands-seigneurs, which signify polite lite- 
rature, men of learning, people of high rank. 

20» The articles un, une, are used when ihey signify 
only a kind of indeterminate individuality, or an indivi- 
duality in an indeterminate manner: as, a king ought to 
be the father of his people : un roi doit etre le pere de 
son peuple. However, these articles may sometimes be 
changed for the definite article : as, a wise man rules his 
passions ; un homme sage regie ses passions, or Vhomme sage, 
&c. The articles un and une are expressed in English by 
a or an* 

21. Articles are repeated brfore each substantive, 
though synonymous ; as, les faveurs et les graces que nous 
reasons du citl : the favours and kindnesses which we re- 
ceive from Heaven, 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



*5* 



fci. Obs. When two adjectives, used positively, are joined together 
by a conjunction, and have the same substantive, the article is put be- 
fore the first of them only, if they be synonymous, or very nearly- 
alike ; as, les riches et magnljfi^u£s present 5 the rich and magnificent pre- 
sents. If they be not synonymous, the article must be repeated $ as> 
les ricba et les pawvres; the rich and the poor, 

'Rules and Observations upon the Articles, exemplified fof 
the Scholar s Practice. 



[ 1 J There are ten parts of 
speech; the* article, the 
noun, the adjective, the 
pronoun, the verb, the 
participle, the adverb, the 
proposition, the conjunc- 
tion, the interjection. 

The article shows the object 
or thing. 

The noun names the thing. 

The adjective expresses the 
quality of the thing. 

The pronoun supplies the 
place of the noun. 

The verb shows the action, 
or passion of the object. 

The participle partakes of 
the nature of the verb and 
noun ; it is used in the 
conjugation of passive 
verbs, and for that of the 
compound tenses of the 
other verbs. 

The adverb marks the differ- 
ence and circumstances of 
the action or passion. 

The preposition is an inde- 
clinable word, placed be- 
fore the nouns, pronouns 



By a dix parties d'oraison : 
/' * article, le nom, /'ad- 
jectif, le pronom, le verbe,' 
le participe, /'ad verbe, la 
preposition, la conjonc* 
tion, /'interjection, 

Z'article montre /'objet ou 
la chose. 

Le nom nom me la chose. 

Z'adjectif exprime la qualite 
de la chose. 

Le pronom tient la place dii 
nom. 

Le verbe montre /'action,, 
ou la passion de /'objet. 

Le participe tient de la na- 
ture du verbe et du nom ; 
il sert a la conjugaison 
des verbes passifs, et a 
celle des- temps composes 
des autres verbes. 

Z'ad verbe marque la diffe- 
rence et les circonstances 
de Paction ou de la passion. 

La preposition est w un mot 
indeclinable, place de* 
vant ks noms, les pro- 



* The words which are the objects of the rules are printed in Ita* 
lie, both in the French and English examples, if there be any expressed 
in the latter, throughout the rules and observations exemplified, to ihe 
end of the French Syntax. 

H 4 



and verbs 
verns. 

The conjunction joins words 

and phrases. 
The interjection expresses 

the motions or passions of 

the soul. 
Summer is an agreeable sea. 

son. 
Idleness is despicable. 
Shut the window- shutters. 
Open the window. 
Draw the curtains. 
Bring the mustard. 
Give me the loaf. 
Cut th-e meat. 
Emulation is a noble passion. 

Virtue and beauty are esti- 
mable. 

Virtue is preferable to 
riches. 

The heart often betrays the 
mind. 

I like fruit, 

[3.] France is a large coun- 
try. 

I speak of France. 

Let us speak of England. 

He talks only of Holland. 

Tonr.iine is the garden of 

France. 
The Thames is a fine river. 

The Rhine is a rapid river. 

Parnassus,. Pindus, and He- 
licon, are the mountains 
of the poets. 

My brother is come from 
India. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 
which it go- 



noms, et lei verbes qifelle 
regit.^ 

La conjonction joint lei 
mots et Us phrases. 

Z'interjection exprime lei 
mouvemens ou lei pas- 
sions de /'ame. 

Z'ete est une saison agrea*. 
bte. 

La paresse est meprisable. 

Fermez lei volets. 

Ouvrez la fenetre. 

Tirez lei rideaux. 

Apportez la moutarde. 

Donnez-moi le pain. 

Coupe z la viande. 

Z'emulation est une noble 
passion. 

La vertu et la beaute sont 
estimables. 

La vertu est preferable aux 
richesses. 

Le cceur trompe souvent 
/'esprit. 

J'aime le fruit. 

La France est un pays con. 
siderable. 

Je pftfle de la France. 

Parlons de V Angle terre. 

II ne parle que de la Hol- 
lands 

La Touraine est le jardin de 
la France. 

La Tamise est une belle ri- 
viere. 

Le Rhin est une riviere ra- 
pide. 

Le Parnasse, le Pind?, et 
/'Helicon, sont lei mon- 
tagnes da poetes. 

Mon frerc est arrive des In. 
des. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



Hi 



My sister tfae* in France. 

I shall go to Italy next 
spring. 

I am going to Spain. 

I am come from Portugal. 

He lives in England. 

[4.] It is the custom of the 
most barbarous people. 

He speaks of the most un- 
happy man. 

He is the best educated 
child. 

tie is the most presumptu- 
ous man. 

She is the most beautiful and 
amiable lady. 

I am writing upon the nicest 
matter, though the least 
shining. 

* It is one of the most bar- 
barous customs. 

He speaks of one of the most 
unhappy men. 

He is one of the best edu- 
cated children. 

He is one of the most pre. 
sumptuous men* 

She is one of the most beau- 
tiful and amiable ladies. 

I am writing upon one of the 
nicest matters, though the 
least shining. 

[5.] Politicians dissemble. 

The ambitious sacrifice every 
thing to fortune. 



Ma'sceur demeure ra France. 
J'irai en Italie au printemps 

prochain. 
Je vais en Espagne. 
Je viens de Portugal, 
II demeure en Angleterre. 
C'est la coutume des peuples 

lei plus barbares. 
II parle de /'homme le plus 

malheureux. 
C'est /'enfant le mieux elevev 

C'est /'homme le plus pre- 

somptueux. 
C'est la demoiselle la plus 

belle et la plus aimable. 
J'ecris sur U matiere la plus 

delicate, quo i que la mo ins 

brillante. 
C'est une des coutumes let 

plus barbares. 
II parle d'nn des hommes les 

plus malheureux. 
C'est un des enfans les mieux 

eleves. 
C'est un dei hommes les plus 

presomptueux. 
C'est une des demoiselles lei 

plus belles et les plus 

aimabies. 
J'ecris sur une matiere dei 

plus delicates, quoique des 

moins brillantes. 
Les politiques dissimulent. 
Les ambitieux sacririent tout ' 

a la fortune. 



* I make use, on purpose, of the six foregoing examples, to render 
the exception to the fifth observation mere obvious to the learner. The 
article immediately following un or une may be omitted, as in the last 
example; in this case the substantive is put in the singular; as C'est 
une ooutume ties glus barbares j lifarle d'un homme des }lut malheureux-* 

» 5 



m 

We ought, in learned works, 
to join profit with plea- 
sure. 

[6.] Coals are sold for a 
shilling a bushel. 

Eggs, have been sold for one 
pound a hundred ; that is 
more than four shilling a 
quarter of a hundred. 

Candles are sold for nine 
pence a pound. 

Butter is sold for ten pence 
a pound. 

This lace cost one guinea a 
yard. 

[7.] It is every body's cus- 
tom. 

Every body knows it. 

He tells the same story to 
every body. 

She speaks ill of all men. 

All men are not liars. 

All women are not proud. 

He slanders all women* 
He paid all the expenses. 
All fashions are not ridicu- 
lous. 
I learn every day. 
It is the report of the whole 

city. 
[8.] The inside of the house 

"is very fine. 
The outside of the church is 

majestic. 
The upper part is quite 

spoiled. 
[10.] My sister plays upon 
the guitar, and my bro- 
ther upon the violin. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



On doit, dans les ouvrages 
d'esprir, joindre /'utile a 
/'agreable. 
Le charbon se vend un 

schelling le boisseau. 
Les ceufs ont ete vendus une 
liv re sterling & cent; c'est 
plus de quatre schellings 
U quarteron. 
Les chandelles se vendent 

neuf sous la livre. 
Le beurre se vend dix sous 

la livre. 
Cette dentelle coute une 

guinee la verge. 
C'est la coutume de tout le 

monde. 
Tout le monde le sait. 
II raconte la meme histoire 

a tout le monde. 
Elle parle mal de tous les 

hommes. 
Tous les hommes ne sont 

pas menteurs. 
Toutes les femmes ne sont 

pas fieres. 
II medit de toutes les femmes. 
II pay a tous les depens. 
Toutes Us modes ne sont pas 

ridicules. 
J'apprends tous les jours. 
C'est le bruit de touie la 

ville. 
Le dedans de la maison est 

tres-beau. 
Le dehors de l'eglise est ma- 

jestueux. 
Le dessus est tout gate. 

Ma srrur joue de la guitare* 
et mon frere joue du vis- 
ion* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



He is a good player at bil- 
liards, at tennis, &c. 

We played yesterday at pi- 
quet. 

[i i.]. He has much money. 

I have ready^ot; books. 

She has matiy friends. 

You take a great deal of 
pains. 

They give themselves less 
trouble. 

He has spent too much mo- 
ney. 

[12.] I shall go to China 
next year. 

He is arrived at Mexico. 

He is come back from Ja- 
pan, from India, fr$m 
Florida, from Canada, &c. 

He lives at the Hague. 

[13.] Here are the two roses 
you gave me to day. 

Of the four seasons of the 
year, the summer pleases 
me more than the other 
three. 

I lost the two letters you 
wrote to me. 

[14.] I come from London, 
from Greenwich, from 
Chelsea, from Kensing- 
ton, &c. 

Athal'm is famous in sacred 
history, Merope in pro- 
fane history. 

Racine's Athalia and Vol- 
taire's Merope are drama- 
tic master-pieces. 



" *55 

C'est un bon joueur de bil- 
lard, de paume, &c. 

Nous jouames hier au pi- 
quet. 

II a lien de /'argent, ou 
heaucoup ^'argent. 

J*ai In feu du livres. 

Elle a heaucoup ^/'amis. 

Vous prenez heaucoup de 
peine. 

lis se donneot mows de 
peine. 

II a depense trap d*argent. 

J'irai a la Chine Parmee 

prochaine. 
11 est arrive au Mexique. 
11 est revenu du Japon, des 

Indes, de la Floride, du 

Canada, &c. 
II demeure _a la Haye. 
Voici les deux roses que vous 

m'avez donnees aujour- 

d'hui. 
Des quatre saisons de l'-aiu 

nee, l'ete me plait plus 

que les trois autres. 

J'ai perdu les deux lettres 
que vous m'avez ecrites. 

Je viens de Londres, de 
Greenwich, de Chelsea, 
de Kensington, &c. 

Athalie est fameuse dans 
l'histoire sacree, Merope 
dans l'histoire profane. 

V Athalie de Racine et la 
Merope de Voltaire sont 
des chefs.d'csuvre drama- 
tiques. 
h 6 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



156 

Milton's Paradise Lost is a 

fine poem. 
[15.] She received me kindly. 
He did it through spite. 
Speak to him without dis* 

da in. 
I haw e a mind to go thither. 
She received me with the 

greatest friendship. 
He did it through the hatred 

he had for her. 
She spoke to him with the 

contempt he deserved. 
He submitted to it with the 

greatest patience. 
[16.] He is in a furnished 

lodging. 
You will find it in the box. 

Is there any ink in the bot- 
tle ? 

Here is some in the ink- 
stand. 

[17.] Paris is the capital of 
France. 

He lives in Paris, the capital 
pf France. 

London is the capital of 
England.. 

He was born in London, the 
capital of England. 

George III, king of England 
and elector of Hanover, 
grandson to George II, 
has married the princess 
Charlotte, daughter to the 
prince of Mecklenburg- 
Streiitz. 

He is a merchant. 

He is a physician. 



Le Paradis perdu de Milton, 

est un beau poerre. 
Elle me re cut avec amitii. 
II le fit par depit. 
Parlez-lui sans dedain. 

J'ai envie d'y aller. 

Elle me recut avec la plus 

grande ami tie. 
II le fit par la haine ou'il 

avoit pour elle. 
Elle lui parla avec le mepris 

£#'il meritoit. 
II s'y soumit avec la plus 

grande patience. 
II est ioge en chambre gar- 

nie. 
Vous le trouverez dans la 

boite. 
Y a-t-il de l'encre dans la 

bouteille ? 
En voici dans /'ecritoire. 

Paris est la capitale de la 
France. 

II demeure a Paris, *ville ca- 
pitale de France. 

Londres est la capitale de 
PAngleterre. 

II est ne a Londres, <ville ca- 
pitale d'Angleterre. 

George trois, roi d' Angle- 
terre et electeur d'Hano- 
vre, pet it -fits de George 
second, a epouse la prin- 
cesse Charlotte, fills du 
prince de Mecklenbourg- 
Strelitz. 

II est marchand, ou e'est un 
marchand. 

II est medecin, ou cUst m 
iiicdecin t 



FRENCH TONGUE 



She is a milliner. 

He is the merchant whom 
you, look for. 

He is the physician whom 
you ask for. 

He is the most upright mer- 
chant. 

He is the most skilful phy- 
sician. 

She has more custom than 
any other milliner. 

[18.] Give me some bread, 
some meat, some wine, 
some beer, &c. 

Bring some salt, some pep- 
per, some mustard, &c. 

There is wine and water. 

Do you choose beer, or 
cider ? 

Eread and water are suffici- 
ent for him. 

You must lay this fruit in 
straw. 

Lend me some paper and 
ink. 

Have you thread or silk ? 

Mend my stockings with 

cotton. 
I spent my money in goods. 

This thread is like silk. 

He compares this stuiF to 
velvet. 

She will not trust such cor- 
rupted men. 

This cider is like wine. 

A f.ne discourse often dis- 
pleases ignorant people. 

Give me some apples, some 



Elle est coiffeuse, ou c'est 

une coiffeuse. 
II est le marchand que vous 

cherchez. 
II est le medecin que vous 

demandez. 
II est le marchand le plus 

integre. • 
U est le medecin le plus ex- 
pert. 
Elle est la coiffeuse la plus 

achalandee. 
Donnez-moi du pain, de la 

viande, du vin, d,e la 

biere, &c» 
Apportez du sel, du poivre, 

de la moutarde, &c. 
Voiia du vin et de /'eau. 
Souhaitez-vcus de la biere, 

ou du cidre ? 
Du pain et de / eau lui suffi- 

sent. 
II faut mettre ce fruit dans 

de la pa i lie. 
Pretez.moi du papier et de 

/'encre. 
Avez-vous du fil, ou de la 

soie ? 
Raccommodez mes bas avec 

du coton. 
J'ai employe mon argent a 

de la marchandise. 
Ce fil ressemble a de la soie. 
II compare cctte etoffe a du 

velours. 
Elle ne vent pas se fier a des 

hommes si corrompus. 
Ce cidre ressemble a du vin. 
Un beau discours deplait 

sou vent a d:s ignorans. 
Donnez.moi des pommes, 



u* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



pears, some oranges, some 

nuts, &c. 
[19.] There are very fine 

flowers. 
I have bought ^fine lace. 
To write well, we must make 

use of good paper, good 

ink, and good pens. 

Here are some fine ladies. 
There are some fine houses 

and fine streets in London. 
This lord has fine estates and 

fine gardens. 
This lady has a great estate. 

This writing-master makes 

fine letters. 
Frederic II. king of Prussia, 

took a particular delight 

in having tall soldiers. 

His brother applies himself 

to polite literature. 
I am acquainted with people 

of wit. 
I saw last week some great 

lords in the Park, 

[20.] A child ought to obey 
his father and mother. 

A king ought to be the fa* 
ther of his people. 

It is a thing unheard ofw 

It is an uncommon friend- 
ship. 

A prudent man ought to 
know how to keep a se- 
cret. 

The last two observations [21] and [22] have beeiv 
sufficiently exemplified in the foregoing examples. 



des poires, des oranges, 
des noix, &c. 
Voila de tres. belies fleurs. 

J'ai achete de belle dentelle. 
Pour bien ecrire, il faut se 

servir de bon papier, de 

bonne encre et de bonnes 

plumes. 
Voici de belles demoiselles. 
II y a de belles maisons et de 

belles rues dans Londres. 
Ce seigneur a de belles ter« 

res et de beaux jardins. 
Cette dame a de grands 

biens, 
Ce maitre a ecrire forme de 

belles lettres. 
Frederic second, roi de Prus- 

se, prenoit un plaisir par- 

ticulier a avoir de grands 

soldats. 
Son frere s'applique aux 

belles-lettres. 
Je connois des beaux-esprits. 

Je vis la semaine passee des 

grands-seigneurs dans le 

Pare. 
Un enfant doit obeir a son 

pere et a sa mere. 
Un roi doit etre le pere de 

son peuple., 
C'est une chdse inouie. 
C'est une rare amine. 

Un homme prudent, ou 
/'homme prudent doit sa- 
voir garde r un secret. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 159 



CHAP. II. 

-Rules and Observations upon Nouns. 

1. T^TTHEN two substantives come together in English 
* * with of before them, that preceded by of in 
English is put in the second case in French ; as, the top of 
the mountain ; le sommet de la montague. 

Sometimes of is omitted, and the substantive, which it 
would have preceded, is put before the other in what is 
called the genitive or possessive case, which is commonly 
denoted by 'm added to the word, when the latter of the 
two substantives must be the first case in French, and 
placed at the beginning ; as, my father's house; la maison 
de mon j>ere. Likewise in the English compound words r 
the first in English is commonly the second in French ;. as, 
a seaport ; un port de mer. 

2. Adjectives, have the same gender and number as 
their substantives ; as, a good book ; un bon lev re : a good 
pen ; une bonne plume : good books ; de bons litres : good 
pens ; de bonnes plumes. 

Except,— first, /*«, late, deceased, before the article or pronoun 5 nu % 
bare, before tete, pieds, jambes> Sec. 3 detnl, half, before its substan- 
tive.— Secondly, tout> followed by an article, or by an adjective, end- 
ing with an e mute in its masculine gender, before the word gem y 
which is feminine; as, all people of probity; tous les gens de probite'^ 
all honest people ; tous lei bonnctes gens. But if the word tout be either 
immediately followed by gens, or if gens be preceded by. an adjective, 
not ending with an e mute in its masculine, then the word tout follows 
the rule, and is put in the feminine *, as, all old people ; toutes les 
weilles gens; they are all persons whom I do esteem, ce sont toutes 
gens que je n'estime point." -Thirdly, adjectives following gens y as they 
are polite people ; cesont des gens polis. 

3. When two or more substantives of different genders, 
and not separated by a disjunctive, are the first case to the 
verb etre y the adjective, or participle, that follows, ought 
t® be in the masculine plural ; as the trunk, the closet, 
and the room, are open ; le cojfre, le cabinet, tt la chambre 9 
sont ouverts. 

f The French Academy^ 

7 



i6a A GRAMMAR OF THE , 

4. Two or more substantives of different genders, im- 
mediately followed by an adjective or ; articiple, require 
commonly, that the adjective or particple, should agree 
in gender and number with the last substanthe, as she 
found the trunk, the closet, and the room open ; elk trouva 
le cojfre, le cabinet, et la chambre^ ouverte. 

Except when an adjective, or a pa'rticiple past, implies 
,a union, or a collection; such as joint, uni, rami; as, 
the children, father, and mother united or joined toge- 
ther ; les enfansy le pere, et la mere reunis ou joints en- 
semble* 

5. Adjectives are put in French after their substan- 
tives. 

6. Some adjectives are put before their substantives ; 
as, beau, bon, grand, gros, jeune, maunjais, mechant, meilleur, 
petity <vieux. 

There are some adjectives which are to be placed sometimes before, 
and sometimes after their substantives. See page 23. 

7. Obs. Adjectives of number are placed before their 
substantives ; except when they are used in a title, or as a 
surname, without an article; as livre premier, chapitre 
second, section troisieme, Charles premier, Jacques second, 
George trois, 

8. Some adjectives govern the following noun in the 
second case, that is, require the preposition de before it : 
Such are adjectives signifying desire, kmnxledge, remem* 
brance, ignorance, ftr getting, care, fear, guilt, fulness, emp- 
tiness, fleniy, <want, Of. 

9. Some adjectives govern the following noun in the 
third case, that is, require the preposition a before it ; 
such are adjectives signifying submission, relation, pleasure 
or displeasure, due resistance, difficulty, likeness, inclination, 
aptness, fitness, advantage, profit, &c. 

10. Adjectives sign tying dimension, as, long, thick, 
high, deep, big, <wi(k, or broad, which come after the 
word of measure in English, come before it in French, 
and are followed by the prepositin de ; as, a window 
three feet broad; uue jhietre large de trcis pieds. Or, 
which is the more general practice, the adjective is turned 
into it's substantive, with the w ord of measure before it; 
in this case the word of measure, or dimension, ic pre- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



i5i 



ceded by the preposition de ; as, une fenetre de trois pieds 
de largeur. When in this construction the verb to be hap- 
pens to precede the word of measure or dimension, it is 
commonly changed into the verb avoir; and the preposition 
de s which is before the quantity of measure, is" left out ; 
as, une fenetre qui a trois pieds de largeur ; a window which 
is three feet broad. 

Rules and Observations upon Nouns, exemplified for ike 
Scholar's Practice. 



[i.] The love of life is. na- 
tural to men. 

The study of languages is 
very entertaining. 

Here is my father's house* 

I saw the king's horses. 

Have you not seen the king's 
palace ? 

The queen's apartments are 
very fine. 

It is my brother's book. 

She wears a straw hat with 
a silk ribbon. 

Is the chamber door shut ? 

We passed over London 
bridge to go to Green. 
wich. 

I bought a fine silver tan- 
kard. 

He is gone to his country- 
house. 

[2.] He spoke to her bare- 
headed. 

He goes barefooted, bare- 
legged. 

The late queen was an ac- 
complished woman, 



L'amour de la nrie est naturel 

aux hommes. 
L'etude" des langues est tres- 

amusante. 
Voici la ma i son de mo« p£re. 
J'ai vu les.chevaux du roi. 
N'avez-vous pas vu le palais 

du roi ? 
Les appartemens de la reine 

sont tres- beaux. 
C'est le livre de mon frere. 
Elle porte un chapeau de 

paille avec un ruban de soie, 
La porte de la chambre est- 

elle fermee ? 
Nous passames sur le pont 

de LondreSy pour aller a 

Greenwich. 
J'ai achete un beau pot 

d J 'argent. 
II est alle a sa maison de 

ca mpagne* 
II lui parla ##-tete, ou tete 

nue. 
II va nu pieds, ##-jambes, 

ou il va les pieds nus> les 

jambes nues. 
Feu la reine, ou la feue 

reine, etoit une femme 

accomplie* 



i6z 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



1 shall go out in half an 
hour. 

It is half an hour past one. 

All people of honour. 

It is the opinion of all peo- 
ple of probity. 

All honest people have 
blamed him. 

Almost all young people 
like play. 

All sorts of people do for 
him. 

All old people disapproved 
of it. 

He withdrew from all the 
bad people of his neigh- 
bourhood. 

They are polite people* 

They are prudent people. 

You must not trust indiscreet 
people. 

[3,] Our maid and man ser- 
vant are very diligent. 

His brother and cousin are 
very idle. 

The window and the door 
are open. 

My father and mother a?e 
sick. 

My brother and sister have 
caught cold. 

[4.] Her eyes, mouth, and 
neck are very pretty. 

She sings with a charming 
and delicate air. 

Why do you leave the win- 
dows and the door open? 

He had his eyes and mouth 
open. 

Her body and mind are well 
framed. 

He found beauty, youth, 



Je sortirai dans une demi* 

hen re. 
II est une heure et demie. 
Tous les gens d'honneur. 
C'est l'opinion de tous les 

gens de probite. 
Tous les honnetes gens l'ont 

blame. 
Presque tous les jeunes gens 

aiment le jeu. 
Us s'accommode de toutes 

sortes de gen's. 
Toutes les vielles gens Pont 

desapprouve. 
II se retira de tontes les mau- 

vaises gens de son voisi- 

nage. 
Ce sont des gens polif. 
Ce sont des gens prudens. 
II ne faut pas vous her a des 

gens in disc rets. 
Notre servante et notre va- 
let sont ti es-diligens. 
Son frere et s«n cousin sont 

trcs-paresseux. 
La fenetre et la porte sont 

owvertes. 
Mon pere et ma mere sont 

malades. 
Mon frere et ma sceur sont 

enrhumes. 
Elle a les yeux, la bouche, 

et la gorge tres- belle. 
Elle chante avec un gout et 

une dclicatesse charmante. 
Pourquoi laisscuvous les fe- 

netres et la porte Qnwrie.t 
II avoit les yeux et la bouche 

owvertc. 
Elle a le corps et Tesprit bien 

fait. 
11 trouva la beaute, la jeu- 



FRENCH 

riches, wisdom, and even 
virtue united in her per- 
son. 
It is~ exceedingly hot and 
foggy. in that country. 

The children, father, and 
mother united. 

Health, honours, and for. 
tune, joined together, are 
not able to satisfy the 
heart of man. 

[5.] I have a green snuffbox. 

The English tongue is co- 
pious, strong, and harmo- 
nious. 

The French tongue is very 
smooth. 

She is a handsome, rich, and 
virtuous woman. 

Give me a clean shirt, 

A black hat, a green suit, 
white stockings, red shoes. 

There is a very fine coach. 

He follows the English fa- 
shion. 

Sing an Italian air. 

People enjoy pure air in 
France. 

Jft liy do not you wear your 
black stockings ? 

She is a charming woman. 

She reprimanded him se- 
verely. 

[6.] He is a naughty boy. 
Bad weather is tiresome to 



TONGUE. 163 

nesse, les richesses, la 

sagesse, et meme la vertu 

reunies dans sa personne. 
11 fait dans ce pays- la des 

chaleurs et des brouillards 

excessifs. 
Les enfans, le pere et la 

mere reunis. 
La same, les honneurs, et la 

fortune, joints ensemble, 

ne peuvent satisfaire le 

eceur de rhomme. 
J'ai une tabatiere verte. 
La langue Anghhe est - 
- abondante, forte et har- 

monieuse. 
La langue Francoise est tres. 

douce. 
C'est une femme belle, riche y 

et vertueuse. 
Donnez-moi une chemise 

blanche* 
Un chapeau noir, un habit 

vert, des bas blancs, des 

souliers rouges. 
Voila un carr osse magnifique* 
II suit la mode Angloise. 

Chantez un air I tali en. 

On jouit d'un air pur en 

France. 
Pourquoi ne portez-vous pas 

vos bas noirs ? 
C'est une femme charmante. 
C'est une charmante femme. 
Elle lui a fait de sevens re- 

primandes, ou des lepri* 

mandes se'veres. 
C'est un mechant ga r con. 
Le mauvais temps Hi 'en* 

nuic. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



564 

He dwells in a large house. 

London is a fine city. 

He is a man of distinguished 
merit. 

He is a tall fair man. 

[7.] The first man was the 
first sinner. 

George III, king of Eng- 
land, and Lewis XVI, 
king of France. 

[8.] I am contented with 
my condition. 

It is a praiseworthy action. 

He is unworthy of your 

friendship. 
She is incapable of a lie. 

Few people are satisfied with 
their fortune. 

I am free from fear and 
danger. 

I was overjoyed at that 
news. 

Sine is not contented with 
her maid. 

He is discontented with his 
wife. 

He is accused of murder. 

He was loaded with praises. 

They «re greedy of glory 
and riches. 

I am tired of your dis- 
courses. 

They are enraged at his suc- 
cess. 

He is deep in debt. 

[9.] That is good for some- 
thing. 

It is a fruit hurtful to 
health. 



11 demeure dans une grande 

maison. 
Londres est une belle ville. 
C'est un homme d'un grand 

merite. 
C'est un^rWhorame blond, 
Le premier homme fut le 

premier pecheur. 
George Trots, roi d'Angle- 

terre, et Louis Seize, r©i 

de France. 
Je suis content de ma condi- 
tion. 
C'est une action digne de 

louanges. 
II est indigne de votre amu 

tie. 
Elle est incapable de men- 

songe. 
Peu de gens sont contens de 

leur fortune. 
Je suis exempt de crainte et 

de danger.. 
Je fus ravi de cette nouvelle. 

Elle n'est pas contente de sa 

servante. 
II est mecontent de sa femme. 

11 est accuse de meurtre. 
II fut comble de louanges. 
II sont avides de gloire et 

de richesses. 
Je suis las de vos discourse 

11 sont enrages, de son suc- 
cess. 
II est charge de dettes. 
Cela est bon a quelque chose. 

C'cst un fruit nuisible a la 
sante. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



!<S< 



He is too much addicted to 

study. 
She is unfit for any cbing. . 
You are i sensible to all the 

remonstrances of your 

friends. 
He is fit for any thing. 
She is not to be compared 

<witb you. 
That is conformable to truth. 

Yours is : like mine. 

I am ready for your orders. 
I am very sensible of co\&. 
That cloth is like yours. 
[ roj A carpet six yards long 
and two wide. 



Our house is fourscore yards 
high, and the foundation 
is four yards deep. 

This lawn is a yard wide. 

A wall two feet thick* 

A street twenty yards wide. 



Our garden is a hundred feet 

long. 
That river is forty feet deep. 

A well forty £a:t deep. 

There are fine walks in St. 
James's Park \ they arc 



II est trop adonne a l'etude. 

Elle n'est propre a rien. 
Vous etes insensible a toutes 

les remontrances de vos 

amis. 
II est propre a tout. 
Elle n'est pas comparable a 

vous. 
Cela est conforme a la ve- 

rite. 
Le votre est semblable an 

mien. 
Je suis pret a vos ordres. 
Je suis tres-sensible au froid. 
Ce drap est pareil au votre. 
Un tapis long de six verges, 

et large de deux ; ou un 

tapis de six verges de lon- 
gueur y et de xieux de lar~ 

geur. 
Notre maison a quarante 

toises de hauteur, et les 

fondemens out deux toises 

de profondeur. 
Ce linon a une verge de 

largeur. 
Une muraille epaisse de deux 

pieds, ou une muraille de 

deux pieds </'epatsseur. 
Une rue large de dix toises, 

cu une rue de dix toises 

de largeur. 
Notre jardin a cent pieds de 

longueur. 
Cette riviere a quarante 

pieds de profondeur. 
Un puits de quarante pieds 

de profondeur. 
II y a de belles allees dans 

le Pare de St. James \ 



X 66 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

at least eight hundred elles out au moins quatre 
yards long. cens toises de longueur. 

Have you ever seen a man Avez-vous jamais vu un 
eight feet high ? homme de huit pieds de 

hauteur ? 
A book two inches thick. Un livre de deux poutes 

</'epaisseuF« 



CHAP. IIL 

Rules and Observations upon Pronouns. 

SECTION I. 

Personal Pronouns. 

i, A GOVERNING personal pronoun, in the firft 
-"- case, must always be put before a verb which 

has no other noun, or prtnoun, for the first case ; as, / 

speak y je parte, &c. 

Except the second person singular, and the first and 

second person plural of the imperative mood, which are 

used without a pronoun personal. 

2. Obs. There are some places where the pronoun personal is put 
after the verb; as when it is joined with either of the seven follow- 
ing: dire, to say j repordre, to answer; repliquer y to reply; repartir, 
to answer again j continucr, to continue 5 poursuivre, to pursue; and - 
s*ecrier, to cry out \ and forms with it a distinct member of the sen- 
tence 5 as, Ihave none, answered he ^ je n"en ax point, repondit-il. 

3. Obs. The personal pronoun must be put after the verb in these 
phrases, dussicz vous, though you should ; fussiex-vous, though you 
were; puhsie%, or pun,it%-'vous, may you; and in any of those expres- 
sions which form what grammarians call the optative mood* as, though 
you were rich, fussier -vous riche; though you should write to him, 
dusswz~<vous lui tcrire; may you see him in good health, pumieiz-'vous 
le vcir en borne sante. 

4. Obs. Tt is more elegant to put the personal pronoun, even fol« 
lowed by que, signifying that, after the vero preceded by one of these 
conjunctions: aussi, but then j ptut-etre, perhaps; du moins, au moins y 
at least; en vain, in vain; a print, scarcely, &c. : as, but then he re- 
ceived his reward, aussi rec-ut-il sa recompense. 



TRENCH TONGUE. 1S7 

5. In an interrogation, either affirmative or. negative, 
the personal pronoun is always put after the verb in 
simple tenses: as, do you eat? mangez-vous ? do you 
not write? n'ecrivez-vous pas? In compound tenses it 
is put immediately after the auxiliary, either in an affirma- 
tive or negative question : as, have you eaten ? a-vez-wus 
mange? have you not written? n'a<vez->vous pas ecrit ? 

6. Oas. When, in ah interrogation, we make use of a verb ending 
with an e mute, we put an acute accent upon the last e of the verb, be- 
fore the pronoun je } as, do I speak ? parle-j* f and not farh-je? do 
\ offer? offre-j*. 

However, in this instance, I would advise to make use of the easy 
way of asking a question by these w®rds, est-a que, as it must be done 
for some other verbs; as, do I sleep? «/-ce que je don? In this case 
the pronoun is put before the verb. 

j. When a verb, interrogatively used, ends in the third 
person singular with a vowel, we always put a t between 
the verb and the pronouns //, e/Ie 3 as in the following ex* 
arnples : does he eat? mange-i-il? has she eaten ? a-Uelle~ 
mange ? 

8. Obs. What we have said in the second rule must be ,said like- 
wise, when after those verbs comes another noun instead of a pro- 
noun ; as, all men are fools, says Boiieau, tout les hommes lont fous, dit 
Boileau. 

Likewise after these pronouns, te y que, k, ce que y it is sometimes 
mere elegant to put the noun after the verb j as, at first a large parlour 
presented itself before our eyes ; d'a-bord se present a de-vant nous un 
grand salon. What reason dictates, is not always true; ce que dicte la 
raison, n'est pat toujour* vrai. It is thus the parliament would Jiave 
it j Cest ains'i que le <voulut le parlement. 

9, A governing personal pronoun is superfluous when 
any noun whatever is the first case to a verb: as 
George III is a good king; Gesrge III est un ban rot. 
But in an interrogation, beside the noun, we put the pro- 
noun after the vorb : as, does your brother w.ijitc ? wtre 
frere icrit-il? 

Except when in asking a question we make use of 
this idiom, est-ce que ; in this case the pronoun is left 
out, as in the foregoing example; est.ee que uotre frere 
icrit? 



i68 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

10. Personal pronouns of the first and second person 
plural are commonly put before the verb, if the verb 
have for it's nominative several personal pronouns, or 
only one personal pronoun, in the first or second person 
of either number, joined with one or more nouns : as, you 
and I are idle; <vous et mot nous sommes paresseux : 
your brother and I were present, <votre frere et moi nous 
e'tions presens. <% 

Except a noun substantive is joined with lui or elle, 
when the personal pronoun is left out, and the verb is 
put in the third person plural : as, your brother and he 
are idle, <votre frere et lui sont paresseux. 

1 1 . Governed personal pronouns are put before the 
verb in French, though after it in English ; as, he told 
me; it me ait. Foreigners should attend to this r«le, 
against which they are very apt to offend. 

Except, ist, in the second person singular, and first, 
and second persons plural of the imperative: as, tell me, 
difes-moi . . . Observe, that me is always put instead 
of moi, when it comes before the verb, unless it be se- 
parated from the verb by a conjunction : as, it is to me 
he gives it; e'est a moi qu'il le donne: 2dly, after the 
verb etre, when it signifies to belong to, and after the 
verb se fier, to trust, or rely on : as, you rely on me, 
<vous vous fez a moi : this house belongs to me ; cette 
maison est a moi : 3dly, after the verbs singer, penser, 
parler, when the last signifies to direct our discourse to, 
and a very few others. 

12. The supplying pronouns le, la, and les, are always 
put before the verbs by which they are governed, and 
are placed before lui and leur ; as, you give them to him ; 
'vous les lui donnex: whereas they are put after the other 
personal pronouns ; as, I give it to you; je vous le donne ; 
except in the imperative mood in affirmative sentences ; 
as, give it me'; donuexAcmoi. 

i}. The supplying pronouns en and y are also placed 
before the verb, and are put after all other personal pro. 
nouns, and en after y ; as, I have sent some to them thither; 
je lent y en <ti envoys* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 169 

Bacept whenjj and moi meet together in the seeand persoa of the 
imperative mood affirmatively used, y is put before &?i \ as, carry me 
thither j menev-y-moi. 

N. B. The last three observations, with their exceptions, are fully 
exemplified in their proper places, and in the supplying pronouns. 

14. //, which some wrongly call a personal pronoun in the follow- 
ing examples, is commonly used before the verb etre followed by an 
adjective, where the word thing is understood j as, it is glorious to die 
for our country ; il est glor'ieux de mourir pour sa patrie. If the 
adjective make a complete sense, ce is commonly used : as, it is true j 
e'est vrai. 

7/ is likewise used when we speak of the time and hour: as, it 
is eleven o'clock; il est on%e bcures\ it is bad weather} il fait mawvais 
tempi. 

Except, when a question is asked with ce\ as, quelle beure est-ce la ? 
the answer is, cest une beure. Ce is commonly used in the beginning of 
a sentence before a substantive : as, it is a pity; c*est dommage. 

ic. //, elle, singular, or ils, elles> plural, and ce, are 
indiscriminately u^ed ; 1st, before substantives expressing 
the sex, quality, profession, or trade of a person ; asj he 
is a merchant ; il est marchandy or e'est uu march and : 
2diy, before names of nations : as, they are Frenchmen ; 
its sont Francois, or ce sont des Francois. Observe, that in the 
two foregoing instances, no article is put before the sub- 
stantive after the personal pronounsyV, tu y il, Sec. 

16. Personal pronouns, whether conjunctive or dis. 
junctive, in their oblique cases, are always to be repeated; 
as, I say and declare to yon, je wous dis, et worn declare ; 
take the books, and read them; prenez, let Irvres, et la 
liscZf or /iscz-les. 

17. Personal pronouns are repeated before each verb: 
1st, when they are followed by verbs, in different tenses : 
as, I say, and shall always say ; je dis } et je dirai toujour; ; 
zdly, when we pass from a negation to an affirmation, 
or from an affirmation to a negation : 3cUy, after the con- 
junctions mat's, meme, cependant, neanmoins, nonobstant^ 
malgre tout cela, anssi, ai/si, on, &c. But when the 
personal p.onouns belong to the same ten e and person, 
they are commonly not repeated ; as, 1 say and declare ; 

je dis et declare. Observe here, that the pronoun on is 
always repeated : as, people speak and act ; on farle e^ 
on agit. 

I 



3 70 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

18. The pronouns \ui % eitx, elle, elles, arte used at the 
^nd of a sentence, only when we are speaking of persons ; 
as, is it your brother? // is; Est-ce votrefrere? C'tst 
lui. When we are speaking of inanimate things, we make 
use of the pronouns /<?, la, les: as, is it your hat? Yes, 
it is* Est-ce la votre chapeau ? Oui, ce I'cst, and not c'at 
lui*. 

19. Obs. The foregoing pronouns lui, eux, elle, leur, when we are 
speaking of inanimate things, are sometimes used in the middle of a 
•entence t, sometimes not ; but there is no other rule for this than 
custom, so that it can be learned only by use : for, speaking of a sword, 
1 may say, je lui deh la vie? I am indebted to it for my life ; and yet 
we must say, speaking of the same sward, attache%-y ce tueud, hang 
that swordknot to it; not attach^x-lm. 

20. //, ih\ elle, elles, in the beginning of a sentence, 
are used, speaking even of inanimate things; as, when 
speaking of a house, I say, elle est belle. 

21. Lui, leur, elle. Sec*, governed by a preposition, 
are never used, speaking of irrational and inanimate 
things : as, you see that house, he lives over against it ; 
njQus wqyez ceite maisotiy il demeure c vis.a~ e vh } and not 
wis-a-vis d 3 elle. 

In this case the prepositions become adverbs. But observe, that 
some prepositions never, or very seldom, become adverbs : as, «<vec, 
with} sans, without, Sec. ; therefore, in such cases, give another turn 
to the sentence : as, I cannot do without it, je tie pun pi* en passer 5 he 
tame with it, il l\i apportf. 

It may be observed, that aprh and avec are sometimes followed by 
hi, eux, elle, or tlltii as, when the river overflows, it carries every 
thing away with it; lorsqut ceite riviere se delorde, tilt ehimme tout 
avec elle: but as such sentences are a> good without avec elle, or apt A 
tile, as with, and it very often happens, that we cannot make u-e of 
these expressions; it is 'best to avoid them by omit tin's them abso- 
lutely, as in the toregoing example, where, hrique cette riven se 
de'borde, elle eritrdtne tout, is as ^ood Fiench without avec die, as if these 
words were aude?]. 

22. Ops. Lt'i, elle, and soi, at the end of a sentence, are not to be 
used indifferently. Soi is very seldom used'in the plural. When 
we speak of things in the masculine gender, soi is used j as, the loal- 

* See the third observation upon supplying pronouns, and the exam- 
ples thereon. Section VI, N« 3. 

-r When things Jtre personified : as, gh ", 'victory, virtue, &c. ; or 
when we make use of personal phrases, .. „•. phrases which are applied 
onlv to persons, Restaut, 

7 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



i?t 



Stone attracts iroa : Va'unant attire le fer a soi. EUe-msme may be mel 
in tl*e feminine} as, virtue is lovely in itself: la vertu est almable eo 
eiie-mcme. 

Speaking of persons in general, soi is to be used : as, a man ought 
not to speak ofrbimself but with great modesty; on ne dolt -parley de soi, 
quavec beaucoiip de modestie. When we speak of a particular person, 
lui or elle is used instead of soi: as, that man speaks of nobody but 
himself: cet bomme ne park que de lui. 

N. B. Meme is often elegantly put after lui, elle, eux, soi, &c. ; sn£ 
must be put after them, when they follow a reflected verb. 

Personal Pronouns exemplified fir the Scholar* t 
Practice. 

£i.] / am learning my les- ^J'apprends ma lecoa. 
son. 



He is writing his theme* 

She is embroidering. 

We have a holiday. 

Veu are lazy, 

They make a noise. 

jl/y mother is in the country. 

She is g©ne out. 

[l.j I have none, said he. 

t had not seen it, answered 7. 

But she replied , why do you 
concern yourself about 
it? 

,[3.] Though you should 
blame me. 

Though you were still more 
surprised* ' 

[4.] Perhaps he will say, 
that he found it. 

{5.] Have you learnt your 
lesson ? 

£6.] / scarcely begin to 
perceive it. 

But then I do not suffer my- 
self to be insulted. 

Do / tell a lie ? 

{7. J Has he not been angry 
wiih mc ? 



77 ecrit son theme. * 

, Elle brode. 
Nous avons conge. 
Fous etes paresseux. 
lis font du bruit t 
Ma mere est a la campagne* 
Elle est sortie. 
Je n'en a point, dit-//. . ~ 
je ne l'avois pas vu, repoti- 

dis-/V. 
lVJais, repliqua-tW/p, de quel 

vous melez-vous? 

Dussiez.s/<?fcj me blamer. 

Fussiez-iw/x encore plus 

surpris. 
Pevt-etre dira Uil qu'il l'a 

trouve. 
Avez-vous appris votre le- 

con ? 
A peine commence./* a m'eflt 

apercevoir. 
Aussi ne soufFre je pas q Von 

m'insulte. 
'Est ce que je mens ? 
N'a-/-// pas etc fachc coatee 

moi ? 



1 t 



\~,z 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Has she not been in the 

country ? 
Does she embroider ? 
[8.] Love your neighbour 

like yourself, says the 

Gospeh 
So the law of God re- 
quires. 
[9.] Is your sister at home? 
Does your brother improve 

in the French tongue ? 
Is yonr sister sick ? 
[10.] You and I are good 

friends. 
She and I went together to 

the Park. 
My brother and I go to the 

play this evening. 
He and my brother are part- 
ners. 
She and her sister learn 

French, 
fn.] She told me> that she 

had written to him. 
Do not fall violently upon 

them. 
I gave him the bcok which 

you sent me. 
I shall tell him. 
Have you promised him P 
I have not promised -her. 
When will you send to him? 
Give me. 
Bring me. 
Torgive him. 
Speak to her. 
He has promised it tQ me. 
Do not confide in him. 
You may confide in me. 
This book is mine. 
This thimble is not jours. 



N'a t-elle pas ete a la cam- 

pagne ? 
Br ode-/-*//*.* 
Aimez votre prcchain comme 

vous-meme, dit l'e'<van- 

gile. 
Ainsi le veut la hi de Dieu# 

Votre sceur est-*//* au logis ? 

Votre frere fait.// des pro- 
gres dans le Francois ? 

Votre soeur e&t-elle malade ? 

Vous et moi nous sommes 
bons amis. 

Elle et moi nous allames en- 
semble au Pare. 

Mon frere et moi nous allons 
ce soir a la comedie. 

Lui et mon frere sont asso- 
cies. 

Elle et sa sceur apprennent 
le Francois. 

Elle m'z dit qu'elle lui avoit 
ecrit. 

Ne hur faites pas de vio- 
lence. 

Je lui ai donne le livre que 
vous w'avez envoye. 

Je lui dirai. 

Lui avez-vous promis. 

Je ne lui ai pas promis. 

Quand lui enverrez-vous ? 

Donnez- moi. 

Apportez-we/. 

Pardonnez-/#/. 

Parlez./*/, 

C'cst a moi qu'il Pa promis. 

Ne vous fiez pas A lui. 

Vous pouvez vous fier a moi. 

Ce livre est a ?noi. 

Ce de n'esrt pas a <vous. 



Do not think of him any 

more. 
I am speaking to him y and 

not to you. 
You gave it to me. 
[12.I Will you give it to 

him ? 
There are fine oranges ; will 

you sell them to her ? 
Show me your letter ; when 

will you send it to her? 

There is a fine book ; I gave 

it to her. 
When will you give it to 

us? 
You had promised it to me. 
Give // to him. 
Bring it to me. 
Show it to her._ 
[13.] Will you carry some 

to them thither? 
I have sent seme to them 

thither. 
I shall send some to you 

thither. 
When did you send some to 

him thither? 
Why have you not carried 

some to her thither? 
Carry me thither. 
Give me some. 
Do not carry me thither. 
[14.] What o'clock is it? 
It is two o'clock. 
// is a quarter after two. 
// is half an hour after two. 
// is three quarters after two. 

// is very fine weather. 

// is gloomy. 

// is rainy weather. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 173 

Ne songez plus a lui. 

Je park a hi, et non pas <r 



<VGUS. 

Vous me /'avez donne. 
Le lui donnerez-vous I 

Voila de belles orangfes 5 lei 
lui vendrez-vous ? 

Montrez-wa* votre lettre ; 
quand la lui enverrez- 
vous ? 

Voila un beau Hvre; je U 
lui ai donne. 

Quand nous le donnerez- 
vous ? 

Vous me 7'aviez promis. 

D on nez -/?-/#/', 

Apportez-/«-7W. 

Montrez -&-/#/. 

Leurj en ponerez^vous Y' 

Je leur y en ai envoy e. 
Je <vousy en enverrai. 

Quaod lui y en avez-vous 
envoye ? 

Pourquoi ne lui y en avez- 
vous pas porte ? 

Menez-y-OTo/. 

Donnez-^zV;/. 

Ne m'y menez pas. 

Quelle heure est-;//* 

J I est deux heures. 

//est deux heures et un quart. 

11 est deux heures et demie. 

//est trois heures moins un 
quart. 

// fait fort beau temps. 

// fait sombre. 

// fait un iemps pluvieux. 
1 3 



'7+ 

// is time to rise. 
// is hot ; // is cold. 
// is my book. 
// is my handkerchief, 
// is a fine house. 
They are your pens. 
They are young ladies. 

It is a pity. 

They are strange people. 

It is enough. 

It is not too much.. 

It was without design, 

// is in spite of him. 

[15.] He is a doctor* 

He is a goldsmith. 

He is a learned man. 

They are idle. 

He is a merchant. 

They are Englishmen, 
Frenchmen. 

[16.] He loves me, and has 
a regard for me. 

I have taken it, and kept 1/. 

I know her, and see her very 
often. 

He esteems and honours you, 

I saw and spoke to her. 

[17.] They say and affirm 
that . . . 

Yon have seen and will al- 
ways see. 

He made his theme ; but he 
did not read his rules. 

She speaks to him, though 
she does not like him. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



//est temps de se lever. 

II fait chaud ; it fait froid. 

Coil -mon livre. 

C'est mon mouchoir. 

C'est une belle ma i son. 

Ce sont vos plumes. 

Ce sont de jeunes demoU 

selles. 
C'est doirrmage. 
Ce sont d'fct ranges gens. 
C'est assez. 
Ce n'est pas trop, 
C<? fut sans dessein. 
C'est malgre lui.. 
// est docteur, ou rest un 

docteur. 
// est orfevre, ou c'est un 

orfevre. 
II est savant, ou c'est un sa- 
vant horn me, 
lis sont paresseux, ou ce sont 

des paresseux. 
II est negociant, ou c'est un 

negociant. 
lis sont Anglois, Francois, 

ou ce sont des Anglois, 

des Francois. 
II ftr'aime, et me considere. 

Je /'ai pris, et /'ai garde. 
Je la connois, et la vois tics- 

souvent. 
II <v6us estime et 'vans honore* 
Je /'ai vue et lui ai parte* 
On dit et oh assure qr.e . . . 

Vous avcz vu et vons verrcz 

toujours. 
II a fait son theme: vmis il 

n'a pas lu scs regies. 
Elle lui parle, cc pendant <U» 
nc l'aimc pas. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



[ i&] Is it your sister ? Yes, 
it is. 

Are they your books? They 
are. 

[ 19.}^ Self-love blinds us-; 
it is the cause of the 
greatest part of our mis- 
fortunes,. 

Those flowers want wat^rf 
give them some* 

My coat has a hole, put s 
patch on it. 

[20.} I saw a fine garden ; 
/'/ is enamelled with a 
thousand fine flowers. 

These shoes are too narrow ; 
they hurt me. 

[21. j Do you know where 
the Exchange is ? He lives 
opposite to H 9 

Give me my book; I can- 
not do without //. 

[22.] A wise man is master 
of himself. 

V/e make our own happi- 
ness. 

A wise man mistrusts hint* 
self. 

She is too much conceited 
of herself. 

We ought not to flatter <wr- 
sdvis. 

He loves only himself \ 

Falsehood is odious in itself. 

The loadstone attracts iron. 
A man ought not to speak 

of himsdfbut with great 

modesty. 
That man speaks of nobody 

but himself. 



*7i 

Est-ce voire' sceur ? Oui, 

e'est elle. 
Sout-ce ves livres ? ce let 

sonr.- 
L'amour propre nous aveu : - 

g\e ; e'est lui qui est la 

cause de la plupatt de . 

nos raalheurs. 
Voila des fleurs qui ont be- 
som d'eau ; donnez-/*7/r- 

en. 
Mon habit est troue, cousez- 

y une piece. 
J'ai vu un beau jardin ; r/ 

est emaille de mille belles 

fleurs. 
Ces souliers sont trop etroits ; 

its me blessent. 
Savez-vous ou est la Bourse ? 

II demeure vis-a-vis. 

Donnez-moi mon livre ; je 

ne puis vcCen passer. 
Le sage est maitre de sol. 

On fait sa felicite soi-meme.- 

Le sage se'mefie de lur- 

meme. 
Eile a trop bonne opinion 

A* clle me me. 
On ne doit pas se flatter sou 

me me. 
II n'aime que lui me me. 
La faussetc est odieuse en 

elle-meme. 
L'aimant auire le fer a soi. 
On ne doit parler de soi 

qu'avec beaucoup de mo- 

destie. 
Cet homme ne parle que de 

lui- mi 'me \ 
4 



i7<5 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

I will do it myself. Je 1c veuji faire moi.meme* 

She relies too much on her- Elle se fie trap a elle-mcme. 

self. 

They betray themselves. J Is se trahisSent eux-memes* 

You hurt nobody but jw/r- Vousne faites tort <j*'a<dffi* 

■f^ meme* 

SECTION II. 

Possessive Promuns 4 

i. The conjunctive possessive pronouns come always 
belbre the nouns to which they are joined : as, it is my 
snuff-box ; e'est ma tabatitre. In this case, mon t ton, son, 
are used instead of ma, ta, sa, before feminine nouns 
beginning with a vowel or h mute, for the sweetness of 
sound: as, my sword; mon epeei thy soul; ton dme: 
his friendship ; son am tie. Absolute possessive pronouns 
are put after the noun with the definite article, U t la, ks ; 
as, le mien, la mknne. 

2. When sake signifies amour in French, the English 
possessive pronoun is to be rendered in French by the 
disjunctive personal pronoun : as, for your sake ; pour 
I* amour de vous, and not four voire amour. 

3. When the verb etre signifies to belong to> the Eng- 
lish possessive pronoun is rendered in French by the 
disjunctive personal pronoun : as, that house is mini; cette 
waison est a ffitoi, and not est la mienne. But, when the 
particle ce is joined to the verb etrc> the possessive pro- 
noun is commonly used; as, this is my house ; e'est ma 
maison: it is his book, and not yours; e'est son li<vre y et 
mon fas le voire. 

4. The gender of possessive pronouns does not follow 
that of the person who speaks, or is spoken of, but agrees 
with the particular gender of ev^ery noun it is joined to : 
as, her father is dead ; son pere est mort. 

5. The possessive conjunctive pronoun is always re. 
peated before a substantive, and after a conjunction; as, 
my brothers and sisters; mes frerrs et mes saeurs : his 
father and mother ; son pere et sa mere. 

6. Le mien, It ticn , le sien> &c. in the masculine gen- 
der and singular number, sometimes signify a person's 



FRENCH TONGUE. 1-77. 

due: as, we must give every one his due; il faut rendre 
a chacun le sien. In the plural number and masculine gen- 
der they sometimes signify relations : as, your relations 
and his ; les <votres et les siens. 

7. His, it's j their 9 &c, are commonly rendered in 
French, by son, sa, ses y leurs: as, plants have their pro- 
perties : les plantes out leurs proprietes. But when it's 
or their belongs to a substantive preceding, it is com- 
monly rendered in French by the supplying pronoun en : 
as, these plants are good, I know their qualities ; ces 
plantes sont bonnes, j'en connois les qualites. This happens 
when the pronouns may be resolved into the substantive 
to which it relates, as in the foregoing example : these 
plants are good, I know the qualities of these plants. 

8. The conjunctive possessive pronoun, with the par- 
ticle de before it, is used instead of the absolute possessive 
pronoun on all such occasions as the following : an ac- 
quaintance_of his : une de ses conttoissances : a friend of 
mine ; un de mes amis. 

9. The conjunctive possessive pronoun is used when we 
call or answer friends, relations, &c. ; as, come, daughter, 
Vimx, ma fill ei yes brother; oui, moufrere. 

IG. Obs. Conjunctive possessive pronouns, coming, in English, 
afrer some verbs not signifying a distemper, are resolved into the con- 
junctive personal pronoun; and, instead of the possessive pronoun, 
we put the definite article; as, I have pared my nails: je me suh 
rigne\t$ ong/es : he has cut my hair; il nCa coupe les cbeveux. 

II. Obs. Generally, when in a sentence a noun or a personal pro* 
noun iufficiently denotes what- thing it is you are speaking of, the pos- 
sessive pronoun is omitted as useless, and resolved i to the definite 
article : ai, I have a pain in my teeth, in my stomach, in my head, in 
my eyes, &c. ; 'fa\ mal aux der.ts> a Veaomac, a la tete, zuxyeux, (&c* 
However, when a pain or distemper continues for some time upon 
us,^ we may say, speaking to a person acquainted with it, mzjambc rfs 
guentpas; my legs does not heal: ma toux me fatigue beaucoup \ my 
cough teases me very much. This may likewise happen in a few 
other instances. Generally, the last two rules tak? place, when there- 
is- a sort of equivocation or amphibology. 



i7« 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Possessive Pronouns exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice. 



[i.] My house is larger than 
his. 

Have you seen my garden ? 

Come and see my flowers. 

Where is your book ? 

Show me your books. 

Lend me your penknife. 

Our school-fellows are play- 
ing in the street. 

Her apron is quite black. 

Her fail is broken. 

Give me my shoes, my stock- 
ings, my handkerchief, my 
shirt, and my hat. 

Your stockings have holes 
in them. 

What is become of his pens ? 

How does your sister do ? 

You hare my needle. 

Is that your hat ? 

1 know your sentiments; 
and you are no stranger 
to mine. 

The Thames got out of it's 
channel. 

[2.] Do it for my sake. 

1 will do it for your sake. 

For her sake. 
For his sake. 
[ 3.] This pen is not yours ; 

it is mine. 
Whose book is this ? It is 

not mine; it is his, or 

bers. 
**t is jour knifc, and not his. 



Ma maison est plus grande 

que la sienne* 
Avez-vous vu mon jardin ? 
Venez voir mes fleurs. 
Ou est <votre livre ? 
Mont rez* moi <vos livres. 
Pretez-moi <votre canif. 
Aw compagnons d'ecole 

jouent dans la rue. 
Son tablier est tout noir. 
Son eventail est rompu. 
Donnez-moi mes souliers, 

mts bas, mon mouchoir, ma 

chemise, et mon chapeau. 
Fes bas sont troues. 

Que son tde venues ses plumes? 
Comment se porte <vctre soeur ? 
Vous avez mon aiguille. 
'Est-ce la ruotre chapeau ? 
Je connois <vos sentknens ; 

et vous n'ignorez pas les 

miens. 
La Tamise est sortie de torn 

lit. 
Faites-le pour l*amour de 

?noi. 
Je le ferai poor I'aincur de 

'VOUS. 

Pour l'amour dW/r. 
Pour Tamour de hi. 
Cette plume n'est pas a 

<vous ; elle est a moi. 
A qui est ce livre ? II n'est 

pas a moi; il est a lui, on 

a elle. 
C'est <votre couteau, et ncn 

yas U sien* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



' 79 



Is this yotlr needle ? 

It is my paper and not 

jours. 
[4.] Ic is my opinion and 

ber l s. 
It is his brother, 
Ir is his sister. 
The horse broke his bridle 

and halter. 
My horse carries his head 

well. 
Your horse has lost his shoes. 
[>•] My father and mother 

are sick. 
His brother and sister are in 

the country. 
Your brother and my cousin 

are very good friends. 
Her mother and aunt are 

against it* 
{7.] Put your books in their 

places again. 
Their reasons are bad. 
1- saw the fireplace of his 

chamber; //'/mantle-piece 

is &f marble. 
You have bought an elbow- 
chair ; it's arms are too 

hi S h \ 
Your stick is not conveni- 
ent ; it's end is too sharp,. 

He has bought a sword; it's 
hilt is of silver. 

Have you read my book ? Is 
not the tvpe very beauti. 
ful. 

He ordered his country- 
house to be rebuilt ? it's 
rooms and it's situation 
are fine. 

There is a very large gar- 



1 6 



Certe aiguille est.elle a <vous & 
Ce papier est a moi 3 et npn 

pas a <vcjus. 
C'est mon sentiment et k 

sien. 
C'est son frere. 
C'est sa soeur. 
Le cheval a rompu sa bride 

et son licou. 
Mon cheval porte bien sa 

tete. 
Votre cheval a perdu see fers. 
Mo 71 pere et ma mere sont 

malades. 
Son frere et sn soeur sont 

a : la campagne. 
Votre frere et men cousin 

sont tres-bons amis. 
Sa mere et sa tante s'y op- 
pose nt. 
Remettez <vos livres a leurs 

places. 
Lturs raisons sont mauvaises. 
J'ai vu.la cheminee de *z 

chambre ; le manteau en 

est de marbre. 
Vous avez achete urv fau- 

teuil ; les bras en sont 

trop hauts. 
Votre baton n'est pas com- 
mode ; le bout en est trop 

pointu. 
II a achete une epee ; la gar-- 

de en est d'argenr. 
Avez. vous lu mon livre ? Le 

caractere n'en est-il pas 

bien beau ? 
II a fait rebatir sa maisoa 

de campagne ; les cham- 

bres et la situation en sont 

belles. 
II y a un tres-grand jnrdui 



1*0 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



den behind his house ; 
the trees of it are very- 
well planted, their fruit 
is excellent. 
Where did you buy this 
book ? the binding is very 
good. 

Every state has it's advan- 
tages, and it's troubles. , 

He is satisfied with his situ, 
ation; he knows all it's 
pleasures. 

The art of war has it's dan- 
gers. 

He is not satisfied with his 
situation ; he sees all it's 
dangers. 

It is a small house, which 
has it's conveniences. 

That tree spreads /A branches 
very far. 

[9.] Brother, lend m^ your 
pen. 

Sister, I cannot; I am, writ- 
ing my theme. 

[10.] He got his hajr cut. 

You split my head. 

He fell from his horse, and 

broke his leg. 
They have cut off his leg. 
He cannot walk out ; the 

gout has swelled his feet. 
Wash your hands, mouth, 

and face. 
I pricked my finger with my 

needle. 
[11.] He only grins. 

He waited on the lady to 
her coach. 



derriere sa maison ; les 

arbres en sont tres-bien 

plantes, les fruits en sont 

exsellens. 
Ou avez-vous achete ce li- 

vre ? La reliure en est 

tres-bonne. 
Chaque etat a set agremens 

et ses peines. 
II se plait dans sa situation : 

il en connoit tous les 

plaisirs. 
I/art de la guerre a ses dan- 
gers. 
II ne se plait pas dans sa 

situation ; il en voit tous 

les dangers. 
C'est une petite maison, qui 

a ses commodites. 
Voila un arbre qui etend ses 

branches tres-loin. 
Mon frere, pretez-moi -joire 

plume. 
Je ne puis, ma sceur; j'ecris 

mon theme. 
II s'est fait couper les ehe- 

veux. 
Vous me fendez la tete. 
11 tomba de cheval, et se 

cassa la cuisse. 
On lui a coupe la jambe. 
II ne peut sortir; la goutte 

lui a enfle les pieds. 
Lavez-itf»j les mains, la 

bouche, et le visage. 
Je me suis pique le doigt 

avec mon aiguille. 
II ne rit que du bout des 

lev res, ou des dents. 
II donna la main a la dame 
et la conduisit a son car. 
rosse. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



Why do you not speak ? Are 
you dumb ? 

He cannot stand upon his 

legs. 
She gave im her word for it. 
She gave him her hand to 

kiss. 
He stands on tiptoe. 

He gave his arm to the sur- 
geon, who was to bleed 
him. 

The patient lost all his 
blood. 

He raised his voice. 

She stretched out her arms. 

He makes a shift to lire by 

hard labour. 
You have hurt my foot. 
You hurt my finger. 
Have you never had the 

tcothach ? No : bur I 

have very often a pain in 

my stomach. 
I am sick. 
His mind is undisturbed. 

Her mind is agitated with a 
thousand fears. 

My finger is not yet healed. 



Pourquoi ne parlez-voiu 

pas ? Avez-vous perdu la 

parole r 
II ne pent se tenix sur set 

jambes. 
Elle m'en donna sa parole. 
Elle lui donna sa main a 

baiser. 
II se tient sur le bout des 

pieds. 
II donna son bras au chi- 

rurgien, qui devoit le sai. 

giier. 
Le malade perdit tout son 

sang. 
II eleva la voix. 
Elle etendit ses bras, ou les 

bras. 
II vit du travail de ses mains. 

Vous m'a vez fai t mal au pied. 
Vous vie faites mal au doigt. 
N'avez-vous jamais eu mal 

aux dents ? Non : mais 

j'ai fort souvent mal a 

/'estomac. 
J'ai mal au cceur. 
II a /'esprit en repos, ou w». 

esprit est en repos. 
Elle a /'esprit agite de mille 

craintes ; ou son esprit est 

agite de mille cr times. 
Man doigt n'est ps encore 

gueri. 



182 A GRAMMAR OF THE 



SECTION III. 



Demonstrative Pronouns n 

r. Ce or cet 9 cettc, and ces, are joined to and go before 
a substantive ; as,- this book, this man, this pen, these 
houses ; ce li<vre y .cet hommCy cette plume, ces maisons* Gcluf 9 
celUy ceuxy ce/Ies, ought to be followed by a second case : 
as, he of you, celui de <vous ; or the relative pronoun qui, or 
que : as, he who loves^ celui qui aime ; he whom* you love, 
celui que njous ai?nez. 

2.- Ce is used before a noun ^masculine beginning with & 
consonant ; but if the rnoun begin with a vowel, .or an h 
mute, cet most be used, Ce is likewise- used before qui or 
que: in this case it is said of inanimate things only, and 
signifies <what ox- the things -which ; as, ce que <vous cherchez 
n'est pastici ,\ what you look for is nowhere, or, the thing 
you look for is not here. , 

3. Obs. The particles ci and la* zxt sometimes joined by a hyphen 
to" a substantive ; as this man, that woman, cet bomme-L], alte-Jiminc- • 
la. They are likewise joined-in the same manner to the demonstra- 
tive pronouns. 

4 . Hi ivhoy he thaty she ixhhy they who, such ns, &c. • 
in the sense of that, even governed of the verb substantive 
to bey are rendered in French bv ielui qui y celle qui, ccux 
qui, which arc never separated. 

5. Obs. He *cho\ he that, &c., whether, they 'be separated -in English 
or not, are sometimes elegantly lendcred in French by the impersoral 
c*est t or c\st ne.pas, according as the sentence is affirmative or negative, 
with an infinitive followed by que de before a second infinitive ; as, 
He who trusts to empty men's promise? is ignorant of the human- heart. 
C'estne pas annoure le xteur lumain que de se jitr aux tftcixes premises 
des bommes. 

I say sometimes, because, first, if one of the English verbs be in the • 
future tense, it is by no means to be used. Secondly, there are mmy • 
cases, in which it is never used 5 a?, tb<y were punished ivko did it, ■ 
ceux qui Vent fait out ete funis; to put the two verbs in the. infinitive 
mood would be nonsense, 

• Ci denotes an object near, and til at a distance. 



FRENCH TONGUE.. 183 

6. ©as. Ce qui, ce que y what, beginning a sentence of two parts, is 
commonly followed by a sub>tantive; as, what I am saying to you 
is the truth ; ce que jcvcus <l\s\ c'est la verite. Sometimes the verb 
e:re is followed by the preposition de with an infinitive \ as, what 
grieves him r is not to have s-u^ccedei r ce qui le fdebe, c'e*t de n^wcir 
pas rtuss'i. Sometimes by que, if it come before another mood; as, 
ce qui le fatbe, e'est qu'il ria pas reussi. Ce qui is used before neuter 
verbs; as, ce qui me plait, what pleases me ; and before active verb?, 
when it is the nominative of the verb. In other cases cezue is used. 

7. Obs-. 7. Ce is not repeated in the before-mentioned- case before 
an adjective, or past participle ; as, what Lam saying to you is true, ce 

q:*e je vous disest 1/rau 

8. Oss. Ceei, this,. cela, that, are sometimes relative to a s'ngle 
noun ; as donr.ex-moi ceci, ou cela, give me tbfo or that, speaking of 
any sing^ tiling v/hatever. Sometimes they are not relative to a 
single noun, but to aw entire action: in this case cela generally sig- 
nifies the action before spoken of ; a?, we often speak ill of absent 
people, ivbicb is base; on park sewvent mat del absent, cela est indigne. 
Ceci generally signifies the action which is going to be mentioned ; .as, 
this is like to surprise you, a man died a hundred and ten years old "j 
Ceci va %-eus surprendre, un bommt qui murut age de cent dix anw 



Demonstrative Pronouns, exemplified for the 
Scholar's Practice. 



[1.] Show me that beok # Montrez-moi ce livre. 

Give me that pen. Donnez-moi cette plume. 

These houses are very fine. Ces maisons sont tres-belles. 

These ladies have a great Ces dames sont tr£s-spirr- 

deal of wit. tuelles. 

[2.] Tint man is very fan- Cet homme est tres-fantas- 

tastical. que. 

That child is very amiable. Cet enfant est tres-aimable. 

Do you know what has hap- Savez-vcus ce qui lui est ar- 

pened to him [or her]? rive ? 

Has she shown you ivhat Vous a-t-elle montre ce 

was given to her ? ou'on lui a donnc ?, 

Yoii will never guess what Vous ne devinerez jamais 

was sard of you. ce ou on a dit de vous. 

Guess what they are about . Devir.cz ce qu'\\% font. 



iS4 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



I know what you say. 

1 know what makes you 
angry. 

He does not know what you 
have written, 

[3.] That man makes him- 
self beloved by every 
body. 

These people are in the 
right. 

Those women are very ca- 
pricious. 

That man is in the wrong. 

Those apples are good for 
nothing. 

Give me some of those pears. 

[4.] He who betrays his 
friend is unwerthy of 
friendship. 

They who despise learning 
do not know the value 
of it. 

He who shuns company is a 
stranger to the charms of 
society. 

She 'who loves nobody does 
not taste the pleasures of 
friendship. 

Such as are enemies to vir- 
tue, are stragers to it. 

Such as are idle, do not 
know the value of tim,e. 

[$•] They who are con- 
tented with their lot are 
happy. 

He who does not study will 
never be learned. 

He who did it was pu- 
nished. . 



Je sais ce que vous ditei. 
Je sais ce qui vous fache/ 

II ne sait pas ce que vous 

avez ecrit. 
Cet homme-Az se fait aimer 

de tout le monde. 

Ces gens-r/ ont raison. 

Ces femmes-/<z sont tres-ca- 

pricieuses. 
Cet homme-Za a tort. 
Ces pommes-Za ne valent 

rien. 
Donne z-moi de ces poires-/*. 
Celui qui trahit son ami est 

indigne d'amitie. 

Ceux qui meprisent la scien- 
ce, n'en connoissent pas 

1c prix. 
Celui qui evite la compagnie, 

ne connoit pas les charmes 

de la societe. 
Celle qui n'aime personne, 

ne goute pas les plaisirs^ 

de l'amirie. 
Ceux qui sont ennemis de la 

vertu, ne la connoissent . 

pas. 
Ceux qui sont paresseux, ne 

connoissent pas le prix du 

temps. 
dux qui sont contens de 

leur sort, sont heureux. 

Celui qui n'etudie pas, ne 

sera jamais savant. 
Celui qui a i&it ccla a c;e 

puni. 

S 



FRENCH TONGUE 

I ley who have written their 
themes have been re- 
warded, 

Thtj who seem to be happy- 
are not always so. 



We should ever remember 

the cares of those, by 

ivbom we were brought 

up. 
We ought to encourage the 

endeavours of those, who 

apply themselves to the 

arts and sciences. 
[6.] What makes him angry 

h her bad humour. 
What an honest man ought 

to bewail is the loss of 

time. 
What grieves him /; not to 

have succeeded. 

What rejoices me is to have 
seen you and your family 
in good health. 

[7.] What I say to you is 

true. 
What she said to yoa is 

false. 
What you have told me is 

surprising. 
[8.] Does this please you ? 
Does that make you angry ? 
That surprises me. 
What do you think of it f 
I neysr thought of that. 
Keep this, and give me that. 

Did you write that? 
1 do not like that. 
That is wonderful. 



,85 

Ceux qui ont fait leurs 
themes ont etc recom- 
penses. 

Ceux qui paroissent etre 
heureux, ne le sont pas 
tou jours. 

Nousdevrions toujours nous 
souvenir des soins de ceux 
par qui nous avons ete 
eleves. 

On doit encourager les ef- 
forts de ceux qui s'appli- 
quent aux arts et aux 
sciences. 

Ce qui le fache, cest sa mau- 
vaise humeur. 

Ce qu'wn honnete homme 
doit regretter, c J est la 
perte du temps. 

Ce qui le fache, e'est de n'a- 
voir pas reussi, ou e'est 
qu'il n'a pas reussi. 

Ce qui me rejouit, e'est de 
vous avoir vu* vous et 
toute votre famille, en 
bonne same. 

Ce que je vous dis est vrai. 

Ce ^'elle vous a dit est 

faux. 
Ce que vous m'avez dit est 

surprenant. 
Ceci vous plait-il ? 
Ce/n vous fache- t-il ? 
Cela me surprend. 
Que pensez-vous de cela ? 
Je n'ai jamais pense a cela. 
Gardez ceci et donnez-moi 

eel 1 . 
Avovous ecrit cela? 
Je n'aime pas cela. 
Cela est admirable,, 



>M A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SECTION IV. 

Relative Pronouns. 

i. 1 he relative pronoun qui is the nominative, and que 
the accusative, in speaking of all sorts of objects ; as, the 
stone which is here, la pkrre qui est ici ; the house that 
you see, la nmisoii q ; ue <vous vov-czr 

Except mat qui is used in the accusative case instead of que, when it 
signifies that person ; as, je sals qui vous aimex, I know whom you love, 
or what person you love $ and when it is governed by a preposition ; 
as, en qui, sue qui, ai/a' qui, &c. In the last case, Uquel, &c. may like- 
wise be used. 

2 t When qui is in the second ease, or comes after any 
preposition whatever, it is applied only to persons, or 
objects used as persons ; and therefore it vvmild be a 
fault to say, e'eit la maison de qui je vous ai parle' y it is 
the house of which I have f spoken to you* In this case 
we make use of duquel, de laqttelle, &c. or dont y which fs 
used equally for all objects, and often more properly tharv 
de quf, or duquely de lciquelle> [8cc. ; as, e'est la muison dent 
je *vouim par lev 

3. A qui is sometimes used in speaking of animate ob- 
jects, though they are not persons, or objects used cis 
persons ; but as we can never err By making use of au~ 
quel, alaqutUe^ oVc.,. I would advise the learner to do so. 

4. The relative pronoun, though not expressed in Eng.- 
fish, must always be expressed in French ; as, the man 
you see, I hqmme que vous njojez; the book you speak of> 
U li-ore dont <vous parLz. 

5. Lequely laquelhy &c, are to be used instead of qui, 
isr, when 7/// is equivocal : zdly, when the relative pro- 
noun is in the second ca«e after a substantive;, as, a cou- 
rier has "been sent to court, at whose return . . . on a in* 
<voje un courrur d la cour, au rctcur duquel . , • jdly, 



FRENCH TONGUE. i<; 

"-hen the relative pronoun expresses a choice; as, which 
will y&a pee ? lequel, or laqoelle, voukzr-uous voir ? 

6. Speaking of things, in *tohkb'f itt what, to which, 
a! nvbkb, at what, in the sense of where, wherein, or when r 
arc rendered in French by cu instead of dans lequely la. 
quelle, &c % as, the house in which, or where he lives, la 
mtiison oil il demeure ; the end at which he aims, le bni Oa 
/'/ tend ; the century in which he lived, le siecle ou il c vi r uoit. 
From which, frQ?nwhnt, are rendered by d'eu instead- of 
duqnel, de laqudle, Sec, : as, the country from which' L 
come, le pajs d'ou je w'ens. Through which* by which, 
are rendered by far cil } or par lequel, 6cc\ 

7. The relative pronoun quoi is used only in speaking 
of inanimate objects. 

A quoi must always be used when it has for it's ante- 
cedent ce and the verb Sire, or rien, and is followed" by. 
a nounj or verb governing the third case ; as, it is to that 
I apply myself, e'est a quoi je m* applique ; there is no- 
thing, to which I am not disposed, il n'j a rien a quoiyV 
ne sois dispose, 

8. De quoi is used when it follows immediately ce and 
the verb etre, and is followed by a noun, or a verb go- 
verning the second case ; as, it is that. I complain of, Vest 
de quoi je me plains. But after rien we make use of 
dont ; at least it is a great deal better; as, there is no- 
thing in the world of which God is not the author,, il n'y 
€ rien au muhde dont Dieu ne soil l auteur* 

1 

9. O-bs. ^5/ may likewise be used instead of lequel, laqueUe y &c. 
after a preposition governing it, such a% :ur, in, a£res t a"ViC, &c. ; as, 
the reason I rely upon, la raisin sur quti je rr.efcntie. 

'However,- in mo>t circumstance, auyuc', duquel, sar lequeU &c, 
may r anil even must be used j but these practice alone can tsach. 

10. Obs. <$ue is used instead of de qui and a qui. It happens not 
enly when the second or third case of a personal jionoun comes im- 
mediately before ir, but likewise after any other noun, when the sen* 
tence begins with ce and cire : as, it is to you that I speak, e'est a vous 
yue je park; it is to hapfiuets that I aspire, t % cs au mbettf %u* 



i'88 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



j* 1 aspire : it is from the public, that I expect approbation, c'est du pu- 
blic que j* attends V approbation. 

The true rule for distinguishing this is when que has the l unification 
of the conjunction that, nor of Svb'cb, as you may see by the foregoing 
examples: by this rule there is no danger of being mistaken. Hence 
it may appear, that in such c^ses que is to be looked upon as conjunc- 
tion, rather than a relative pronoun. 



Relative Pronouns, exemplified for the Scholar $ 
Practice. 



[i.] It is the Lady <wbo 

spoke to you. 
Speak to this Gentleman 

nahb is here. 
Is this the new hat which 

you bought ? 
The book which you lent 

me is very well written. 
I know whom you mean. 
You do not know who it is. 
Do you know whom I love ? 
I know whom she loves. 
[2.] He is a friend in whom 

I put my confidence. 
He is a person to whom you 

may confide. 
She is a Lady against whom 

nothing can be said with 

truth. 
I know the person to whom 

you were talking. 
It is the man of whom I 

spoke to you. 
[3]. The dog of which they 

have cut the ears. 
There is a bird to which it 

is necessary to give some- 
thing to eat. 
[4.] It is the horse he spoke 

to you about. 
[5.] She is a woman in 



Cost la Dame qui vous a 

parle. 
Parlez a ce Monsieur qui 

est ici. 
Est-ce la le chapeau neuf 

que vous avez achete ? 
Le livre que vous m'avez 

prete est tres-bien ecrit. 
Je sais qui vous voulez dire. 
Vous ne savez pas qui e'est. 
Savez-vous qui j'aime ? 
Je sais qui elle aime. 
C'est un ami en qui je mets 

ma confiance. 
C'est une personne a qui on 

peut se fier. 
C'est une Demoiselle contre 

qui on ne peut mal parler 

avec verite. 
Je connois la personne a<vec 

qui vous avez pnrle. 
C'est rhomme de qui, ou 

dont je vous ai parle. 
Le chien a qui, ou a u quel on 

a coupe les oreilles. 
Voila un oiseau a qui, ou 

auqucl il fa ut donner a 

manger. 
C'est le cheval duquel, ou 

dont il vous a parle. 
C'est une femme sur la con* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



189 



•whote behaviur there is 
nothing to censure. 

He is a merchant whose ho- 
nour and probity cannot 
be doubted. 

[6 ] The circumstances you 
are in. 

The danger he is in. 

The end she aims at. 

The house where she lives. 

He has the same frame of 
mind and the same senti. 
ments, which he has al- 
ways haa 

I know the place whence 
you come. 

These are the reasons from 
which I conclude. 

These are his discourses by 
which he insinuates. 

Thii is the city through 
which I have passed. 

I know the means by which 
he has gained his point. 

[7.] It is what I am think- 
ing about. 

It was what he applied him- 
self/0. 

It was what she exhorted 
him to. 

I will think about it. 

There is nothing in which 
I am not ready to oblige 
you. 

[8. ] That is the matter in 
question. 

It is what he complains of. 

It is what 1 am sorry for. 
There is nothing I am more 
sorry for. 

There is nothing he com- 
plains of more. 



duite de la quelle il n'y a 
rien a red ire. 

C'est un negociant sur l'hon- 
neur et la probite duquel 
il ne peut y avoir de doute. 

Les circonstances cu vous 
etes. 

Le danger ok il se trouve. 

Le but ou elle vise. 

La maison oh elle demeure. 

H est dans la meme disposi- 
tion d'esprit, et dans les 
memes sentimens, ou il a 
toujours ete. 

Je sais la place d'ou vous 
venez. 

Voila les raisons d'ou je con- 
chas. 

Voila. ses discours far ou il 
insinue. 

Voila la ville par ou j'ai 
passe. 

Je sais les moyens par cu \\ 
parvint a ses fins. 

C'est a quoi je pense. 

C'etoit a quoi il s'appliquoit* 

C'etoit a quoi elle l'exhor- 

toit. 
C'est a quoi je penserai. 
II n'y a rien a quoi je ne 

sois dispose pour vous 

obliger. 
Voila de quoi il s'agit. 

C'est de quoi il se plaint. 
C'est de quoi je suis fache. 
II n'y a rien dont'yt sois plus 

fache. 
II n'y a rien dont il se plaigne 

davant^ge. 



igo 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



There is 4io tiling that he is 

not capable or". 
[9.] I do nor see upon what 

his discourse is grounded. 
It is what you may rely on. 

It is an argument to which 
there is no answer. 

Death is an evil for which 

there is no remedy. 
Idleness is a vice to which 

young people are much 

inclined. 
This is the reason upon 

which I am grounded. 
It is the happiness to which 

I aspire. 
These are the -reasons by 

wfjich I convinced him. 
{10.] It is to you that I 

shall speak. 
It is to her that I had pro- 
mised it. 
It is from his friend that he 

has received so many fa- 
vours. 
it is his brother that he 

complains of. 
It was by my friend that I 

was betrayed. 
It is to continual study that 

your brother owes his 

great learning. 
It is to my sister that you 

have given it. 
It is to her that you have 

spoken. 
It is from her that I expect 

that favour. 



II n'y a rien do at il ne soit 

cap.ible. 
Je ne vols pas sur quoi son 

discours peut etre fonde. 
Cest sur quoi vous pouvez 

compter. 
Cest un raisonnement att- 

quei il n'y a point de re- 

ponse. 
La mort est un mal auquel 

liny- a point de remede«, 
La paresse est un vice au- 
quel les jeunes gens sont 

tres-en-clins. 
Cest la raison sur laquclle 

je me fendc. 
Cest le bonheur apres Je- 

quel j' a spire. 
Ce sont les raisons a<vec let- 

quelle s je lat convaincu. 
Ce.rt a vous que je parlerai. 

Cest a elle que je l^avois 

pro mis. 
Cest de son ami qu'il a recu 

tant d'amities. 

Cest de son frere ^*'il se 

plaint. 
Ce fut par mon -ami que je 

fus trahi. 
Cest a une etude continu- 

elle que votre frere doit 

ses grandes connoissances. 
Cest a ma sccur que vous 

f'avcz donne. 
Cost a elle que vous avez 

parle. 
Cest d'clle que j* at tends 

cette giace. 



FRENCH TONGUE. i 9 i 

It is to trade 'that he ap~ C'est au commerce qu'W. 

plies himself. s'applique. 

It is to the protection of C'est a li protection de ses 

friends that he owes his amis qif'A doit sa fortune. 

fortune. 

It is by the public that he is C'est du public qu'il est ap. 

approved. prouve. 



SECTION V. 

Interrogatory Pronouns. 

i. Que, as interrogative, is applied only to things, and 
f&s only to parsons ; as, what do you say ? que dites-vous ?\, 
for whom are you looking ? qui cherchez^vous f Both are 
used in all their cases as above. 

2 « G vr,/ *> interrogative, is used after a preposition ; as, 
upon what are you grounded ? $ur quoi vous fo7idez~ r Jous / \i 
about what do you busy yourself? -de quoi *mm melez- 
*vou$ f. 

3. If prar be not immediately followed by a verb, it 
may sometimes be used in the first case ; as, what is there 
greater r quoi de plus grand? It sometimes expresses only 
an emotion of the mind ; as, how / you are angry ! quoi! 
*vo:ts c'tes fachef 

4-. Qj^h quelle y &c, are said of persons and things. 
It is to be observed, that quel is always followed by it's 
substantive; as, what man is it? quel ho?7i?7ie est-re ? 
Except when the noun was expressed before ; as, this is 
my opinion; what is yours ? <voiIa mon sentiment; quel 
tjt le voire ? 

5. Lequel, &c, is also said of persons and things ; it is 
always followed by a genitive expressed or understood; 
as, which of the two will you have ? lequel des denxvou- 
hz^uous P Ojtel answers to 'what : lequel > to which. 

6. Whose y signifying to whom a thing belongs, is trans- 
lated into F#nch by the dative, a qui ; as, whose house 
is that ? a qui est cette maiSQU? 



l$2 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Interrogatory Pronowis exemplified for the Scholar *'& 
Practice. 



[ i .] What do you say ? 
What do you want ? 
What do you ask for ? 
What do you fear ? 
What is the matter ? 

What shall we do ? 
For whom are you looking ? 
Who has done that ? 
Who spoke to you f 
Whom do you suspect ? 

From whom have you that 
news ? 

Who is come ? 

To whom do you give the 
preference ? 

[2.] Why do you concern 
yourself? 

Of what does she complain ? 

What is the matter ? 

Why so much ado ? 

Tq what do you apply your- 
self? 

How do you spend your 
time ? 

What can she expect ? 

Of what is he talking ? 

Far what is she so angry ? 



Que * dites-vous ? 

Que souhaitez.vous ? 

Que demandez-vous ? 

Que craignez-vous ? 

Qu' est-ce que e'est? or Qji'esi* 
re qu'il j a P 

Que ferons-nous ? 

Quiir cherchez-vous ? 

Qui a fait eel a ? 

Qui est.ee qui vous a parle ? 

Qui est-ce que vous soupcon- 
nez ? 

De qui tenez-vous cette 
nouvelle ? 

Qui est-ce qui est venxi ? 

A qui donnez-vous la prefe- 
rence ? 

De quoi vous melez-vous ? 

De quoi se plaint-elle ? 
De quoi s'agit-il ? 
A quoi bon tant de fa cons ? 
A quoi vous appliquez-vous ? 

A quoi passez-vous le temp> ? 

A quoi peut-elle s'attendre ? 

De quoi parle-t.il ? 

De qui e sue lie si lachee ? 



* Observe here, that instead of que, we often make use of qu\*st- 
it que. In this case the personal pronoun comes before the verb. 

+ Instead of qui % ■■ this and similar interrogation, it is equally 
proper to use qui est-ce qui in the nominative, and qui est-ce que in 
the accusative j in this case the perse al pronoun is put btfore tki 
verb. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



Of what are they so jealous ? 
T§ what do you impute the 

fault ? 
How shall we spend our 

time ? 
[3.] What is there more glo- 
rious than to die for our 

country ? 
Mow ! would you deceive 

me ? 
[4.] What man spoke to 

you ? 
What woman have you 

seen ? 
What lace has she bought ? 

What books have you read ? 
What sort of shirts does he 

wear ? 
This is my opinion ; what is 

his? 
This is your advice ; what 

is hers ? 
It was her sentiment ; what 

was yours ? 
What grammar do you read ? 
[5*.] Of all the grammars 

which have been printed, 

to which do you give the 

preference ? 
There are apples and pears ; 

which do you like best ? 

Which of these two oranges 
will you have ? 

Which of these two ladies do 
you think the handsomest ? 

Which of all the gramma- 
rians has written mgst 
clearly and precisely ? 



*9J 

De quoi sont-ils si jaloux ? 
A quoi attribuez-vous la 

faute ? 
A quoi nous amuserons-nous ? 

Quoi de plus gtorieux que 
de mourir pour notre pa- 
trie ? 

Quoi! voudriez-vous me 
tromper ? 

Quel homme vous a parle f 

Quelle femmeavez-vous vue ? 

Quelle dentelle a-t-elle ache- 
tee \ 
Quels livres avez-vous lus ? 
Qaelles chemises porte-t-il ? 

Voila mon opinion ; quelle 

est la sierme t 
Voila votre avis \.quel est le 

sien ? 
C'ecoit son sentiment ; quel 

etoit le votre \ 
^/^//^grammairelisez-vous ? 
De tontes les grarnmair« 

qui ont ete imprim&s, & 

laquelle don nez- vous la 

preference ? 
Voila des pommes et das 

poires ; lesquelUs aimez. 

vous le mieux ? 
Laqudle de ces deux oranges 

voulez-vous? 
Laqutlle de ces deux dames 

trouvez-vous la plus belle ? 
Lequel de tous les grammai- 

riens a eerie le plus clai- 

rement, et avec le ptus de 

precision ? 



K 



194 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Which of the books you Des livres que vous avez las; 
have read do you think fttqueh trouvez-vous les 
the most useful ? plus utiles ? 

[6.] Whose penknife is this ? A qui est ce canif ? 

Whose pen is this ? A qui est cette plume ? 

Whose hat is this ? A qui est ce chapeau ? 

Whose garden is this ? A qui est ce jardin ? 

SECTION IV. 

Indefinite or Indeterminate Pronouns. 

i. Pas un, aucun, nul, are three negative pronouns, 
having the signification of no person or nothing, and 
require the particle ne before the verb; as: nobody 
spoke of it; aucun^ ox pas un, or nul n'en a parle'; no- 
body knows it ; aucun, or pas un, or nul ne le salt. 

Nulls never used in an interrogation ; for we do not say, vul ne It 

salt-il f 

2. Or.s. Aucun is sometimes used without a negation, in phrases of 
interrogation or doubt. In such a case it may be rendered by quel- 
quun ; as; of all those who know my reasons, is there any one who 
ha3 blamed me ? de tous eeux qui savent mes raisons, y en a-t-il aucun 
qui iii* ait blame'? 

3. Obs. When aucun and mil are followed by a second case, or a 
substantive either expressed or understood, they must be in the same 
gender as that second case or substantive, but not in the same num- 
ber; as: none of them has been there, aucun d y eux, speaking of men,- 
or sucutie d'cl/es, speaking of women, n'y a ete. These thiee pronouns, 
used as pronouns, have no plural. 

4. Nul and aucun are sometimes to be looked upon as 
adjectives : this happens when they are joined to a sub- 
stantive ; as, he yields to no reason, il ne se rend a 
aucune raisoni she has no pleasure, elle n'a aucun plaisir. 
iV.v/may likewise be used, but aucun in such a case is far 
better. 

5. Obs. AV is also a law term signifying void; in such a case it 
has a plural, if the noun be in the plural; as: the proceedings are 
void, Us procedures sent nulles. 

6. Chacuuy each, signifies every person or thing, has 
no plural, is indifferently applied to persons and things, 



FRENCH TONGUE. 195 

and follows the gender of the norm to which it is joined, 
or relates ; as, each of these two women has seen it ? cf:a~ 
C€ine de cet deuxfemmes I 3 a "vu: 

Obs. If the noun be a collective one, and cannot be divided by 
one or two, chacun is put in the tnacuiine gender, though the collec- 
tive noun be feminine ; as: the Commons withdrew, each of them t* 
their own home,; les communes le retirerent, chacun che-z sci. 

N, B. Custom does no # t allow us t<r say un chacun^ instead of chacun* 

7. Persemte signifies nobody, has no plural, is always 
X)f the masculine gender, and is attended "by the particle 
tie before* the verb ; as, nobody saw it, personne tt* 

8. Oas. Whfert p&stinne signifies any body, and is not preceded by 
an adverb of denial ; such as ^ not, never, &c, the particle ne must be 
'omitted ; as, did evrr any bo-ly find the phiIsopher*s stone ? per* 
-Sonne a-t-il jamais tr.uz/ la perre pbihsopbaic ? This way of speak- 
ing in>inuates ? that you do notbdieve the thing concerning which yon 
inquire. Take care not to confound this pronoun with the noun 
substantive ; a person, une personney the person, la penomte, which is 
always feminine. 

9. Tout has many significations-: it sometimes sig* 
nifies, all, every, or the whole. When it is joined to a 
€ubstantive, it requires the 'definite article before the 
following noun, notwithstanding its having before it de 
or a ; as, the whole house,* toute la ?nmson .• of the 
whole house, de toute la maison ; to the whole house, a 
ttute la mauoju 

10- The pronoun tout, used by itself, is always put in 
the masculine singular ; as : almost every thing is uncer- 
tain in this world : presque, tout est incertain dam le 
tnonde^ Sometimes it has the signification of chaque ; as: 
every day, tcus hs jours ; every moment, a tout moment^ 
Sec. But we say, a chaque instant^ a chaque 7ninute i every 
instant, every minute. 

ii. Ons. Tout sometimes signifies although-, followed by a wori 
denoting the quality, office, dignity, trade, calling, circumstance, Sec, 
of the object ; in such a case, the word denoting such quality, &c , 
which is placed after the verb in English, must be placed in French 
immediately . alter hut, and must be followed by que ; as : though be 



R,<5 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

38 learned, he mistakes sometimes, tout savant quV/ est, U se trompe 
qudquefois. When tout is rendered by blen que, or quoique, the verb 
must be put in the subjunctive mood ; as, bien quo, or quoiqu'il soit, 
savant, &c, 

12. Obs. When the word that comes after the verb does not de- 
note the quality of the subject, then, notwithstanding, or although must 
be rendered in French by bien que, or quoique \ as, although you make 
use of this physician, bien que, or quoique vous vous servie% de ce medecin. 

13. Obs. Tout, in the sense of although, is indeclinable, except be- 
fore a noun feminine beginning with a consonant. 

14. Obs. Tout sometimes signifies quite, entirely; as, she is in 
every respect lovely ; eile est tout aimable. In this sense it is likewise 
declinable only before a noun feminine beginning with a consonant. 

15. Obs. When nen signifies nothing, or not any thing, the particle 
tie must be placed before the verb; as, I have seen nothing prettier, 
je rCtii rien <vu de piuz beau. 

But when it signifies any thing, and is not preceded by an adverb 
of denial, the particle nt is omitted ; as, have you ever seen any thing 
so beautiful ? a*voz-vous jamais rien vu de si beau f 

16. Plust'eurs signifies many or several. It is always 
plural ; as several have believed, that the world was 
eternal , plusieurs ont cru le monde eterneL It is some* 
tim^s an adjective ; as, many friends, plusieurs amis. It 
is declined with the indefinite articles de and a. 

17. Obs. Autre, other, is sometimes an adjective; as, another 
book, un i.utre li-vre ; sometimes a substantive, when it is preceded by 
en, to which it has relation ; as, 'fen conncis un autre, I know another : 
sometimes a pronoun ; as, another than you, un autre que vouu—Autrui 
our neighbour, others, or other people, is more commonly used in the 
second and third cases ; as, of others, toothers, d^autrui, a autrui.— 
Ni run ni FauU-e, neither the one nor the other, will have the verb in 
the plural, whether it come after or before; as, neither the one nor 
th£ other knows the reason of it, ni Tun ni 1'autre, rfcn savent la raison ; 
Us n'en savent /# raison ni Tun ni rautre.— L'un Pautre, one the other, 
one another, is used to express the mutual action of two objects on 
each other, and consequently it is always reciprocal ; as, they love one 
another, Us s'aimtnt Tun Pautre. The first is always in the first case.— 
l?un tt Fautrt, the one and the other, or both, has a different meaning : 
it signifies the union of two ebjects already mentioned ; as, both are in 
the wrong ; ih ont tort Vun et I 'autre or Pun ft P 'autre ont tort ; it always 
governs the plural. Both of these tw© words are declined with the 
definite article. 



FRENCH TONGUE. T97 

Take notice, that Pun I* autre comes always after the verb ; >;/ fato 
m Pautre, and Pun et Pautre, in the first case, go indifferently befope 
or after, with this difference, that, when they are put after, the per- 
sonal pronoun goes always before the verb, though noc expressed in 
English; and, when they are before the verb, the personal pronoun 
is omitted, though expressed in English ; as, they are both in the 
wrong, or both are in the wrong j Us ont tort Pun et I* autre? or Pun et 
P autre ont tort, 

18. Qjie[que y some, signifies in fhe singular, that the 
object is taken indeterminately : as, he is always read- 
ing some good book, il lit toujour* quelque ban livre. la- 
the plural, it expresses an indeterminate number of ob- 
jects ; as, he is addicted to some vices, */ est adonne « 
quelque* vices* 

19. Obs. Sometimes quelque signifies not the indeterminate number,, 
but the indeterminate quality or quantity of things, and answers th* 
English expressions, whatever, although, though, ever so much y Sec. i 
is, although they are learned, quelque savaus qu'ds silent. $%ueiqui y 
taken in this sense, has no plural before adjectives, unless they aie. 
immediately followed by their substantive ; as, though they seem ever 
so rich, quelque riches quells far oissent j though he has penormed ever 
so good actions, quelques belles actions, qu'il ait fait es. Hence it appears, 
how much an author is mistaken, who says that, quelque can never 
come before an adjective except with etre. 

Observe, that quelque in this case is always followed by que, or qui t 
which governs the following verb in the subjunctive mood. 

20. Obs. Quel que, whatever, s followed immediately by a verb 
in the subjunctive mood. It must be separated into two words, and 
then quel has both numbers and genders, and que is not repeated 
in the following part of the sentence; as, whatever his intentions ap- 
pear, quelles que parohsent ses intentions; whatever I am, quel que ft 
soh j whatever they may be, (speaking of women) quelles v^elkt 
fuissent etre 

2 1, Quelqu'un, in the sense of somebody, or any body r 
is used in all its cases in the singular masculine only ; a>, 
somebody has told it to me, quelqu'un me I'a dst.. I know 
it from somebody, /<> le sals de qiulqu'un; 1 have given 
it to somebody, je l y ai donne a quelqu'wu However, 
quelques-nns is used as the nominative of the verb ; a*, 
seme persons have said it, quelques. tins I'ont dit. In the 
other cases we make use of quelques personnel > and not 
quelque s-uns* 

22. Quelqu'un sometimes signifies an indeterminate part 
of a number, and is then joined with the second, case ©£ 

* 3 



i9« A GRAMMAR OF THE 

some other noun expressed, or sufficiently tinderstood '; 
©r with the particle en instead of the second case ; in this 
sense quelqu'nn is used in all the genders, numbers, and 
cases ; as^ has any of these gentlemen heard any thing of 
it? quelqu'un, or quelques-uns de ces Messieurs en an- 
roit-il) or auroient.ils entendu pcirler ? Those are fine 
flowers, give me some ; <voila de belles fours y donnex-m* en 
quelques-unes. 

23. Obs. When whatever has no relation either to an adjective or 
a substantive, it must be rendered by quoi que, tout ce qui, tout ce que 5 
as, whatever happens, quoi qu'i/ arrive', whatever you please, tout ce 
quV vous piaira—Qui que is used only in the first case, whereas tout 
ce qui> tout ce que, are used in all their cases. Observe, that quci que 
ee soit (whatever it maybe) is likewise used in all its cases; as, of 
whatever he may speak, de quoi que ce soit qu*/7 parte ; to whatever he 
may apply himself a quoi que ce soit qu*i7 s' 'applique : this last pronoun, 
when followed by a verb, requires that verb in the subjunctive mood 
with que before it, as may be seen by the foregoing example. 

Qui que ce -olt, in a sentence with the particle ne before the veib, 
■ signities nothing at all, or nothing whatever: as he talks of nothing 
whatever j U ne parle de quoi que ce soit. 

14. Obs. Qui que ce soit, whoever, or whatever person, is used in 
all it's cases; as, from whomever he may have learned it, de qui que 
ce soit qu'il Pait appris ; to whomever he may address himself, a qui 
que ce soit qu'd s'adresse. When this pronoun belongs to a sentence 
wherein ne precedes the verb, it stands for nobody whatever; as, I 
shall speak of it to nobody whatever, je n % en parlerai a qui que ce soit. 
Hence it appears, that quoi que ce soit is used for things only, and qui 
yue ce soit for persons. 

Observe, that instead 01 qui que ce soit que, in the sense of who- 
ever, or whatever person, it is often more elegant to use only qui pie ; 
as, whomever you may sec, qui que vous voyhz, except beiore the pro- 
nouns U% ds } to avoid ti,e hard sound qui q-uiL 

25. Ob?. Qui que ce scit, in the sense of quicenque, whoever, or what- 
ever person, must always be followed by i/, elle, &c, or qui, ;.nd 
sometimes by both: as: whoever it may be, he will be discovered, 
«iui que ce soit, il sera de'eeuvert : whoever deceives me shall be dis- 
covered, qui que ce soit qui me trempe, il sera d? convert : but alter qui. 
cov.que il and qui are omitted; as, quiconque m$ (romper*, sen* de.cu* 
iert, ;\nd not;/ sera, ccc. 

26. Metre is sometimes an adjective ; as, the same au- 
thor, le me me auteur : sometimes it answers to self in 
, English; as, myself, vwi-mem: in these two senses ic 



FRENCH TONGUE. 199 

has a plural*: sometimes it answers to even in English; 
as, even this book, ce li*vre me me. 

27. Je ne sais qui, I do not know who, is used in all it's 
cases in the singular only for persons. Je ne sais quoi, I 
do not know what, is u^ed in all its eases lor things only 
in the singular. Je ne sais quel is used in all its num- 
ber-, cases, and genders, speaking of persons or things, 
and is always followed by a substantive. 

28. They, people, men, we, &c, are sometimes ren- 
dered by en ; as, they, or people, talk ; on parle ; may I 
know r peut-on sansoir ? 

Sometimes on signifies it: in th'rs case the verb, which is in Eng- 
lish in the passive voice, must he changed in French into" the active j 
as, it is hoped, oneSpere\ it was said, on <iisoit.~ Farrfier, a* the 
passive voice is seldom used in French, in such a case the noun, ov 
pronoun, which is the object of the passive verb. in Fngiish, mifef 
be made the object of the verb in French, and the passive verb rncne 
be changed in o the active, and put into the same tense as in Ivnglhh : 
as, great rejoicings have been made this week j on a fail cttie umairfc 
de grandes r/jouissances, instead of de grandes rejomssancts ont eie 
fades. 

Indeterminate Pronouns exemplified for the Scho~ 
lav's Practice. 

[1.] Nobody spoke to him, Aucun, pas un, ou nul ne 

lui a parle. 
Nobody knows it. Aucuk, fas un, ou nul ne 

le sait. 
Nobody has seen it. Aucun, pas nn, ou nul ne 

l'a vu. 
Nobody can boast of it, Aucun pas tin, ou nul ne 

peut s'en vanter. 
Of all the grammars I am a De toutes les grammaires, 
slave to none. je ne m* attache a eu- 

cune. 
I never saw any of them. Je n'en ai jamais* vu un, ou 

aucun, and not nnh 
Did you ever see any one, En avez-vous jamais vu un 9 
who . . . ? ou aucun qui . , . ? and 

not nuL 

* See rule 22, of the personal pronouns, at the end of page 170* 
K 4 



2 CO 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



[2.] Is there any one, who 
can blame roe ? 

Is there any one, who has 
seen it? 

[3.] I have not read any of 
the books you lent me. 

I did not see any of the la- 
dies you spoke of. 

I knew none of those mer^ 
-chants, 

I saw none of them, 



[4.] He has no resj. 

She has no uneasiness of 

mind. 
1 have no interest in it, 

[$.] The sentence was an- 
nulled. 

All their privileges are an- 
nulled. 

[6 ] Every one lives after 
h : s own n winner. 

All men are faulty. 

All men desi e to be happy. 

Every one ot them was sur- 
prised. 



I know two ladies ; they 
have, each of them two 
thousand pounds a year. 

The two clerks have, each 
of them, written four let- 

■ ters. 

The commons withdrew, 
each of them to hi* own 
lpine* 

3 



Y en a-t-il aucun qui puisjt 
me blamer ? 

Y en a-t-il aucun qui Pait 
vu ? 

Je n'ai lu aucun des livres 

que vou6 m'ave* pretes. 
Je n'ai vu aucune des Dames 

dont vous avez parl«. 
Je ne connois aucun de ces 

commercans. 
Je n'ai vu aucun d'eux, for 

the masculine i aucune 

d'elles, for the feminine* 
II n'a nul repos-~aucun ra- 

pos. 
Elle n'a nulle, ou aucune 

inquietude d'esprit. 
Je n'ai nul y ou aucun in. 

teret en cela. 
La sentence fut declaree 

?2ulle, 
Tous leurs privileges sont 

nuls, 
Chacun vit a sa mode. 

Chacun fait des fautes. 
Chacun veut e'tc heureux. 
Chacun d'eix fut surpris, 

for the mosaiine: cha- 
cune del les fut surprise, 
for the fcmi?;ine, 

Je cor.nois deux demoi- 
selles : elles ont chrcunc 
deux mille livres sterling 
de rente. 

Les deux commis ont ecrit 
chacun quatre lettrcs. 

Les Communes se retire- 
rent chacun ches sou 



FRENCH TONGUE". 



2©i 



Each of the shires sends two 
representatives to Parlia- 
ment. 
Put the books in order, and 
put every one into it's 
place. 
\j.] Nobody talks of it,- 
Nobody has seeayou. 
Nobody has guessed the 

meaning of the riddle^ 
Nobiay knows it.. 
Nobody suspected hen 
She toid it to nobody,. 
He mistrusts nobody. 
She trusts nobody.. 
[8.] Did ever any bodj know 
all the properties of mat- 
ter ? 
Did ever any body seriously 
doubt, of the existence of 
God? 
Did ever any man compre- 
hend the mysteries of re- 
ligion ?. 
[9. 10.] ////is lost.. 
AH is quiet now.. 
Every thing in nature is lia- 
ble to change, 
He mistrusts every thing.. 
She is frightened at every 

shadow,. 
He is capable of every thing. 
Can a man be sure of every 

thing? 
Lam disposed for any thing 

)o:i please. 
He is fit for any thing. 
They are against evtry thing. 
I see her ; and speak, to her 

tviry day. 
Sine goes to the play almost 
itvery evening, 



Les provinces envoient cha- 
cune deux deputes au 
Parfement. 

Arrangez les livres, et les 
mettez chacun a sa places 

Personne n'en parle. 
Per sonne ne vous a vu. 
Personne «'a devine 1'enig- 

me. 
Per sonne ne sait.- 
Per sonne ne la soupconnjoit*- 
Elle ne Pa dit ?l personne. 
II ne se merle At per sonne. 
Elle ne se fie a personne. 
Per sonne a-t-il jamais connu' 

toutes-les proprietes de la- 

matiere ? 
Personne a-t-il jamais doute. 

serieusement de Pexis-- 

tence de Dieu ? 
Personne- a-t-il jamais com- 

pris les mysteres de la 

religion h- 
Tout est perdu. 
Tout est tranquille a present;. 
Tout dans la nature est sujet 

au changement. 
II se merle de tout. 
Elle est epouvantee de tout;. 

II est capable de tout. 
Peut-on etre.fcurde tout ^ 

Je suis^ pret a tout ce qu'ili 

vous ^I'iira. 
II est p;opre a tout. 
lis s'opposent a tout, 
Je la vuis, et lui park :our> 

les jours*- 
Elle va a la cc.redre pres*- 

que torn les sons,,. 



£0* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He flies into a passion every II s'emporte a lout moment. 

moment. 

[l r, 12.] Though . he is Tt/*/ riche qu'W est, ou ^2/- 

rich, he is not the more qu'il soit riche, il n'en est 

contented. pas plus content. 

Although he seems angry, he Tout fache qu'il paroir, on 

is not really so. quoiqu'W paroisse iache, 



ally 

[13, 14.] She was quite 
frightened. 

She lives wholly in retire- 
ment. 

[ic.] I saw nothing more 
extraordinary. 

He applies himself to no- 
thing. 

Nothing is more surprising. 

I do not suspect you of any 
thing. 

Is there any thing more 
wonderful ? 

I doubt whether any thing 
he more useful. 



qu 01 qu'il par 
il ne 1'est pas. 
Elle fut tout epouvantee. 

Elle vit toute retiree. 

Je a'ai rien vu de plus ex- 

traordinire. 
II ne s"*applique a rien, 

Rien n'est plus snrprenant. 

Je ne vous soupconne de 
rien. 

Y a-t-il rien de plus admi- 
rable ? 

Je doute que rien soit plus 
utile. ' 



£16.] Many are not of your Plusuurs ne sont pas de votre 

opinion. 
Many are of this opinion. 



It is the lot of many. 

It is the voice of many. 

She told it to many. 

'[17] Have you re ad the 

book? will you have an. 

other ? 
If you do not like that 

pen, I will give you an* 

tithe r* 
Another would be more 

grateful. 
Another would have married 

him. 
Jbtotber would have been 

deceived. 



opinion. 

flaneurs sont de ce senti- 
ment. 

C'est le partage de plusicursm 

C'est le defaut de p!usieurs. 

Elle l'a dit a flutieurs. 

Avez-vous lu le livre? en 
voulcz-vous un autre? 

Si vous n'aimez pas cette 
plume, je vous en donne- 
rai unc autre. 

Un autre seroit plus reeon- 
noissant. 

Uue autre l'auroit epouse. 

Un autre auroit fete txompe. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



203 



I gave it to another, 
I know neither of them. 



Neither 
him. 



of them spoke to 



Neither of them studies. 

They hate one another. 
We know one another. 

They cheat one another. 

They mistrust one another. 

It is uncommon for two au- 
thors to speak well of one 
another. 

We trust one another. 

You wrong one another. 

Let us not hurt one another. 

Each of them is good. 

Both are bad. 

Both shall be punished. 



Each of them shall be 

warded, 
I do not care for cither. 

She complains of loth. 

been cheated 



re- 



by 



He has 

both. 
1 cenfide in both.. 
Give to both. 
She speaks to both^ 
[18.] I have received some 

money. 
He has fallen into some 

errours.. 



Je l'ai donne a un autre. 
Je ne connois ni Vun ni l y au- 
tre. 
Ni Pun ni V autre ne liii ont 
parle, ou, ils ne lui ont 
parle, */ Vun ni V autre. 
Ni Vun ni V autre n'etu- 
dient j ou, ils n'etudient 
ni Vun ni V autre. 
Ils se haissent Vun V autre. 
Nous nous connotssoris Vuw 

Vautre. 
lib se trompent Vun Vautre* 
11 se mefient Vun de Vautre. 
II est rare que deux auteur^ 
disent du bien Vun de' 
V 'autre. 
Nous nous fions Vun & Vau- 
tre, 
Vous vous faites du tort Vuw 

a Vautre. 
Ne nous nuisons pas Vun £ 

Vautre. 
L'un et Vautre sont bons. 
Vun et Vautre sont mauvais- 
He seront punis Vun et Vau- 
tre. 
lis seront recompenses Vuw 

et Vautre. 
Je ne me soucie ni de Vun nJ 
de V autre. , 

Elle se plaint- de Vilw et de 

Vautre. 
II a etc trompe par Vim ett 

par Vautre.. 
Je me fie a Vun et a Vautre* 
Donne z a Vun et a Vautre.. 
Elle parle a Vun et a ['autre*. 
J'ai recu que J que argent. 



II est torn be 
erreurs* 



dans- guelqpas 



x 6 



204 



A GRAMMAR OE THE 



You are mistaken by some 

shillings. 
Apply yourself to some use- 
nil work. 
[19.] Though you pretend 

to be ever so bold. 
Though he be ever so rich, 

he is very covetous. 
Whatever happy talents a 

man may have, he ought 

to cultivate them. 
However far I may be from 

you, I shall not forget 

you. 
However rich you saw them, 

they are now very poor. 

However cunning they ap- 
pear, they are sometimes 
deceived. 

Though they pretend to ever 
so much honesty, they 
sometimes cheat. 

Whatever friends he may 
have, he will never suc- 
ceed , 

Whatever small rewards 
you may give him, he will 
be grateful for them. 

Whatever riches you have. 

[20.] Send me some news 
whatever it may be. 

Ke shall be punished who- 
ever he may be. 

Whoever you may be, they 
will render you justice* 

Whatever his sister may be, 
I will never marry her. 

Whatever her sisters may 
be, they are not so. lovely 
as she is. 



Vous vous trompez it quel* 

ques schellings. 
Occupez-vous a quelque 

ouvrage utile* 
Quelque hardi que vous af- 

fectiez d'etre. 
Qu4que riche qu'il soit, il 

est fort avare. 
Quelques heureux talens 

qu'un homme puisse avoir, 

il faut qu'il les cultive. 
Quelque eloign e que je sois 

de vous, je ne vous oublie- 

rai pas. 
Quelque riches que vous les 

ayez vus > ils sont a pre- 
sent fort pauvres. 
Quelque ruses ^a'ils parois- 

sent, ils sont quelquefois 

trompes. 
Quelque honnetes qu'Ws pre- 

tendent etre, ils trompeat 

quelquefois. 
Quelques amis ^a'il ait, il ne 

reussira jamais. 

Quelques petites recompen- 
ses que vous lui donniez, 
il en sera reconnoissant. 

Quelques richesses que vous 
ayez. 

Envoyez-moi des nouvelles, 
quelques y^'eiles-soient. 

II sera puni, quel qu'il soit> 

Qutl que vous soyez, on VOUS 

rendra justice. 
Quelle que soir sa soeur, je 

ne l'epou serai jamais. 
Quelle s que s< \-:w\ ses sceurs, 

elles ne soi:( pas si airoa- 

Lies cuj'elle. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

Whatever these conditions 
may be, I will never sub- 
mit to them. 

Whatever these goods are, 
send them to me. 



ZQ$ 



Do not rely upon the pro. 
mises of men, 'whatever 
they may be. 

He will not hear of any ac- 
commodation, whatever it 
may be. 

I do not care for him, who- 
ever he is, 

[21.] Is any body come ? 

Somebody told it you. 

Did any body speak to him 
(or to her?) 

Did you see any body there ? 

She knows it from so;* body. 

He took it from somebody. 

She mistrusts somebody. 

Give this to somebody. 

They spoke to somebody. 

He wrote to somebody. 

Some people say. 

Some believe. 

I have this news from some 
persons.. 

I told this news to some- 
body. 

[22.] Some of the prisoners 
made their escape. 

I know it from some of those 
who were present. 

He has given bread to some 
of those who were in need 
of it. 

Some of the robbers have 
been taken. 

Some of them will be hang- 



Qiielles que soient ces condi- 
tions, je ne m'y soumet- 
trai jamais. 

Quelles que soient ces roar- 
chandises, envoyez-les- 
moi. 

Ne vous fiez pas aux pro- 
messes des hommes, quel* 
les Relies soient. 

II ne veut entendre parler 
d'aucun accommodement, 
quel qu\\ puisse etre. 

Je ne me soueie pas de lui, 
quel qu'il soit. 

Onelqu'un est-il venu. 

Quelqn'un VOUS l'a dit. 

Quelqu'un lui a-t-il parle T 

Y avez-vous vu quelquun? 
Elle le sait de quelqu'un. 
II l'a pris de qu.lqu'un. 
Elle se mefie de qudqu'un^ 
Donne z cela a quelqu-un.. 
lis ont parle a quelqu'wt* 
II a ecrit a quelqu'un*. 
Quelque s~uns disent. 
Quelque s-uns croient. 
Je tiens cette nouvelle de 

quelques personnes. 
J'ai dit cette nouvelle a 

quelques personnes-. 
Quelque s-uns des prisonniers 

se sont eVades. 
Je le ^ais de quelques uns ct£ 

ceux qui etoient presens. 
II a donne du pain a queL 

ques-uns de ceux qui en 

avoient besoin. 
Quelques-uns des voleurs ont 

ete pris. 
Quelques, uns d'e^x seront 

pendus^ 



2*5 

Do you know any of those 

ladies ? 

know some of them. 
Will you have any of these 

oranges ? 
Give me some. 
Buy some of those apples. 

Will you taste any of them ? 

[26.] Whatever may happen, 
he is always the same. 

Whatever you say, it shall 
be so. 

Whatever he may under- 
take he will never suc- 
ceed. 

I know every thing he is 
able to do. 

Do vjhatever yon please. 

I do not care for whatever 

he may do. 
Take whatever you like 

best. 
I am ready for whaevcr you 

please. 
She applies herself to every 

things that may be «se- 

ful to her. 
Any thing he writes to you, 

tell it me. 
Do not talk of any thing. 
He succeeds in whatever he 

applies himself to. 
[24.] They will tell him the 

same thing, to whomever 

he- may address himself. 
He does not care for any 

person whatever*. 
I saw nobody at alU 
He knows nobody* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Connoissez-vous que/ques-- 

unes de ces Dame. ? 
J 'en connois quelques-unesS 
Voulez-vous quelques -lines 

de ces oranges ? 
Dcnnez-m'en quelques. unes, 
Achetez quelques.unes de ces 

pom Ties. 
En voulez-vous gouter queK 

que s -lines ? 
Ojioi qu'il puisse arriver, il 
' est toujours le memc. 
Quoi que vous disiez, il en 

sera ainsi. 
Quoi qu'il puisse entrepren- 

dre, il ne reussira jamais. 

Je sais tout ce qu'il peut faire. 

Faire 1 tout ce que vous vou- 

drez. 
Je ne me soucie pas de tout 

ce qu'il peut faire. 
Prenez tout ce que vous 

aimez le mieux. 
Je suis pret a tout ce que vous 

voudrez. 
Eile s 'applique a tout ce qui 

peut lui etre utile. 

Quoi que ce soit qu'il vous- 

ccrive, dites-le-moi. 
Ne parlez de quoi que ce soft* 
11 reussit a quoi que ce soit 

qu'il s 'applique. 
On lui dira la meme chose, 

a qui q;ie ce soit qu'il s'a- 

dresse. 
11 ne se soucie de qui que ce 

SOit, 

Je n'ai vu qui que ce soit. 
II no connoit qui que ce self. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



2CJ 



1 spoke to nobody whatever* 
Do not talk to any body. 
Whoever we may be, it is 

nothing to you. 
To whomever you may 

speak, do not mention that 

affair. 
iVhoevrr you may be, I do 

not fear you, 
[25.] Whoever he is that 

speaks to you, give him 

an answer. 
Whoever he is, he is in the 

wrong. 
Whoever speaks English 

shall be lined. 
Whoever does not learn his 

lesson, shall be marked. 
[26.] The same author has 

written other books. 
I 'shall speak to him or to 

her, myself. 
Write your letter yourself* 

They wrong themselves. 

[28.] Ptople say, people 
talk, people believe, peo- 
ple fancy, people do not 
know, &c. 

May / know, &c. 

Has any one spoken to you ? 

May / ask you ? 

Has c.ny one seen you ? 

May we go along this street ? 

May vje see the Queen's 
apartments ? 

77 is said,. it is reported, it 
is asserted, it is doubted, 
it has been proposed, // 
has been resolved, &c. 

The letters have not yet 
keen received. 



Je n'ai parle a qui que ce soit* 
Ne parlez a qui que ce soit. 
Qui que nous soy oris, pen 

vous importe. 
A qui que vous parliez, n© 

dites rieh de cette affaire. 

Qui que vous soyez, je ne 

vous crains pas. 
Qui que cc Soil qui VOUS parle, 

repondez-lui. 

Qui que ce soit, il a tort. 

Quiconqne parlera Anglois, 
sera mis a Pamende. 

Qui con que ne saura pas sa 
leeon, sera marque. 

Le mime auteur a fait d au- 
tres livres. 

Je iui parlerai m&i-meme. 

Ecrivez votre lettre vous-^ 

me mem 
lis se font tort a eux-memes 9 
Ou dit, on parle, on croir, 

on s' imagine, on ne sait 

pas, &c. 

Teut-on savoir? 

Vous-n-t-on parle ? 

Peut-0/z vous demander ? v 

Vous a-t-07/ vu ? 

Peut-wr passer par cette rue? 

Peut-0« voir les apparte- 
mens de la Reine i 

On dit, on rapporte, on as, 
sure, on doute, on a pro- 
pose, on a lesolu, &c. 

On n'a pas encore recu fes 
lc tires. 



*o8 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Great preparations have 
bee?i made for the recep- 
tion of «,.•'•• . 

Great rejoicings <were rmde 
at St. James's on the 
Queen's birthday. 

Great news <was received by 
the last mail. 

A courier has been dispatch 

ed to the French court. 
// is believed, that war 

will be declared against 

France. 
// nvas said so, but contrary 

news has been received 

this week. 



On a fait de grands prepa- 
ratifs pour la reception 
de ► . . . 

On a fait de grandes rejouis- 
sances a St. James, le jour 
de la naissanee de la Reine. 

On a recu dc grandes nou- 
velles par l'ordinaire der- 
nier. 

On a depeche on courrier a 
la cour de France. 

On croit qu'on declarera la 
guerre a la France, 

On le disoit, mais on a recti 
des nouvelles contraires 
cette semaine-ci. 



SECTION VII. 
Supplying Pronouns, le, en, y. 

t. It, or so, is sometimes rendered by le; as, give it 

to me, donnez-le-moi; I will give //• to you, je <vous le 
d-onnerai; I think so, je le crois. 

In some instances the English for le is not expressed. 

*• Qf> f rom > with, by, about. Sec, him, her, it, them,. 
some, any, &C, and thence, by en; as, do not speak of it 
to me ; ne m'en parlez pas. 

J. To it, there, therein, in it, hi them, about it, abort 
them, &c, hy y ; as, I will not be against it, je ne m'yt 
oppcurai pas. These pronouns are called supplying 
because they stand not only for one preceding word, but 
sometimes for whple sentcne s, and are chiefly used in^ 
stead of the pronouns, lui\ elk ; eux, elUs. 

♦4. Le and en are applied either to persons or things,, 
and_y to things only; except in a few instances, and'in 
an answer to a question ; as, Do you think of roe J Yes,. 
I do ;. Ptnuz.vQus *- moi ?■ Qui> j'y faisc*. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 209 

5. Le put after ce i when we speak of things, is de- 
clinable ; as, Are these your horses ? Yes, they are : Sont* 
ce la vos che<vaux F Oui y ce les sent. I say when we speak 
of things ; because, when we speak of persons, we make 
use of the personal pronouns ; as, Are these your bro- 
thers ? Yes, they are : SonUce la <vos freres P Oui y ce sort* 
eux> and not ce Us sont. 

It is the opinion of several, that le is declinable after an adjective 
in the feminine singular only, in the following and similar expressions 
spoken by women ; I was frightened, and I am so still ; je fui ef~ 
fraye'e et la suis encore : of others, .that it would be more proper 
ta say, et je le suis encore* P'augelaSy the Abbe Cirardy Restaut, the 
French Academy, &c, are for the latter j so that there can be no 
doubt. 



Supplying Pronouns exemplified for the Scholars 
Practice. 

[1.] Will you give it him Le lui donnerez-vous ? 

[or her] ? 

Have you given it him [or Le lui avez-vous donne? 

her] ? 

I have promised it him [or J e le lui ai promis. 

her]. 

I have not promised it him Je ne le lui ai pas promis, 

[or her]. 

Have you sent it to them ? Le leur avez-vous envoye ? 

I j not sent it to them. Je ne le leur ai pas envoye. 

Have you told it him [or Le lui avez-vous dit ? 

her] ? 

I hare not told it him [or Je ne le lui ai pas dit. 

her]. 

Do nor tell it him [or her]. Ne le lui elites pas. 

Do you know // ? Le savez-vous ? 

She does know it, Elle ne le sait pas. 

I do not know //. Je ne le sais pas. 

He told me something, will II m'a dit quelque chose, U 

you know it? voulez-vous savoir ? 

Ask him, I will not tell it Demandez-/^-lui, jc ne veux 

you. pas vous U dire. 



2fO 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Why will you not tell it 

me ? 
Because he forbade me. 
Tell it me. 

1 will never tell // you* 
Do you believe iff. 
I do not believe it. 
She believes it. 
[2.] Give me some. 
Do not give him [or her] 

any. 
Wil you give him [or her] 

any P 
Do not speak of it to him 

[or to her]. 
Did you Sjteak 0/" it to him 

f*r to her] ? 
I did not say a word of iU 
Will you have *«y ? 
Take some. 

Give him [or her] some. 
Will you be satisfied w/VA 

i / /> 
I will not meddle with it. 
I am sorry for it. 
I am very glad of it. 
She wonders at it. 
She complains of it. 
He is overjoyed a/ //. 
I will not hear any more 

about it. 
What do you say to it? 
I wonder at it. 
She will repent it. 
I am sure of //. 
Have you any money ? Yes, 

I have some. 
She has none. 
Will you join with us P 
I come thence. 
Do you know any thing of 

itP 



Pourquoi ne voulez-vous pas 

me le dire ? 
Parce qu'il me /'a defendu. 
Dites-Zf-moi. 
Je ne vous le dirai jamais. 
Le croyez-vous ? 
Je ne le crois pas. 
Elle le croit. 
Donnez-mVtf. 
Ne lui en donnez pas 

Lui en donnerez-vous ? 

Ne lui en parlez pas. 

Lui en avez-vous parle ? 

Je nen ai pas dit le mot. 
En voulez-vous ? 

Prenez-<r#. 

Donnez-lui-^;/. 

£« serez-vous content ? 

Je ne veux pas m*en meler, 

I'en suis fache. 

yen suis bien aise. 

Elle sV* etonne. 

Elle s f «f plaint. 

11 sV* rejouit. 

Je nV« veux plus entendre 

parier. 
QuV« dites-vous ? 
JV;/ suis surpris. 
Elle sV* repentira. 
JV;/ suis siir. 
Avez.vousdePargent ? Oui, 

j'<v? 'A. 
Elle nV// a point. 
Eu voulez-vous etre ? 
JV/y viens. 
En savez-vous quelque. 

chose ? 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



211 



I know nothing of it. 
He shall know nothing of it. 
Have you any ? 
[3.] Have you been there? 
Have you thought of it ? 
I have not yet been there. 
S'e was forced to it. 
Has he consented to it ? 
I shall never consent to it. 
They have been against it. 
Do not think of// any more. 
The government have wisely 

provided 'for it. 
The King will not be against 

it. 
I am prepared for it. 
Will you go t hi the r ? 
You pay no attention to it. 
Mind it. 
I shall mind it. 
1 have added many new ob- 
servations to //. 
[4,] He is a traitor \ do not 

go to him. 
He is aa honest man ; trust 

to him. 
Do you think of me ? Yes, 

I do. 
[j.] Are these your books ? 

Yes, they are. 
Are these your pens ? Yes, 

they are. 
Are those your father's 

horses ? Yes, they are. 

Are these your favours ? 

Yes, they are. 
' Are these your sentiments ? 

Yes, they are. 
Are these your reasons ? 

Yes, thej are. 



Je n'en saii rien. 
II n'en saura rien. 
En avez-vous ? 

Y avez-vous etc ? 

Y avez-vous pen^e ? 

Je n'_v ai pas encore ete. 
Eilej 3 ete forcee. 

Y a-t-il consenti ? 

Je x\'y consenti rai jamais, 

Us s'y sunt opposes. 

N'j pensez plus. 

Le gouvernement y a sage* 

meet pourvu. 
Le Roi ne s'j opposera pas. 

]\y suis prepare. 

Y Vou-ez-vous aller ? 
Vous n'y prenez pas garde. 
Prenez y garde. 

J'y prendrai garde. 

Yy ai ajoute plusieus nou- 

velles remarques. 
C'est un traitre ; ne vousjr 

fiez pas. 
C'est un honnete homme : 

fiez-vous-7. 
Pensez-vous a moi ? Oui, 

Yy pense. 
Sont-ce la vos livres ? Oui, 

ce les sont, 
Sont-ce la vos plumes ? Oui, 

ce les sont. 
Sont-ce la les chevaux de 

votre pere ? Oui, ce les 

sont. 
Sont-cc la vos amities ? Oui, 

ce ies sont. 
Sont-ce la ves sentimens ? 

Oui, ce les sont. 
Sont ce la vos raisons ? Oui, 

ce les sont. 

I 



212 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Is that your penknife ? Yes, 
it is. 

Are they your sisters? Yes, 

they are* 
Are these his brothers ? 

Yes, they are. 
Are these her cousins ? Yes, 

they are. 
Are these your brothers ? 

Yes, they are. 
Is it your cousin ? Yes, 

it is. 



Est-ce la votre canif ? Oui, 

ce /'est. 
Sont-ce la vos sceurs ? Oui, 

ce sont elles. 
Sont-ce la ses freres ? Qui, 

ce sont eux. 
Sont-ce la ses cousines ? Oui, 

ce sont elles, 
Sont.ce la vos freres? Oui, 

ce sont eux. 
Est-ce votre cousin ? Oui, 

c'est lui: 



CHAP. IV. 

Rules and Observations upon the Degrees of 
Comparison. 

Obs. t^ RAMMARIANS seem to be in a mistake 
^-* about the degrees of comparison ; for compa- 
rison implies a relation to another thing, with which the 
comparison is made : wherea^ the positive is the adjective 
in it's natural state, without relation to another thing; as 
when I say, this house is pretty; cctte maison est belle, 
there is in fact no comparison at all. However, if by de- 
grees of comparison we mean different manners of express- 
ing the quality of something, there are three; the posi- 
tive, the comparative and the superlative, 

i. When the adjective is compared in an equal, higher, 
or less degree, it is called comparative, which comparison 
is made in French by placing before it plus, more ; mews, 
less ; j/, so ; aussi, as, &c. 

2. Plus and moins are commonly followed by the par- 
ticle que y and, when a verb comes immediately after it, 
that verb hns the negative particle tie before it ; as, he 
was richer than was believed ; il ctoit plus rkke c^x'on ne 
croyoit* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 213 

Except, when the following verb is in the infinitive 
mood, or preceded by a conjunction, tie must be left out ; 
as, he finds himself more undisturbed in the country than 
in town ; // se trowve plus tranquille a la campagne, que 
d'etre a la ville, or que s'il <v*voit a la <ville. 

3. Si, so; tant, so much, as much, as many, so many, 
comparatively used, are always used negatively ; as you 
are not so rich as he, vous n'etes pas si rkbe que hi; he 
has not so many friends as you, il n'a pas tant d'amis que 
<vous. In other case?, aussi, or autant, is to be used ; ex- 
cept in an interrogation, where si and tant may be used 
eithe? with or without a negation, according to the inter- 
rogation being affirmative or negative. 

4. When plus, msins, autant, tant, are immediately 
followed by a substantive, that substantive must be pre- 
ceded by the preposition de ; as, more money, plus d'^zr- 
gent ; less credit, moins de credit; so much pain, autant 
de peine; so many rings, tant de bagues. 

5. When the verb avoir, or etre, is before .plus, moins, 
autant, &c. s and the same verb follows que, the second 
avoir, or etre, is more properly left out in the French, 
though it may be expressed in the English 3 and we are 
contented with que and the pronoun only, or any other 
noun i as, you have more money than I, or we have, 
*vous avez, plus d' argent que moi ; or que nous; or some- 
times vous a<vez plus d' argent, que je n'en at, or que vous 
n'en avons ; Miss A* is as sensible -as she is, Mademou 
selle A, est aussi sen see qu'elle, and not quelle est. Ex- 
cept when que is followed by a conjunction, or by the 
same verb in the infinitive mood, with a government after 
it, or a preposition ; as, you have more pleasure, than if 
you had great riches, vous avex plus de plaisir, que si <vous 
aviez beaucoup de richesses, or que d 'avoir beaucoup de 
rkhesses ; you are more happy, than if you were married, 
vous etes plus heureux que si *vous etiez marie, or que d'etre 
marie. 

d. When plus and moins are adverbs of quantity, or 
meet with a noun of number, the word than, which im- 
mediately follows more or less, is expressed by the pre- 
position de: as, he has more than ten guineas ; il a plus 
<ie dix guinees* 



2i4 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

7. When the quality is raised to the highest degree, .or 
depressed to the lowest, it is called superlative. 

8. The definitive article, le, la y &c, are put before ///'*, 
mains, mcilhur y pire, &c, in the superlative degree ; ai:d,. 
when the superlative is followed by the noun with which 
the comparison is made, this noun must be in the second 
case> as : he is the best of my friends ; il est le fneilleur 
de mes amis, or c'tst le meilleur de mes amis, 

9. When the superlative is followed by a verb, that 
verb mu^t be in the subjunctive mood, preceded by qui % 
dont, or que, rs, the most happy woman alive, la fern me 
la plus heureuse qui soit ; the most happy man that I 
know, Vhomme le plus heureux que je conmisse. 

10. Sometimes a quality is mentioned in the highest 
degree without comparison ; and this is done in French 
by placing adverbs of exaggeration before it ; as, very 
rich; trh-riche: very polite; trh-poli: extremely ob- 
ligel; infinimetk ghlige. 









3*2.3 



3*H.3 

3 C5 ~ 



* 3 



o 

o 

s 

> 

9* 
> 

H 

w 






FRENCH TONGUE. 

as y g ?* s ?> ! 

b 
k 



til 



b 

Co 

Co ^ 



s -. 



Ok) 






3 


T2. 


*H. 




o 


•"J 


—t 


Co 




r» 


rt 


& 


3* 


*• 


w 


•o 


o- 






•^ 


*t 


pa 


99 


R 


o 

km 


l-v- 


TJ 










s 


ST 


CI 


o 


e* 








& 

8 


3 
o 
















3 






c\ 


w o 


a: o 


"*2 


a 


hr^ '-^ 


"SLIL 




o 






Co 




ZL — 


C c 


Cj 


CO CO 


CO CO 


*S 


3 3 


3 3 


k 


w o - 


B3 CJ 

c c 




=5*: 


"3 »T3 


< < 


D - p* 






ft: ft; 


fti ftJ 


«^* 


c c 




3 D 


«■* 


co en 


OB CO 


<-»• -*• 


N. 


"S "a 


o »■ 




s* 


rt CD 







3 3 






5 55 



> 



V 


w 




X 




o 


** 


M 


b 


►d 




H 




1— 1 


CO 


O 


^ 


fej 


o 


5° 


•§ 




SS 




-S 




I* 





Co* 



^ 



3 



8l5, 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



The Degrees of Comparison exemplified for the 
Scholar's Practice. 



[i.] London is more popu- 
lous than Paris. 

France is larger than Eng- 
land, Ireland, and Scot- 
land. 

The streets of London are 
wider than those of Paris. 

My snuff-box is prettier 
than yours. 

My books are dearer than 
yours. 

He is more idle than his 
brother. 

Your father is richer than 
his. 

His house is greater than 
yours. 

[2.] They are msre forward, 
than I thought. 

He gave me more money, 
than I asked for. 

You have met with more ob- 
stacles, than you thought. 

I have found it easier, than 

I foresaw. 
They have more friends, 

than you believe. 
He has lost more, than he 

he has won. 
You have asked for less, 

than was your due. 
She has worked more than 

her task. 



Londres est plus peuple que 

Paris. 
La France est plus etendue 

que PAngleterre, l'lr- 

lande, et l'Ecosse. 
Les rues de Londres sont plus 

largesque celles de Paris. 
Ma tabatiere est plus belle 

que la votre. 
Mes livres sont plus chers 

que les votres. 
II est plus paresseux que son 

frere. 
Votre pere est plus riche que 

le sien. 
Sa maison est plus grande 

que la votre. 
lis sont plus avances que je 

ne croyois. 
II m'a donne plus d'argent 

que je ne demandois. 
Vous avez trouve ////^ob- 
stacles que vous ne pen* 

siez. 
J'y ai trouve plus de facilite 

que je ne prevoyois. 
lis ont plus d'amis que vous 

ne croyez. 
11 a perdu plus qu'il #'a 

gagne. 
Vous a*ez demande moins 

qu'il ///vous etoit da. 
Elle a fait plus d'ouvrage 

qu'on ne lui avoit pres- 
ent. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



J did not ask far more, than 

was my due. 
Haye you not undertaken 

more, than you were able 

to perform ? 
She is happier, than if she 

tvere married. 

Fh is more contented with 
her, than if he had all tne 
gold of Peru. 

I am quieter in my room, 
than if I were in com- 
pany. 

You look more sickly, than 
while you were in the 
country. 

They are less troubled in the 
country, than if they were 
in town. 

[3.] Ke is not so rich as it 
is said. 

She is not so old as yon be- 
lieve. 

I am not to idle as my bro- 
ther. 

We are not so much sur- 
prised as you think. 

You are not so brave, as you. 
pretend to be. 

They are not 10 learned, as 
they would make us be- 
lieve. 

They are not so proud as to 
despise your praises. 

She is net so vain, as to listen 

to your flatteries. 
I have not won ;i>jnuch as I 

thought. 



tlj 

Je n'ai pas demande plus 
qu'il ns m'etoit du. 

N'avez-vous pas entrepris 

plus que vous ne pouviez 

execute r? 
Elle est phis heureuse fme 

d'etre mariee, ou que si 

elle etoit mariee. 
II est plus content avec elle 

que s'W avoit tout Tor da 

Perou. 
je suis plus tranquille c\zx\% 

ma chambre que si j'etois 

en compagme. 
Vous parors^ez plus malade 

que lorsqne veus etiez a la 

campagne. 
Us sont moins deranges a la 

campagne, que j'ils etoient 

a la ville. 
II n'est pas si riche £«'on le 

dit. 
Elle n'est pas si agee que 

vous croyez. 
Je ne suis pas si paresseux 

que m©n frere. 
Nous ne sommes pas si sur* 

pris que vous pensez. 
Vous n'etes pas si braves 

que vous dites. 
II ne sont pas si savans 

qu\\s voudroicnt nous 

le fa ire croire. 
Elles ne sont pns ti fleres 

que de mepriser vos lou- 

aoges. 
Elle n'est pas si vaine que 

d'ecouter vos flatteries. 
Je iv a i p.is tent gagne que 

■je pen-sois. 



Zi% 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



lie has not lost so much as 
you. 

j^4 ] She r has not so much- 
money as you think. 

We have not so much self- 
love, as to prefer our- 
selves to you. 

You have not so much busi- 
ness, as to hinder you 
<from applying yourself to 
the study of the French 
language. 

They have not so much cou- 
rage, /is they pretend to. 

They have not so much plea- 
sure in the country as in 
town. 

[5.] I am as much surprised 
as you. 

He is as learned as his elder 
brother. 

She is as lovely as her sister. 

We are as quiet as you* 

You are as brisk as he. 
They are as rich as your 

♦father. 
They are as witty as his 

sisters. 
1 have as many friends as you. 
He is as covetous as ever* 

,She has as much beauty 04 

formerly. 
We have as much trouble as 

you. 
You have as many books as 

I hav.e. 



II n'a pas tant perdu que 

vous. 
Elle n'a pas tant Sargent 

que vous pensez. 
Nous n'avons pas tant d'a- 

mour-propre, que de nous 

preferer a vous. 
Vous n'avez pas tant d'oc- 

cupations, que vous ne 

puissiez vous appliquer a 

1'etude de la langue Fran- 

<coise. 
lis n'ont pas tant de courage 

qu'ils se fiattent d'en 

avoir. 
Elles n'ont pas tant de plai- 

sir a la compagne qu'k la 

ville. 
Je suis aussi surpris que 

vous. 
II est aussi savant que son 

frere aine. 
Elle est aussi aimable que sa 

soeur. 
Nous sommes aussi tran- 

quilles que vous. 
Vous etes aussi vif que lui. 
lis sont aussi riches que votre 

pere. 
Elles sont aussi spirituelles 

que ses sceurs. 
J'ai autant ^'amis que vous. 
II a autant d'avarice que 

jamais. 
Elle a autant de beaute 

^'autrefois. 
Nous avons auians de peine 

que vous. 
Vous avez autant de livre* 

que moi« 



FRENCH TONGUE 

They have as much honour 

as your countrymen. 
They have as much love for 

the sciences as their bro- 
thers. 
Y#Gr suit is more worn 

than mine. 
Her apron is cleaner than 

her sister's. 
You are more learned than I 

am. 
He is older than you. 
She is more lovely than he. 
You are older than she is. 
[6.] My brother has more 

books than you. 
We have more pleasure than 

they. 
I have lost more than ten 

guineas. 
She has brought him for her 

portion more than ten 

thousand poands. 
She has less vivacity than 

her sister. 
We have less trouble than 

you. 
They have spent more than a 

thousand pounds a year. 
He owes more than four 

thousand pounds. 
He has written more than ten 

letters to day. 
I am more than half per- 
suaded of it. 
My brother is more than 

twenty years old. 
I am no more than twelve 

yeass old. 
I have more friendship for 

lii'm, than he has for me. 

L 



lis ont autant </' hon near que 

vos compatriotes. 
Elles ont autant Mainour 
-pour les sciences que leurs 

fr£res. 
Votre habit est plus use que 

le mien. 
Son tablier est plus Wane 

que celui de sa sceur. 
Vous etes plus savant que 

moL 
II est plus age que vous. 
Elle est plus aimable que lui. 
Vous etes plus age ^'elle. 
Mon frere a plus de livres 

que vous.. 
Nous avons plus de plaisir 

qu'eux. 
J'ai perdu plus de dix guu 

nees. 
Elle lui a apporte en manage 

plus de dix mille livres 

sterling. 
Elle a moins de vivacite que 

sa sceur. 
Nous avons twins de peine 

que vous* 
II ont depense plus de miile 

livres sterling par an. 
II doit plus de qua t re mille 

livres sterling. 
II a ecrit plus de dix lettres 

aujourd'hui. 
J'en suis plus d'k moitic 

persuade. 
Mon frere a plus de vingt 

ans. 
Je n'ai pas plus de douze 

ans. 
J'ai plus */'amitie pour lui 

qu*\\ n'en a pour rooL 
z 



220 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

She has more money than I Elle a plus d'argent que mou 

have. 

I have not more cunning Je n'ai pas plus de finesse 

lhan they. ^«'eux. 

$ take more pains than you. Je prgnds plus de peine que 

vous. 

You have less pride /&7// he. Vous avez moins ^/'orgueil 

> que lui. 

J 7.] He is the most skilful C'est le plus habile medecin 

physician in the whole de toute la viile. 

city. 

He is the idlest of them all. C'est le plus paresseux de. 

tous. 

She is the loveliest of them C'est la plus aimable de 

alL routes* 

England has given birth to L'Angleterre a donne nais- 

the most skilful philoso- sance anx plus frabiles vt&~ 

phers in Europe. F losoohes de 1'' Europe. 

£8. ] She is the most lovely C'est la plus aimable demoi- 

lady I know. sclle que je couuoisse. 

It is the greatest piece of C'cst la plus grande sottise 

folly you can ever com- que vous puissLz jamais 

mit. faire. 

He is the greatest ninny you C'est Thomme le plus sot que 

e\ev saw. vous puissiez voir. 

The French is the most use- Le Francois est la Jangue la 

ful language you £an pos- plus utile qu'on puisse ap- 

sibly learn. prendre. 

J9.] I am <vcry glad of it. J'en suis bien aise. 

I am very much concerned at J 'en suis m-j-mortifie. 

it. 

He is a 'very polite man* C'est tin horwme //t-j-poli. 

He is 'very diligent. II est /nk-diligenc. 

She is 'very lovely. Etle est fri*-aimable. 

I am much indebted to you. Je vous suis //^j-redcva- 

ble. 

I am infinitely obliged to Je vous suis infinwunt obli- 

you. go. 

I cr is 'very rich. Son pere est tres riche. 

are *very much persuaded Nous en sommes //vVper. 

of it. suades. 



FRENCH TONGUE. tmn 

I am your most humble Je suis votre /m'-humble 

servant. serviteur. 

Your most obedient servant. Votre /rvi-cbeissant servi- 
teur. 

The Exceptions p. £15, exemplified. 

He is the best man in the C'est le meilleur homme dgr 

world.. monde. 

Your pen is letter than Votre plume est meilleure que 

mine. la mienne. 

French fruit is better than Les fruits de France sont 

English, meilleurs que ceux d'An- 

gleterre. 

It is the best reason you can C'est la meilleure raison que 

give him* vous puissiez lui donncr. 

They are the best people in Ce sont les meilleure s gens da 

the world. monde. 

Flis theme is better written Son theme est mieux fait que 

than yours. le votre. 

The least thing makes me La moindre chose m'enrhu- 

catch cold. me. 

His writing is 'very bad; Son ecriture est tres~mau. 

but yours is worse. <vaise ; mais la votre est 

pi re. 

Let the worst come to the Au //jailer. 

worst. 

I shall do it to the best of my Je le ferai le mieux qu'il me 

power. sera possible. 

He obliged me the least of II m'a oblige le mains de 

any. tous. 

It is the least thing you can C'est le moins que vous puis- 

do. sie^ faire. 



t 1 



2*2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 



CHAP. V. 



Rules and Observations upon Verbs. 

HP HE verb agrees In person and number with it's sub- 
-*- ject, or nominative case. All nouns whatever, in 
grammatical construction, are of the third person ; as, 

the air prepossesses ; the behaviour engages ; lair pre\ienr, 
les manieres eng agent. 

i. Two or more nouns in the singular number have 
verbs agreeing with them in the plural number; as, the 
father and the mother have consented to it, le fire et la mere 
y ont consenti. 

Except when they are joined by the disjunctive con- 
junction qu ; as, on le psre ou la mere j a consenti. 

3, The verb following the conjunction ni is always put 
piural ; as, neither rnudress nor force can move him, 
ni la douceur ni id force ne pewvent le'mcuzoir* 

t Oss. If many nouns, or pronouns, singular or plural, be sejra. 
rated by mals^ rler;, tout, &c, then the verb agrees in number and 
person with the noun or pronoun which follows these words; as, 
not only his estate and health, but also his reputation, has suffered by 
it : notu-setiltmiH ses blent et sa sante, inais .encore sa reputMmm en a 
souffert. 

J. Collective partitive* nouns, as, infinite', nomlre, 
la plupart 3 quantitc 3 troupe, multitude f, &C, followed 

* They are called partitive, and not general, because they denote 
some parts of a whole. For want of making that distinction, Rettaut 
seems to contradict himself; for fage 34 of his French Grammar, 9th 
Edition, he says, thzt fir$t t pcuple, arr.e'e, are collective nouns; and, 
page 174, he say;-, that when the verb has for it's nominative a collec- 
tive noun in the singular, used by itself, or followed by a noun in the 
plural, the verb is put in the plural, which is false; because forit,p a-. 
ple armi:, always govern the verb in the singular. 

+ Except from these, la mv*\:\ le tier:, le fUartf which always go- 
vern the verb in die singular. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 223 

by a noun in the plural, require the verb in the plural; as,, 
moat men are of that sentiment; la plupart des hom?ncs 
sont de ce sentiment* 

When they are used by thenrselves, they generally govern the verb 
in the plural, if ihey have a relation to a noun in the plural which id* 
understood. La plupart^ according to the French Academy, almost 
always governs the veib in the plural, whether the noun to which it 
relates be in the plural or not. 

6. When ce is the nominative to the verb etre, this verb' 
is put in the singular, if it be followed by the personal 
pronoun nous or <vcus ; as, it is we, c' est nous;, is it you, 
my friends ? est.ee <vous, mes amis ; but it is always put in 
the plural, when followed by eux 3 elhs> or a substantive 
in the plural • as, it is they, ce so?it eux y these are my 
bocks, ce sont la mes litres; were these your reasons ? 
e'toient-ce la <VOS raisons P 

7. After the determining pronoun qui, the verb is put 
in the same number and person, as the word to which qui 
relates; as, you who speak, vqus qui par/ez: we who study, 
nous qui etudiois. 

8. The verb is commonly repeated in French, 1st when 
the first member of the sentence is affirmative, and the 
second negative; or the first negative, and the second 
affirmative; as, we ought to expect every thing of God, 
and nothing of ourselves, on doit attendre tout de Dim 
et ne rien attendre de soi-meme ; our reputation does not 
depend on the caprice of men, but on the praise-worthy 
actions which we do, notre reputation ne depend pas dpi 
caprice des hzmmeSy ma is elle depend des actions louabL-s qne 
nous faisons. 

2dly. When the verb is active in the first member, 
and passive or reflected in the second ; as, lazy men 
are not esteemed, because they do not deserve it ; on 
n'estime^tfj les faineans, parce qu'ils ne meritent pas d'etre 
estimes. 

N. B. Three things are chiefly to be considered in 
verbs, «v/». the use of tense?, the use of moods, and the 
government of veris. 



L 4 



224 A GRAMMAR OF THE 



SECTION I. 



The Use of the Tenses* 

i. The present denotes the actual or habitual action or 
passion of the subject : as j'e'cris, which answers to the 
English* I write, I do write, I am writing. 

This tense is often used in familiar discourse instead of the future, 
but then it must be joined to lome words which denote futurity; as, 
1 shall be wkh you in a moment, je suis a i>ous dans un moment. It is 
also used, as in all other tongues, particularly in the French, in ora- 
tions, pcetry, or set discourses, instead of Lome other tenses, to repre« 
tent an action past in a more lively and emphatical manner. 

2. The imperfect tense represents the time of an event 
under two points of view, or relative circumstances. 

j st. The imperfect represents a past event, as present 
at the time of another event past, and mentioned or un- 
derstood in the sentence; and then it exactly answers the 
English expression, / <was doing, as I was reading when 
you came into my room ; je lisois quand wous ent rates dans 
ma chamhre* The action of reading is past in itself, but 
it is present in respect of your entrance into my room : I 
had a design to speak to him, but he was not at home, 
/'avois desstin de lui parler> +nais il »'etoit pas chez /*/*• 
My design to speak to him, though past in itself, was pre- 
sent in respect of the circumstance uuderstood, when J 
*went to his house* 

sdly. The imperfect is used to represent a continuity, 
a repetition, a habitude, and then it exactly answers the 
English expression, / used to do; as this man altered his 
mind every day, cet bourne changeoit tcus les jours de 
dissew. The act of altering his mind being repeated, 
requires the imperfect. Lewis XIV loved war too 
much, Louis &IV aimoit trap la guerre. Here also 



French tongue. **5 

the imperfect must be used to express a habitual dispo- 
sition, 'But should we specify how many times, or how 
long an action has b^en repeated, or the exact duration 
of the' habitude, the preterit ought to be employed in- 
stead of the imperfect; as, this man altered his mind 
- three times, or, for three days, cet homm* changea.d? 
dessein trois /bis, or, pendant trois Jsurs, and not chan~ 
geeit. Lewis XIV loved war too much all his life, 
Louis X/Z^aima trap la guerre pendant toute sa <ure 3 and not 
ai?noit, 

N.B. The imperfect is used after si, if, -instead of the subjunc- 
tive mood, expressed by should, could, would, .< in English: as; \£ 
you" would conve, si vqus vouliez r vemr : if virtue should re.iga, si la 
1/ertu reguoit. 

3. The preterit denotes an action entirely past, in a 
time also entirely past : as, he was happy last week, 
last month, last year; // fut heureux la semaine passee> 
le mois passe ^ Va?inee passe'e. If the time be not en- 
tirely past, we make use of the compound of the pre- 
sent tense ; as, he has been happy this week, this month, 
this year: il a etc heureux cette semaine-ci> ce mois a' f . 
cette anne'e-ci* 

The preterit is used when we speak of an action done but once 
or very seldom, and the time is specified ; as, Edward -III t«ok 
Calais the 3d of August, 134.7; Edouard \\\ prit Calais/* -3 d'^w/, 
1347. If the time be not specified, we more commonly use the 
compound of the present: as, Etfouaru III a pvh Calais. 

We commonly make use of the compound of the present tense 
before defuls, since : as, there has been a great battle, since I saw 
you, il y a eu une grande batailk, depuis que je ne vous al va. Some- 
times we make use of this tense instead of the compound of the future; 
as, will you have done soon ? avcz-i/wu bientCt fait, instead of, aurez- 
n*us bkr.tU fait ? 

4. The future is used as in other languages. 

5. The conditional is usad as in Enghlh, but never 
after the conjunctions which govern thQ subjunctive mood,' 
though it has been erroneously placed by some grammarians 
among the tenses of that mood. 



tiG A GRAMMAR OF THE 

The Tenses of Verbs exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice. 

{Chap. V. 1 .] The sun Le soleil luit. 

shines. 

The summer it a very agree- L'ete est une saison tri- 
able season, agr£ah!e. 

Winter does, not please me. L'hiver ne me plait pis. 

The stars begin to appear. Les etoiles commencent a pi- 

roitre. 

The days are very much Les jours sont tres-alonges. 

lengthened. 

These meadows are very Ces prairies sont tres-belles. 

beautiful, 

[2.] The brother and sister Le frere et la sceur s'y sont 

were against it. opposes. 

The father and mother have Le pere et la mere y ont 

consented to it. consent!. 

[3.] Neither he nor she Ni lui ni elle ne lul ont 

has spoken ro him [or to parle. 

her.J 

Either your brother, or- yoi*r Ou votre f*6re, on. votre 

sister, has told it you, fceur, vous Ya dit. 

[4.] Prayers, threats, #*- Prieres, menaces, rien ne 

thing can move him. peut l'emouvoir. 

Honours, riches, pleasures, Honneurs, richesses, plahirs>. 

t<very thing disappears at tout disparoit a la mort. 

ckalh. 

[$.] A vast number of peo- Une iofinitede gens^ sont les 

pie are duped by one dupes les uns des autres. 

another. 

ft great number of ships are Un grand nombre, de vais, 

ready to sail. seaux sont prets a faire 

voile. 

Most part .of the goods ha<ve La plupart des .marehandkes 

been bold. ont etc vendues. 

p6.] // was I who saw it. C**sl moi qui Wat vu. 

It ijas we who hindered C\st nous qui Yawns em- 

him. pechc. 

J: was you who made the C\st vous qui a<v z fait le 

noise. bruit,. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
// was they who heard it. 



227 



[Sect. I. 2,] When I was 

young, I /<rv ed play greatly . 
1 had a mind to write to 

him. 
He had a mind to come aiird 

see you. 
When I was in London, I 

used to go very often to 

the^lay. 
You 'were scarcely gone, 

when he arrived. 
I expected nothing , else. 

He was afraid to interrupt 

yoo. 
She was not so angry, as she 

seemed^ t<ybe. 
I was in the Park, when he 

spoke to you.. 
I was in London, when the 

duke of Cumberland died. 

He seemed much surprised at 

that news. 
Where were you, when the 

King was crowned? I was 

in France. 
He was very sprightly in his 

youth. 
He had a great many friends 

in London. . 
He was not persuaded of 

what he said. 
My father was seventy years 

old when he died. 
His mother was forty years 

old, , when, she married 1 

again. 
i/.yeu would speak to him 

\qr to her.] 



Ce sont eux qui Vont en ten* 

du. 
Quand y/fois. jeune, y aimois 

beaucoup le jeu. 
]'a-vo/s envie de lui ecrire. 

11 a<vo it erwie de venir vous 

voir. 
Quand j'etois a Londres, 

j % alldis t r es - s o u v en t a ia* 

corned ie. 
A peine etiez* vous parti,- 

qu'il arriva, 
Je ne m'attendois a rien au~ 

tre chose. 
II await peur de vous inter- 

rompre. . 
Elle n'etoit pas si fachee 

qu*elk le parsissoit. 
Ye'tois au Pare quand il vous 

par la* ; 
Ye'tois a Londres, quand le 

due de Cumberland moo- 
rs tv. 
II parol ssoit fort surpris de 

cette nouvelle. 
Ou ///Vz-vous, quand le Roi 

fut couronne ? J'e'/ois en 

France. 
II etoit tres-vif dans sa jeu-- 

nesse. 
II awoit beauconp d'amis a 

Londres. • 
II n'e'toit pas persuade de ce 

qu'il disoit.. 
Mon pere aw*t so»xante-ef- - 

dix ans,- quand il mourut. • 
§a mere await quarante ans 

quand elle se remaria. 

Si vous lui parliez* • 



L 6; 



2*S 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



If you should write to him 
[or to her.] 

If she would be angry at it. 

If I should go and see him. 

If he would employ half his 
time. 

If she would apply herself to 
music. 

If we could "know. 

If they would apply them- 
selves to something use- 
fui. 

if they would listen to flat- 
teries. 

[3.] I have written six let- 
ters to day. 

i&^ you seen him to day ? 

1 have not spoken to him far 

to her} to day. 
Where have you few* to 

day ? 
I; £tfiY been in the Park;, 
J saw him to day. 
She went to the play this 

week. 
He has not studied this 

week. 
I «u^#/ into the country this 

week. 
You have lost your time this 

week . 
What have you done this 

week ? 
We haw* spent a great deal 

of money this week. 

You have done more work 
ihan I this week. 

1 his morth has not been 
very sharp. 



Si vous lui ecrrviez* 

<S/elIe s'en fachoit. 

Si je Y allots voir. 

ff*il employoit la moitie de 

son temps. 
«5V elle s'appliqutit a la mu- 

sique. 
«S7 nous savions, 
S'ils % y appliquoient a quelqtJ6 

chose d'utile. 

& elles prttoient 1'oreiUe 
aux flatteries. 

]'ai ecrit six lettres aujour- 
d'hui. 

L'^t^-vous *vu aujour- 
d'hui ? 

Je ne lui at pas parte au- 
jourd'hiw. 

Ou avez-vous //*' aujour- 
d'hui ? 

Vat ete au Pare. 

je l\z/ i;a aujourd'hui. 

Elle a ete a la comedie cette 
semaine. 

II tfa pas etudie cette se~ 
maine-ci. 

YaieWi. la campagne cette 
semaine-ci. 

Vous avez perdu rotre 
temps cette semaine-ci. 

QuWra-vous fait cette se- 
maine ? 

Nous avons depense beau- 
coup d'argent cette sc* 
maine-ci. 

Vous avez fait plus d'ou- 
vrage que moi cette se- 
maine-ci. 

Ce moisicLn/o- pas ete tr£s- 
rutie. 



It has been very hot this 

month. 
It has rained all this month. 
It has not snowed this month. 
It has been exceeding cold 

this month. 
They have had a plentiful 

harvest this year. 
This year has not been very 

favourable to me. 
•You have been very lucky 

this year. 
They have lost a great deal 

of money this year. 
I have been in France this 

year. 
She died this year. 
He has been very sick this 

year. 
He is arrived from the West 

Indies this year. 
I wrote six letters y ester. 

day *. 
Did you see him yesterday ? 
I did not speak to him [or to 

her] yesterday. 
Where did you go yesterday ? 

I went to the Park. 
I saw him yesterday. 
I met with her "yesterday in 

the street. 
She went to the play last 

week. 
He did not study last week. 

I went into the country last 

week. 
You lost your time last 

week. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 229 

II a fait tres-chaud ce mois. 



II a plu tout ce mois-ci. 

Iln'tf pas neige ce mois-ci. 

II a fait tres-froid ce mois- 
ci* 

On a eu une moisson abon- 
dante cette annee-ci. 

Cette anne-ci ne m'a pas 
ete tres-favorable. 

Vous avez eti tres-heureux 
cette annee-ci. 

lis ont perdu beaucoup d'ar- 
gent cette annee-ci. 

Yaietetvi France cette an- 
nee-ci. 

Elle est morte cette annee-ci. 

II a ete tres-nialade cette 
annee-ci. 

II est revemt des Indes Oc- 
cidentals cette annee-ci* 

\ecrivis hier six lettres. 

Le vztes-vous hier ? 
Je ne lui parlai pas hier. 

Ou /#/*$- vous hier? Je fits 
au Pare. 

Je ie vis hier. 

Je la rencontrai hier dans la 
rue. 

Elle fut a la comedte la se- 
maine passee. 

II v\etudia pas le semaine 
passee. 

Je fus a la campagne la se- 
maine passe* 

Vous perdites votre temps la 
semaine passee. 



• I repeat, purposely, the foregoing examples, to render the different 
uses of Che tenses more intelligible Co che learner, 



2-3P 



A. GRAMMAR OF THE 



What did yon do last week ? Que ffos-vous la semaine 



We spent a great deal of mo- 
ney last week* 

You did more work than I 
last week. 

Last month was not very 

sharp. 
It was exceeding hot last 

month, 
It rained all last month* 
It did not snow last month. 

It was exceeding cold last 
month. . 

They had a plentiful harvest 
last year. 

Last year was not very fa- 
vourable to, me. 

Yon were very lucky last 
year. 

They lost a great deal of mo- 
ney last yean 

1 went to France last year* 

She died last year. 

He was very sick last year; 

He arrived from the West 

Indies last year,. 
How have you been, since I 

had the pleasure of seeing 

you ? 
I have been very sick, since 

I arrived from the East- 
Indies. 
I have received no. tidings 

of him. since he went 

away, 2 



passee r 
Nous depemanus beaucoi:p 

d* argent la seraaine pas- 

sie. 
Vous fites plus d'ouvrage 

que moi la semaine paa* 

see. 
Le mois passe ne fut pas 

tres-rude. 
II fit tres-chaud le mors; 

passe. 
Wplut tout.le moi passe. 
11 ne neigea pas le mois pas* 

se. 
II fit tres-froidle mois pas* 

se. 
On eut une moisson abon- 

dante Panee passee. 
L'annee passee ne. me /;»* 

pas tres-favorable. 
Vous futes tres-heureux Pan* 

nee passee. 
lis perdirent beaucoup d'as- 

gent Pannee passee. 
j'alfai en France Pannee 

passee. 
Elle mourut Pannee passee. 
11 jut tres-malade Pannee 

passee. 
11 arriva des lades Occi- 

dentales l'annee passee. 
Comment vous etes-vous 

parte, depuis que je n'ai 

en le plaisirde vous voir ? 
)\ai cte tres-malado, dcpi:U 

que je suis arrive des hi- 
des Orientates* 
Je x\ ai pas rccu de ses nou* 

velles depuis qu'il ell; 

parti* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 231 

Have you seen him, since he LWfZ-vous <i>«, depuis qu'il 
arrived from France? est arrive de France ? 

Where ha<vt you £«»/?, J/tffe' Ou avez-vom ete\ depuis 
you went out ? que vous etes sorti ? 



SECTION II. 

The Use of the Subjunctive Mood. 

1. The subjunctive mood is used after que, or qui, preceded by a verb 
denoting doubt, wish, fear, command, prohibition, &c.j such are 
craindre, prier, dcuter, soubaiter, permetire, commander, de'fendre, Sec, ; aj, 
his father has forbidden him to go thither; son pent a defendu qu'il y 
allit. But when any of these verbs govern a noun or pronoun, and 
the action of the verb following belongs to the person designated by the 
noun or pronoun, it is. put in the infinitive mood, commonly with the 
preposition de before it; , as in the foregoing example, son pere lui a 
defendu d'y al/er. 

2. The subjunctive mood is likewise- used after que preceded by an 
impersonal verb that denotes a thing ought to be, or to be done; as, I 
must go thither ; iifaut que j y y aille. See the 9th observation upon im- 
personal verbs, 

3. There are some impersonal verbs which govern the indicative 
mood: such are, i I parol r, U y apparence, &c, and those which de- 
note any thing as more positively existing or being done. But, .when 
the same impersonal verbs are used negatively or interrogatively, ..they 
govern the subjunctive mood; as, it is true that you are married; il 
est vrai que vous etes marie'; .is it true, that you are married ? est it vrai 
gue vous soye z marie' f 

4. The subjunctive mood is used after verbs preceded by ne or si, 
used in a doubtful manner, and followed by que or qui; as ,1 do not be- 
lieve, that he has done it; je ne crois pas qu'i/ I'aixtfait ; if you think I 
am an honest man, si vous croye-z, que je sois bonnete bomme. Some gram- 
marians say, that, speaking in the last instance positively, the verb 
following que is put in the indicative mood; as, si vous croyt% que je suit 
bonnete bomme *. 

The indicative mood is more properly used in the foregoing case, af- 
ter the verbs dire, tnoncer, affirmer, and the like, as : if you say, that 
he is an honest man ; si vous dites qu'i/ est bonnete bomme ; Except when 
the verb dire implies a command or prohibition ; as, tell him to come 3 
drtes-lu: qu'//vienne# 

6 The subjunctive mood is used after the verb il semble, it seerns, 
when it implies a doubt, when it means to look as if\ as, it seems that 
you are angry, or, you look as if you were angry; il semble que vous 
soyez facbe. But if that verb imply a persuasion, or have a pronoun 

* N. B. In this last instance, si has the import of £uisquc, and signi- 
fies as) % . 



23 2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

before it, or a governed word afler it, the indicative mood is to be 
used ; as, il me terrible, or, il semble a la compagnie que vous etes facte'. 

J. A verb following another, which is in the subjunctive mood, 
must also be put in the same mood after que or qui ; as, do you be- 
lieve, that he expects I shall come? croyez-vGus qu 1 /'/ j'attende que je 
vienne ? , 

8. The subjunctive mood is used, ist. after quolque, quelque que, quel 
que, &c>. signifying whomever, whatever, &c : as, though you are 
rich, quoique vtus soyez rkbe ; though you are ever so rich,, queique 
tube que *voui soyez. See the 19th and 20th observations upoa inde- 
terminate pronouns, page 197. 

adly, After que used instead of repeating the conjunctions 5/ in the 
second member of a sentence; as, if you study and take pains; si -vcus 
etudiez et que vons preniez de la peine. See the 5th observation upon 
the conjunctions si and que, ch. x. page 294. 

3<Hy, After the pronoun qui or que preceded immediately by a super- 
lative; as, it is the best news you can tell me, Cest la meilieure ncu- 
velle que vous puissiez me dire f 

4thly, After que used instead of de ce que, which governs the indi- 
cative mood ; as, I am sorry he is not come ; je suit facte qu'// ne soit 
pat *venu^ or, de ce qu'il n*ett pat t venu. 

5thly, After the relative pronoun qui or que between two verbs, sc 
as to express some desire, need, or necessity 5 as, I seek a woman who 
is handsome, rich,. and wise, je cbercbe une femme qui soit belle, ricbr, tt 
sage. 

6thly, We elegantly make use of the compound of the preterit of 
the subjunctive m >od after 5;, instead of the compound of the imper- 
fect of the indicative; as, if I. had been informed of it sooner, that 
would not have happened ; si fen eusse ete averti plus tot, cela ne scrtit 
pas arrii>e.\ 

9. The verb which is in the future in English is put in the present in 
French, whenever it ought to be in the subjunctive mood ; as, do ycu 
think, that he will come } . croyecn-'vous qu'/7 vienne? 1 do not believe 
that he will write, je re crcii pas qiw/ ecrive. Except after the verbs 
savoir, assurer, &c, where si signifying whether, must be used in- 
stead of que :■ as, do you know whether he will come ? sa<ve%.>v<<us s'i/- 
viendra ? 

10. The verb, which according to the aforesaid rules, is put in the 
subjunctive mood, must be put in the present tense of thatinooi, if it 
be preceded by a verb in the present or future tense, or in the impera- 
tive ; as do you believe that he will guess it, croyez-veus qu'i/ le de- 
vine ? will. you believe now, that he has written ? croirezvous a present 
qu'i/tf/r ccrit? If the iirst verb be in a*ny other tense, or in a compound 
one, the pieterit of the subjunctive mood is to be used: as, what 
would you have him do? Que vouJricz-'VQus qu'il fit f 

This tense is likewise used, when the verb which is in^the subjunc- 
tive mood is followed by the conjunction si } and a verb in the imper- 
fect tense, or a conditional expression, though the first verb is in the 
present} as, do you believe, that he could guess it, if you would not 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



233 



cell it him r crcytz-vous qu'i/ k devinat, si njous ne k lui disskz pas? { 
<ioubt whether he would have succeeded without the help, ot hia 
rriends, je doute ^\x y \\ eut reussi sans le secours de ses urn'is. 

N. B. As there are some conjunctions, which require the subjunc- 
tive mood, and are every where the same, it will not be amiss to set 
them down here, as I have met with them in other grammars. 



Conjunctions governing the Subjunctive Mood. 



} 



Afin que, pour que, — 

avant que, — — 

sans que, — — 

quoique, bien que, encore que 

soit que, — — 

suppose ou snpposons que 

au cas, ou en cas que, — 
a la bonne heure que, 
non que, 
non pas que, 
$e n'est pas que, 
pourvu que, 

a moins que, — — 

pour peu que, — — 

de peur que, — — 

de crainte que, — ■ — 

loin que, — — 

bien loin que, — — » 

malgre que, — — 

nonobstant que, — 

Dieu veuille que, — 
Plaise, ou plut a Dieu que, 

a Diu ne plaise que, — 
sinon que, 1 
si ce n'est que, J 



• that s to the end that* 

■ before, 

- with Gttt that. 

■ though. 

- whether and or. 

• suppzse that, 

• iit that case, or if* 

■ I grant that* 

■ not that, 

■ it is not that* 
provided, 

- unless. 

■ if ever so little* 
for fear that, 

■ lest, 

■ far from. 

■ <very far from, 

for all that, though. 

■ notwithstanding that* 
God grant, 

wwld to God, 

■ God forbid. 

save, but. 



N.B. The last two govern the subjunctive mood, when they are 
preceded by a verb expressing command, desire, or uncertainty. In 
other cases they govern the indicative mood; as, I want nothing of 
you, but to do your duty ; je ne veux rlen autre chose de vous sinon que, 
ou, si ce n'est que, njoui fassiez votre devAr ; I answered him nothing, 
but that I had executed his orders, je ne lui ai re'pondu autre cfase y sinon 
$ue, ou si ce n'est que^'V/ois exe'eutf set crdres. 



234 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

The Subjunctive Mood exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice. 

f i.] I was afraid he would Je craignois qu'il ne mint, 

come. 

I suspected he iviuld write Je doutois qu'il vous e'cri*vft m 

to you, 

1 did not doubt, but he Je ne doutois pas qu*i\ nzf&t 

would be very glad to see bien aise de vous voir. 

you. 

Her mother commanded her Sa mere a commande ^a'elle 

to marry him. Vepousaty ou lui a com- 
mande de Vcpouser. 

His father has forbidden him Son pere a defendu qu'W 

to play. joudty ou lui a defendu de 

j ouer. 

Her husband permitted her Son mari a permis qu'elle aU 

/0£5 to the play* l&t a la comedie, ou lui 

a permis d'aller a la co* 
medic 
fa.] I must write to him. II faut que je lui ccrvve. 
It is convenient for you to II convient y#*vous lui par- 
speak to her. hex. 
It is of consequence for him II est de consequence qu'it 

to hep good company. frequente la bonne com* 

pagnie. 

There is no way for her to II n'y a pas moyen £*'el!e 

escape, echappc. 

It is surpising that she has II est sarprenant f**elle cti 

succeeded, reussi. 

It is just, that he should be Ii est juste qu'il mrt reeorru 

rewarded, pense. 

It is unjust, that he should II est injuste qu'il soit puni. 

be punished. 

It is fit, that you give hirn II est a propos que vous fcr- 

nvarniz/g. <verfissii%>. 

It is necessary for him to go II est nccessaire ja'il y <7/7fr. 

thither. 

It is improper for you to go II est indecent que vous a 9 .* 

alone, //V* scul. 



FRENCH TONGUE 



It is astonishing, that he 

knew nothing of it. 
It is lucky, that she is not 

dead. 
It is impossible for him to 

recover* 
It is next to impossible, that 

she should be ignorant of it. 
[3.] It seems, that you 

know him. 
It seems, that he speaks truth. 
It seems, that he is an honest 

man. 
It seems that she is surprised 
It seems that he is angry. 
It is likely, that he knew 

her. 
It. is likely, that you saw 

him. 
It is likely, thai he wrote to 

her. 
It is likely, that she loved 

him. 
It is true, that I spoke to him. 
It is true, that he saw her. 
It is true, that she wrote to 

him. 
It is true, that my father 

knows him. 
It is certain, /^/ he is dead. 
It is certain, that he li come 

from Flanders. 
It is certain, that he does not 

know him. 
It is certain, that he told 

him that news. 
It is certain, that he •*?»/* 

to her. 
It is certain, that he under* 

stands his lesson. 
It is said, that the king of 

Spain, //dead. 



II eft etonnant ^a'il n'en 

sut rien. 
II est heureux qu'tlle ne &> 

pas morte. 
It est impossible qu'il en re- 

<vienne. 
II est presque impossible 

^'elle ne le sache, 
II paroit que vous le connois* 

sez, 
II paroit qu'il dit vrai. 
II paroit qu'il est honnele 

homme. 
II paroit ^'elle est surprise. 
II paroit qu'il est fache. 
II y a apparence qu'il Va 

connue. 
11 y a apparence que vous 

1'avez vu. 
II y a apparence qu'il lui a 

ecrit. 
11 y a apparence qu'ellt Va 

aime. 
II est vrai que je lui ai parle* 
11 est vrai qu'il Va vue. 
II est vrai qu'ellelui a ecrit. 

II est vrai que mon pere le 

connoh, 
II est certain qu'il est roorf. 
II est. certain qu'il est reventi 

dc Flandre. 
II est certain qu'il ne le tm. 

noit pas. 
II est sur p'il lui a dit cette 

nouvelle. 
II est sur qu'il lui a ecrit* 

II est sur qu'il sait sa lec^on. 

On dit que le roi d'Espagne 
est mort. 



236 

It is thought, that he has 

made his fortune, 
[4.] * It does not seem, that 

you know him. 
It does not seem, that he 

speaks truth. 
It does not seem, that he is 

an honest man. 
It does not seem, that she is 

surprised. 
It does not seem, that she is 

angry. 
It is not likely, that he 

knew her. 
It. is not likely, that you 
, saw him. 
It is not likely, that he 

wrote to her. 
It is not likely, that she 

loved him. 
It is not true, that I jr/oi* to 

him. 
It is not true, that he saw her. 
It is not true, that she wrote 

to him. 
It is not true, that my fa- 
ther knows him. 
It is not certain, that he is 

dead. 
It is not certain, that he is 

come from Flanders. 
It is not certain, that he 

does not know him. 
It is not certain, that he 

te/</him that news. 
It is not certain, that he 

wrote to her. 
It is not certain, that he un- 
derstands his lesson. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Op croit qu'il a fait sa for- 
tune. 
II ne paroit pas que vous le 

connoifsiez. 
II ne paroit pas qu'il dise 

vrai. 
II ne paroit pas qu'il so it 

honnete homme. 
II ne paroit pas qu'elle soil 

surprise. 
II ne paroit pas ^a'elle soil 

fachee. 
II n'y a point d'apparence 

qu'il I' ait connue. 
II n'y a point d'apparence 

que VOUS I'aycz^ vu. 
II n'y a point d'apparence 

qu'il lui ait ecrit. 
II n'y a point d'apparence 

qu'tlle Yait aime. 
II n'est pas vrai que je lui 

aie parle. 
II n'est pas vrai qu'il I'aJtvuz. 
II n'est pas vrai qu'elle lui 

ait ecrit. 
II n'est pas vrai que mon pere 

le conuoisse, 
II n'est pas certain qu'il wit 

mort. 
II n'est pas certain qu'il s:it 

venu de Flandre. 
II n'est pas certain qu'il ne 

le connoisse pas. 
II n'est pas sur qu'i\ lui ait 

dit cette nouvelle. 
II n'est pas sur y^'il lui ait 

ecrit. 
II n'est pas sur qu'il sachet* 

lecon. 



* The twenty-one preceding examples are varied here purposely, t* 
render the third rule, and the exceptions to it more intelligible to tht 
learner. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



2 37 



ft h not said, that the king 

of Spain is dead. 
It is not thought, that he 

has made his fortune. 
[5.] He told me, that he 

■would write to you. 
I shall tell him, that you 

^-rr come to see him. 
Tell him I will come and see 

him. 
Did you tell him, that I 

taw you r" 
Do not tell him, that I shall 

go to the play. 
Do not tell him, that you 

taw me. 
Tell him, that I <z^#/ out. 
Tell him, that I tame to 

speak to him. 
I shall tell him, that you 

spoke to me. 
I shall tell him, that you 

were perfect in your les- 
son. 
Tell him to come and see me. 
Tell him not to call to day. 

Tell him to write his theme 

out fair. 
Tell her to hold her tongue. 
Tell him tt hriwr his books. 

Tell him to learn his lesson. 

Tell him to give you my 

penknife back again. 
Tell him to give you paper. 

1 shall tell him, to wriu to 

you. 
I shall tell him, to tab care 

of you- 



On ne dit pas que le rci , 

d'Espagne soit mort. 
On ne per.se pas qu y \\ ait fait 

sa fortune. 
Ii m'a dit qu'il vous ecrira* 

Je lui dirai que vous etes ve- 

nu pour le voir. 
Dites-lui que je <viendrai le 

voir. 
Lui avez-vous dit que je 

vous ai vu ? 
Ne lui dites pas que 'yiraih 

la eomedie. 
Ne lui dites pas que vous 

m'avez vu. 
Dites-lui que je suis sorti. 
Dites-lui que je suis venu 

pour lui parler. 
Je lui dirai que vous m'avez 

parle. 
Je lui dirai que vous saw'ez, 

votre iec on. 

Dites-lui f«'il i'wme voir. 
Dites-lui fa'il ne vie/me pas 

aujourd'hui. 
Dites-lui qu'il metie son 

theme au net. § 

Dites-lui p'elle se taise* 
Dites-lui qu'W appcrte ses 

livres. 
Difes-lui qu'il apprenne sa 

Leon. 
Dit-es-lui qu'W vous rende 

n>on can if. 
Dites-lui qu'W vous donne 

du papier. 
Je lui dirai qu'i\ vous ecrinje, 

Je lui dirai f«'il ait scin de 
vous. 1 



238 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Do not tell her to 'write to Ne lui dites pas qu'tt\\t 

me. m*e'crive. 

Will you tell him to bring his Lui direz- vous qtt\\ apporie 

bill ? son memoire ? 

Will you tell him not to be Lui direz-vous ^a'il ne soit 

angry ? pas fache ? 

I shall tell him not to be un- Je lui dirai qu'il soit tran- 

easy. quille. 

I shall tell her t& send you Je lui dirai ^a'elle vous en- 

your book. voie votre livre. 

I shall tell them to give you Je leur dirai ^a'ils vous/^x. 

an answer. sent reponse. 

I shall tell him to be mode. Je lui dirai qu*x\ soit mo- 
rate, dere. 

[6.] She seems to be angry. II semble ^'elle soit fachee. 

It seemsj that you know II semble que vous le connois- 

him. siez* 

It seems, that he is in the II semble ^«'il ait raison. 

right. 

It seems, that she is in the II semble ^a'elle ait tort, 

wrong. 

It seems, that you are older. II semble que vous etes plus 

age. 

It does not seem, that she is II ne semble pas ^«'elle soit 

sick. malade. 

It seems to me> that you are II me semble que vous etes 

sorry. Cache. 

It seems to me, that he is II me semble qu'il est fort sa- 

very learned. Vant. 

It seems to him, that she is II lui semble qu'elle est fort 

very pretty. jolie. 

A covetous man thinks he II semble a un avare qu?\\ 

never has enough. n'a jamais assez^ 

Your brother thinks he is II semble a votre frere qu r A 

rich enough. est assez riche. 

[8.] If he come aud ask for S'il vient et qu\\ demande 

me, tell him 1 am not at apres moi, dites-lui que 

home. je ne suis pas au logis. 

If you study, and if you Si vous etudiez, et que vous 

take pains, you will learn freniez de la peine, vous 



FRENCH 

'the French language in a 

short time. 
He is the most conceited 

man I know. 
She is the handsomest lady 

you ever s£w, 

I am sorry he is sick. 



I am glad she is better. 

I am surprised, that he is 
not come. 

I am over joyed, that he has 
gained his lawsuit. 

I am surprised, that she has 
married him. 

She is grieved, that you 
^«</her no news. 



I am surprised at his having 
made his fortune in so 
short a time. 



Give me a handkerchief /A*/ 

is clean. 
I look for a servant whom I 

may trust. 
He looks for a woman <who 

is rich. 
She looks for a husband <who 

is handsome. : 
[-9.] Is it certain, that he 

twill come to day ? 



TONGUE. 239 

apprendrez le Francois en 
peu de temps. 

C'est Thomme le plus suffi- 
sant que je cennoisse* 

C'est la plus belle demoi- 
selle que vous syez jamais 
vue. 

Je suis fache q?i'i\ soit ma- 
lade, ou de ce qu'il est ma- 
lade. 

Je suis bien aise ^a'elle se 
porte mieux. 

Je suis surpris qu' 11 ne soit 
pas venu, ou de ce qu'il 
n'est pas venu. 

Je suis ravi qu'il ait gagne 
son proces, ou de ce qu''A 
a gagne son proces. 

Je suis surpris £#'elle Vait 
epouse, ou de ce ^a'elle 
Va epouse. 

Elle est ehagrine que vous ne 
lui donniex, point de nou- 
velles, ou de ce que vous 
ne lui donne-z pas de nou- 
velles. 

Je suis surpris qu'il ait fait 
sa fortune eu si peu de 
temps, ou de ce qu ll a fait 
sa fortune en si peu de 
temps. 

Donnez-moi un mouchoir qui 
soit blanc. 

Je cherche un domestique a 
qui je puisse me tier. 

II cherche un femme qui 
soit riche. 

Elle cherche un mari qui soit 
bel homme. 

Est-il sur ^«'il *vienne au« 
jourd'hui ? 



2 4 o A GRAMMAR OF THE 

[10.] Do you believe, that Croyez-vous ^'elle aille 

she 'will go to the play ? la comedie ? 

I do not believe, that she Je ne crois pas ^a'elle soit 

will be angry with you. fachee contre vous. 

I suspect, that, he twill write Je doute qu'il vous ecri<ve % 

to you. 

Is it certain, that he will go Est-il s\xvqu y \\ aille en France 

to France next spring f au printemps procbain ? 

Is it not certain, that he twill II n'est pas sur ^«'il rebienm 

come back this summer. cet ere. 

Do you thir.k, that he will Croyez-vous qu'W- mpfrennt 

learn French in four le Francois en qua t re 

months ? mois ? 

Do you think, that he will Pensez-vous qu'il soit a la 

be in the country next campagne la semaine pro, 

week * chame I 



SECTION III. 

The Government of Verbs. 

1. Active verbs govern the first case ; as, I read the 
books, je lis les livres. Passive verbs govern the second 
case : as, he is esteemed by all men, il est estime de tout k 
monde. 

They also govern the first case with the preposition par^ speaking of 
some bodily action $ as, he was killed by robbers, II ae.e tue'pzv dei rs- 
ieurs. In speaking of actions, which partake both of the sentiments of 
the mind, and motion ot the body, we commonly make use of par % 
though we say, il est entoure de gens emtuyeux, he is surrounded by trou- 
blesome -people ; here entture expresses only, tkat troublesome people 
are round about him. 

2. Verbs that signify to give, or to take away, govern 
the first case of the thing, and the third ca.->e of the person : 
as, I have given him the book, je lui at ' dovtie le livre ; 
they have taken his sword from him, ils lui ont M son 

cpe. 

3. Many verbs govern the infinitive of a verb, with the 
preposition de before it; which occurs when to in English 
may be changed into of, from, by, or with ; as, he hin- 
dered me from working ; il nfempecha de travaiUer* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 2+ i 

4. Many verbs govern the infinitive with the preposi- 
tion a before it : in this case, to, in English, almost 
always may be changed into in, or, for ; as, help me to 
do it, or in doing it, aidez-moi a le faire. 

5. Some verbs have the preposition pour before their in- 
finitive, which occurs when to denotes the design, end, or 
reason of fhe passion or action of the verb. In this case, to 
can be changed into in order to, 'with a design to, to the 
end that ; as, I came to see you, or in order to see you, or 
with a design to see you ; je suis wenu pour <vous <voir. 

6. There are five verbs after which de and a are used 
indiscriminately before the infinitive ; contraindre, continuer y 
discontinuer, essajer, forcer. 

The verb cbliger, in the sense of to force, to excite, to engage, is 
followed by the preposition a before the infinitive ; as, I will oblige 
him to do it, je Vobligerdi a le faire : when it is used passively, it is 
followed by the preposition de \ as, he was obliged to do it, il fut 
oblige de le faire. 

When tbe verb tacher means simply to seek or aim at semething, it 
takes the preposition & before the infinitive ; as, he seeks to injure me, 
ii tdebe a me nu'ire : when it implies effort, it requires the preposition: 
de j as I will endeavour to please you, je tdeberai de vous plaire. 

When the verb s'fforcer is used in the sense of to strive, to strain, to 
make use of all our strength, it requires the preposition a before the 
next infinitive : but when it is used in the sense of to endeavour, to 
make use of our industry, it requires the preposition de; as, he strove 
to run, il s" 'est efforce 'a courir : he endeavours to please her, il s\fferce 
*ie lu'i plaire. 

When the verb tarder is used personally, it requires the preposition 
a: when impersonally, the preposition de; as, do not stay, ne tarde% 
pas a rcvenir: I long to get rid of the business, il me tarde d^etre bsrs d'af* 
faire. In this tense it is always joined to a third case, and may be fol- 
k)wed by que, with the verb in the subjunctive mood; as il mt tarde 
<{\it je sois bort d" affaire. 

The verb commencer is sometimes followed by de; according to tht 
French Acadsmy, the ear is the judge in such a case. When it sig- 
nifies to begin by, it is followed by par; as, he began by reading 
jEsop's Fables, il cemmer.ca par lire let Fables d^Esope. 

The verb manquer requires the preposition de before the infinitive^ 
when it is used negatively j as, I. will not fail to do what you please, 
je ne manquerai pat de faire ce que vous voulez : or when it signifies to be 
near, to be like, to do or suffer any thing ; as, I was like to fall, j'ai 
manque dc tomber. In this sense it is always used affirmatively, and i* 
familiar discourse. 

M 



242 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

But when it is used affirmatively in the sense of not to do what we 
ought, it is followed by the preposition a- y as, he has failed to do his 
duty, il a manque a falre son devoir* 

? '. De is used before the infinitive of verbs, to which cer- 
tain nouns are joined without an article; such are avoir 
congi, permission, en c uie y coutume y besoin y sujet y raison y droit y 
tort, occasion, Sec. de, 

8. Infinitive moods governed by the verb etre y followed 
by an adjective governing the second case, take also de be- 
fore them; as, 1 am glad to see you y je suis bien aise de <vous 
i'&ir. But if the verb etre be followed by an adjective 
which governs the third case, the verb which is in the in- 
finitive takes before it the preposition a; as, he is ready to 
go thither, il est pret a y a Her, 

9. When etre, signifying to be, is followed by a noun, 
and preceded by ce y the following verb, in the infinitive 
mood, is preceded by que de ; as, it is a folly for a man to 
forget himself: cest une folie que de se meconnoitre. 

10. De is put before the infinitive after venir and nefaire 
que, signifying an action that has just taken place ; as, I 
left him jus t now, je <viens de le quitter, or je ne fais que de 
le quitter. These two verbs are frequently used thus in the 
present and imperfect tense,, but in no other. m 

11. A is put after the verb -vemr, signifying to begin, or to set about 
doing something : as, when I began to speak ; quand je vlns a parler. 
This verb is used in all it's tenses, and is commonly placed after some 
conjunctions. Sometimes it is not expressed i» English, though it is 
added to the French verb; as when he shall know that, quand it wen- 
dra a sa*voir cela. 

12. A is put before infinitive moods or verbal nouns governed by 
etre, preceded by a', and used in the sense of to be a person's turn, his 
business, or his duty ; as, it is your turn to drink, c^est a vous a ho'ire. 

13. A. verb coming after asse* or trop very often requires the prepo- 
sition pour before it; as, he has vanity enough to believe it, il a assez 
de vanite pour I e noire. Sometimes it takes the preposition de\ as, to 
sffront him was not sufficient, ce n'ttoit pas assez de Voutrager. ; some- 
times no preposition at all; as, this is insulting me enough, or too 
much, c*est assez ou t*est trop m'insulter. Hence it appears how much 
grammarians are in the wrong, in saying that assez and trop always re- 
quire the preposition pour betore the next infinitive. mood. 

14.. When two or more verbs requiring different cases 
after them govern the same object, this must follow the 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



m 



first verb in the case this verb governs, and a relative pro- 
noun must be put after each of the other verbs in the case 
governed by that verb ; as, that pleased and charmed the 
prince, cela plut au prince et ie charma ; and not tela pint et 
cbarma it prince ; because plaire governs the third case of 
the person, and charmer the first. 

i£. There are some verbs which take no preposition 
after them before the infinitive mood ; as, alter , venir, en~ 
<voyer, s avoir, faire, oser, voir, pouvoir, vouhir, croire, pre* 
tendre, devoir, eccuter, entendre, daigner, &c. 

Government of Verbs exemplified for the Scholar s 

Practice. 
[i.] I like Pope's e wsrks. J'aime les ceuvres de Pope. 



You like apples and pears. 

He is beloved by all his re- 
lations. 

He is respected by all his 
pupils. 

He was robbed bj two 
rogues. 

He is surrounded with flat- 
terers. 

[2.] I gave it to him. 

When will you give me my 
book ? 

Will you give it to him ? 

I did not give it to him. 

She took it fro?n him. 

Take this knife from him. 

Do not take it from her. 

[3.] Make an end of play- 
ing. 

I have not blamed you fur 
having kept him com- 
pany. 

He has censured him for hav- 
ing written. 

Cea§e to reproach me with 
my foible. 



Vous aimez les po:nmes et lei 
poire s. 

II est aime de tous ses pa- 
rens. 

II est respectc de toas ses 
eleven 

II fut vol£ par deux -co- 
quins. 

il est entoure de flatteurs. 

Je le lui ai donne. 

Ouand me donnerez-vous 

man livre? 
Le lui donnerez-vous ? 
Je ne le lui ai pas donne* 
Eile/^ lui a ote. 
Otez-iW ce cculeau. 
Ne le lui otez pas. 
Finissez de jouer. 

Je ne vous ai point blam£ de 
l'avoir frequente. 

II Pa cen-sure ^'avoir ecrit. 

Cessez de me reprocher mon 

■ foible. 



244 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Warn her to take care of her Avertissez-la 
reputation. 

I advised him to ask her 
pardon. 

Why have you deferred pay- 
ing him ? 

I wrote to him, to send me 
my books, 

I was frightened to see him. 

Excuse mtfrom learning my 
lesson to day. 

Do not undertake to unde- 
ceive her. 

"Try to persuade her. 

He was constrained to pay. 

He deserves to be punished. 

He has neglected to study. 

I forgot to bring my books. 



He pressingly invited me to 
dine with him. 

Did you promise to go thi- 
ther ? 

I advised him to be more 
diligent. 

She refused to speak to him. 

I intend to go to France next 
year. 

Endeivour to please her. 

Take care not to tell her, 
that you know me. 

I repent of having sold my 
book. 

She cannot forbear lying. 

Make haste to prevent him. 

Make haste to write your 
letter. 

He flatters himself, that he 
knows almost every thing 
that happens in the city. 



de prendre 

soin de sa reputation. 
Je lui ai conseille de iui de- 

mander pardon. 
Potirquoi avez-vous differe 

de le payer ? * 
Je lui ai ecrit de m'envoyer 

mes iivres. 
Je fus effraye de le voir. 
Dispensez-moi ^'apprendre 

ma lecon aujourd'hui. 
N'entreprenez pas de la de- 

sabuser. 
Essayez de la persuader. 
II fut contraint de payer. 
II merite d'etre, puni. 
II a neglig6 </'etudier. 
J'ai oublie ^'apporter mes 

Iivres. 
II m'a presse de diner avec 

lui. 
Avez-vous promis d'y aller ? 

Ju lui ai recommande d'etre 

plus diligent. 
Eile refusa de lui parler. 
Je me propose Waller en 

France l'annee prochaine. 
Tachez de lei plaire. 
Gardez-vous de lui dire que 

vous me connoissez. 
Je me repens </'avoir vendu 

mon livre. 
EUe ne peut s'empecher de 

mentir. 
H&tez-vous de le prfvenir. 
Depechez- vous d'o.cx'ue vo- 

tre lettre. 
II se flatte de savoir presque 

tout ce qui se passe dans 

la ville. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



245 



1 take upon myself the care 
* of speaking to him of it. 
f4.] He learns fencing. 
You lave to play. 
He seeks to wrong me. 
Give me some drink. 
I am disposed to obey you. 
He has encouraged him, to 

undertake that work. 
She has engaged him to play. 
You have induced me to eat. 

I have exhorted him to be 

wise and dutiful. 
Help me to write my letters, 

Think of paying me. 
You expose yourself to fall 
side. 

He prepares himself for his 

departure. 
She delights in tormenting 

me* 

[5.] I did not do it to make 

you uneasy. 
1 told it him to inspire him 

with emulation. 
He came to see you. 
/// order to be happy, we must 

be contented. 
I shall do every thing to 

please you. 
[6.] I shall oblige him to 

do it 
You will never oblige him, 

to submit to her. 
Oblige him to see her. 
He was obliged to do it. 
I am obliged to go out. 
He will be obliged to see 
her. 



Je me charge de lui en par- 

ler. 
11 apprend a faire des armes. 
Ybus aimez a jouer. 
II cherche a me faire tort. 
Donnez-moi a boire. 
Je suis dispose a vous obeir. 
II l'a encourage a entrepren- 

dre cet ouvrage. 
Elle l'a engage a jouer. 
Vous m'avez excite a man- 

£ er \ 
Je l'ai exhorte a etre sage 

et obeissant. 
Aidez-moi a ecrire mes let* 

tres. 
Songez a me payer. 
Vous vous exposez a tornber 

malade. 
11 se prepare a partir. 

Elle se plait a me tourmen- 
ter. 

Je ne l'ai pas fait pour vous 
faire de la peine. 

Je le lui ai- dit pour lui Con- 
ner de ^emulation. 

II vint pour vous voir. 

Four etre heureux, il faut 
etre content. 

Je ferai tout pour vous 
plaire. 

Je Tobligerai a le faire. 

Vous ae l'obligerez jamais 

a se soumettre a elle. 
Obligez-le a la voir. 
II fut oblige de le faire. 
Je suis oblige de sortir. 
II sera oblige de la veifa. 



M 3 



7 46 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He aims to hurt me. 
They aim to deceive you. 
1 shall endeavour to bring 

him to his duty. 
Do not stay. 
Do not delay to speak to 

her. 
Why do you delay going 

thither ? ' 
I long to see her. 
I shall begin to apply myself 

to the French language. 
I begin to understand French 

a little. 
He began to take more care. 

We began by breakfasting 
before we went out 

I shall n©t fail to do what 
you please. 

Do not fail to be in such a 
place. 

He has failed to do his duty. 

[7.] You are in the wrong 

to complain. 
You are in the right to be 

angry with him. 
Have you not a mind to take 

a little walk ? 

I have leave to go out. 

I want to see him, and speak 

to him. 
You have no occasion to 

complain of me. 
Take care to write your 

theme. 
[8.] I am very glad to see 

you in good health. 
1 am overjoyed to hear, 



II tache a me nuire. 

lis tachent a vous ' romper. 

Je tacherai de le ramener a 

son devoir. 
Ne tarclez pas a revenir. 
Ne tardez pas a lui parler. 

Pourquoi tardez-vcus a y 

aller ? . 
II me tar3e de la voir. 
Je eommencerai a rr/appli- 

quer au Francois. 
Je commence.^ comprendre 

un pen le Francois. 
11 eommenca ^'avoir plus de 

soin. 
Nous commencames far de- 
jeuner avant de sortir. 
Je ne manquerai pas de fa ire 

ce qui vous plait. 
Ne manquez pas de vous 

trouver en tel lieu. 
II a manque a faire son de- 
voir. 
Vous avez tort de vous 

plaindre. 
Vous avez raison */'etre fa- 

che contre lui. 
N'avez-vous pas envie de 

faire un petit tour de pro^ 

menade? 
J'ai permission de sortir. 
J'ai besoin de le voir et de 

lui parler. 
Vous n'avez pas sujet de 

vous plaindre de moi. 
Avez soin de faire votre 

theme. 
Je suis bien aise de vous voir 

en bonne same. 
Je r suis ravi </'apprendre que 



FRENCH 

that all your family is 
well. 
I am sorry to see you sick. 

He is very near his death. 

He is very capable of teach- 
ing mathematics. 

He is incapable of wronging 
any body. 

She is worthy to be loved. 

I am tired with writing. 

Are you able to walk ? 

Are you sure g/* pleasing her ? 

It is easy to guess. 

This fruit is good to eat. 

He is much inclined, to slan- 
der. 

You are not exact in learn- 
ing your lesson. 

Are you ready to go ? 

She plays upon the harpsi- 
chord very well. 

I am assiduous m reading 
Telemachus. 

He is first in prattling. 

[9.] It is to no purpose, to 
spebk to him about it. 

It is a misfortune, to have 
no friends. 

It is a folly to despise others. 

[10.] I have just breakfast- 
ed. 

I have just written my let- 
ter. 

I have just left him. 

He had just dined. 



TONGUE. 247 

toute vatre famille se 
porte bien, 

Je suis fache de vous voir 
malade. 

II est sor le point de mourir. 

.11 est t res- capable </'ensei- 

gner les mathematiques. 

II est incapable de faire tort 
a qui que ce soit. 

Elle est digne */'etre aimee. 

Je suis ias ^ecrire. 

Etes-vous en etat de mar- 
cher ? 

Etes-vous sur de lui plaire ? 

Cela est aise a deviiier, 

Ce fruit est bon a manger. 

II est tres-enclin a. medire^ 

Vous n'etes pas exact a ap. 

prendre votre leeon. 
Etes-vous pret a partir ? 
Elle est habile a toucher du 

clavecin. 
Je suis assidu a lire Tele- 
ma que. 
II est le premier a babiller. 
C'est temps perdu que de lui 

en parier. 
C'es.t un malheur que de n'a- 

voir point '/.'amis. 
C'est une folic que de me- 

priser les am res. 
Je viens de dejeaner, ou je 

ne fa is que de dejeuner. 
Je viens ^'ejrire ma lettre, 

ou je nc fais que </'ecrire 

ma lcttre. 
Je viens de le quitter, ou je 

ne fais que de le quitter. 
II venoit de diner, ou ii ne 

faisoit que de diner. 



m 4 



h* a grammar of the 

She was Just arrived. 



We hadyW got out of the 
coach. 



They hz&just finished their 
play. 

[11.] When I began to 

write my letter. 
He began to speak of his 

riches. 
As soon as she began to 

speak of her misfortunes. 
She was very much sur- 
prised, when we began to 

relate to her that story. 
When his father shall know 

of it. 
Jf his wife should know his 

libertinism. 
If you should speak to her 

about it, tell her, that I 

am not ignorant of it. 
[ 1 2.] It is your part to obey 

me. 
It is your part to play. 
It is my turn to walk out. 
It is his turn to stay at home. 
Whose turn is it to drink ? 
It is her turn to write. 
It is your turn to read. 
It is not my business, to 

correct him. 
It is not your business, to 

meddle with it. 
It is not her business, to 

find fault with it. 
It is not their business, to 

take you from your work. 



Elle venoit ^'arriver, ou elie 
ne faisoit que ^'arriver. 

Nous venions de sortir du 
carrosse, ou nous ne fax* 
sions que de sortir du car- 
rosse. 

lis venoient de finir leur jeu 
ou ils ne faisoient que de 
finir leur jeu. 

Quand je vins a ecrire ma 
lettre. 

II vint a parler de ses ri- 
chesses. 

Des qu'elle vint a parler de 
ses malheurs. 

Elle fut fort surprise quand 
nous vinmes a lui raconter 
cette histoire. 

Quand son pere viendra a 
savoir cela. 

Si sa femme venoit a savoir 
son libertinage. 

Si vous veniez a lui en par- 
ler, dites-lui que je ne 
l'ignore pas. 

C'est a vous a m'obeir. 

C'est a vous a jouer. 

C'est a moi a sortir. 

C'est a lui a rester au logk. 

A qui est-ce a boire ? 

C'est a elle a ecrire. 

C'est a vous a lire. 

Ce n'est pas a moi a le cor- 

riger. 
Ce n'est pas a vous a vous 

en meler. 
Ce n'est pas a elle a y trou- 

ver a redire. 
Ce n'est pas a eux a vous 

distraire de votrc ou- 

vrage. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



[13.] He has _ too much 
pride to own his faults. 

She has still beauty enough 
to please. 

You have not money enough 
to bear great expences. 

He is too proud, to ask her 

pardon. 
It will be sufficient, to write 

to me about it. 
It wiJl be sufficient, to tell 

it him in two words. 
It is sufficient to warn her. 
It is too much to ask of me. 
It was insulting him too 

much. 
It is too much, to deplore 

your misfortune. 
Cease from conversing with 

him ; it is doing him too 

much honour. 
[14.] I saw her, and spoke 

to her. 
That play pleased and 

charmed the Queen. 
She pleases and charms him. 



249 

II a trop d'amour-propre 

pour avouer ses fautes. 
Elle a encore assez de beautq 

pour plaire. 
Vous n'avez pas assez d'azv 

gent pour faire de grandes 

depenses. 
II est trop orgueilleux pour 

lui demander pardon. 
Ce sera assez de m ? en ecrire.' 

Ce seroit assez de Ie lui dire 

en deux mots. 
C'est assez de l'avertir. 
C'est trop me demander, 
C'etoit trop l'insulter. 

C'est trop deplorer voire 

malheur. 
Cessez de lui parler; c'est 

lui faire trop d'honneur. 

Je i'ai vue, et lui ai parle* 

Cette corned ie plut a la 

Re'me et la charm a. 
Elle lui plait et /'enchante* 



CHAP. VI. 



. Rules and Observations upon the Impersonal Verbs. 

i.TMPERSONAL verbs are used only in the third per- 
-■- son singular. They are of two kinds ; some are im- 
personal by their nature ; and these are never used but in 
the third person singular; as, il ?zeige y il pleut : others are 
sometimes impersonal, sometimes personal. These are per- 
sonal when il y in French, has a relation to some foregoing 
noun; as, drawing is a genteel amusement, it becomes 
young ladies 9 le dessin est un amusement honnite % il con- 

m 5 



?5o A GPxAMMAR OF THE 

vient: uux jeujtes demoiselles: here il has a relation to dessht % 
They are impersonal, when /'/ has no relation to a forego- 
ing novm ; as, le des sin est nn amusement honnete> il can vient 
que lei jeunes demoiselles s'j appliquent. 

2« The verb il pleut, beside the use made of speaking of rain, may 
be used impersonally in a figurative sense, speaking of several other 
things which may be supposed to fall like rain : as, il phut des pietres, 
11 plut de la marine dam le desert. And in familiar discourse, to express 
eagerness for departing, we sometimes say proverbially, je part'irai de+ 
tnain, quar.d il pleuvroit des hallebardes. In this case, when it follows 
the substantive, it agrees with it in numbei, according to the French 
Academy : thus, speaking of a bloody battle, we may say, les mousque- 
tades y plewuoknt \ thus the relations of cardinal Ma-zarin, who used to 
send them a great quantity of money, said, il faut croire que l y or & i' 'ar- 
gent pleuvent en France. 

3. Some personal verbs are used impersonally in the third person sin« 
gular, though their following nominative is in the plural; as, many 
©ccasions are found ; il se trouve bien des occasions, or il y a bien des occa- 
sions* 

4. 11 y a, there is, there are, some are, many .are., may 
be followed by a noun in the plural ; as, there are few peo- 
ple, who apply themselves to their own language - 3 il y a 
peu de gens qui s'appliquext a leur propre langue. 

Sometimes en is added to it; in this case it has a relation to some 
preceding noun j. as, parmi teux qui apprennent les Ungues e'trargeres, il y , 
en a qui negligent leur propre langue: among those who learn foreign lan- 
guages, there a^e some who neglect their own tongue. 

When we speak of something present, as if pointed at with the fin- 
ger, there is, is rendered in French by voila j as, there is a handsome 
lady, voila une belle dame* 

;V. B. Vaugelas, and, after him, the abbe Girard, will not allow, that 
\l est might be used instead of il y a. .However, they agree, thatfl n'est 
jnay sometimes be used instead of il rfy a, and sometimes nor, as in the 
following example: there is nothing which pleases me mere, il n'est 
run qui me plaise d' ' advantage 5 whereas it is not used in the following i 
there is nothing but honour in serving our country, ii n'y a que d 
r.eur ii serinr sa pairie, and not il n'est que : but, as grammarians are di- 
vided here avnong themselves, I adv.se the lesrner to make use of U y 
a instead of il est, and particularly of il ny a instead of il n'est, until he 
is perfect enough in the French tongue, to know in what circumstances 
the one may be used instead of the other ; and even Vaugdas, Cc 
and th« abbe G'irard, do not agree about such circumstances. 

^. The impel sonzbilya is likewise used to deirctc a quantity of time. 

In 1 his case, ago, since, these, and for, are rendered m French, by ii 

y a beginning the sentence;, afterward* comes the number, followed by 

fu-\ as, I Ktavt arrived in Loiidoa three years agoj il y a trois ans 



FRENCH TONGUE. £/* 

que je suis arrive' a Londres. If the impersonal be transposed, que is 
omitted : as,-/* suis arrive a Londres il y a trois ass. In an interrcgA- 
tion, combxen y a-t-il que .. . is commonly used. 

6. Verbs construed with the indeterminate pronoun en are not pro- 
perly impersonal, though used only in the third person singular ; be- 
cause on may be resolved into a substantive ; as, en parte, or les hommti 
parent. It may even be resolved into a pronoun ; as, I will see you to- 
morrow, on <v:us *verra denzain, or je was <verrai aema'tn : consequently 
all verbs may be preceeded by on, except those which are impersonal 
fey their nature j as, for example, we never say, on heige. 

7. The auxiliary verb to be, followed by the adjective 
necessary or requisite, when it may be resolved into -nve 
musty is commonly rendered in French by il /nut, with the 
following verb in the infinitive mood ; as, it is necessary 
to, or we must love our neighbour;. i\.faut aimer son pro-- 
chain* 

8. II faut, signifying a want, is fo-llowed by a substantive, preceded 
by one of these articles, un y de, des, du, de la ; as, to Write well, we must 
have good paper, ink, and pens: pour bien e'erire, il faut de bon papier, 
de bonne encre, et de bonnes plumes. In this case, when a personal pro- 
noun is expressed in English, it is put, in French, in the third case, 
between il and faut ; as, he wants books, il lui faut des fores. 

When a noun is expressed in English, signifying the subject that/ 
wants, it is likewise put in the third case, but after the noun which is 
the object ; as, my brother wants books, il faut des 'fores a men frcre; 

9. The verbs, io be necessary, musty and should, signify- 
ing duty, and preceded by a personal pronoun, or any 
other noun, are rendered in French by the verbs, il faut y il 
faudroit, il faudra, &c- according to the corresponding 
tense in English ; in this case, il faut is followed by que, 
then comes the pronoun, or the noun ; and the verb fol- 
lowing both, is put in the subjunctive mood ; as, I must 
go, ilfatit que faille ; my brother must ^o y ilfant que man 
frcre aille\. 



As the English verb vnmt is often used personally, and the Trench 
vtTbfall/<r is always impersonal, whenevera noun or pronoun is use«T 
as the nominative of the verb must, if that verb-implies an absolute ne- 
cessity, it must be translate*! according to the foregoing rule ; as, we 
must die ; such is the law of nature, il faut que ncus mourions ; telle est la 
hi de nature \ but when the obii<jation may be dispensed with or neg- 
lected, instead oifallo'.r we may use the verb devoir personally, as mts 
must help ; one another, les hemmes d'focr.t CentS 'aider ■» 



M 6 



H* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



ii. It is, followed by with, is expressed in French by 
il en est, and the two following nouns are put in the second 
case, and separated by comme ; as, it is with you as with 
me, il en est de <vous comme de moi. 



>m Rules and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs, ex* 
cmplified for the Scholar's Practice. 



[jr.] It is very fine weather 

to day. 
How is the weather ? 
It rains, it snows, it freezes, 

it thaws, it thunders* it 

hails. 
// is hot, it is cold, 
// is bad weather. 
// is clear weather. 
// is dark weather. 
JThe wind blows. 
It has rained to day, as fast 

as it could pour. 
It snows in great flakes. 
The moon shines. 
It is dirty. 
What o'clock is it? 
Tell me, if you please, what 

o'clock it is. 
It is twelve o'clock (at 

noon). 
// is a quarter after twelve. 
// is half an hour after 

twelve. 
// is three quarters after 

twelve. 
// is one o'clock. 
Jt is a quarter after one. 
// is half an hpur after one. 
// is three quarters after 

one, &c. 

8 



II fait tres-beau temps a«- 

jourd'hui. 
Quel temps fait- il? 
II phut, il neige, il gele, il 

de'gele, il tonne, ilgrele. 

II fait chaud, ilfait froid. 
II fait mauvais temps. 
Ilfait un temps clair. 
Ilfait un temps obscur. 
Ilfait du vent. 
// aplu a verse aujourd'hui. 

II neige a gros flocons. 
Ilfait clair de lune. 
II fait sale. 
Quelle heure est-il? 
Dites-moi, s'il vous plait, 

quelle heure il est ? 
II est midi. 

II &st midi et un quart. 
// est midi et demi. 

// est une heure moins u* 

quart. 
II est une heure. 
// est une heure et un quart. 
// est une heure et demie. 
II est deux heures moins un 

quart, #C« 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



*S$ 



It is not late. 

// is early. 

// is time to go. 

[3.] Reports are spread in 
the city, that .... 

Many opportunities are to he 
met with. 

[4.,] There are occasions on 
which delay is of the ut- 
most consequence. 

*There are few people, who 
know themselves. 

There are handsome women 
in London. 

There is some danger in it. 

There is no doubt of it. 

There is some profit to be 
hoped. 

Some books are very useful, 
many are very dangerous 
for youth. 

Some women are very capri- 
cious. 

There is a handsome lady. 

There are fine oranges. 

These are strange reasons. 

There is a very rich shop. 

[5.] How long have you 

been in England ? 
How long is it since you saw 

him ? 
How long has he been dead ? 

I' have been in England 

these three years. 
He has been dead these two 

years. 
I have not seen him these 

four years. 



II n'est pas tard. 

11 est de bonne heure. 

II est temps de partir. 

11 s'est repandu un bruit par 
la ville, c'est que .... 

77 se trGwve bien des occa- 
sions. 

11 y a des occasions ou le 
delai est de la derniere 
consequence. 

II j? a peu de gens qui se 
connoissent eux-memes. 

II y a de belles femmes a 
Londres. 

II y a du danger. 

II n'y a point de doute. 

II y a du profit a esperer. 

II y a des livres fort utiles ; 

il y en a beaucoup de dan- 

gereux pour la jeunesse. 
II y a des femmes tresca- 

pricieuses. 
Viola une belle demoiselle. 
Voila de belles oranges. 
Voila d'etranges raisons. 
Voila une boutique tres- 

riche. 
Combien y a-t-il que vous 

etes«en Angleterre ? 
Combien y a-t-il que VOUS 

ne Pavez vu ? 
Combien y a-t-il qu'il est 

mort ? 
11 y a trois ans que je suis en 

Angleterre ? 
II y a deux ans qu'il est 

mort. 
II y a quatre ans que je ne 

P^i vu. 



2 £4 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



She has been married these 
sick 



ten years. 
Her husband lias 



been 
for these five years. 

My brother made his for- 
tune twenty years agd in 
the East Indies. 

Where were you ten years 
ago ? 

[7.] Every man should love 

- his neighbour. 

[ 8 . J I want pens. 

I want nothing now. 

He wants time to learn his 
lesson. 

[9.] You must go thither. 

She must speak to him. 

He must know it. 

She must learn French. 

They must study. 

Are you not obliged to go 
out ? 

Is he not obliged- to accom- 
pany you ? 

He must not go out. 

You must hold your tongue. 

Y©u should go and see him. 



// would be necessary for you 
to know him. 

tyeuld it not be necessary fat- 
her to go thither ? 

Would it 'not be necessary for 
us to know your reasons ? 

7/ twill be necessary for you 
to speak to his father. 

It will be necessary for' her to 
apply herself to history. 



II y a <iix ans qu'elle est 

mariee. 
II y a cinq ans que son mari 

est malade. 
II y a vingt ans que mon 

frere a fait sa fortune 

dans les Tndes. 
Ou etiez-vous it y a dix 

ans ? 
II faut aimer son prochain. 

II me faut des plumes. 

II ne me faut rien a present. 

II lui faut du temps pour 

apprendre sa lecon. 
II faut que vous y alliez. 
// faut qu'elle lui parle. 
// faut qu'il le sache. 
II faut qu'elle apprenne le 

Francois. 
II faut qu'ils etuiient. 
Ne faut-il pas que vous scr- 

tiez ? 
Ne faut-il pas qu'il vous ae- 

compagne ? 
II ne faut pas qu'il sorte. 
II faut que vous vous taisiez. 
II foudroit que vous allassiez 

le voir,, tej wits* devriez 

allcr le voir. 
H fan droit que vous le con- 

nussiez. 
Ne fa u droit - // ' pa s q u ' e 1 le y 

all&t ? 
Ne f: udroit - il pas que nc b s 

sussions vos raisons ? 
II faudra que vous parliez a 

son pere. 
II faudra quelle s'applique 

a l'histoire. • 



Will it not be necessary 
her to prevent him ? 

My brother must go to 
France. 

My sister must stay at home. 

[10.] // is with poets as 

with painters. 
It is with you as with me. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
for 



*5S 

Ne faudra-t-il pas qu'elle le 

previenne ? 
II faut que mon frere aille 

en France. 
II faut que ma soeur reste au 

logis. 
// en eft des poetes comme 

des peintres. 
// en est de vou* comme de 

moi. 



CHAP. VII. 
Rules and Observations upon the Participles. 

T3ARTICIPLES are either active or passive ; therefore 
-*- " I shall take notice of them separately in the two fol- 
lowing sections : 

SECTION I; 
The Active or Present Participle. 

i. The active or present participle is always indeclina- 
ble : as, a woman fearing God, and loving her husband ; 
une fc?nme craignant Dieu et aimant son mar.i. Except in a 
very few law terms. 

1. We now seldom make use of a participle active, except ataut ?jid 
Ayanc, used before a participie passive ; as, having met with his bro- 
ther, he spoke to him ; ayant rencontre ton frere, il lui farla. Except 
too v/hen it is preceded by en ; as, in going, or while P was going, er. 
cllant-y in eating, or while 1 was eating, en mange ant. Some call this a 
gerund. However it matters very little what it is called. 

En, In this case, may be translated into English, by while, or ivhen, 
which may likewise be rendered in French by comme, Icrsaue, or quand\ 
the first of these requires the following verb- in the imperfect ; the 
©thcr two require it in the present, or in any other tense; as, I never 
Speak white eating, or while, cr wher, I eat; je ne far le jamais, lorsque 
ou quand, je rr.angc, and not comme je mange', but we say, as I was *t 
i , he cam* to see me j comme je djnois, li vint m« voir. 



256 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

3. Some participles are, by use, become adjectives, and 
some substantives : as, a detracting~man, a detracting wo- 
man ; un homme me'disant, jaie femme medisante or un medi- 
sattt, une medisante. In such a case they are declinable. 

4. According to the present usage, the present participle governs no 
base whatever, but we resolve it into a tense of the verb, with the pro- 
noun relative preceding it. Thus, instead of saying with Vaugelci, in 
his remarks on the French tongue, these stuffs are not at all like those 
I saw yesterday, ces etoffes ne sent pas approchantes de celles que jc wis bier ; 
or, his temper is so repugnant to mine, son hutneur est telkment repu- 
gnante a la mienne, we say, ces etoffes n'approchent pas de celles que je t\s 
bier, son humeur repugne telkment a la mienne. Even in the case of the 
first rule, instead of saying, c'euu une femme craignant Dieu et aimant 
son marly it is better to say, c'etoit une femme qui craignoit Dieu et aimoit 
son marl. 



SECTION II. 
The Passive or Past Participle. 



To show exactly in what instances the participle passive 
or past is declinable or not, is one of the greatest diffi- 
culties ot the French tongue. The following observations 
will set this nicety, hitherto so perplexed, in a clear light. 

I. The passive participle is declinable, 1st, when it is 
used adjectively ; as men despised, des hommes meprises; 
they are loved, ils sont aimes, ou dies sont aimees. 

2-dJy, It is declinable, when it is preceded by a noun or 
pronoun which it governs in the first case ; as, the letters 
which I have received, les lettres quej'ai revues. 

3dly, When, with the auxiliary verb etre> it forms a neuter, recipro- 
cal, or reflected verb, not governing a first case, or followed by any 
other word making but one sense with it 5 as, they have addicted them- 
selves to trade, il se sont adonnes au negece. But we do not say, she put 
herself to death, clle s y est donnee la mort\ because la mart is a first case. 
If the verb has no governed word after it, the practice of the rule is 
c till more certain. 

The difficulty is to know whether the participle, followed by an in- 
finitive mood, ought to agree with the foregoing noun or pronoun. A3 
no grammarian explains this matter in a clear and intelligible man- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 257 

ncr *, and it is besides of great use, I shall give some observations 
upon it in the following rule. 

II. The participle, followed by an infinitive mood, is 
declinable, if it govern the foregoing noun or pronoun ; 
if the noun or pronoun be governed by the infinitive 
mood, the parriciple is indeclinable : this rule is plain 
and certain. Now to know whether the participle, or 
the infinitive mood, govern the foregoing noun or pro- 
noun, attend to the following observations. 

1 st. If the infinitive be preceded by a preposition, the 
participle governs the noun or pronoun, if the noun or 
pronoun may be. put, without altering the sense, between 
the participle and the infinitive ; as, the soldiers whom 
they have compelled to march, les soldais qu'<?// a con- 
tracts de marcher; for we may say, they have compelled 
the soldiers to march ; on a contraint les soldats de 
marcher. Again, the hiftory which I gave you to read, 
Vhistoire que je vous ai donnee a lire ; for we may likewise 
say, I gave you the hiftory to read ; je <vous ai donne 
l'histoire a lire. 

On the contrary, the infinitive governs the foregoing 
noun or pronoun, if this cannot be put between the par- 
ticiple and the infinitive : as, we never ought to swerve 
from the good way, which we began to follow ; il ne 
faut jamais s'e'carter de la bonne rout que Von a com- 
mence a suivre ; we cannot say, on a commence la bonne 
route a survre ; but, we may say, on a commence a suture 
la bonne route. 

2dly. If the infinitive be not preceded by a preposi- 
tion, the participle governs the foregoing rlbun or pro- 

* Grammarians give false and inadequate rules about this matter. 
They say, commonly, that the participle passive is indeclinable, when 
a pure infinitive follows it; by a pure infinitive they understand an 
infinitive used without a preposition or any other word. How much 
they are in the wrong appears by the examples of the second rule. 

Some say, that " the participle is indeclinable, when the pronoun 
is governed by a verb coming after the tense compound, and not by 
the tense compound." This rule is not clear, and leaves a learner in 
darkness: neither is he able to know when the pronoun is thus go- 
verned; consequently this rule is very inadequate. 

According to others, the, participle is indeclinable, when a verb in 
tfcfc infinitive ian mediately follows. This rule is false in many cases. 



2$% A GRAMMAR OF THE 

noun ; if the infinitive may be turned into the present 
participle in English, or rendered in French by qui, and 
the imperfect of the indicative mood, without altering 
the sense; as, I saw her painting; je Yai vue peindre : 
I heard her singj.yV \*m entendue chanter: the ladies , 
whom I saw passing; les da?nes que j'ai vues passer: 
the soldiers whom I saw going ; Its soldats que j'ai vus 
fartir. In ail the foregoing examples I may say, with- 
out altering the sense, je Yai vue qui peignoit, je Yai en- 
tendue qui chantoit, &c. 

On the contrary, the infinitive governs the noun or 
pronoun, when, the infinitive cannot be turned into the 
present participle, or rendered by qui and the imperfect 
tense ; thus, speaking of a lady whose picture was 
drawn, we say, I saw her picture drawn ; je Yai vu 
peindre : of a song, I heard it sung ; je Yai entendu 
chanter* 

The verbs falre and lahser, followed by an infinitive, form with it 
a sort of compound verb, and the participle is indeclinable; as, that 
woman whom you have put to deatk, cette femme que *vou% a-vcz, fait 
m»urir' y that opportunity which you have suffered to escape, cette. 
occasion que vgui avez laisse echapper. 

III. The passive participle is indeclinable, ist. When 
it is immediately followed by que or qui ; as, the conse- 
quence which I intended, that you should draw from 
it ; la consequence que j'ai pretendu que <vous en tiras- 
s'tez. 

2dly. When the participle and the auxiliary verb are 
ir.ed impersonally : as, the hot weather we have had ; 
les chaleurs qu'il a fait, 

3<dly . When it cannot be joined to a substantive as 
it's adjective ; therefore the participles parle, agi, tie, 
craint, plaint, &c, are never declined. 

4thly. When it is followed by it's governed case ; as, 
I have received the letters ; j'ai recu les lettres. 

Jthly« The participles pu from powvoir t <voulu from 
wottloir, are indeclinable, either because they are not used 
adjcctively, or, because an infinitive is understood, which 
governs the preceding noun : as, I made all the endeavours 
I could ; j'ai fait tons les efforts que j'ai pu ; /aire k under-. 
6tood after ///. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 259 

IV. It is the opinion of some grammarians, that when the subject 
or nominative case of the verb comes after it, the participle is indeclin- 
able ; but good authors, such as the abbes Q'irc.rd and d"* Olivet, Mes- 
sieurs Vuebs, Marmontely &c, make it declinable; as, there is a good 
lesson our misanthrope has received: viola une honne lefon qu'a re$ue 
voire misanthrope ; Marmontel : the impression which the recital of 
your misfortunes made on me 5 /'impression que m'a faite h re'cit de ves 
malbeun ; ibid. 

The participles in the foregoing examples are declinable, becaus-e, 
according to the second obeervation, the foregoing nouns are governed 
fey the participles. 

V. According to the actual use, the participle is de. 
clinable, when it is followed by an adjective which it go- 
verns, and which has a relation to a preceding noun, and 
makes a part of it ; as, Amasis is the only one of the 
Egyptian kings, who conquered the isle of Cyprus, and 
rendered it tributary ; Amasis est le sad des rois d'Egypte 
qui ait conquis Vile de Cypre, et qui V ait rendue tributaire ; 
Rollio: 

VI. According to the second observation we write, 
the ladies whom you came to see ; les dames que wous 
etes venu voir, because the foregoing noun is governed by 
the infinitive. 

Though a personal conjunctive pronoun be put before alle or venu, 
followed- by a verb in the infinitive mood, the participles all: and venu 
must agree with the person to which they relate : thus we write, she 
came to see you ; elk votts est venue voir. But it is better to trans- 
pose the pronoun, and put it immediately before the word that -go- 
verns it, die est venue vous voir. 

N. B* All the preceding rules are conformable to the present usage ; 
all the grammaiians and the best authors having agreed respecting them 
for the iast sixty years. Every rivle inconsistent with these is gene*, 
rally deemed erroneous, 



i6o 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Rules and Observations on Participles exemplified 
for the Scholar's Practice. 



[Sect, I. i.] A man fearing 
God, 

A woman loving her hus- 
band. 

A lady applying herself to 
study. 

[2.] He died while eating 
his breakfast. 

Why do you speak nubile 
.you are eating f 

I saw him while I walked in 
the Park. 

[3.] Fortune is fickle. 

She is a charming lady. 

She is a slanderous woman. 
[4.] His [Vher] temper is so 

repugnant to mine, that . • 
These are reasons proving 

the same thing. 
[Sect. II. 1.] The idle are 

despised. 
She was endowed, in her 

youth, with wit and 

beauty. 
Unpolite men are hated hy 

all. 
He is cherished by the king. 
Have you seen the stockings 

I bought ? 
I have seen the shirts you 

bought. 
I shall speak to him of the 

affair you communicated to 

me. 
I have read the letter you 

wrote to me. 



Un horn me qui craint Dieu. 

Un femme qui aime son 
mari. 

Une demoiselle qui s' appli- 
que a Tetude. 

II mourut en dejeunant* 

Pourquoi parlez-vous en 

mangeant ? 
Je le vis en me pr untenant 

au Parct 
La fortune est change ante. 
C'est une demoiselle char- 

mante. 
C'est une femme me'disante. 
Son humeur ripugne telle- 

ment a la mienne, que . . 
Ce sont des raisons fui con- 

cluent la meme chose. 
Les paresseux sont meprises. 

Elle etoit, dans sa jeunesse, 

donee d 'esprit et de beau- 

te. 
Les im polls sont hats de 

tout le monde. 
II est chert du roi. 
Avez-vous vu les bas que 

j'ai a eke les? 
J'ai vu les chemises que 

vous aves acketees, 
Je lui parlerai de l'affaire 

que vous m'avez cemmu- 

niquee. 
J'ai lu la lettre que vous 

m'avez ecrite. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



261 



Have you read the books I 
lent you ? 

It is a piece of news I have 
not read in any newspa- 
per. 

I have not yet read the pa- 
pers you sent me. 

I had no time to give you 
an answer to the letters 
you wrote to me. 

These are not the same hats 
as I saw. 

You do not know the trou- 
ble I had to persuade her. 

Do you know the reasons 
he told me ? 

The lace you bought is very 
fine. 

I have not learned the lesson 
you gave me. 

You speak to him of sci- 
. ences, which he has ne- 
ver learned. 

You speak of a woman I 
knew. 

These are things- I never 
foresaw. 

You talk of an affair I have 
not forgotten. 

This is as good fruit as 
you have ever eaten. 

This is the best liquor I ever 

drank. 
These are the most honest 

people you ever knew. 

The jewels you showed me 

are very rich. 
The woman he has married 



Avez-vous lu les livres que 

je vous ai pretes ? 
C'est une nou velle que je 

n'ai lue dans aucun papier 

de nouvelles. 
Je n'ai pas encore lu les pa- 
piers que vous m'avez en- 

HJOjes. 
Je n'ai pas eu le temps de 

foire reponse aux lettres 

que vous* m'avez ecrites. 
Ce ne sont pas les memes 

chapeaux que j'ai vus* 
Vous ne savez pas la peine 

que j'ai eue a la persuader* 
Savez-vous les raisons qu'il 

m'a dites? 
La dentelle que vous avQfc 

achetee est tres-belle. 
Je n'ai point appris la lecon 

que vous m'avez donnee. 
Vous lui parlez de sciences 

qu'il n'a jamais apprises* 

Vous parlez d'une femme 

que j'ai conmte. 
Ce sont des choses que je 

n'ai jamais pre'vues. 
Vous parlez d'un affaire 

que je n'ai pas oubliee. 
Ce sont d'aussi bons fruits 

que vous ayez jamais man* 

C'est la meilleure liqueur 

que j'aie jamais hue. 
Ce sont les plus honnetes 

gens que vous ayez jamais 

conn us. 
Les bijoux que vous m'avez 

montre's sont tres-riches. 
La femme qu'ii a e'pouue^ 



t5i 



. A GRAMMAR OF THE 



has brought him a hand- 
some fortune. 

There are the bocks you 
lent me. 

I have found my gloves 
again, .which I had fast. 

It is a thought I have read 
somewhere. 

She has applitd herself to 
the French tongue. 

They have applied- them- 
selves to trade. 

They have ruined them- 
selves by foolish ex- 
penses. 

They have drowned them- 
selves. 

The garrison has surren- 
dered at discretion. 

She gave herself up to de- 
spair. 

She has seen herself i?e- 
traj^d by her own rela- 
tions. 

They have found themselves 
surrounded by their ene- 
mies, 

[2.3 The soldiers whom 
they have constrained to 
submit. 

What is become of the 
books, which I gave you 
to read ? 

The lesson, which I gave 
you to learn is not diffi- 
cult. 

Where are the letters, which 
I gave you to write ? 

I expect the ladies, whom I 
invited to dinner to day. 



que vous 



lui a apporte un bien cou- 

siderable. 
Voila les livres 

m'avez pretes, 
J'ai retrouve raes gants que 

j'avois perdns, 
C'esr une pensee que j'ai 

lue quelque part. 
Kile j'est appliquce a la lan- 

gue Francoise. 
lis se sont adonnes au com- 
merce. 
lis se sont mine's par de fol* 

les depenses. 

lis se sont noyes. 

La garnison /'est rendue \ 

discretion. 
Elle j'est abandotmee au de- 

sespoir. 
Elle j'est vue trahie de ses 

propres parens^ 

lis se sont trouves environnes 
par leurs ennemis. 

Les soldats qu' on a ccn» 
traints de se soumettre. 

Q«e sont devenus les livres 

que je vous ai donnes a\ 

lire ? 
La le^on que je vous ai don. 

nee a apprendre n'est pas 

difficile. 
Ou sont les lettres que ja 

vous ai donnees a ecrire , 
J'attends les dames que jail 

prices de venir diner au-| 

jourd'hui. 
1 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



We ought not to swerve 
from the good way, which 
we began to follow. 

The language that you be- 
gan to learn is very use- 
ful. 

The lady whom you left off 
visiting is very witty, 

The history which I hegan 
to read is very entertain- 
ing. 

I j<i*w her. painting. 

1 heard her sing. 

The ladies whom I saw 
passing. 

The soldiers whom I saw 
going. 
saw them arriving, 

I sa-uu her picture drawn. 

It is a bong, which I heard 
sung this week. 

Several ladies came to the 
door, I did not suffer them 
to be refused. 

The house, which he or- 
dered to be built, is very 
fine and well situate. 

What news have you heard? 



the news I have 
that I have 



l S> 



This is 

heard. 
It is a thing, 

seen done. 
Have you seen the new 

suit of clothes, which he 

ordered to be made for 

him?' 



263 

11 ne faut jamais s'ecarter 

de la bonne route que l'on 

a commence 'a suivre. 
La langue que vous avez 

commence' d'apprendre, est 

fort utile. 
La demoiselle que vous avez 

Mti de voir est tres-spi- 

rituelle. 
L'histoire que j'ai commence 

a lire est tres-amusante. 

Je /'ai <vue peindre. 

Je /'ai ent endue chanter. 

Les dame que j'ai <v«es 

passer. 
Les soldats que j'ai <vus par- 

tir. 
Je les ai <v us arriver. 
Je /'ai <vu peindre. 
C'est une chanson que j'ai 

entendu chanter cette se- 

maine. 
Plusieurs dames se sont 

presentees a la porte, 

je ne les ai pas /aisse 

renvoyer. 
La maison qu'W a. fait batir, 

est tres-belle et tres-bien 

situee. 
Quelle nouvelle avez-vous 

entendu dire ? 
Voila la nouvelle que j'ai 

entendu ranconter. 
C'est un chose que j'ai <vn 

faire. 
Avez-vous vu l'habit neuf 

qu'il a fait faire ? 



1 



264 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



[5.] The books I have <?r- 

dered to be sent to me. 
The lesson which I com- 
manded that you should 
learn. 

The consequences which I 
intended that you should 
draw from ir. 

I have been ill during the 
hot weather we have had. 

The rain we have had this 
week has spoiled the 
roads. 

I have read those books. 

I received your letter. 

Have you seen the Queen ? 

Why have you not trans- 
lated your fable ? 

She has not learned her les- 
son. 

She used her best endea- 
vours. 

I have granted her all the 
pleasures she desired, 

[4.] The impression which 
the recital of your mis- 
fortunes' made on me. 

The trouble which your 
law suit gave me. 

The letters which your bro- 
ther wrote to me. 

The friends which your mo- 
ther procured me. 

The surprise which his pre- 
sence occasioned me. 

[5.] The English rendered 
themselves masters of 
Quebec. 

They have rendered them- 
selves famous in war. 



Les livres que j'ai ordonne 

qu'on m'envoyat. 
La lecon que jai command e 

que vous apprisslez. 

La consequence que j'ai 

pretend* que vous en ti- 

rassiez. 
J'ai ete malade pendant- les 

chaleurs qu'il a fait. 
La pluie qu'il a fait cette 

semaine-ci a gate les 

chemins. 
J'ai lu ces liv res-la. 
J'ai recu votre lettre. 
Avez-vous vu la Reine ? 
Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas 

traduit votre fable ? 
Elle n'a pas appris sa leean. 

Elle a fait tous les efforts 

qu'elle a pu. 
Je lui ai accorde tous les 

plaisirs qu'elle a voulu, 
L'impression que m'a faite 

le recit de vos malheurs. 

La peine que m'a donne'e 

vorre proces. 
Les lettres que m'a e'critss 

Monsieur votre frere. 
Les amis que m'a procures 

Madame votre mere. 
La surprise que m'a occa~ 

siovnee sa presence. 
Les Anglois se sont rendus 

maitres de Quebec. 

Us se sont rtndus fameux 
dans Ja guerre. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 265 

She has rendered herself ce- Elle j'est rendue celebre par 
lebrated by her wit and son esprit et par sabeaute. 
beauty. 
The garrison has surrendered La garnison j'est rendue pri- 

prisoners of war. sonniere de guerre. 

She is come to see us. Elle est venue nous voir, ou 

elle nous est venue voir. 
They are gone to see him. Elles sont allies le voir, ou 

elles le sont allies voir. 
They are come to see me- Elles sont venues me voir, ou 

elles me sont venues voir* 



CHAP. VIII. 
Rules and Observations upon Adverbs. 

2, A D VERBS, if simple, are commonly placed be- 
•^*- fore adjectives and participles; as, this wine 
is very good, ce vin est tres-bon. When they are com- 
pound, they are commonly placed &fter ; as, he is ar- 
rived seasonably, il est arrive a. propos. 

2. When adverbs, simple or compound, are joined to 
a verb, they are commonly placed after it ; as, she loves 
-him tenderly, elle I'aime tendrement. But when the ad- 
verb is simple, and joined to a verb in a compound tense, 
it may be placed before or after the participle, though it 
is better to place it before; as, elle Va tendrement aime a 
Except davantage> more, which is always put after the 
participle. 

The following adverbs, bien, mieux, trop y mal } fort f 
to74J'jurs> jamais, and some others, are placed between the 
auxiliary and the participle : and when jamais or tou- 
jours meets with another adverb, it is always placed first ? 
as he always spoke well of you, U a toujours bien parte 'de 
vous. 

3. Beaucoupy peu } ircp, assez, and similar adverbs of 
quantity, take sometimes before them the particles de 
or a> in the manner of nouns; as, it is the custom of 
many people, e'est la c-utume de beaucoup de gens: q£ 
few people, de peu de gens: that happens to too many 

N 



idb A GRAMMAR OF THE 

people, c la arrive a trop de gem: to too few people, s 
trop pcu dc gens. 

4. In a negative sentence we generally make use of 

two negative words ; as, nt-plut^ no more ; nt-potnt f 

rot at all; tie-pas, not; tte-rien 9 nothing; ne-Jamais, 

' never; ne-nullement, by no means ; ne-personne, ne-pai-uti, 

m+mm€m*i nobody ; Arc. 

5. S'e, which is the fir«t negation, always follows the subject of 
the verb, an J whatever dept-nds on it, if the subject be a noun ; as, 

, being born feeble, is never free from trouble ; rbomme e'tant ne 
J9ikle % n'ett jamais exempt de feme. If the subject be a pronoun per- 
icaal, and the sentence interrogative, the sentence begins with ne j 
as, do ;iot you know ? ne sav^t-'vout pas ? In compound tenses, the 
second negation 11 always put between the auxiliary and the verb; as, 
I have not read your book, je n'ai pas lu votre tore. If the verb be 
in the infinitive mood, the two negatives come before it; as, not to 
tell you a falsehood, pour ne pas vous dire un mensonge. 

6. We m-ke use of the particle ne, without it's second negative 
word fas or point, in the following cases : 

1st. When the negative m follows; as, I neither love nor hate him, 
je ne raxmt ni ne le bais. 

idly. After the conjunctions a moins que, unless ; de peur qv, de 
crmsrti jue, lest, or for fear that; as, unless he comes; a mtmi quilnt 
vieaae. 

jdty. After que preceded by the words empecber, to hinder, or keep 
from; crsindre, to fear; and others expressing fear J n mentioning an 
»rTcct not desiied ; as, he is afraid that he will come to day, il craint 
qu'il ne vienne aujourd^bui. , 

But if we wish, that the thing spoken of should happen, then the 
>erb that follows cra'mdre, or any other verb, expressing fear, must be 
vied with two negatives ; as, he is afraid, that he will not come 
to day, il craint quil ne vienne pas aujourd'hui. 

4thly. Before que, taken in the sense of sinen, beside, nothing but, 

•nip; a?, I desire no recompense only, or but, the pleasure of 

ng you, je ne desire pour recompense que le tlaiiir de vou$ 

Stl.Iy. After que ne, taken in the *cnse of why not; a?, why do not 
you iuiwer, que ne > efrnJez-vous ? 

6(hly. Afttr ne iav.ir u»ed for ne po uv *ir, or when it implies aa 
of the mind : as, I do not know whether he will succeed, 

uil j'// re'uinr 1. 

If it imply a full ignorance of the thing, it commonly requires 
tfaovea; aa, I do not know, whether he be come, je ne sais pas 

Jffcjy, After the verbs #ier, caser, and powvoir, used negatively; at, 

1 dj| t0 nim > K n'c" iui e\nre. In an interrogative phrase, 

cud negation is commonly added : as, dare you not write to him? 

e r 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



267 



Sthly. After the verb il y a, followed by a compound of the pre- 
sent tense in a negative sentence ; as, I have not been in Paris these 
ten years ; il y a dix arts que je n'ai ete a Parts : even if it be fol- 
lowed by any other tense, the second negative is still omitted ; as, I 
had not been in Paris for a year, il y avoit un an que jt fi'aveis e'te a 
Paris. 

9thly. When, in a negative sentence, the particle de signifies a part 
of time : as, I will not see him for a year ; je ne le verrai fun an< 

lothly. There are some expressions, in which we indiscriminately 
make use of a single or double negative, particularly after si : as, *i 
vous ne voule&. m % y conduire, or si vous ne *uoule% pas my conduire j 
if you will not carry me thither : si vous ne vene% cette semaine, #r si 
vous ne venez pas cette semaine j if you do not come this week« &c. 

Rules and Observations upon Adverbs, exemplified 
for the Scholar's Practice. 



[i.j I saw him 'very often. 
You are in great haste, 
[2.] You are come very tea* 

sonably. 
At present , let us see. 
^For the present, I am very 

easy. 
Now, I will tell you. 
Come to day and see me. 
Quick, make liaste. 
I wentyesterday to the play. 
I saw her the day before 

yesterday. 
I have known him formerly. 
He arrived lately. 
She died not long ago. 
You must write to her be. 

fore. 
I shall speak to you to mor- 
row. 
I shall have done after to- 

morrow. 
Come back soon. 
Henceforward you shall be 

rov friend. 



Je Pai vu tres-souvent. 
Vons etes //•<*/- presse. 
Vous etes arrive tr& a pro- 

pos. 
A present, voyens. 
Pour le present, je suis trh- 

tranquille. 
Maintenant, je vous dirai. 
Venez me voir atijourd'hui. 
Fife, depeche z . votis . 
Jefus hier a la cornedie, 
Je la vis evvant-hier. 

Je Pai connu autrefois, 
II arriva demierement* 
Elle mourut depuis pen. 
II faut lui ecrire anparcL*' 

*vant. 
Je vous parlerai demain* 

J'aurai fait afrh-demam. 

Revenez bientot. 

Vous serez desormais mon 

ami. 
2 






A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Henceforth it will always 
be so. 

At fir it he spoke thus. 

J have been often astonished. 

She died suddenly. 

Do you sometimes read ro- 
mances ? 

I very seldom read any. 

On a sudden he presented 
himself before my eyes. 

I shall come back, at the 
latest, by ten o'clock. 

Run thither nvtth all speed. 

I never consented to it. 

I shall always be faithful to 
you. 

It is all over. 

She torments him continu- 
ally. 

I shall speak to him at Li- 
tun . 

I commonly breakfast at nine 
o'clock. 

At what o'clock do you 
commonly dine ? 

We dine almost always at 

} three o'clock. 

1 hardly ever go out before 
dinner. 

I shall meet him enc time or 
other. 

You go to bed too :oon. 

You rise too late. 

Rise betimes. 

Have you not seem him 
yet? 

We shall be in the country 
then. 

Then we shall make our- 
selves merry. 

from that tune I perceived 
uia cheating irickb. 



Dorenavant, ii en sera tou- 

jours de meme. 
D*abord il parla ainsi. 
J'ai ete souvent e tonne. 
Elle mourut subitement. 
Lisez-vous quelquefois des 

romans ? 
J'en lis tres-rarement. 
Soudain il se pre sen ta de- 

vant mes yeux. 
Je reviendrai a dix heuresj 

au plus tard. 
Courez-y au plus vite. 
Je n'y z\ jamais consent i. 
Je vous serai toujours fidele. 

C'en est fait/<?»r toujour:. 
Elle le tourmente continued 

lement. 
Je lui parlerai a loisir, 

Je dejeune ordinaireme?it a 

neuf heures. 
A quelle heure dinez-vous 

co?mnunement% 
Nous dinons prcsque tou- 
jours a trois heures. 
Je ne sors pnsque jamais 

avant le diner. 
Je le rencontrerai tot ou 

tard. 
Vous allcz trop tot au lit. 
Vous vous levez trop tard.- 
Lcvez-vous de bonne heure. 
Ne l'avez-vous pas encore 

vu ? 
Nous scrons alors a la cam* 

pagne. 
Feur lors nous nous diver- 

tirons. 
JDesAjrs je m'apercus de ses 

fourbenes. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



269 



I have not seen her since. 

When will you come ? 

Now and then we play at 
cards. 

We: have made ourselves 
merry all the night. 

He has been robbed at noon- 
day. 

I shall send it you the first 
opportunity. 

I shall be ready to serve 
you at all times. 



WL 



ere are you going 



Whence do you come ? 

Which way do you go ? 

Come hither* 

Go hence* 

Come this way. 

Stay there. 

Do not stir hence. 

Go that way* 

Look up. 

Go up stairs. 

Your pen is down here. 

See yonder that beautiful 

flower. 
She comes from above. 
1 come from below. 
Take it by the top. 
Hold it by the bottom. 
This old house is very fine 

within. 
This house is very fine with- 

out. 
How far shall we go ? 
J have read this book as far 

as this. 
Let us read as far as this. 
You will find him bcrt- 

about. 



Je ne Pai pas vue depuis. 
Quand viendrez-vous ? 
Nous jouons aux cartes de 

temps en temps. 
Nous nous sommes divertis 
. toute la nuit. 
II a ete vole en plein jour^ 

ou en plein midi. 
Je vous l'enverrai au premier 

purl 
Je serai pret en tout "temps a 

vous servir. 
O/*- allez -vous ? 
Yyou venez -vous ? 
Par oil avez- vous passe i 
Venez ici. 
Sortez d'ici. 
Venez par ici. 
Restez la. 

Ne bougez pas de la. 
Allez par Id. 
Regardez la haul. 
Allez en haut. 
Votre plume est ici dessous. 
Regardez Id has cette belle 

fieur. 
Elle vient d'en haut. 
Je viens d 3 en has. 
Prenez-le par en haut. 
Tenez-le par en has. 
Cette vieille maison est tres- 

belle en dedans. 
Celle-ci est tres-belle en de* 

hors. 
jfusqu'oii irons- nous ? 
j'ai lu ce Hvyq jufqu'ici. 

Li sons jusque-ld. 

Vous le trouverez aux en- 



.270 



A GRAMMAR OF TfrE 



You go very far \ 

He lives hard by. 

I bought it just by. 

I have followed him close. 

Come nearer* 

Go before t I will follow you. 

Walk behind. 

You will nowhere find the 

like. 
Put this over and that 

under. 
He struck me behind. 
You would be rich elsewhere. 
You will be contented no- 
where* 
She will be admired every 

nvh.~ff t 
His hou-je is m this side. 
1 i is garden is on that side. 
They seek for him 001 a!! sides. 
They have agreed on both 

sides. 
He runs hither and thither* 
She goes up and down. 
Go on the right. 
Do not go on the left. 
Go straight along. 
He fell all along into 

dirt. 
They went together to 

coffee-house. 
We treat one another by 

turns. 
Let us drink about. 
Do not speak all at once. 
They run helter skelter. 
They ran in a crowd to see 

the King. 
You turn every thing topsy 

tun . 
And he lilczasc. 
Give him rwr io little of it f 



the 



the 



Vous allez bien loin* 
II demeure tout p roc he. 
Je l'ai achete ici pres, 
Je l'ai suivi de pres. 
Approchez-vous de plus prhs* 
Allez devant, je vous suivrai. 
Marchez derriere. 
Vous n'en trouverez nuUe 

fart de semblable. 
Mettez ceci dessus, et ceia 

desssus. 
II m' a frappe par dorriere. 
Vous seriez riche ailleurs. 
Vous ne serez content null* 

pat*. 
Elk sera admiree par tout \ 

Sa maison est Nh>dtf4i 
Son jardin est aiudeia. 
On le cherche de tuus cotes. 
11 se sont accordes de jjart 

et d' autre, 
II court de cote et d* autre* 
Elle va ca et Id. 
Allez a dro'Ue, 
N'allez pas a gauche. 
Allez tout droit. 
II tomba tcut 

dans la boue. 
lis sont alles 

cafe . 
Nous nous traitons tcur 4 

tour. 
Buvons a la ronde. 
Ne parlez pas tous d lafois. 
lis courent pele.mele. 
lis coururent en foule pour 

voir le Roi. 
Vous mettez tout sens dessus 

dessous. 
Et lui aussiy ou pareillement : % 
Donnez-lui.en taut soit feu* 



de son long 
ensemble ail 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



iji- 



Vou give him a great deal. 

Give her but little* 

I have not much of it. 

Have you enough ? 

I have eaten sufficiently , 

You gave me too much. 

You gave him too little. 

By little and little he will 

become a doctor. 
Do you owe him so mtich ? 
I have owed him more. 
I may have it at another 

place for less. 
I have been, at most, twice 

at her house, 
Do not fail to write to her 

at least* 
Y@u bought it too dear. 
I have not sold it him dear. 

I am infinitely obliged to you. 

He was almost killed. 

You must ask it of him by 

all means. 
She is tolerably well* 

Why do you not answer 

me ? 
Hovj is your sister ? 

She is very vosll. 
She has been very well, since 
she went into the country* 
I am admirably vjell. 

My mother is very ill* 
You have done vcisely. 
You accuse me falsely. 
pie thoroughly understands 
the French language. 



Vous lui en donnez beaucoup, 
Ne lui en donnez guens. 
Je n'en ai pas beaucoup* 
En avez-vous assezf 
J'ai mange suffisamment. 
Vous m'en avez trop donne, 
Vous lui en avez donne trop 

peu. 
Feu a peu il deviendra, doc- 

teur. 
Lui devez-vous tant? 
Je lui ai du davantage. 
Je l'aurai ailleurs a moins. 

J'ai ete deux fois chez elk, 
tout au plus. 

Au moins > ne man que z pas 
de lui ecrire. 

Vous i'avez achetc trop (her. 

Je ne le lui ai pas vend a 
cher. 

Je vous %m$infiniment oblige. 

II fut presaue tue\ 

II faut que vous le lui de- 
mand iez absolument. 

Elle se porte passablement 
lien. 

Pmrfttoi ne me repondez- 
vous pas I 

Comment se porte mademoi- 
selle votre sceur ? 

Elle se porte tres-bien. 

Elle se porte tres-bien, depuis 
qn'elie est a la campagne. 

Je me porte parfaiiement 
hi en. 

Ma mere se porte tres-mah 

Vous avez agi sagement. 

Vous m'accusez a faux. 

II sait le Francois a fond m 

K 4 



272 

You will hardly persuade 

her. 
She consented to it with re* 

luctancy. 
She went against her will. 
3 agree to it heartily. 
She is secure from all danger. 

I have told yon my senti- 
ments openly. 

He has given us a descrip- 
tion to the life. 

He fell upon his hack. 

They went groping along. 

You have put on your stock- 
ings the wrong side out* 
ward. 

He did it on purpose. 

I did not do it designedly. 

Do you speak in earnest ? 

I tell it you seriously. 

1 did it in a joke. 

I said it in jest. 

fhe said it in jest. 

You have done it in a hurry. 

1 have done it unawares. 

You speak at random. 

Let the worst come to the 
worst, you can only lose 
your labour. 

Their lodgings are small. 

I shall inge?iuously confess it. 

1 won h fairly. 

I am fully persuaded of it. 

He would by all means make 
me stayat dinner. 

Your book is, in all respects, 
better. 

I warn you as n friend. 

Let us settle our affairs ami. 

cably. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

A peine la persuaderez-vous* 



Elle y consentit a regret. 

Elle y est allee a contrt-cceur. 

Vy consens de bon caeur. 

Elle est a convert de tout 
danger. 

Je vous ai dit mon sentiment 
a decGWvert. 

II nous a fait une descrip- 
tion au natitrel. 

11 tomba a la renverse. 

lis allerent a tatons. 

Vous avez mis vos bas a 
Venders. 

II Pa fait expres. 
Je ne Pai pas fait a desseitt m 
Parlez-vous de bonne foi P 
Je vous ie dis serieuscment. 
Je le rls pour rire. 
Je Pai dit pour badiner % 
Elle Pa dit en badinant. 
Vous Pavez fait a la hate. 
Je Pai fait par megarde. 
Vous parlez au ha sard. 
Au pis aller, vous ne pouvez 
perdre que votre peine. 

lis sont loges a Vetroit. 
Je Pavouerai de bonne foi. 
Je Pai gagne de bonjeu. 
J'cn suis tout-a-fait persuade. 
II voulut a toute force me 

fa ire r ester a diner. 
Votre livre est meiileur a 

tous cgards. 
Je vous avertis en ami. 
Regions nos affaires a la- 
J :lc. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



*73 



He awaked suddenly. 

Let us live in peace. 

You may sleep quietly. 

Will you return empty hand- 
ed? 

Make free, as if you were 
at home. 

She has resisted him stoutly. 

Did you go thither on foot ? 

She was on horseback when 
I saw her. 

Yes, indeed, I have been 
there. 

Perhaps he will come to 
day. 

Hz probably does not know 
it. 

Put them separate. 

1 have put them out of the 
way. 

I have lefr them apart. • 

I know it better than you. 

Trade goes on worse* and 
worse. 

I know it as well as you. 

My mother is not so ill as 
she was. ■•-». 

His affairs go on better and 
better. • 

He shall pay dearly for it. 

I am thirty years old, nei- 
ther more or less. 

Above all, do not forget, to 
bring paper. 

I shall speak ..to her in pri- 
vate. 

[3.]. It is the opinion of 
many people. 

It is the custom of few peo- 
ple. 

That happens to many people. 



II se reveilla en sursaut* 
Vivons en paix. 
Vou> pouvez dormir en repot* 
Vous en retournerez-vous 

a vide ? 
Agissez librementy comme si 

vous etiez chez vous. - 
Elle lui a resiste fort etferme. 
Y allates.vous a pied? 
Elle eroit a cheval, quand 

je la vis. 
Oui, en verite, j'y ai ete. 

Peut-etre viendra. t-il au~ 

jourd'hui. 
Probablement il ne le sait 

pas. 
Mettez-les se pare menu 
Je les ai mis a Vecart* 

Je les ai laisses a part. 
Je le sais mieux que vous. 
Le- commerce va de pis en 

pis. « 
Je le sais aussi bien que- vous* 
Ma mere se porte mains mal 

qu'elle ne faisoit. 
Ses affaires vont de mieux en 

mieux. 
II me le pay era cher. 
J'ai trenie ans, ni plus ni 

moins. 
Surtout n'oubliez pas d'ap- 

porter du papier. 
Je lui parlerai en particulier* 

C'est l'opinion de beaucoup 

de gens. 
C'est la coutume de peude 

gens. 
Cela arrive a beaucoup de genso 



-74 



[4'1 I have not learned my 
lesson. 

I shall speak to him no more. 

I have not seen him at ail. 

He knows nothing. 

I never knew him. 

By no means consent to it. 

I did not see any body there. 

[$.] Have you not seen my 
brother ? 

Have you not written your 
theme > 

Have they not yet break- 
fasted? 

Has she not consented to it ? 

Has he not spent all his 
money ? 

Has he not sent for him ? 

[6.] I neither love^r hate 

him. 
i neither see her nor speak 

to her. 
Unless you come with me. 

lest he should die. 

I shall hinder him from 

playing. 
I am afraidhe is sick. 

Be sure that he does not go 

out. 
I am afraid he will not come 

to day. 
Why do you fear she wilL 

not write to you ? 

She fears he does not lore 

her. 
She fears he is not in good 

health. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Je #'ai pas appris ma Jecon, 



Je ne lui parlerai plus. 

Je ne l'ai point vu» 

11 ne sait rien. 

Je ne l'ai jamais conna. 

N'y consentez nullement* 

Je n'y ai vu personne. 

A'avez-vous pas vu mon 

frere ? 
A^'avez-vous/tfi ecrit votre 

theme ? 
A^'ont-ils pas encore dejeu- 

ne f 
A r, y.a-t-elle pas consenti ? 
A r 'a-t-il pas depense tout 

son argent ? 
Ne l'a-t-il /tfj envoye cher- 

eher ?" 
Je ne l'aime mi ne le hahi 

Je ne la vois ni ne lui park. 

A mo ins que vous ne veniez, 

avec moi. 
De erainte qu'il ne mourut. 
J'empccherai qu'il ne joue. 

Je crains qu'il ne soit ma* 

lade. 
Prenez garde qu'il ne sorte. 

Je crains qn'il ne vienne pas 

aujourd'hui. 
Pourquoi craignez - vous 

qu'clle ne vous ecrivc 

pas? 
Ellc craint qu'il ' w^ l'aime 

pas. 
Ellc apprehende qu'il ne icit 

pas en bonne santv 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



I desire no recompense, but 
the pleasure of obliging 
you. 

It is only through idleness. 

I know only him. 

It was but a false alarm. 

It is only a jest. 
We are but two. 
I spoke but two words to 

him. 
I have learned French but 

three months. 
L heard only that news. 

We staid there only one 

hour. 
She wrote only six lines. 
Why Acy not you answer ? 
Why do not you study ? 
Why do not you write ? 
Why does ?iot he go thither 

himself ? 
Why.&i&he not come sooner ?. 
Why does not she. rise ear-- 

lier ? 
I. cannot go thither. 
I cannot keep pace with you. 
You cannot speak to him .to 

day. 
I cannot stay any longer. 

Cannot yoir force him to it ? 
1 dare not speak to her. 
I dare not contradict him* 
He does not dart take it 

upon himsel£ 
She does not dare to declare 

her thoughts freely. 
Dare you not write to him > 



*75 

Je ne desire pour recom- 
pense que le plaisir de 
vous obliger. 

Ce »'est que par pure fai- 
neantise. 

Je ne connois que lui. 

Ce a'etoit qu'ane. fausse 
alarme, 

Ce tf'est qu'an badinage. 

Nous ne sommes que deux, 

Je ne lui ai dit que deux 
mots. 

Je n*ai appris le Francois 
que trois mois. 

Je tf'ai appris que cette nou* 
veile. 

Nous n*y restames ^«'une^ 
heure. 

Eile u'a ecrit que six lignes. 

Qjie ne repondez-vous ? 

Que ff'etudiez-vous ? 

Que tt'ecrivez-vous ? 

Que n'y va-t-il lui-meme ? 

Que Vest-il venu plus tot ? 
Que ne se leye^t-elle plus 

matin ? 
Je me puis y aller. . 
Je ne puis vous tenir pied. 
Vous ne pwvez. lui parlcr 

aujourd'hui. 
Je ne puis rester plus long- 

temps. 
Ne powviz-.Y ous Vy forcer ? 
Je n'ose Ivli parler. 
Je *'cse le contredire^ 
li nose s'en charger* . 

Elle n'ose declarer librement 

ses pensees. 
<VWx-vqus tax lui ecrlre ? 

K 6 



t]6 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



D"'S not he dare to go to 

the play ? 
Docs not she dare to take 

the least pleasure ? 
I have not seen him these 

ten years. 
I had not spoken to her for 

two years. 
I have not been at the play 

these three years. 
I had not been in the Park 

for four years. 
I shall not see him for a 

year. 
I shall not speak to them 

for two years. 



A r W-t-il pas aller b. la co- 
rn edie ? 

A r, 0j<f.t-elle fas prendre le 
moindre plaisir ? 

11 y a dix ans que je ne l'ai 
vu. 

II y avoit deux ans que je 
ne lui avois parle. 

11 ya trois ans que je «'ai 
ete a la comedie. 

II y avoit quatre ans que je 
»'avois ete au Pare. 

Je ne le verrai d'un an. 

Je ne leur parlerai dc deux 
ans. 



CHAP. IX. 

Rules and Observations upon Prepositions. 

COME prepositions govern the first case; some the 
*^ second ; and some the third. 

1. The following prepositions, as exemplified, govern 
the first case : 



Avant 

aprcs 

devant 

avee 

chcz 

contrc 

dans 

en 

tic puis 

dis 

ttenicrc 



lc deluge, 

vous, 

lui, 

son ire re, 

vous, 

la muraille, 

la ch imbrc, 

Anglererrc, 

son arrr ee 



before the deluge* 
after you. 
hforc him. 
with his brother* 
at jour house, 
against the <walU 
in the roc?n. 
in England, 
since his arrival. 



le commencement, from the beginning. 
lc j ardi n, . it hind the garden • 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



des«us - 
dessous - 
entre 
envers - 

environ 



la table, 

la table, 

amis, 

son prochain, 



- cent gumees, 
excepted hormis son pere, 



over the table, 
under the table, 
between friends* 
- towa rd our neig h hour* 
f about a hundred gui* 
\ neas. 
except his father* 



malgre 
malgre - 
-outre 
par 

par mi - 
pendant 
durant - 
pour 
sans 



moyennant - une somme d'argent, for a sum of money. 

nonobstant, oul x § notwithstanding, or 

^ sa mere, -J 

elle, 

son logement, 

terre, 

les riches, 

l'hiver, 

la paix 

sa pension, 

amis, 



don, ou sui^ant votre avis, 

- les decombres, 

- le toit, 

- cette affaire, 

le scir 
les Alper, 

- les Alpes, 

- le corps, 



sous 
sur 

touchant 

vers 

par-deca 
par-deia 
a travers 



in spite of his mother, 
again her will. 
beside his lodging, 
by land* 
among the rich, 
during the winter* 
during the peace. 

- for his board. 

- without friends. 

f according to' your aa* 
\ &Ke. 

tinder the rubbish. 

upon the roof. 

concerning that 
fair. 

about the evening. 

on this side the Alps 

beyond the Alps. 

through the body* 



{ 



af. 



2. The following prepositions govern the second case : 

or about the 



Autour 

anpres - 

faute 

le long - 

pres, ou proche 

ensuite - 

hors 

loin 

>is-a-Yis 



de la maison, 

de lui, 

d'argent, - 

de la haie, 

du Palais Royal, 

de quoi, 

du cabinet, 

de ses ennemis, . 

de la Bourse, 



{ 



round, 
house. 

near him. 
for want r f money . 

along the hedge. 

near the Royal Palace. 

after which. 

oui of the closet. 
far from hts enemies, 
opposite the Exchange* 



278 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

And all others which are composed of a substantive 
preceded either by a, au, or en. Except a tra<ver; t 
which governs the first case ; as above. 



3. The following prepositions govern the th'rd case : 

Conformement & Tusage, - agreeable to custom* 

quant - - amoi, - - as for my part. 

jusqu'aux - nues, - to the skies. 

n • f by reason of bis cus— 

par rapport - a ses pratiques, \ t , 

Remarks on Prepositions. 

r. Some prepositions are placed before infinitives,. as well as before- 
nouns ;, some, when placed before infinitives, have no preposition, 
after them, others have the preposition de, and some the preposition a. 
Those which take no preposition after them before an infinitive, ar^ 
aprcs, par, sans, and pour 5 as, after having talked without knowing any 
thing of the matter, apres avoir parte sans savoir ce pfii disoiu 
Those which take the preposition de after them before an infinitive, 
are, bois, bormis, except/, a la re'serve, loin, au lieu, faute, a force, au peril, 
and perhaps some others; as, far from blaming you, loin de vous blame. 
Those which take the participle a are, sauf and jusque ; as, I can but 
begin again , sauf a recommencer. 

2. En is. never followed by the article, though we say, in a. familiar 
way of speaking, he is dead ; il est alle en P autre monde j upon what 
account, en Vbonneur de quel saint. 

Dans is always followed by the article, except before possessive 
pronouns, proper names of authors quoted, and proper names of 
towns ; as, I have read it in Cicero ; je V a\ lu dans CicSron ; search in 
my pocket, cbercbcz dans ma fotbe. We indifferently make usecf 
en or dans before personal pronouns; as, in him, en iui, or dans lui. 
But we say, petiser en soi-meme, to reflect within ourselves. 

3.. En, before nouns of time, signifies the time employed in doing a 

thing; and dam, the time after expiration of which the thing will be 

done j as, I. could do it in a week, or I would spend no more than a 

In doing it, jt h firth en hu'.t jours j I will do it a week, hence, 

je /cfetai dans buit jours. 

4. Chi-z, followed by a pronoun, or a proper name of a person, 
.signifies- somebody^ house ; a?, he is at my house, at your house, &c. ;. 
il est cbiz tnci, cb<.z txus, Sec. It is preceded by de, when it signifies 
Coming from ; as, I come from your house, je viens de cbez vcus. 

5. Dcdan, dekcrr, desius, dessus, and t.uparat>ant, are always ad- 
verb., *nd never preposition? j consequently they h*ve no ca*e aftet 

9 



FRENCH TONGUE. 279 

thett, except when dedans and dehors, dessus and dessou*,. are either 
joined together, or have the particle dt ox par before them; as,, both 
within and without the house, dedans et dehors la maison j. both upon 
and under the chair, dessus et dessous la chaise; from under the 
bed, de dessous le lit. 

6. When the definite article precedes dedans or dehors, dessus or des- 
sous, those words are used substantively, and consequently require the 
following noun in the second case ; as, the inside, or the outside of 
the house, le dedans, ou le dehors de la maison. 

7. Jusqves, or rather jusque (to, as far as, till) coming before the pre- 
position a, it's final e ores rs emitted, and an apostrophe is put in it's 
stead ; as> to death, jusqu'a la mort. This is to be observed even in 
declamation ; as, how long ? jusqu'a quandf and not jusques a quand ? 
as likewrse the other conjunction, till, until j as, jusqu'a ce que, which 
governs the subjunctive, and not jusques a ce que. 

8. Even or iery, in English, is sometimes rendered in French by 
jusqu'a; as, even the king, jusqu'au roi. In this sense it signifies an 
emphatic expression of a collection, or universality of objects, either 
mentioned or understood ; a?, when I say, even kings are mortal^ 
jusqu'aux rois sont mortels : it signifies all men, even kings are mortal* 
tcus Us btmmes, jusqu'aux rois, sont mortels. 

9. Sauf, which signifies an exception to something, governs the 
first case, speaking of things; as, without prejudice of his claim, sauf 
ton droit* It governs the third case, speaking of persons ; as, sauf 
au demandeur a se pour voir, but the plaintiff, or petitioner, is at liberty 
to sue, or make application. A law expression. 

10. When before signifies opposite to, or in the presence of, it must be 
rendered in French by devant : as, opposite to your house, devant votrs 
maison; in the presence of the king, devant le roi. The opposite to de- 
vant is derrihe, behind. When before signifies to have precedency of, it 
is rendered in French by avoir le pas sur; as, dukes are before earls, 
les dues ont le pas sur les comtes. In all other cases, before is rendered 
into French by avant ; as, we were happy before the war, nous etions 
tcareux avant l-a guerre ; virtue must be preferred to every thing, la 
vertu doit aller avant tout; it's opposite is apres, after. 

11. Avant followed by que, is a conjunction, which governs the 
subjunctive : as, before you were born, avant que vous fuisscz ne'$ 
followed byde, it governs the infinitive; as, before death, avant demourir, 

12. Pres, aupres, near, govern the second case, though we may say,, 
in common conversation, near St. Paul's, pres l'eglise St. Paul. Pres 
must always be used instead of aupres, speaking of time or age ; as, it 
is near twelve o'clock, il est pres de mldi ; she is near thirty year6 old, 
elle a pres de t rente ans. 

13. As custom will not always suffer aupres to be used, when 
speaking of places, particularly alter trop, si, assez, plus, bien, I advise 
the learner to make use of pres; as, he lives near the church, i7 de- 
meure pres de l'eglise : though aupres may be indifferently used in 
such a case. 

14. Pres, in the sense of save,'excepting, governs the third cage, and- 
must be placed after the noun which it governs; as, except one crov*n, 
a un ecu pres ; excepting that, a cela prh. 

jj. Aupres m\xz\ always be used instead of prh, 1st, when we speak 



s8o A GRAMMAR OF THE 

of somebody placed with anotlvr, as his master, friend, counsellor, or 
servant j as, j'ai mis mon fi s aupres ae mon f>cre, I have placed my 
son vv,th ny brother, viz. as bis tutor, master, friend. 

2div. When we mention in what esteem a person is with another, 
or what interest he lias with him : as, he is in favour with the king, 
my lord, that lady; il est hien aupres du roi, de monseigneur, de cette 
dame: he can do what he will with him, il a tout pouvoir aupres de 
lui. 

3dly. When we mention by whom a person is entertained, shel- 
tered, &c, as, he is gone to live with him, M i'est retire aupres de lm\ 
he is quite safe with him, // est en sure,/ aupres de lu'i. 

1 6 The prepositions to and toward, when they signify in regard to, 
must always be rendered in French by envers: as, he is ungrate- 
ful to God and men, il est ingrat envers Dieu et envers les bommes. 
In all other cases, toward must be rendered by vers; as, he went 
toward Islington, il est alle vers Islington. Vers signifies likewise 
about: as, about the beginning of the spring, vers le commencement 
du printemps. 

17. When from and to denote simply the distance from one place 
to another, they are rendered in French by de and a $ as, it is five 
miles from London to Greenwich, it y a cinq millet de Londres a 
Greenwich. When they denote the quality of the distance, they are 
rendered by depuis an^ j usque; as, he walked from London to Green- 
wich, il alia a pied depuis Londres jusqu"^ Greenwich. When they 
denote succession of place, they are rendered by de and en 5 as, he 
goes from town to town, il va de ville en ville. 

iS. A, each, and every, before a noun denoting distribution of 
people, time, or place, are rendered tn French by par ; a^, two 
crowns a piece, aeux ecus par tete : three guineas a week, trois gui- 
neas par semaine : four shillings a mile, quatre schell'ings par mille. 

19. Vis-a-vis and a V opposite, opposite, govern the second case, 
though we say in common conversation, vis-a-vis i'hotel de ville, 
opposite Guildhall. The first is applied both to persons and things, 
the other to things only. 

20. The participle active in English, preceded by without, is ren- 
dered in French by sans, sometimes followed by a .substantive with- 
out an article j as, he spoke to him without fearing, il lui par la sans 
crainte. Sometimes by an infinitive without a preposition : as, // lui 
parla sans craindre. Sometimes by que, and the following verb in the 
Subjunctive mood; as, il lux parla sans qu'il crmgnU : and this last 
must be used when the active participle in English is preceded either 
by a pronoun, or any other noun. 

21. ^s, in English, with a verb in the indicative mood, or en and 
upon with an active participle, ate rendered in French, sometimes by 
sur followed by ce que, as, as you wrote to me that... sur ce que 
vous rrfuvtz cent que .... Sometimes by commc, as j as 1 walked 
into the Park, comme jc me pnmenois au Pare. Sometimes by a fol- 
lowed by a substantive ; as, on my arriving at London, a mon arriv/e 
« Londres. 

22. The prepositions a, de, centre, sur, sous, and sans, are commonly 
repeated in French, though they arc not in Englith 5 as, there were 



FRENCH- TONGUE. 281 

many books upon the table and chair} il y avoit beaucoup de jivres 
sur la table et sur la chaise. 

23. Par, pcur, avec, dans, &c, are commonly repeated when the 
nouns are not synonymous, or pretty nearly of the same signification, 
as, by mildness and reason ; par la douceur et par la ra'ison : par is 
repeated, because douceur and raison are neither synonymous, n«f 
nearly of the same signification. But in this instance, in luxury and 
vouptuousness, dans la mollesse et la volupte, the preposition, for the 
contrary reason, is not repeated. 



Farther Remarks upon the Prepositions a and de. 



N. B. The preposition de, and the article le, are contracted into du, 
de and les into des: of the father, du pere, of the fathers, de: peres ; 
instead of de le pere, de Us peres, the same contraction of the article 
is made with the preposition a : to the father, au pere, to the fathers* 
aux peres j instead of a le pere, a Us peres. 

The preposition de, of, indicates the second case of the noun or pro- 
noun following it, a is the sign of the third case, see page 62. 

1. When two nouns substantive in English are joined together, 
making but one word, the first expressing the manner or form of a 
thing, or the use for which it is designed, the first must be the second 
in French, with the preposition a before it, or it must be changed 
into a verb in the infinitive mood 5 as, a dining room; une saile a 
manger: a patch-box, une bone a tnoucbes. But, if the first express 
the matter of which the thing spoken of is made, it requires the pre- 
position de; as, silk stockings; des bas de sue: a silver pot: un fot 
tfargent* 

2. A\s sometimes used, 1st. instead of at, or to before names of 
places, which admit of no article; as, vivre a Paris, aller a Londres, 
s'arreter a Amsterdam. 

2dly. Instead of with ; as, to paint with oil colours ; peindre a 
n-uile. 

jdly. Instead of for; as, a coach for six persons: un carosse a six 
pLces. 

4thly. Instead of after; as, to live after the English fashion « vivre 
a l^Aigloise. 

5thly. Instead of on; as, on the right hand, a main drcite : on the 
left hand., a main gauche. 

6thly. Instead of in; as, a suit in fashion, un habit a la mode. 

7thly. Instead of by ; as, step by step, pas a pas. 

8thly. Instead of according to; followed by the substantive avis ; ae, 
according to my opinion, a mon avis. 

gthly. Instead of to; as, to judge of him by his looks, a juger dt 
hi par la mine. 



2$* A GRAMMAR OF THE 

lOthly. Instead of at ) as, at two o'clock, a deux beures. 

It is sometimes used without being expressed in English. 

3. De is often put afters substanstive instead of some, expressed or 
urderstood ; as, a bit of bread, of meat $ un morceau de pain, de 
<viande> It is sometimes used likewise, 1st, after the indeterminate 
pronouns, quelqu'un, pesonne, ricn, qu r S\, Sec, before an adjective j 
as, there is nobody so lucky as he, U rSy a personne de si bcureux que 
/»;': there is something inexpressibly gracious in his discourse, il y a 
je ne sals quoi de gracieux dans ses discours. 

2dly. Before the proper names of places having no article, which 
we are going or coming from ; as, revenir de Pans, part'tr de JLe>»- 
ires. 

3dly. Instead of in\ as, he went away in the night, il partit de 

Tiuit. 

4thly. Before a past participle in the following and similar expres- 
sions; as, there were ten thousand of them killed or wounded, il y 
9n eut aix mille de tugs cu de blesses. 

5thly. Instead of by $ as, he is taller by the whole head, il est plus 
grand de ttute la tete. 

6thly. Instead of with ; as, he ran with all his might* il courut de 
toutts ses forces* 

7thly. Instead of in, after, instead c/j as he behaves in, or after, 
this manner; il u conduit de utU mandrel Witt t in vouf ittad) 
siffiois de vws 9 

Sthly. Instead of on ; as, to live on fish, vhrc de peisua* 

It is likewise used without being expressed in English. 

There are some other uses of the prepositions de and a ; but it would 
be too t-edious to relate them here, as they have been sufficiently ex» 
plained in the foregoing grammatical rules and observations. 

Rules and Observations upon the Prepositions, exem- 
plified for the Scholars Practice* 

[i.] 1 was here before you. J'etois fci avant vous. 

You are come after me, Vous etes verm aprh moi. 

Get out of my sight. Otez-vous de decant moi. 

I saw it behind the house. Je l'ai vu derriere la maison* 

He went nviih his brother. II est alle avec son frere. 

1 have been at your house. J'ai ete ctm vous. 

Have you been at bis house ? Avez-vous ete cbcz lui ? 

I have not been at her Je n'ai pas ete chez elle* 

house. 

Why did you not come to Pourquoi n'etes-vous pas 

our house ? venu chez nous ? 

He has succeeded against all II a reussi contre toute appa- 

likelihood rence* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



2S3 



Yeu will find my stockings 

in the closet. 
He is in England. 
Since his arrival he has al- 
ways been ill. 
I foresaw the consequences 

of it, from the begin- 

ning. 
My knife is over or under 

the table. 
Let us share between us two. 
Let us have charity toward 

our neighbours. 
I have spent about a thou. 

sand guineas. 
They are all dead, except 

my father. 
He will do it for a lum of 

money. 
She likes him notwithstand* 

ing his humour. 
She would marry him in spite 

cf all her relations. 
I spend two guineas a week 

beside my lodging. 

We travelled by land. 
I left it among my papers. 

We take a walk every day 
during the summer. 

The people suffer a great 
deal during the war. 

I gave it^or you. 

He is without friends and 
without money. 

I have acted according to 
your advice. 

Eight men were buried un- 
der the rubbish. 



Vous trouverez mes bas dans 

le cabinet. 
II est en Angleterre. 
Depuis son arrive il a tou* 

jours ete malade. 
J'en previs les consequences 

dis le commencement. 

Mon couteau est dessus ou 

dessous la table. 
Partageon* entre nous deux. 
Ayons de la charite enters 

notre prochain. 
J'ai depense environ mille 

guinees. 
Ih sent tous morts, except/ 

ou hormii mon pere. 
II le fera moyennemt une 

somme d'argent. 
Elle l'aime, nonobstant son 

humeur. 
Elle voulut l'epouser malgri 

tous ses parens. , 
Je depense deux guinees 

par semaine, outre mon 

logement. 
Nous voyageames per terre. 
Je l'ai laisse parmi mes pa. 

piers. 
Nous nous promenons tous 

les jours /'ete. 
Le peuple souffre beaucoup 

durant la guerre, 
Je Pai donne pour vous. 
11 est sans argent et sanx 

amis. 
J'ai agi selort y ou suvvant 

votre avis. 
Huit homines ont et6 en?e«. 

velis sous les decombres* 



284 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Leave that dish upon the Laissez ce plat sur la table* 

table. 

He spoke to me concerning II m' a parle touch ant cette 

that affair. affaire. 

I shall come and see you to- J'irai vous voir 'vers le 

ward the evening. soir. 

He has been run through the II a recu un coup d'epee a 

body. tracers le corps. 

[2.] He rambles every night II rode toutes les nuits au- 

about the house. tour de la maison. 

A man starves for want of Faute d'argent, on meurt de 

money. faim. 

He followed me along the II me suivit le long de la 

hedge. haie. 

There are fine buildings II y a de beaux batimens le 

along the Thames. long de la Tamise. 

Let us walk along the river. Promenons-nous le long de 

la riviere. 

I met him near the royal Je Pai rencontre pres du 

palace. palais royal. 

He followed me out of the II me suivit hers de la viile. 

city. 

I am far from my own Je suis loin de mon pays* 

country. 

Come near me. Venez aupres de moi. 

Keep yourself near the fire. Tenez-vous aupres du feu. 

She lives opposite the Ex- Elle demeure <vis-a-<vis de la 

change. Bourse. 

After which there was a Ensuite de quoi il y eut un 

ball. bal. 

I have suffered a great deal J'ai beacoup souffert a cause 

en her account. d 'elle. 

She died, to the great regret Elle mourut an grand regret 

of all her family. de toute sa lamille. 

Cut them close to the Coupez-les of cur de terre. 

ground. 

Sit down near my brother. Asseyez-vous a cote de moa 

frere. 

He made his escape oy fa- 11 s'echappa a la fav.ur de 

nj-ur of tho night. la nuit. 



FRENCH TONGUE 



285 



The bridge was built at the 

expense of the city. 
He pretends to be in the 

right, in spite of common 

sense, 
They dress themselves after 
the French fashion. 

sAs to what you say, I heard 
no talk about it. 

She has done it without the 
knowledge of her mo- 
ther. 

You shall not have it under 
fifty guineas. 

He has sold all his estate, 
except a small house. 

We are sheltered here from 
the rain. 

There has been a battle on 
this side cf the Alps. 

He went to the other side of 
the Pyrenees. 

Nobody is secure from slan- 
der. 

Dukes are above earls. 

I am below you. 

Let us go and me*t him. 

He has remembered all his 

family in his will, his wife 

excepted. 
We have brought it about 

by strength of arms. 
I shall defend you at the 

peril of my life. 
He was stopped in the middle 

of the street. 



Le pont fut bati aux depens 
de la ville. 

II veut avoir raison, en de- 
pit du bon sens. 

lis s'habillent a la mode 

de France, on a la Fran- 

coise. 
A I'egard de ce qtae vous 

dites, je n'en ai pas en- 

tendu parler. 
Elle l'a fait a I'insu de sa 

mere. 

Vous ne 1'aurez pas a moins 
de cinquante guinees. 

II a rendu tout son bien, a 
la reserve d'une petite 
maison. 

Nous sommes ici a I'abri 
de la.pluie. 

II y a eu une bata^lle m de~ 
,;d des Alpes. 

II est alle aumdela des Pyre- 
nees. 

Peisonne n'est a convert de 
la medisance. 

Les dues sont au-dessus des 
comtes. 

Je suis au-dessous de vous. 

Allons au-de<vant de lui. 

II a favorise toute sa famille 
par son' testament, a {'ex- 
clusion de sa femme. 

Nous en sommes venire a 
bout a force de bras. 

Je vous defendrai, au perri 
de ma vie. 

II fut arrete au milieu de la 
ree. 



286 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He lends money at the rate 

of five per cent. 
[3.] As for my part, I do 

not care for it. 
They have been pursued as 

far as the wood. 
1 do not like to remove on 

account of my customers, 

[Rem. 1.] After having 
talked without knowing 
any thing of the matter. 

To show you how much I 
am concerned for all your 
interests. 

I give you leave to do what- 
ever you please, except 
going out. 

Far from disapproving of 
your conduct, I would 
have done the sane. 

He. does nothing but prattle, 
instead of learning his 
lesson. 

For want of asking it of 
him, you will lose your 
money. 

By dint of walking we ar- 
rived before night. 

He has entered an action 
against him, at the risk 
^losing all his estate. 

I shall tell her my senti. 
ments at the risk of dis- 
pleasing her. 

I can only begin again. 

He took so much liberty cs 
to tell her, that she had 
told a lie. 

[2 ,] i have read it in Virgil. 



II prete de 1 'argent a raisin 
de cinq pour cent. 

Quant a fnoi, je ne m'en 
soucie pas. 

On les a poursuivisy#jf*'au 
hois. 

Je n'aime point a deloger, 
par rapport a mes prati- 
ques. 

Apres avoir parle sans sa- 
voir ce qu'il disoit. 

Tour vous montrer combien 

je prends part a vos in- 

terets. 
Je vous permets de faire 

tout ce qu'il vous plaira, 

ho r mis de sortir. 
Loin de desapprouver votre 

conduite, j'aurois fait la 

meme chose. 
11 ne fait que causer, au 

lieu </'apprendre sa kcon. 

Faute de le lui demander, 
vous perdrez votre ar- 
gent. 

A force de marcher, nous 
arrivames avant la nuit. 

II lui a intente un proces, 
au p/ril de perdre tout 
son bien. 

Je lui dirai mon sentiment, 
au risque de lui deplaire. 

Saufa recommencer. 

lis s'emancipa jusqu'a lui 

dire qu'elle en avoit 

menti. 
Je 1'ai lu dans Virgile. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



287 



i am sure that she is now in 

Paris. 
My father is not in town. 



Je suis sur qu'elle est a* pre- 
sent dans Paris, 
Mon pere n'est pas en ville. 



Are you sure, that he is not Etes-vous sur qu'il ne soit 



/* the city ? 

I have left it in the cham- 
ber. 

I have shut it up in my 
trunk. 

Put that into my closet. 



pas dans la cite ? 
Je 1'ai laisse dans la cham- 

bre. 
Je l'ai enferme dans mon 

coffre. 
Metrez cela dans mon ca- 
binet. 
There is nothing in the II n'y a rien dans la boa- 
bottle. 
Reflect well within your, 
self. 



teille. 

Reflechissez bien'ra vous- 
meme. 



I see nothing in him, that Je ne vois rien en lui qui me 



deplaise. 
II n'y a rien en elle que 

vous puissiez blamer. 
Y a-t-il quelque chose en 

eux qui puisse donner lieu 

a vos soupcons ? 
Je le ferois en dix jours. 

Vous ne le feriez pas en 
quinze jours. 



displeases me. 
There is nothing in her, 

that you can blame. 
Is there any thing in tiiem, 

that can give occasion to 

your suspicions ? 
[3.] I could do it in ten 

days. 
You would spend more 

than a fortnight in doing 

it. 
I shall have done in four J'aurai fait dans quatre 

days. jours. 

I shall send it you in a Je vous l'enverrai dans huit 

week's time. jours. 

[4.] 1 have come from jour Je viens de cbez vous. 

house. 
I came from bis or her Je venois de cbez lui, ou de 

house. cbez elle. 

[$.] I have looked for it Je l'ai cherche dedans et de- 

within and without the bors la maison. 

house. 
There is Spanish leather II y a du marroquin desmt 

both upon and under the et dunus les chaises. 

f hairs. 



2 38 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

him from under II le tira de dessous la tabic. 



outside of his 
house is very 

side of 



He drew 

the table, 
[6.] The 

country 

pretty. 
Give me the upper 

the bread. 
You will oblige me, if you 

give me the under part of 
• the pie. 
[y.] I shall love you //// 

death, 
[g.] All men, even kings 

themselves, are liable to 

sickness. 
All men despise him, even 

his relations. 
[9.] Without prejudice to 

my claim. 
But the plaintiff /V at liberty 

to sue. 
[10.] Why do you leave 

that heap of dirt before 

your house ? 
They are not covered in the 

presence of the king. 
You have the precedency of 

him. 
We were happy before the 

war. 
Virtue should be preferred 

to every thing. 
[12.] It is near two o'clock. 
She is near twenty years old. 
He lives near St. Paul's. 
[23.] Docs he live so near 

you f* 
You live very near one an- 
other. 



Le dehors de sa maison de 
campagne est fort beau. 

Donne z-moi le dessus du 

pain. 
Vous m'obligerez, si vous 

me donnez le dessous du 

pate. 
Je vous aimerai jusqu'a la 

mort. 
Tous les hommes, jusqu'aux 

rois, sont sujets a des ma. 

ladies. 
Tout le monde le meprise, 

jusqu'a ses parens. 
Saufmon droit. 

Sauf au demandeur a se 

pourvoir. 
Fourquoi laissez-vous ce tas 

de boue dtvant votre 

maison ? 
On ne se couvre pas devant 

le roi. 
Vous etes devant lui. 

Nous etions heureux avant 

la guerre. 
La vertu doit aller aVant 

tout. 
II est pres de deux her.rcs. 
Elle a pres de vingt ans. 
II demeure pres de St. Paul. 
Demeure-t-ii si pres de vous ? 



Vous demeurez 
Pun de P autre. 



lien pres 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



?§9 



Corse ncirer me, 



to 



Approchez-votK plus pret 
de moi. 

Vous n'etes pas ass'z prh 

de moi. 
Elle conscnti-t a tour, a cela 

prh. 



r ou are not near enough 

me. 
[i\.] She consented to 

every thing, that ex- 

rctted. 
He has paUl me ail, except II m'a tout paye, I six gnu 

si* guineas. nets. prh. 

[i- 1 I have put my daugh- J'ai mis ma fi lie an prh.. 

ter and r her care. d'el'e. 

He is in favour with the Ii est bieri an prh du Roi. 

King. 
ffc can<£j what he will with II a tout pouvoir axtprh de 

him. h*i. 

She is gone to live with Elle est allce auprh de lui. 

him. 
You *re cafe with him. Vous etes en surete auprh 

de l«i. 
[16.] He is ungrateful to II est ingrat ewers moi. 

me. 
I have not been ungrateful Je n'ai pas etc ingrat etwen 

to you* vous. 

I intend to go to France, J'ai dessein d'alier en France 

abiut the beginning of the *ver$ Te commencement -da 



prvnremps. 



Coune about midnight Venez i>cn mimnt* 

She went out avint noon. Elle sortit <ver* midl. 

[17.] How many miles is it Combien de milles y a-t-il 

fr*m London to Windsor? Je Londres-» Windsor t 

Greenwich is five mile* front II y a cinq miiles de Lon- 

L or, don. drts i Greenwich. 

We walked from London to Nous ailames a pud depuit 



Greenwich. 

We came in a coach from 

the Tower to the Pati\ 

^OCS from town to town. 
go from house to 
house. 



Londres jusqu'd Green- 
wich. 

Notts v{nmes en carrosse 
depuii la Tour jui^i'au 
Pare, 

II va <fc ville en vilie. 

lis vont </(? xnaisoo en mai- 
son, 

O 



290 

[i8.] We spent ten shillings 

a piece. 
They gave him two guineas 

a month. 
Every mile will cost you a 

shilling. 
[19.] Sit opposite me. 

I bought my ring opposite 

the Exchange. 
[20.] He went away, with- 
out telling me any more. 
She spoke a long while, 

without my taking any 

notice of it. 
We went out, without her 

perceiving it. 
He wrote to you, without 

my knowing any thing of 

it. 
He cheated us, without our 

suspecting any thing. 

She osed him ill, without 
his cotnplaining of it. 

[21.] As you wrote to me 
that 

As 1 walked in the Park. 

On. my arriving at London. 
[22.] There are many books 

upon the table and the 

cjiair. 
She has married him against 

your will, and against 

mine. 
It was not the sentiment of 

her father and mother. 
He threw some under the 

table and chairs. 
He came to school without 

books or paper. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Nous depensames deux ecuj 
par tete. 

lis lui donnent deux gui- 
nees par mois. 

II vous en coutera un schel- 
ling/<7r mille. 

Asseyez-vous vis-a-vis de 
moi. 

J'ai achete ma bague vis-a- 
vis de la Bourse. 

II par tit, sans m'en dire da- 
vantage. 

Elle parla long-temps, sans 
que Yy prisse garde. 

Nous sortimes, sans ^'elle 

s'en aper$ut. 
II vous ecrivit, sans que 

j'en susse la moindre 

chose. 
II nous trompa, sans que 

nous ssupconuassions la 

moindre chose. 
Elle le maltraita, sans qu'il 

Ji'en plaignit. 
Sur ce que vous m'avez ecrit 

que 
Comme je ne promenois au 

Pare. 
A mon arrivee a Londres. 
11 y a beaucoup de Jivres 

sur la table et sur la 

chaise. 
Elle l'a epouse contre votre 
volonte et contre la mienne. 

Cc n'etoit pas le sentiment 
de son pere et de sa mere. 

II en a jcte sous la table et 
sous ks chaises. 

II est venu a l'ecole sans li- 
vres et sans papier. 



FRENCH TONGUE 



[23.] He ha 5 succeeded in 
it by his opulence and 
riches. 

He makes himself feared by 
his wealth and violence. 

Go into the dining room ? 
Where have you put my 

patch-bax ? 
He has made her a present 
. of a diamond ring. 
Bring the vinegar-bottle. 

Where is the powder-box ? 

Give me my gold fringed 
petticoat. 

I go to Paris. 

It is dear living in London, 

He had been in Amsterdam. 

The wainscot is painted in 
oil. 

She works <with the needle, 

W T e had a coach for six per- 
sons. 

Let us take a coach for four 
persons. 

He has a coach and four. 

1 tike to live after the Eng- 
lish fashion. 

She is dressed after the 
French fashion. 

Go to the right hand, after- 
ward you will go on to 
the left. 
. 1 ordered a fashionable suit 
to be made for me. 

How I you are in the fashion. 

Let us go step by step. 
Go two and two. 



291 

II y a reussi par son opu- 
lence et ses richesses. 

II se fait craindre par son 
opulence et par ses vio= 

knees. 
Entrez dans la salle a manger. 
Ou avex-vous mis ma boite 

a mouches ? 
II lui a fait present d'une 

bague a diamans. 
Apportez la bouteille a xu * 

naigre. 
Ou est la boite a poudre ? 
Donnez-moi ma jupe a 

franges d'ox. 
je vais a Paris. 
If fait cher vivre a Londres # 
II a ete a Amsterdam. 
Le lambris est peint i 

l'huile. 
Elle travaille a 1 'aiguille. 
Nous avions un carrosse a 

six places. 
Prenons un carrosse a quatre 

places. 
II a un carrosse a quatre 

chevaux. 
J'aimea vivre «l'Angloise. 

Elle est vetoe a la Francoise. 

Allez a droite, ensuite vous 
prendrez a gauche. 

Je me suis fait faire un ha- 
bit a la mode. 

Comment ! vous voila a la 
mode. 

Allons pas a pas. 

Allez deux a deux, 
) a 



202 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



JcordiKg to my opinion, she 
is not in the wrong. 

To judge of him by his 
looks, he is an honest 

man. 
I was here at ten o'clock* 
He wears silk stockings. 
He has a fine marble slab in 

his room. 
Give me my black velvet 

petticoat. 
Give him a bit of bread. 

Do you choose a bit of 
meat ? 

A bit o/" cheese will be suffi- 
cient. 

There is something inex- 
pressibly gracious in his 
discourse. 

Somebody will be punished. 

Is there any tiling more beau- 
tiful than the sky ? 

I shall leave London next 
year. 

I come from Pari?. 

lie went away in the night. 

We shall arrive there in the 
da} timv. 

I shall set out to morrow 
early in the morning. 

She is taller by the whole 
head. 

She is beloved fy every 
body. 

Jlr ran with all his might. 

1 love you with all my heart. 

he behave in that man- 
net r 

V. t it 1 in ymir stcaJ. 
VYc live on fish. 



A mon avis, cl!e n'a Ml 

tort. 
A juget de lui par la mine, 

ll est honnete hommc. 

J'etcis ici a dix hevres. 

II parte des bas de soie. 

II a dans sa chambrc: une 
belle table de marbre. 

Donnez-rr.oi ma jupe de ve- 
lours noir. 

Donne 2. lui un morceau de 
pain. 

Souhaitez- vous un morceau 
de via nde r 

Un morceau de fromage 
suffira. 

11 y a je ne sais quoi de gra- 
tieux dans se^ discours. 

II y aura quelqu'un de puni. 
Y a.t-ii rien de plus beau 

que le firmament ? 
Je partirai de Londres l'an- 

nee prochaine. 
Je viens de Paris. 
Jl panic de nuit. 
Nous y arrivcrons de jour. 

Je partirai demain it grand 
matin. 

Elle est plus grande d toute 
la tcte. 

Elle est aimee de tout le 
monde. 

II courut de tout*s sea forces. 

Je vous airne de tout mon 
cccur. 

Se conduit-;'/ de cctte ma- 
nic re ? 

Si j'etots de vous. 

J\ous vivoos de poisson. 



FRENCH TONGUE 
They live on nothing but 

reatcst follv in 



mear. 
It is . the 

the world. 
My rascally servant told 

him every thing. 
I shall not come back these 

four months. 
There is no such thing. 
He goes on better and better. 
She soes on worse and worse. 
1 learn music tverjn otlier 

clay. 
They meet emerj third year, 

I shall be married a year 
hence. 



*9$ 

Us ne se nourrissent que de 

viande. 
C'est de la derniere folic. 



Mon eoquin dr valet lui a 

tout die 
Je ne reviendrai de qua: re 

mois. 
II n'y a rien de tef„ 
II va de rnieux en mieux. 
Kile va de pis en pis. 
J'apprends la musique de 

deux jo r, l.'un. 
lis s'assem,.*.nt de trois ans 

en trois ans. 
Je serai marie dans nil an 

d'ici. 



CHAP. X. 
Observations upon the Conjunctions si and que. 

I. PTHHE verb following the conditional si, when it signifies if, h 
J. never put in the subjunctive mood; and it is put in any terise 
of the indicative but the future; consequently the future in English 
is changed into the present in French; as, you shall be satisfied if you 
call to morrow; vous sere-z satis/ait fei vous venez demnin. The condi- 
tional is changed into the imperfect of the indicative; a?, if you 
would call to morrow, si vous veniez demairt, or si vous vouliez vtnlp 
dctna'in ; and not si vous r viendiie% t nor si njcus vsuJ>i;z t'er.'ir. 

2. Sometimes, instead of the compound of the imperfect of the in- 
dicative, we elegantly make use of the compound of the preterit of the 
subjunctive mood after si ; as, if I had known it sooner, that would 
not have happened, si je l'eusse su plus tot, cela ne seroit pas arrive, in- 
stead of ii je havois su, (S?c. 

3. When si signities ivbetber, it may be used i'i the same tense a* 
when signifying if, or in the future, or conditional; a?, do you not 

know whether he would come, if , ne sovez-vcus pas s'il viendroit, 

v ; I do not know, whether he will come to day, je ru sj\t s'il 

viendra auj:urd*b«i*. 

* See the exception to the 9th observation on the use of the sub. 
juLCtivc mood, pa^e 232, 



294 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

4. From the last observation it follows, that the conjunctions tvhe* 
tier and or are most commonly rendered in French by si, and ou ; 
as, ask him whether he have done that or not, demandez-lui s'z/ a fait 
cela ou non, They are sometimes rendered in French, whether, by 
que, and or, by ovt que, or que alone; as, you will not be punished, whe* 
ther you have done that or not: que vous ay e% fait cela) que, ou que 
ijous ne Vayen pas fait, vous ne serc% pa; punt. It may likewise be 
rendered this way : <vous ne serex pas puni, soit que *> oui o.ye% fait cela^ 
soit que, or ou que vms ne Tayt% pas fait. It is better not to repeat 
fflifi at least in conversation. Take notice, that whether and or, 
rendered by que, or scit que y govern the subjunctive mood in the 
French. 

5. We make use cf que, instead of repeating the conjunction si, or 
some of the other conjunctions, but more particularly those of which! 
que makes a part. . In the first case qne is followed by the subjunctive 
mood : as, if he come, and if you speak to him, s'U vier,t, et que 
vuus hi parliez. 1$ the second case, the verb is put in the subjunctive 
mood, when que supplies the place of a conjunction which requires 
this mood: and in the indicative mood, if it supply the place of a 

nction which requires the indicative 1 &.© that It fellows the na- 
lure ot the conjunction of which it is a pare *. 

Examples where que governs the indicative. When I have told and 
assured you, quand jc <vous at dit, et que je ijous ai assure \ as h« 
maintained ir> and I did not believe it, comme il le soutenoit et que je v» 
le croyois pas. 

Examples of the subjunctive. He is very far from reading and 
writing well ; il s 'en faut bier, qifil Use et qu'i/ ecrive bien \ provided he 
comes, and is in good health, pourvu quil n)ienne, et qu'i/ soit en bonr.t 
same'. Many more instances will be met with in the following ex- 
amples. 

As the first three observations have been sufficiently exemplified in 
the tenses^ and moods of the verbs, I shall here exemplify only the 
fourth observation, and the conjunction que throughout it's different 
significations and purposes. 

The Conjunction que exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice. 

[4.] I do not know whether Je ne sals j'il viendra ou 

he will come or not. non. 

Do you know whether he Savez-vous i'il a fait cela<?» 

have done that or not ? non ? 

Tell me whether he have Dites-moi j'il Pa fait ou 

done it or not. non. 

* This distinction is very nice, yet neglected by all grammarians 5 
some ot then give inadequate and contradictory rules. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



*95 



I do not know whether it be 
on the right hand or the 
left. 
I do not know whether he 

speak true or not. 
I doubt whether she will ac- 
cept the offer they make 
her or not. 
[5.] It matters little whether 

he goes away or stays. 
Whether he win or lose, he 
is always of a cheerful 
temper. 
So that you did see him, and 

speak to him. 
Jn such a manner ) that you 
have sold your goods in 
time, and made a great 
profit. 
When I saw him, and told 
him my reasons, he ap- 
proved of my behaviour. 
While you play, and Use 
your time, he learns his 
lesson. 
While I was speaking to 
him, and showed him he 
was in the wrong, our 
discourse was suddenly in- 
terrupted JDy an unfore- 
seen accident. 
Because you would not fol- 
low my advice, and 
would listen only to your 
own whim, you do not 
deserve, that I should con- 
cern myself farther about 
you. 
As sjou as I have dined, and 
written a letter, I shall go 
and speak to him. 



Je ne sais si c'est a droite ou 
a gauche. 

On ne sait i'il die vrai ou 

non. 
Je doute si elie acceptera ou 

non Poffre qu'on lui fait. 

II importe pen p'ii parte cu 
qu*i\ demeure. 

Soit qu'll gagpe on qu'W 
perde, il est toujours de 
bonne humeur. 

Si hien que vous l'avez vu, et 
que vous lui avez parie. 

De mauiere que vous ave* 
vendu vos marchandise3 
a temps et que vous avez 
i\iit OH grand profit. 

Ojmnd je le vis, et que je lui 
dis mes raisons, il approu- 
va ma conduite. 

Pendant que vous jouez, et 
que vous perdcz, votre 
temps, il apprend sa lecon. 

Tandis que je lui parlois, et 
que je lui faisois voir le tort 
qu'il avcit, un accident 
imprevu interrompit tout 
a coup notre discours. 

Farce que vous n'avez pas 
voulu suivre mon avis, et 
que vous n'wvesc voulu 
ecouter que votre caprice, 
vous ne rneritez pas que 
je m'interesse davantage 
a vous. 

Des que j'aurai dine, ct que 
Yaurai ecrit une lettrir, 
j'iral lui parler. 
o 4 



2<)6 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



As soon as I saw, that I 
could net make him listen 
to reason, and that he 
iju as too much prejudiced 
against me, 1 went away 
without saying any thing. 

Why do you not i mi tale 
your sister, and ////// 
yourself to the French 
tongue as she does ? 

Is it not because you are la- 
zy, and you shun labour 
and pain ? 

After we had drank tea and 
played at cards, we went 
a. waiKii.g. 

Pirbafi* he will come and 
§ee you to day, and give 
yon an account Oi" his 
leaser. s. 

Jkide that her brother docs 
not study, and that he 
iu-ws play tco much, he 
has not so much wit as 
she. 

jis loi'g as we have wealth, 
and live expensively, we 
never want friends. 

In proporiio* as you study, 
and learn the French 
tongue, you will find 
more beauties in it. 

Since we are together, and 
it is very fine weather, 
let us go and take a little 
wall: in the country. 

CJ forbid, that I should 



Ausuiot que je vis que je ne 
pouvois lui (aire entendre 
raison, et qu'il etci( irop 
prevent] centre moi, jc ' 
sortis sans dire mot. 

D y ou rjietit que vous n'imitez 
pas voire sceur, et que vous 
ne vous afpliqutz pas aj 
Francois comme elle ? 

N'est-ce pas pane que vous 
etes paresseux, et que vous 
evittz le travail et la 
peine ? 

Apres que nous e times pris ie 
the, et que nous tumes ]OU<8 
aux cartes, nous al.ames 
a la promenade. 

Plu -etre qu'il viendra vous. 
voir aujourd'hui, et qa'\[ 
vols rettdra lump-te Je ses 
raisons. 

Outre que son Here rretudie 
pas, et qu'il uime trop a 
jouer, il n'a pas tant d'eja- 
prit qu'elie. 

Tant quov\ a du bien, et qn'on 
fait de la depense, ou ne 
manque jamais d'amis. 

A me sure que vous etudierez, 
et que vous apprendrez le 
Francois, vous y trouvc- 
rez plus de beauic*. 

Puisque nous sommes ensem- 
ble, et qu'W fait fort beau 
temps, a lions (aire un pe- 
tit teur de promenade a 
la campagne, 

A Du u nt plaisi que je 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



m 



blame your behaviour, 
and reproach you with ir. 

God grant, that you may 
be in good health, and 
succeed in all your enter- 
prises. 

Notwithstanding that you 
know him, and he has 
cheated you, you still 
converse with him. 

He is far from being happy 
and living contented in the 
midst of his wealth. 

Go and speak to him, lest 
he should be angry and 
reproach you. 

Unless you go and see him, 
and speak to him, he will 
not be pleased with you. 

I shall go into the country 
next week, provided I be 
well, and it be fair* 

Not that I praise him, and 
approve of his arrogance. 

In case that he comes, and : 
asks news of my brother, 
teil him that he will be 
here in a week. 

Though he denies it, and de- 
clares that he has not seen 
it, I can assure you of the 
contrary. 

/// order that you may be 
contented,, and have no 
occasion to complain of 
me, I will give you raore. 
than I promised you r 



blame votre tonduite, et 
que j'e <veviUe vous en 
fa ire un reproche. 

Plaise a Dieu que vous vous 1 
portiez bien, et que vous 
reussissit % dans toutes voa 
entreprises. 

Malgre que vous le connois- 
siez et qu'il vous ait trom~ 
pe, vous ne cessez de iui 
parler. 

// s'eu faut bien qu'W soit 
heureux et qu'W vi-ve con- 
tent au milieu de ses rip- 
enesses. 

Allez lui' parler, de crainte 
qu'W ne foit fache, et qu'W 
ne yous fasse des re— 
proches. 

A mcins que vous n'alliez le 
voir, et que vous ne lui 
par/iez, il ne sera pas 
content de vous. 

J'irai a la campagne la se- 
maine prochaine, pourvu 
que je me porte bien, et 
qu'W fasse beau> 

Nan pas que je le loue, ni que 
]'approuwe son arrogance. 

Au cas qu'W vienne, et qu'il 
demand e des nouvelles de 
mon frere, dites-^ui qu'il' 
arrivera dans huit jours. 

Quoiqu'W le nie, et qu'W de'-- 
dare ne l'avoir pas vu, je 
puis vous assurer du- con*- 
traire. 

Afin que vous soyez content,, 
et que vous n\z>v:s. pas sujet 
de vous plaindre de moi, : 
je vous donnerai plus que-* 
je ne vous ai prom-is*. 



208 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Though he told me of it, 
and his brother confirmed 
it, I believe nothing of it. 

Though he is young and 
rich, she does not love 
him. 

before you give your opi- 
nion, and determine, be 
without partiality and 
prejudice. 



Bienqu'W. me l'ait dit, et que 
6on frere me Vait con- 
tinue, je n'en crois rien» 

Encore qu'W soit jeune et 
qu*\\ nit du bien, elle ne 
l'aime pas. 

Avant que vous disiez votre 
sentiment, et que vous de- 
cidiez,, soyez sans partia- 
lite et sans prevention. 



FRENCH TONGUE. zoo 



PART IV. 



Practical Irregularities of the French Tongwe, 
ALPHABETICALLY DISPOSED, 

WITH THE APPROPRIATE USES OF 

PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES, 

APPROVED BY THE BEST AUTHORS, 

AXV ESPECIALLY 

BY THE DECISION OF THE FRENCH 
ACADEMY. 



Abandenne'* 

HHHIS word in the masculine gender,, commonly sig- 
-*- nifies forsaken, given over ; as, un homme abandonn£ y 
a man who is forsaken ; un malade abandonee, a sick 
person given over by his physicians. When it is ap- 
plied in the feminine gender to persons, it always signifies 
a bad woman* 

Ajfectiomer. 

We say offectiormer une chose, to love, to like a 
thing ; but we do not say afftct'ionner une personne, to 
love, to like a person, if the person be of an equal, or 
higher rank : the genius of the French tongue does not 
allow it. However, effectmine\ in a passive significa- 
tion, may be used, speaking of an inferior, with regard 
to his superior ; as, ce scrviteur est fort affectionne a !*x 
maUre) this servant is much attached to his master, 

o 6 



300 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Bouhours and Corneille observe, that njotre aft&ionni 
$ernjiteur y your affectionate servant, is used only to per. 
sons of an inferior rank. 

Aider. 

When the verb aider governs the first case, it is taken 
in the sense of to assist a person with money, counsel, or 
some thing ; as, /'/ Va aide dans cette affaire, he assisted 
him in that affair, miz* with money. But when it go- 
verns the third case, it is taken in the sense of to help a 
man overloaded ; as, il 1*1 a aide a porter ta charge y he 
helped him to carry his burthen. 

Aller, Fenir, 

The first is said of the place where a person is, with 
relation to the place where he is nor. The second, on the 
contrary, is said of a place where a person is not, with 
a relation to the place where he is ; as, supposing the 
person speaking in London, he will say, un courier est 
iM§ de Londrcs a Paris en trots j^nrs, et il est <i;e?,u de 
Paris a Londres dans le meme espace de temps; a courier 
went from London to Paris in three days, and came from 
Paris to London in the same space of time. 

This verb is likewise used, when speaking of the place 
where a person dwells - y a?, meeting somebody, 1 say to 
him; je voits prie, Monsieur, de <Venir diner dtrnain chiTZ 
moiy pray, sir, come and dine with me to morrow. 

However, there is a distinction to be made here \ if it 
be another person's house, aiur must be used ; as, if, 
meeting somebody ; I say, Monsieur A. <vout prie dialler 
domain diner chtz, luL But, in this case, when the per, 
son who speaks is likewise to go to the other person's, 
house, itnir is used j as, Monsieur A. *vous prie de 
lenir dtrnain a~ucc moi diner chez lui. 

This verb alltr is likewise used to denote what is> or 
v ;\s to happen immediately ; it signifies to be going, to 
be ready ; as, je vais ecrire y I am going to write, il <ia 
sot/ir, he is just going out; // allcit rendre lame> he 
was ready to breathe his last, 

fiari*> cn the contrary, signify, a thing just done ; ar, 



FRENCH TONGUE- 301 

je viens de lui ecrire, I have just written to him ; je Vinok 
de diner, quand vcus ... I have just dined, when you . . K 

Ke faire que de may be used instead of venir in the 
aforesaid sense; as, je ne fais que de lui e'crire ; je ne 
faisois que de diner quand vous . . • These three verbs are 
used in this senseonly in the present and imperfect tenses 
of the indicative mood. 

Vtnir, followed by an infinitive with a, signifies, as I 
observed elsewhere, Part III, Sect. 3, p. 252, to begin 
or to set about doing something; as, quand je <vins a lui 
parler, when I began to speak to him* This verb may 
be used in all it's tenses. 

Again, though the verb alter is neuter, it seems to be, 
in some case*, an active one, or, at least, to have an ac- 
tive signification ; as, aller sou chemin, to go his way ; 
filler son train, to be the same, to continue in the same 
way ; aller son meme pas, to go on in the same manner ; 
but in this case a preposition is understood before the sub- 
stantive. 

A!ler y joined with the participle ;•, and used imper- 
sonally, fignifies to. be at stake, to be concerned ; as, 
your fortune is at stake, il y va de voire fortune ; your 
life was concerned in it, il y alloit de voire vie^ 

\n this signification, and every other of the verb aller-, 
y is left out before the future and the conditional ; as, 
though my fortune should be at stake, quand il trait de 
via fortune ; though my life should be concerned in ir, 
quand il iroit de ma vie. When will you go to Windsor I 
we shall go there to-morrow, quand irez.vous a. Windsor g 
nous irons demaw* French Academy, 

AklS, L0lSy 

The second is never used without being followed by 
que, unless it be preceded by these two participles des or 
four; in these cases, des-krs signifies from that time, and 
four lorSy then. Lorsqite signifies when ; as, lorsque je 
le vis, when I saw him. Some say des-lors que je le vis y 
as soon al I saw him : but this expression is very bad ; 
we say, dh que je le **//, Ahri sigifies then^ and is sever 
followed by qm^ 



$ oz A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Ancien. Vieux. Antique* 

The second is commonly used in speaking of old per* 
sons and things worn by use ; as, this man is very old r 
cette bomme est ttis-*vieux ; this suit of clothes is very"old r 
cet habit est tres-vieux. The first has a relation to the 
century a person lived in ; as, Aristotle est plus ancien 
que Ciciron, Aristotle is more ancient than Tully. It 
signifies, likewise, an advantage acquired by time; as, 
t'est une maiso7i atic'mine, or, une famille ancienne, it is 
an ancient family. But, when we speak of a building, 
we say, une <viille maison, an old house } and not une 
maison ancienne. 

Though we equally say, le VieuXy or V A?icien Testa- 
ment , the Old Testament ; d'anc-ienms, or de weilles 
htitoires, old histories; de *vieux % or d'anciens manuscrits ; 
de <vieux y or cV anciens romans, &c. : however, we do not 
equally say, le jcune y for le Nowveau Testament ; and so 
for the others ; t hough jeune is the opposite of vieux, which 
may be used equally with ancien in such cases as above. 

Neither de we equally say, d\anciens y or de <vieux livres ; 
d*anciens y or de <vieux tableaux. We say, d'anciens linjres^ 
d'anciens tableaux, of books or pictures which the au. 
thors and painters of antiquity made ; and <vieux li<vres % 
*vieux tableaux, of books or pictures grown old and spoiled 
by time, of whatever age they may be. 

The third is used in speaking of medals, statutes, and 
pictures, when we speak of them as monuments of anti- 
quity. It is likewise used in speaking of some pieces of 
architecture executed in the ancient style. 

When we speak of a collection of the laws of the Visi- 
goths, Burgundians, &c, we say les lois antiques. But 
when we speak of other Roman or French law, we say, 
les lois anciennes. We say likewise, coutumes aucienncs, les 
ceremonies anciennes. 

Annie fasse'e. Anne qui vient. 

L'anftie fassee is used only with relation to the year 
which immediately precedes that we live in ; as % je fas ma. 
lade I'annc'e fassee, I was sick last yeas, L'anuce qui 
9 



FRENCH TONGUE. 303 

*oient is used when we speak of the year immediately fol- 
lowing that we live in ; as, j'trmi a Amsterdam Vannie qui 
<vieut, I shall go to Amsterdam next year. 

Au cas. 

This word signifying in case, is always followed by 
que : as, au cas qu'.il meure, in case he should die. We 
equally say, en cas qu'il meure. If after cas a substantive 
follow, we make use of en cas, followed by del en cas de 
mart, in case of death, and not au cas de morU 

Beau coup. 

This word signifying ma?ty, is seldom used alone ; as, 
we do not say, il dowwit peu a beaucoup, he gave little to 
many ; we add, a beaucoup de persomies, or a beaucoup de 
gens. 

When a personal pronoun comes before beaucoup, in 
such a case it may be used alone ; as, nous sommes beaucoup , 
*vous etes beaucoup, we are many, you are many - because 
beaucoup has a relation to the foregoing pronoun. The 
same is to be said when the indeterminate pronoun en is 
before beaucoup ; as il y en a beaucoup, there are many. 
En is in the place of gens, personnes, or any thing men- 
tioned before ; as in the foregoing example, il y a beaucoup 
de gens. 

When beaucoup is taken in the sense of much, a great 
deal, and comes after an adjective, it must always be pre- 
ceded by the particle de ; as, <votre bouquet est plus beau 
de beaucoup que celui de <votre frere, your nosegay is much 
finer than that of yeur brother. But when beaucoup is 
before the adjective de may be left out. 

We say, il s'enfaut beaucoup, to express, that there is a 
great difference between persons or things, and it signifies 
to be far from, to come short of something : as, he comes 
far short of being so handsome as you, il n'est pas si beau 
que *vous> il s f en faut beaucoup. The latter gallicism 
may begin the sentence, and then the first is preceded by 
que, and the following verb is put in the subjunctive 
mood) as, // iUn faut bzaucQup qu y il soil aussi beau que 

WQUS. 



304 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

We say, tl s'en faut de beaucoup, to express a defici- ' 
ency in something ; as, you think that you returned me 
every thing, but there is a great deal wanting, vans crojex 
m' avoir tout paje, d s'en faut de beaucoup m French 
Academy, 

* Champ* 

This word, in the singular, signifies a piece of arable 
ground, commonly not encompassed by walls. But when 
it is taken in the plural, it is applied to all sorts of ground, 
such as meadows, woods, &c., taken together : thus we 
say, to lead the cattle into the fields, mener les bestiaux 
aux champs. It likewise signifies every other place, 
which is not in the city or suburbs ; thus we equally say,, 
une mahon de camp ague, or une maison d.s champs, a country 
house : however, the first is in most use. 

Cceur* 

When this word is joined to the verb avoir, and pre- 
ceded by the article, it signifies to have courage ; thus, we 
say of a man who is not a coward, il a du cceur. When 
it is preceded by the preposition a, it signifies to espouse 
an affair ; avoir une affaire a cceur* When it is pre- 
ceded by the preposition sur, it signifies to resent a thing, 
avoir une chose sur le cceur* 

When we make use of the word cceur to express gene- 
rosity or goodness, we join to that word an adjective, or 
some other word j as, il a U cccur bun fait, il a- le cceur 
bouy cest un ban cceur, he is a good-natured man. 

Likewise,, though e'est un homme de cceur signifies he 
is a courageous man ; yet, when we add tout to the word 
cceur, it signifies a generous man ; as, il est tout cceur, he 
is a very generous man.. 

Commit 

This word is used in different manners : it is used in- 
stead of aiusi que, de me me que, dans le temps que, par 
extmple, a cause que ou pane que, presque. en que/que scrte ; 
as, like, as it were, in the time tha?> for -example, b«cauic> 
in some manner, 

i 



FRENCH TONGUE/ 305 

// sera puni comme les <;utres t 

Mc shall be punished like others, 

Cda paroit com me <vieux. 

This seems as if it were old. 

Comme il a rriuoit . 

As he was coming. 

Comme // a toujour* aime le bkn public y il n'a jamais 
1'oulu const ntir y 8c c. 

As he always loved the public good, he never would 
consent, Sic. 

11 est comme le res sort de tout cette intrigue. 

He is in some measure the spring of this intrigue. 

It is likewise used instead of comment > signifying how, 
or in what manner, after some other phrase ; as, il uerra 
comme je lui parlerai, he will see in what manner, I shall 
speak to him. But when, how, or in what manner, be- 
gins a phrase, comment must be used ; as, in what man- 
ner did he succeed ? comment a-t-il reussi f and not 
comme. 

Davantage. Plus. 

Plus is never used at the end in an affirmative sentence; 
as, give me some more, donnez m'en davantage, and not 
plus. Unless it is preceded, by de ; as, 1 wi.l give you 
something more for it, je <vous en donuerai quelque chose 
d^ plus. 

Plus and dwantage are used indifferently at the 
end of a negative sentence ; but plus requires only ne 
before it, whereas davantage requires ne and pas; as, 
je n'en <ueux pas davantage y or je nen <veux plus } I will have 
no more of it. 

Davantage is never put in the middle of a sentence be- 
fore a substantive, but plus may be; as, the Romans 
have more plain dealing than the Greeks, les Remains out 
plus de bonne foi que Its Grec f , and not da-vantage de bonne 

Davantage must never be used in the middle of a sen- 
tence before que ; thus we say, you are in the wrong to 
reproach me with being hasty, I am not more so than 
you ; vous avcz tort de me rep roc her d'etre vij\ je ne le 
si< is pets plus que vous t and not davautage que vaui* 



«o6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Durant. 

This preposition is sometimes indifferently put either 
before or after it*s regimen ; as, durant deux mors, or 
deux mois durant, Airing two months ; daring his life, 
j* <vie durant* But we always say, durant le jour, durant 
la nuit* 

Enclin* 

This word signifies inclined. It is used in morals, and 
commonly speaking of something bad ; as, // est cnclirt 
akjeuy he is inclined to gaming. 

Though we say enclin } yet we say, incline^ inclu 
natim% 

Ekmfrvw (j')« 

This verb is used only in the third person singular and 
plural ; as, tout ce qui s'ensuit, all that follows thence ; 
les accidens qui s'ensuivroient, the accidents which would 
ensue. 

Evitable. 

Some French authors have made use of this word, and 
it has been inserted in the last edition of the dictionary of 
the French academy, but it is very seldom used. How- 
ever we say ine-vitable, unavoidable. 

We have in the French tongue several compounded 
words, which are used, though the simple words from 
which they are formed are not ; as, inexorable y inexora- 
ble ; infplatable, implacable; irreconcilable, irreconcilable; 
insatiable, insatiable ; indubitable, unquestionable; ineffable ^ 
ineffable; immani[uable\ infallible, &c. 

Exceptc, 

When this word comes before a noun, it is a preposi- 
tion, consequently indeclinable; as, excepts cenxla y ex- 
cept those ; excipie ?na tour, except ni) sister. But 
when it comes after the noun, it is a past participle* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 307 

consequently declinable $ as, ma sceur exceptee, my sister 
excepted, 

Fable. 

When this word is used to signify the fabulous history 
of the gods and demigods, it has no plural ; as, un poete 
doit savotr la Fable, a poet ought to know the history 
of the gods and demigods ; la Fable est fort amusante, , 
Mythology is very entertaining. 

But if we say in the plural, les fables sont agriables 
. et utiles, fables are pleasant and useful, we understand the 
fables of JEsop, Fh&drus, . la Fontaine, Gay, and other 
authors* 

The word fable is sometimes Used in a figurative sense \ 
as, le pauvre homme sert de fable et de riste d tout le 
MQfid?) the poor simpleton makei himself a common talk* 
and a laughingstock 

Fleurir, 

This verb may be taken in a proper or figurative sense 3 
in the first, it signifies to blossom ; in the second, it signi- 
fies to flourish, to be in repute. 

When it is in it's proper sense it has no irregularity 
. at all ; but when it is used in it's figurative sense, it has an 
irregularity in all the persons of the imperfect tense, and 
in the participle of the present ; as, une ar?nee florissante, 
a flourishing army ; Horace florissoit sous August e, Horace 
flourished in the time of Augustus, 

In the present tense we say, fleurissent ; as, les arts et 
les sciences fleurissent dans notre sikle ; arts and sciences 
flourish in our age, 

Gagiier, 

Though we say gagner une bataille, to gain the victory 
in a battle, yet we do not say gagner un combat, to ex- 
press the same thing. We may say eire I'ictorienx dans 
un combat. 

Gens. 

There is scarce another word to be met with liable to 



joS * A GRAMMAR OF THE 

so many irregularities. See pnge 159, where notice id 
taken of some oi them. 

Gens is never said, as in English, of a determinate 
number of people, unless it be attended wilh an adjec- 
tive; as, two honest people, deux h,nntles gens. How- 
ever, we say, a thousand people believe it, mille gens le 
erase srl. In thu case mill* is taken for an indeterminate 
number, viz. a great many. 

Gens sometimes signifies a person's rerinue; in this 
case it may be used with a determinate number, but always 
followed by the preposition de ; as, 1 see but four of my 
servants, where are the others ? je ne vois que quatre de mes 
gens, cu sent les autres ? 

Gens sometimes signifies people who are of the same 
party or club; in this sense it is likewise used with a de- 
terminate number-; as, four of our club are come, quatre 
de nos gens sont arrives. 

Gens, in the sense of nation, is only used in this phrase ; 
the law of nations, le droit des gens. Ic is still used in 
the same sense, in the singular number, in some pieces of 
poetry, such as fables ; as, la gent aquetique, to express 
fishes, and whatever lives in the water. La Fontaine. 

Grace. 

When this word is alone with the verb /aire and an 
article, it signifies favour, kindness ; as, do me the fa- 
V O U t , faitts- m 9 i la g rci ce . 

When it is without an article, it signifies to forgive, to 
remit; as, the king has forgiven him, le roi lui a fait 
grace; you owe me a hundred guineas, but 1 remit you 
the half, f-dens me de-vez cent guine'es, mais je tons fais 
grace de la wAtie. 

When grace is used in the singular with de before ir, 
it signifies pray, or be so kind as - ... ; as pray tell me, 
de £ t a c e , dites-moi. 

Grace, used in the singular, alone or with the adjective 
ignifies gracefulness; as, he salutes with grace- 
fulness '/ salue at bonne grdce f or a<vec grace: she is very 
graceful, tile a bonne grace, or elle a de la grace. 

When in the same number it is preceded by the adjec* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 309 

tive mauuaise 9 it signifies quite the contrary ; as, admire 
his awkwardness, admirez sa mauvaise grace. Sometime?, 
in this latter sense, it only signifies what is contrary to 
propriety, to reason : as, there is no reason to complain of 
me, kfotts a*ve% mawvahe grace de i-ons plain dre de tnii. 

When gfe'ces is used in the plural, it signifies the 
Graces ('hree goddesses, who, according to the Poets, 
were the companions of Venus) ; also, the beauties of 
language ; as, les graces de la langne Francs'se, or the 
gracefulness of a person ; as, do you not admire the grace- 
fulness of that lady r n'admirez. ttous pas les graces de cette 
dame ? 

If, in the same number, the word bsitijfs be added to 
it, it signifies good will ; as, he has the good will of his 
master, il a les bonnes graces de son m?ifre. 

Bouhours observes here, that, though we try gergner 
les bonnes graces de quelqu'un y to gain tht good will of a 
person ; yet we do not say, to express the contrary, 
cither gagner or enconrir les mau--vai:es graces de quelqu' un ; 
custom, says he, allows the one, and not the other ; in 
such a case we say perdre les bonnes graces de quelquun s to 
lose the good will of a person. 

Etre en graces apres du Prince ou de qttelquc pcrsonne 
puissanfc, signifies to be in favour with the King, or some 
powerful person. 

Etre dans les bonnes graces d'une dame, signifies to be be- 
loved by a lady. 

Jf'ai ete, je suis alle\ 

We make use of the first expression to signify that we 
are not, or were not any longer in the place we are 
speaking of; as, Madam went to the play yesterday, Ma- 
dame a cic a la ccmeJie hier ; but when somebody is or 
was still in the place we. are speaking of, then we use the 
compound of clier ; as, Madam is gone to the play, Ma- 
dame est dllec a la come die. 

Moreover, if some word denoting motion be added to 
it, we make ul-c of the compound of al'er y though the 
person is no longer in the place we are speaking oi ; a?, 
he went to Paris in two days, il est a lie a Paris en deux 
jfmru V- c -)kc wise say in conversation, j'aurois cte\ or 



3 io A GRAMMAR OF THE 

je serois allc <vcus voir, I would have gone to see you ; je 
fus, or j'a/laihier a V opera, I went yesterday to the opera. 
French Academy. 

Main. 

This word has many curious significations. 
Downer la main a une chose, to consent to a thing. 
Tendre la main, to beg alms, also so lend a ..helping 
hand, to assist a person: as, lend him your assistance, 
tendez-lui la main. However, donner y or preter la main a 
quelqu'un is less equivocal. 

t En venir aux mains asvec I'ennemiy to fight with the 
enemy. 

Faire main bafse sur Vennemiy to put all to the sword. 
Metire la main sur quelqu'un (le bo tire) to lay hands 
upon a person, to beat him. 

Tenir la tnain haute, to keep a strict hand over a person, 
to treat him severely. 

Prendre en main la cause de quelqu'un, to take a person'3 
part. 

Prendre a ioutes mains, to eaten every way. 
Donner la mmin a un cbeval, to give a horse the reins. 
Donner de main en mahiy to hand about. 
Met t re la main a la plume % to begin to write. 
Mettre la main au chapeau, a l'epee f to put the hand to 
the hat, in order to salute somebody ; to put the hand to 
the sword. 

Mettre le chapeau a la main, to pull ofF the hat. 
Mettre V epie a la main, to draw a sword ; also to fight 
with a sword. 

Etre en main pour faire une chose, to be at hand, or in a 
convenient situation to do a thing. 

Lever la main, to make an oath before a judge, to lay 
our hand upon the Bible, to lift up our hand. 

Avoir I /; armes bien a la main, to be skilful in bodily 
exercises with weapons. 

Faire credit de la main £ la bourse 3 to trust no farther 
than we can see. 

Un coup de main signifies a bold action; in this sense 
it is joined to the verb faire. When it is joined to the 
verb donner y it signifies to put our hand to something* 



FRENCH TONGUE. $ll 

in order to assist a person ; as, dsnnez-nous tin coup de 
main, 

Un homme de main signifies a man who is fit for a bol4 
and hazardous enterprise. 

Des coups de main, blows with the hand or fist. 

A pleines maius, largely, plentifully. 

Sous main, underhand, secretly. 

Combat de main, a close fight. 

Sous la main, under a person's nose. 

Cela est fait a la main, that is done in concert. 

Maison, 

Speaking of people of quality, or of gentlemen of an 
ancient and noble extraction, we say, maison; as, he is 
of the house of Montmorency, il est de la maison de 
Montmorenci, But speaking of citizens and people of 
business, we make use of the word famille. 

Sometimes we make use of the word famille, instead of 
maison) when some following words heighten the significa- 
tion ; as, the royal family, la famille rojale. 

Take notice, that when we say, la famille rojale, we 
mean by this expression, the king, the queen, their chil- 
dren, and grandchildren. But, when we say la maison 
rojale, we commonly mean the other princes and princesses 
©f the blood. 

La maison du roi signifies the king's household, servants, 
or troops. 

Take notice, likewise, that, though we say la maison 
rojale, or la maison du roi, we never say, la famille du 
roi. 

Famille is used instead of maison, even speaking of 
ancient nobility, when we mention it with relation to me- 
dals ; as, the consular medals are distinguished by the Ro- 
man families, les me dailies cpnsulaires st discing uent par les 
families Rcmaines, It is for this reason, perhaps, that we 
say, la famille des Scipions, /<* famille des C tsars, &c, and 
50 1 la maison des Scipio?is y even when we do not speak of 
medals. 

The word famille is likewise used, when we speak of 
a person's nearest relations; as, he has fallen out with 
his relations, // s 'est brouilti avec so famille. 



3 T2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Mahon and familJe are sometimes, used promiscuously 
speaking of person's servants and household ; as, she is 
a woman who takes care of the household, e'ert u*?e femme 
qui a torn de sa mar son, or famille. J lowcer the first seems 
to have -a more extensive signification, and to reJa'te more 
immediately to household affairs. 

We always say, e'tnblir sa martin, and /aire vne birrve 
maitm t and not familk $ when we would express to grow 
rich. 

Metier. 

This word is low in its proper, and: elegant ir. it's figu- 
rative sense. According to Balzac painters are offended 
at this word, for we do not say, le metier de per'/itre, the 
profession of a painter. 

However gen, rah of the army boast of their calling ; 
as, the profession of arms, the profession of war; le me- 
tier del arm el) le metier de la guerre. 

We likewise say, speaking of works ; there arc only 
people of that calling, who can be judges of it; il n'j a 
Cu" let gens du me'tir, qui en sdent bins jnges. 

In this sense it must be used with the definite article, 
because gent de metier signifies quite another thing, viz, 
handicraftsmen. 

MotfU 

This verb is never used alone, except when we speak 
of the mountains that separate France from Italy ; for we 
say let Afpetx or Is wonts only, after some prepositions, b*T 
verj seldom ; as, on the side the Alps, en defi des montt. 

In prher circumstances we say, le mont Oljmpe l lejmttt 
' : Etna, le mont St. Gothard ; but we say, la 
vtontagnc du Calvaire. 

is de A aticftt et de Languet* 

There Is, prrhaps-, nothing where variety of custom is 
more visible, than in the names of some nations and Ian- 

The first is applied to men and 



FRENCH TONGUE. 313 

women ; as, une Arabe, une femme Arabe. The second 
is never applied to persons, but to the Arabian charac- 
ters. Speaking of the language, we say, P Arabe, or la 
langue Arabe* We say, une figure Arabesque, an Arabic 
figure. 

Barbarie. We use the word Barbaresque, to express a 
man of Barbary, or something belonging to that country ; 
as, un nauire barbaresque, a Barbary vessel. Un Barbare 
is always taken figuratively, and signifies a barbarous 
man. Barbe signifies a Barbary horse. 

Chaldean, Chaldaique* The first is said of the persons 
and their language ; the second of their language only, 

Dorien, Dorique ; Ionien, Ionique. The first is applied 
only to persons ; as, les Doriens, les hniens ; une D^rienne, 
une Ionienne. The second is applied to the language. 
Speaking of the architecture, we say, ordre Dorique, ordre 
Ionique* 

He'breu, Hebraique. We say, speaking of the people, 
un Hebreu, les Hebretix* This word is not used in the 
feminine gender ; thus we must say, la femme d y un He'~ 
hrcu, la fille d y un He'breu, les femmes et les filles des H^ 
breux. Speaking of the language, we say, Vffibreu, or 
la langue Hebraique, Speaking of manuscripts, we only 
say, des mauuscrits Ilebreux ; but, speaking of Hebrew 
types, we say, des carac teres Hebraiques* 

Juif, Juda'ique. We say un Juif, une Juive, speaking 
of the modern Jews. We say <vi<vre a la Juive, to live 
like the Jews, with relation to their manners ; and <vivre 
a la Juda'ique, with relation to their ceremonies. 

More, Moresque. We say un More, a Moor; une 
Moresque, a Moorish woman, and net une More; though 
we say, une femme More, We say le More, speaking of 
the language. Moresque signifies a Moorish dance, also 
Morisco work in painting. 

P-rse, Persan, Persien, Persique. W T e commonly say 
les Penes, speaking of the ancient people of Persia ; and 
Persan s, speaking of the modem. 

In the siit^ular we always say un Persan, and not un 
Perse. Printed cloth of Persia is called de la Perse, and 
not Persicnne. The latter is applied to Venetian blinds. 

However, when we speak of Persian stuffs, we may 
say, une e'iiffe de Ptrse, as we say, une e'tojfe de la Chine. 



SH A GRAMMAR OF THE 

We say, la langue Persienne, or le Persien, speaking of 
the ancient language ; but we say, la langue Per sane, or 
le Persan, speaking of the modern language. 

We always say, d la Persienne, to signify after the 
Persian manner. 

Persifue is said of the gulf that separates Persia from 
Arabia ; as, le golphe Persique. It likewise signifies a 
species of architecture. 

Speaking of the ancient kings, Cyrus, Darius ', &c, we 
call them indifferently rot de Perse, or roi des Perses; but 
o( the moderns we say only le roi de Perse. 

Syrien, Syriaque. The first is used speaking of the 
people, un Syrien, une Syrienne ; the second speaking of 
the language, le Syriaque, or la langue Syriaque. 

Teuton, Teutonique, Tudesque* The first is said of the 
people and of the language ; the second of the language, 
and when we speak of the order : as I'ordre Teutonique, the 
Teutonic order. Tudesque is only used speaking of the 
language of the ancient Germans. 

These are the irregular nouns relating to nations and 
languages. The rest are equally applied to the people 
and to their language; as, Us Ethiopiens, VEthiopien; les 
Moscovites, le Moscovitej les Grecs, le Grec ; les Latins, U 
Latin, &c 

Des Nombres tardinaux. 

What belongs to the manner of counting them has been 
said already, see p. 2 3. However, there are many other 
remarks to be made concerning these numbers. 

It is to be observed, that vingi, when it is multiplied 
by another preceding number, whether followed by a sub- 
stantive or not, takes an s after the / : as, quatre-viugts, 
eighty ; quatre~ e vivgts guinees, eighty guinea- ; but the s 
is omitted when it is followed by another cardinal number; 
as, quatre njingt-trois, eighty-three. 

To know in what cases the other numbers are either 
declinable or indeclinable, see page 30. 

Instead of septante, seventy ; oetante, eighty ; and nc- 
nante, ninety ; we always say soixante ct dix, quatrc- 
vingts, nuatre-'vingt-dix. Except when wc 5 peak of the 
interpreters of the Bible, we say lis scptante^ though 



FRENCH TONGUE. 3 if 

they were seventy- two ; but when we add inter prctes de 
la Bible, we say, les soixante et douze interprkes de la. 
Bible, 

We likewise say les septante surnames de Daniel, th 
seventy weeks of the prophet Daniel. We may say six- 
*vingts, one hundred and twenty ; and sometimes sept- 
*vingt, one hundred and forty ; huit-vingts, one hundred 
and sixty ; but we never say deux-<i>ingts, forty ; trois* 
vingts, sixty ; cinq-<vingts, a hundred ; dix-<vingts, two 
hundred. After six-vingtsf we say cent <vingt et un, cent 
*vifigt deux, &c. 

After mille we say onze cent, ahuze cent . • . to deux 
mille. When we speak of the year of our Lord, we 
write mil, and not mille: after mil we say I* an ouze 
eeufi, one thousand one hundred ; Van mil deux cent, one 
thousand two hundred; Van mil trois cent, one thousand 
three hundred, &c. However we say douze cents hommes, 
twelve hundred men ; trieze cents hommes, thirteen hundred 
men, &c. 

When we speak of the place endowed at Paris by 
Lewis IX, king of France, for three hundred blind, or, 
when we speak of the blind themselves, we say, les 
quinze.<vingts, and not les trois cents. 

Sometimes we make use of couple and paire instead of 
deux, but not indifferently ; couple arad paire are said of 
things of the same kind which may be separated ; as, a 
brace of partridges, a couple of chickens ; une couple^ oc 
une paire de perdrix, une couple, or une paire 'de poulets m 
Couple is never said of things which are considered as in- 
separable ; as, a pair of gloves, a pair of ruffles, a pair of 
stockings, &c, une poire de gants, une paire de manchettes % 
une paire de has, Sec, and not une couple de- gants, &c. 
Couple is likewise said of persons united together by love 
or marriage ; in this sense it is always in the masculine 
gender ; as, beau couple, couple fidele. 

We make use of the word qudrteron, when we are 
speaking of things which are reckoned per cent. It sig- 
nifies the fourth part of a hundred ; as, a quarter of a 
hundred pins, un quarteron d*epingles. The word is like* 
wise said of things which are weighed; it then signifies 
the fourth part of a pound ; as, a quarter of a pound of 
butter, un quartern de beurre. 

F 2 



3 i 6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

We make use of the word quintal, to express a hun- 
•dred weight ; it is used only when we are speaking of 
some commodities that are weighed. 

Millier is -said of a thousand weight ; as, a thousand 
weight of iron, brass, Sec. un millier de fer^ de cuivre, &c. 

When we speak of time, we say kuit jours, or wie se- 
maine, for a week ; quinze jours, or deux semaines, for a 
fortnight. However, we always say trois semaines, three 
Weeks; un mois, a month; cinq, six, sept semaines, five, 
six, seven weeks ; deux mots, two months ; ne if semaines, 
nine weeks ; deux mois et demi, ten weeks ; trois miis, 
*hree months, and not nn quart d'an ; quatre, cinq, six 
mois, four, five, six months, and so on to un an. Thence 
we commonly reckon by months, as treize mois, qua- 
tcrze, quinzt mois, See. to deux ans ; though we may say, 
«t.Ms child is one year and one month, or eighteen months 
•Id ; cet enfant a un on it un mois, or un an et demi in these 
two cases only. 

We never say il est douze heures, it is twelve o , clock > 
•bat il est midi, il est vtinuit. 

Des Nombres collect if s. 

The numbers which grammarians call collective, are 
iuitainc, newvaine, dizaine, douzaine, quinzainc, *ving- 
9aine, trentaine, quarautaine^ cin quanta i fie, soixantaine 3 
sentaine* 

Huitaine signifies eight days ; it is used in law ; a la 
buitaine, eight days hence. 

Neuvaine signifies a nine days devotion ; it is now 
never used in poetry, as it was formerly, to signify the 
nine Muses. 

Dizaine and douzaine signify a collection of ten and 
twelve ; as, une dizaine ou une douzaine de pommes y 
half a score, or a dozen apples ; douzaine signifies a dozen, 
and demLdauzainc, half a dozen ; but we never say demi- 
huitainr, demi-dizawt, to signify four or five. 

Qjiu?zaiiiCy <vingUwie, tren taint. Sec. a collection of 
.fifteen, twenty, thirty, Sec. 

Quarantainc is likwise said of the forty days, which 



FRENCH TONGUE. 3r* 

persons, coming from a place where the plague is, are 
obliged to spend, before they are admitted into the town,. 
to which they intend to go, in English quarantine. 

There are some other collective numbers; as, u*cet y 
quatrain, sixain, huitain, dizai?*, quinzain, trentain* 

The first five are osed only in speaking of some pieces 
of poetry. The first signifies a triplet, the second a 
stanza of four verses, the third a stanza of six verses, &c 

Quinzain and trentain* are used, at tennis. Quinzain' 
is said when both players have fifteen, and tre?itain whea. 
they have thirty. In this sense they are indeclinable - tl as*, 
they are fifteen all, ils sont quinzain.. 

Des Nombres crdinaux^ 

The ordinal numbers are premier, second, trokih&e,. 
qua trie me, cinquisme, six i erne, &c. 

Though we do not say unieme alone, it is, however-^ 
used after other numbers; instead of premier; as, we do 
not say vingt et premier twenty-first ; trente et premier y 
&C. ; but we say <vingt et unieme^ trente et unieme* 

Neither do we say viitgi et second, trente et second; but 
we say vingt-deuxieme, trente. dcuxieme. 

Speaking of a sovereign, we make use of the cardinal 
numbers ; as, Guillaume trois, George trois, Louis qutnze %s 
and not Guillaume troisieme, &c, as in Bojer's Grammar. 
However, for the first and second we make use of the ordi- 
nal numbers; as, George premier, Frederic second. Speak- 
ing of the emperor Charles V, and of the pope Sixte V* 
we say, G h arte s- Quint y Sixte-Quint. 

We commonly say livre trois, chapitre cuatre, article- 
cinq, -uerset huit, nombre dix, paragraphe ci>/f> page 
soixante ; however, speaking regularly, we make use of the 
ordinal numbers in such cases; as, Irore troisieme, chapitre 
quatrieme, &c. 

When two uncertain numbers follow one another; the 
rust is a cardinal, the second an ordinal number;, as, this 

* The words quinzain and trentain are formed by corruption from. 
quinzs-a,. trente^a, to signify quitize~a-quwze, tremca-trente* 

* 3 



51 8 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

is in the third or fourth chapter, cela est dans le trois ou 
quatriime chapitre ; he is the seventh or eighth earl if* 
the kingdom, /*/ est le sept ou huitieme Comte du rqyaume. 
Except premier et second \ which are always to be used in 
such cases. 

After moitte', half, tiers, third, quart, fourth, we use 
the ordinal numbers cinquitme, sixieme, &c. 

When cinquieme y sixieme, &c. are preceded by the in- 
definite article un, they signify the fifth, sixth, &c. part 
of a thing; as, I took a sixteenth in the lottery, j'ai pris 
un seizieme d la loterie ; but when they are preceded by 
the definite article /<?, they must be followed by the pre- 
position de ; as, le cinquieme, le sixiime, the twelfth part 
of sixty is five, le douzieme de soixante est cinq. When 
speaking of the divisions of an ell, we say un demi-tiers 
or un siXy un de mi- quart or un huit y un douxe, un seize , 
un vingt-quatre, un trente-deux* 

When we ask for the day of the month, we commonly 
say quel quant ie^ me a*vons-nous du mois ? or quel jour avons* 
nous du mois? We likewise say, le quantieme etes-ivus de 
<votre classe P what place, have you in your school? Wh^n 
we speak of the day of the month, we always make use 
of the cardinal numbers ; as, it is the fourth day of the 
month ; c'est le quatre du mois 3 except fo| the first day of 
the month ; c'est le premier du mois. 

Des Noms propnu 

It would be too tedious, and to no purpose, to relate 
all the proper names that undergo an alteration in French. 

Vnugclasy and particularly Menage % have made a com- 
plete list of them, "fhey who are desirous to know such 
irregularities may consult these two authors. I will lay 
down here some general rules concerning this matter. 

ist. Proper names of kingdoms, empires, provinces, &c. 
commonly take the French appellation ; thus, England is 
called l % Anghterre ; Wales, la province de Galles ; Ireland, 
V lrelande ; Scotland, I'Ecosse. 

idly* Proper names of cities and towns have commonly 
no variation, though sometimes pronounced in a different 



FRENCH TONGUE. 319 

manner ; as, Bristol, Sec. Except a few of the most re. 
nowned places ; as, London, Londres. 

Neither are foreign proper names of men ever subject 
to any alteration of the whole word ; thus, Mr. White, 
in English, is Monsieur White in French ; Mr. Black is 
Monsieur Blacky &c. ; and not Monsieur le Blanc , Monsieur 
le Noir, Sec. 

3diy. Such ancient foreign names as are much cele* 
brated are commonly adapted to the genius of the French 
language; as, Homire, Pindare, Virgile, Horace, &c. 

4th)y. A compound name commonly does not change 
it's termination ; as, Petronius Priscus; Marcur Varro y &c. 
But if one or other of the two names be much celebrated, 
it commonly follows the genius of the French tongue ; as, 
Jults-Qes«r y Marc-dnf$ine f Quinte*Curce y &c. If the name 
be composed of three, the two first never change their 
termination; as, Marcus Tull/us Cicero;; ; Caius-Julius- 
C$sar> &c # 

Nuage^ Nue'e> Nue* 

These Words, taken in a proper" sense, signify nearly 
the same thing ; but, when they are taken in a figurative 
sense, they are not used ii differently, and as synonymous 
expressions; for we say, to extol somebody to the skies, 
either quelqu'un jusqu'aux nttes, and not, nuages ; and we 
say, truth dissipates the clouds of error, la write dissipe 
Ins nuages de l y erreur y and not nues ; the clouds which 
darken the understanding, les magnes qui qffusquent Ventende* 
ment ; a cloud of dust, un nuage de poussiire. 

We say, figuratively, he has a mist before his eyes t il a 
un nuage devant lesjeux y and not nue. 

To wear out a man's patience, to put him into a pas* 
sion, faire sauter quelqu y un aux nuts, and not nuages. 

To be extremely surprised and astonished, tomber da 
vues, and not nuages. 

We say of a person who is out of countenance, not 
knowing to whom he is to address himself in a company* 
il semble tomber det nues, and not nuages ; and of a man 
who is not known to, or owned by any body, il est tombc 

des ;MCS % 



3*o A GRAMMAR OF THE 

We likewise say, in a bad sense, of a man who, rn his 
writings or discourse, soars in such a manner as to lose 
himself, and make others lose the main subject of his 
writings or speech, il se ferd dans les nues, and not 
vuages. 

We say, in a figurative sense, une nuee se forme, la 
nuee crcvera, and not nuage, nor nue, to express that an 
enterprise, a plot, a conspiracy, a punishment, or a war, 
&c, is ready, and near breaking out. 

We likewise make use of the word nuee, to express a 
multitude of persons, birds, or animals, that are supposed 
to be in flocks ; as, there came a cloud of barbarians, who 
laid waste the country ; il <vint une nuee de harbares qui 
desoltrent tout le fays ; a multitude of witnesses, une nuee 
de temzinsy and not un vuage or nue. 

Generally speaking, we make use of the word nuage, 
when speaking of what dims the sight, and hinders it 
from seeing objects distinctly. It is likewise used to ex- 
press the doubt, the uncertainty, or ignorance of the 
mind* 



This word, used ndjectively, is said of something new, 
not done after a model ; as, an original picture, un tableau 
original; that is not a copy, it is original; cela n 9 est fas 
ir/tite'y a la est original. 

We likewise say peniee originate, a new thought, a 
tLoi'ght not taken from any aiu. r. 

When this vxrei is -used substantively, it is said, of 
things which are the first in their kincfj and are not copied 
after others ; such are master* pieces of art, ancient ma- 
nuscript, or loiters written or signed by those who are 
tM authors of theov; as, this picture is an original; ee 
fabliau tit uu original $ V original Hebreu; ."original d* une 
Litre. 

We likewise say, f peaking in mockery, of a ninny and 
lidiculous fellow, c'mst un original, 

This word is likewise used in a good sense, speaking 
seriou'iy; As, it is alter so great an original, than Plato 
become a philosopher; e'est sur m si grand original, que 



FRENCH TONGUE, 32V 

Flaton est devenu philosophe. In this sense it is always- 
attended by an adjective expressing the meaning of it. 

This word is likewise used in speaking of languages, of: 
texts, or of writings; as, les langues originates, les textes 
%riginaux, les pieces originate*. 

Original is sometimes applied to a person, whose pic- 
ture has been drawn ; thus, on seeing a picture, you may- 
say : I like the original better than the copy yj'aime 
meux. I* original que la copie» 

Part, Partie. 

These two words,, signifying a part, a share, a portion; 
of a whole, have several odd constructions, and are not to* 
be used indifferently the one for the other. We say une 
partie d'tm livre, une partie du corps humain, a part of a* 
book, a part of the human body ; une part d i enfant dans la 
succession, a child's portion in the succession* 

As these. words are used several ways in a proper sense^ 
it will not be amiss to set the most part dow-n, without ihe 
English annexed to them, as these words are easily, un- 
derstood, when a. learner comes so far. as to learn this- 
parr. 

We say: on a fait trois parts de tout le 6 /en de la 
succession. Qjiand il y a tant d i heritiers y les parts sont' 
fet lies. Voila votre party et void la mienne, &c. CV- 
der sa part Prendre sa part. 11 a eu tant pour sa 
part et portion. Donnez-mci ma part. Prendre sa part* 
Le plus fit fait la part au plus foible. II en a eu tant 
a sa pari, tant pour sa part. Entrer en part a<vec quel^u ) un > , 
tire de part a-jec lui. S'ily a du profit, fen aurai- ma part P , 
&e. and not partie. 

We say: partie d'nn corps politique. Le tout est plus; 
grand que sa partie. Les partit s subtiles, grossicres, homogenes 3 
hite'rogenes, &c. L' union des parties, I 'arrangement des parties^ 
Les quatre parties du monde. Ce priu.ee perdit une partie de 
sou royanume. Cette grammaire est en. quatre parties j Une- 
partit de I'armee etoit encore campet,. I* autre efoit trt; 
marche. II n'anjoit quune partie de ses troupes.. II avail tant* 
d* argent y mat's il en a donni une partie* II a *vendu une par lie - 
de,ses Irvres. II a employe une partie de sa <vie a cel« $ &£.. 
and HQX partm. 

* 5; 



jai A GRAMMAR OF THE 

We 6ay indifferently la plupart, la plus grande part, la 
plus grande par tie, to express the greatest n«mber, the most 
part. 

Beside the foregoing irregularities, part and partie arc 
used, both in a proper and figurative sense, in several 
other expressions, the chief of which are to be met with *n 
dictionaries. 

Parti, 

This word joined to the verb prendre has many signifi- 
cations. 

Prend%e parti signifies to turn soldier ; in this sense it 
is commonly followed by the verb regiment; as, il a pris 
parti dans un tel regiment. It likewise signifies to engage 
in a person's service ; but then we express with whom ; as, 
ke has engaged himself in the service of my Lord N., il a 
pris parti avec milord N. 

Pnndre son parti signifies to resolve, to take a final 
resolution ; as, j'ai pris mon parti, I am resolved upon 
it. When it is used in this sense, it is followed by no- 
thing else, and the verb prendre and the possessive pro- 
noun which follows miist relate to the same person ; but 
when they relate to different persons, it signifies to defend, 
to take a person's part ; as, 1 took his part, J'ai pris son 
pari. 

Prendre un parti likewise signifies to take a resold 
tion, with this difference, that it requires always after 
it either an adjective or a personal pronoun, to make a 
complete sense ; as, H a pris un parti avantageux, or un 

})arti qui est avantagcux, he took an advantageous reso- 
ution. 

Prendre h parti signifies to take a resolution, to choose, 
and is commonly followed either by a verb in the infini- 
tive mood preceded by de, or by a relative pronoun : as, I 
I choose to be silent ; fai pris k parti de me taire* 

When prendre le parti is followed by a noun in the 
second case, it signifies to defend, to protect ; as, we 
ought to protect oppressed innocence; il faut pundr* 
parti de I ' n:ncc*n<e oppr'rne'e. 

Prmdre le parti, followed by a noun in the second 
1 



FRENCH TONGUE. 325 

ease, likewise signifies to embrace a calling, profession, 
&c. ; thus we say prendre le parti de Veglise, le parti det 
armesy le parti de la robe, to turn clergyman soldier^ 
lawyer. 

Passer: 

This verb is liable to several irregularities. We say 
sometimes indifferently /#;x^r and se passer; le temps passe % 
or le temps se passe , time passes away ; la beaute passe, or 
la beaute se passe bien wite, beauty fades very soon. In 
this sense it is conjugated in its compound tenses by the 
auxiliary etre; as, le temps est passe. 

However, the one is sometimes better used than the 
other. When we speak of beauty in general, we lay la 
beaute passe ; but, when we speak of a handsome person, 
whose beauty decays, it is better to say, sa beaute st 
passe. 

We say des couleurs qui se passent, preferably to des 
couleurs qui passent y colours that fade. 

When we speak of time, merely to express the rapidity 
with which it flies away, and without mentioning in what 
manner we spend it, we say le temps passe; les jours pas* 
sent \ les annees*passent. 

But when we speak of time with relation to-the use we 
make of it, we say se passer ; one part of our life flies 
away in desiring the future, and the other part in lament- 
ing the past ; une par tie de not re vie se passe a des ire r I'ave* 
nir y V autre, a regretter le passe. 

We do not say indifferently il est passe' and // a passe, ht 
is gone by. 

When passer has either a case governed, or relation t» 
places or persons, we say // a passe y either in a proper or 
figurative- sense ; as, he passed this way, il a passe* par ici ; 
the troops have passed through Germany ; les troupes ent 
passe par V Allemagne. 

Passer is conjugated in it's compound tenses, by the help 
of the verb avoir, when it is used in the figurative sense, 
and has a relation to something ; as, after his second part 
he passed to his conclusion ; apris son second point il a paslf 
a sa conclusion* 

p 6 



a 



324 A GRAMMAR OF TOE 

When passer his neither a ease governed, nor relation, 
it is conjugated by die help of etre\ as, the troops have 
passed by ; les troupes sont fas sees. 

The two following expressions, a pas:e> est passe 
speaking of words or expressions used in a language, have 
a quite contrary signification ; as, for example, ce mot a 
fat$e\ signifies that this word took, or was received into 
use ; whereas the other expression, ce mot est passe, Slgnu 
fies, that this word is obsolete, and quite out of use. 

Generally the word passer is conjugated in it's com- 
pound tenses with the verb criwr, when it is used actively. 

Likewise, when it signifies to be reputed, accounted 
for, though in this serise it is not used actively ; as 
Cromwell was reputed the greatest politician of his age; 
Cromivell a passe pour le plus grand politique de son siecle. 

Passionner* 

?auhn?ie> used adjectively, is said both of persons, 
and things which have relation to persons ; as, une homme 
fasSionne ; dts sthtimens passhnnts ; des expressions passiountes : 
un air passion ne. 

When this word is said of things, it never has a case 
governed atrer it ; as des se?ithncns passionnes, & c. But 
U it be said of persons, sometimes it has a case* sometimes 
not ; when it has no case, it is commonly taken in a bad. 
sense ; as, un homme passipnne\ a passionate rnan ; when 
it has a case after it, it signifies fond of a thing, and theru 
it has a good or bad sense according to its case; as, un 
to mme passion ne pour la <volupte y pour la gloire, pour I* hotim 
y*ur> &c. a, man fond of pleasure, of glory, of honour*. 

fersonnage* 

This word is applied only to men, not to women ; 
aft, the greatest rren of antiquity, les plus g%a?ids per— 
tennages de V (nitiquite ; he is one of the most illustrious 
iiicn oi this age, <\st un da plus illuttres penounages d< (ft 



FRENCH TONGUE. 32 j 

We say, in familiar discourse, in ridicule of a person, 
<*eit un sot personnage, e'est un ridicule persounage, he is a 
silly fellow, a ridiculous man. 

When personnage is preceded by the definite article, 
without some modifying word before or after it, it is 
commonly taken in a bad sense ; as, 1 know the fellow, 
je c QnnQis le per tonnage* 



Peinture, Portrait, Tableau. 

These three words, when they are taken figuratively, 
have the same sense, and signify a description, a picture 
of some person or thing ; but when they are taken in a. 
proper sense, they signify different things. 

The first is said, 1st, of what is painted upon a wall, 
wainscot, &c. ; 2dly, of the art of painting ; 3.diy, of the 
colour in general which is made use of in painting. 

The second is said of a picture, which is drawn to re- 
present any thing after life. 

The third is said of any picture upon wood, cloth, 
brass, &c, representing a history, landscape, building, 
hunting, storm, shipwreck, Sex:. Even what is drawn 
after a statue, bust, medal, &c, is called tableau, and. 
not portrait, the latter always signify ing^ a picture drawn 
after life. 

Persuader. 

When this verb signifies to convince, it commonly 
governs the first case of the person, and the second case 
of the thing ; as, I have convinced him of this truth; je 
I *ai persuade de cette *verite ; he convinced me of the sin- 
ceri.y of his intention*, il m* a persuade de la sinceriie de set 
intentions. 

But when this verb signifies to advise, it governs the 
third ca^e of the person, and is always followed by a 
verb in the infinitive mood, preceded by the preposition 
de\ as, I will advice him to go thither ^ je lui persuade- 
rai dj idler ; I have advised him to study ; je lui ai ptr-: 
made d'e'tudkr* 



3i6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Perturbateur, 

This word is not joined with all sorts of substantives. 
We say tin perturbateur du repos public, de I'e'tat, de Peglise; 
a disturber of public repose, of the state, of the church ; 
but we do not say un perturbateur du peuple, a disturber of 
the people. 

Likewise we say troubler le repos public, lordre, Vetat, 
Veglise, un royaume, to disturb public repose, order, the 
state, the church, a kingdom ; but we do not say troubler 
le peuple, un e'taty une province, to disturb the people, a 
state, a province ; though we say exciter des troubles parmi 
le peuple, to excite disturbances among the people; exciter 
des troubles dans un e'taty dans une province, &c. 

According to the French Academy, perturbateur is 
scarcely used but in this phrase, perturbateur du repos 
public, 

Piquer (se). 

This verb signifies, rst, to be offended, to be angry 
at ; as, he is offended at the least thing, il se pique^ de 
la moindre chose. 

' 2dly. It signifies to pretend to, to set up for ; as, a 
truly learned man knows every thing, and pretends to 
nothing ; un homme veritablement savant sait tout, et ?:e se 
pique de rien ; he pretends to write and speak well, il se 
pique de bien ecrire et de bien parler. 

We say of a man, who has displayed his generosity in 
emulation of another; il s'est pique d'bonncur. This verb, 
in the three foregoing cases, is always followed by the 
preposition de, 

Politesse, 

Thjs word is used in a figuratiye sense only ; for we 
say : the politeness of the court ; la polite sse de la ccur; and 
we do not say, la politesse des perles, la politesse du ntarbre % 
Jjut le poli ; though we say, du marbie pcli, polished marble. 

What we have said of the word politesse may be ap* 
ylicd to many other substantives, which are used only 



FRENCH TONGUE. 327 

in a figurative sense, though the adjective from which 
they are derived is used both in a proper and figurative 
sense; such are, among others, tendresse> droiture. Thougu 
we say, du pain tendre> new bread, and colonne droite, a 
straight column ; yet we do*not say, la tendresse du pain, 
la droit ure d*une colonne. 

Precis. 

When this word is used adjectively, it signifies precise, 
fixed; as, a fixed time, temps precis ; a fixed day ', jour 
precis; a fixed hour, heure precise. 

We say of a man who is concise and exact in his dis- 
courses : il est fort precis dans ses discourse what you say is 
very plain, ce que <vous ditts la est fort precis. 

But when it is used substantively, it signifies the sub- 
stance, the summary, of what is the main, the chief, the 
most important thing in an affair, science, book, Sec. ; as, ' 
there is the whole substance of this book; 'voila tout le 
precis de ce livre. 

Pres de, Pret a. 

These two expressions followed by a verb are very 
often mistaken one for the other, even by authors of repute. 

Pres de signifies near, at the point of: he is at the point 
of death, il est pres de mourir. 

Pret a signifies prepared, disposed ; as, he is prepared to 
die, il est pret a mourir* 

Propre. 

When this word signifies fit, good, apt, it is followed 
either by the preposition a or pour; as, a man fit for war, 
un homme propre a la guerre ; or, pour la guerre; an herb 
good for healing wounds, un her be propre a guerir des 
plaies; or, pour guerir des plaies. 

However, when it is followed by an active verb having 
a passive signification, it is always followed by a; as, a 
truth fit to be preached, une <verite propre a frecher; fruit 
good to be preserved, du fruit propre d coxfre, or, a fare 
conft* 



328 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

When propre is taken substantively, it signifies a par- 
ticular quality, which distinguishes a thing from al! 
others; as, the property of birds is to rly ; U propre dej 
oistaux est de <voler. 

Raillcrie. 

When this word is used with the verb entendre, and 
without any article, as, entendre raillerie, it signifies to 
give a good interpretation to raillery, not to be offended 
at any thing. 

When it is used with the same verb entendre, and with 
the definite article, as, entendre la raillerte, it signifies 
to be acquainted with the art of raillery ; as, il entend la- 
rail I trie. 

W^e sometimes say, railhrie a part, seriously, in earnest.. 

Recherche. 

This word is not equally applied to all things ; for we. 
do not say, fa ire la recherche d'une chose perdu, d'une chose 
egaree, to inquire after a thing that is lo>t or mislaid; 
though we say, faire la recherche de la <vie de quelqu*uu, to 
make an inquiry into the life ard actions of a person ; 
faire la recherche d'une file, to court a girl for a wife. In, 
this sense we likewise say, reckercher une file en manage, 
or only recbercker. 

We do not say, in a proper sense, the seeking after 
the treasures which the sea encloses in its depths, La r-44 
chcrche des tresors que la mer renferme dans ses abin.es* 
However, we say, in a figurative sense, la recherche des 
bifui.de la terre et des tresors, the pursuit after wealth and 
treasures. 

We likewise say let recherche* de Vantiquite, the 
inquiry into antiquity; il faut toujeur* trouvaille r a la re~ 
ehetche de la ve'rite, we should always be occupied in the. 
search of truth. 

It is applied likewise to curious researches; as, this 
book is full of curious inquiries; ce Iwr* est plein de re» 
(hi rehes cur u uses. 

Though we do not say of a thing lost or mislaitV, faire 
la reejjtnht ; yet wc may make use of recherch*r>. to 



TRENCH TONGUE. 329 

seek again, to look for a second time ; as, you did not seek 
well every where, you must seek again ; <vous ri&vez pas 
bign cherche partout, il faut rechercher* 

Regie, Regulier. 

These two words have many odd constructions. They 
are both said of persons and things, but with different 
•significations. 

We say for a man regular in his study and conduct ; un 
bomme regie dans $es etudes, et dans sa conduite. 

We likewise say des mceurs reglees, good manners ; une 
*vie regie's, a pure and innocent lite ; une horloge bien reglee, 
a clock that goes well ; uh re pas regie, a repast not too 
expensive ; des beures reglees, stated hours, &c. 

We say, une femme tres-picuse et ires-reguliere ; sa cor." 
duite a toujour* ele fort reguliete ; to express, r 'iat a woman 
is very pious and regular in h^r conduct. We do not say, 
in this sense, c 1 est une femme re glee ; th : s woid has qu;t2 
a different meaning ; however, we say, c'est un homme 
regie, he is a sober man. 

We say regulier of things done : n an uniform and re- 
gular manner, particularly of those which are done accord- 
ing to the rules of art. Thus we say, uhe procedure re'gu- 
litre, a regular proceeding ; une beaute re\: utiere 3 'a regular 
beauty ; un mswvement regulier, a great and uniform 
morion; <verbes rcguliers ; batiment regulier, Us mou'vemens 
rtguliers des corps celestes, &c. 

De regie is the contrary of regie; it is applied, tit, to 
matters of morality; as, un bomme d ere glee, a disorderly 
man ; dis mceurs dereglecs, uhe <vie de'riglee, disorderly man. 
ners, or life ; 2dly, to things which are not according to 
the ordinary course of nature and art ; thus we say, ;/;/ 
temps de regie, avoir le pmls de regie, une horloge de regie e y 
une montre dereglee* 

Irregulier is the contrary of regulier* It is scarcely 
applied to persons, but in ecclesiastical matters. It sig- 
nifies one who, by reason of some misdemeanor, some na- 
tural defect, or some ecclesiastical law, cannot be admitted 
into orders, or officiate if he be in orders. 

However, irregulier is frequently used in speaking of 



330 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

things; as, ttne pro: t Jure irreguliere, un hatiment irregul/er, 
Tin discours irregu/ier, des manieres irregulicrer, fortification 
inegul/ere, pec me irregulier, &c. 

Rendre* 

Rendre justice a quelqu'nn signifies to do a man justice, 
to give him his due. Rendre la justice signifies to exercise 
or to administer justice. 

This verb is never followed by a participle passive; as, 
for these are the means to make you known, we must nor 
say, e'est le moyen de vcus rendi'e connu ; but, de ^ous fain 
coriTJOitre* 

Some French anthors have put a participle after this 
verb, as, for example, one of them says r la mertu rend 
chtri de Die//, virtue makes you beloved by God. 

Such expressions are very faulty. The verb rendre y in 
this sense, is to be joined only with pure adjectives ; as, 
bon f amiable y illustre, ridicule ', odieux, celebre, &c. or with 
substantives. 

Neither do we say, with a certain French author, rendre 
la guerison, to cure a person ; because people had no cure 
before they were sick; and we use, in this sense, the verb 
rendre, only speaking of things which are lost, or of 
which we have been deprived. 

Hence it follows, that we may say rendre la sante, t* 
restore health; rendre la <vie, to restore life, because 
we enjoy health and life before we are deprived of them. 
Thus too we say, rtndre la inty les forces, la libcrte, 
lappctit. 

Richesse. 

This word, used in the singular, signifies sometimes 
opulence, richea j as, commerce makes all the riches of 
that country, le commerce fait loute la richesse de ce pajs-la. 
Sometimes it signifies, in poetry, the exactness and just- 
ness of the rhyme* j as, the exactness of rhyme contributes 
a great deal to the beauty of poetry ; la richesse de la 
rime conttibue bcaucoup a la beaut e de la poesie. 

bometimes it signifies the copiousness of a language, 
as the copiousness of the English language ; la richesse dt 
la langue Angloise* 



FRENCH TONGUE. x 3 i 

Rfchesses^ in the plural, and in a proper sense, always 
signifies great riehes. 

Satisfaire* 

This verb sometimes governs the first case, and some- 
times the third. There are some occasions, on which 
it governs the first case, and not the third; as, all the 
wealth in the world is not able to satisfy the human heart, 
tous les biens du ?nonde ne sont pas capable s dt sat is/a ire le 
coeur humain m 

We likewise say, satisfaire ses passions, sa colere, son 
ambition, sa <vanite', sa curiosite, &c* ; and not satisfaire a 
ses passions, &c. ; to satisfy, to content our passions, anger, 
ambition, &c. 

There are some others, on which it governs the third, 
and not the first case ; as, satisfaire a son devoir, to dis- 
charge our duty ; satisfaire a une obligation, to acquit an 
obligation ; satisfaire aux personnel quon a offense'es f 
to make reparation to persons we have offended. 

However, we say, in the first case, satisfaire les per* 
sonne s a qui on doit, to pay people to whom we are in* 
debted. 

The general rule to know whether satisfaire govern the 
first or the third case, is this; when it is used in the sense 
of to pay or content, it governs the first case ; and when 
it is used in the sense of make reparation, or discbarge a 
duty, it governs the third case. 

Supplier. 

Though this word be more respectful and submissive 
than prier, yet we do not say supplier Die//, to beseech 
God ; we say prier Dieu. However, speaking to God, 
we say with propriety, je te supplie, 6 mou Dku! nous te 
tupplions, 6 Dieu de misericorde ! 

Such is the caprice of custom in the use of this word, 
that we dare not employ the word prier, speaking of a 
king, or of persons of a much higher station than ours ; 
though we use it speaking of God j for we do not say, 
prier le rei 9 but supplier /e*ro/\ 



23* A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Tel. 

Some persons say j'aime fous les bins litres , tels quih 
soient ; I like all good books, whatever they may be. 
Bat this is wrong: we ought to say quels qu'ils soient; 
for tels qu'ih soient would signify such as they are. 
Moreover it governs the indicative, and not the subjunc 
tive mood •> consequently, it should be, tels qu'ils sont. 

Vaillant. Valant. 

These two words are subject to the caprice of custom. 
There are some cases where we make use of the first, and 
others where we m::ke use of the second; as, for exam- 
ple, we bay : /'/ a cent mille ecus <vaillant y he is worth a 
hundred thousand crowns; il a en menbles dix mille ecus 
<vniUa,;t % his personal estate is worth ten thousand crowns. 
But we say, je lui ai dowie dix tableaux <valant deux 
g'ii'.t 'j -La pie\ .., and not radiant; I have given him ten 
pictures \\ ^ah two guineas a piece. 

• "V\ her, it signifies what a man is worth, either in his 
real or personal estate, we make use of vaillant ; but, 
when it implies what a thing is worth, we make use of 
<ua/ant. I his reflection may easily be applied to the fore* 
going examples. 

VeilleYn 

VeilUr une personne, to watch a person, has two differ* 
cut significations : it signifies to spend a night with a 
sick person to take care of him : it likewise signifies to 
watch, to observe, to have a watchful eye upon a person. 

In this sc:it>e we likewise say veiller sur une persomic , sur 
les actions, sur la conduite de quc/qu'uu, 

Veillcr governs sometimes the third case ; it then sig- 
nifies to take care, and is properly applied only to things : 
as,yV vallerai a vos affaires , 1 will take care 01 your afTaus, 

Veuir a bout* 

When this verb is applied to thing?; It, t ~vir a bout 
d y un chose, it signifies to bring a thing about, to succeeds 
as, il est n/etm a bout de sou dentin* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 3S3 

When it is applied to persons > it signifies sometimes to 
reclaim a person ; as, this child cannot be reclaimed, on 
ne saursit venir a bout de cet enfant. 

Sometimes it signifies to overcome a man's enemies; as, 
ilviendra a bout de torn ses emu mis* 

Vent. 

Though we say, with the article, vent du 'fiord, north 
wind ; vent du sud, south wind ; yet we say, with the 
preposition de only, vent d*est, east wind; vent d' Quest, 
west wind. 

Ville. 

We say in familiar discourse of a person, il est a la 
ville, to express that he is not in the country ; and il est 
en ville, that he is not at home, when we are speaking. 

Vin. 

We say vin de Bourgogne, de Champagne, d'Espagne, 
de Portugal, de Pie'mout, Sec ; and we say, vin du Rhin, 
afid not v in de R/:in. 

Foulo'ir* 

This word, which commonly signifies to be willing, to 
Tiave a mind to, has several other significations : it signi- 
fies first, to command ; .as, the king commands you to 
obey, le roi veut que vous obe'issiez. 

Secondly, to desire, to wish ; as, they will gijre you 
whatever you desire; on vous dormer a tiut ce que vous 
voudrez. 

Thirdly, to consent, to agree; as, yes, I cor-sent to 
it, oui, je le veux bieu ; if you agree to it, he w.ll like- 
wise ; si vous le voulvz, il le voudra aussi. 

Fourthly, a necessity ; as, this affair must be conduct^ 1 
with prudence ; cette affaire veut ttre conduite avec / rUm 
deuce; this picture must be seen in its proper li/^t, ce 
tableau veut ttre vu dans so//Jcur. 

When the word bien, preceded by the article is added 
to it, it signifies to have a regard for somebody* to wish 
him well ; as, il vous veut du bien, When the word 



334 A GRAMMAR, Sec. 

mil is added to it, it signifies the contrary; as, il votu 
<veut du maU 

We say en vouloir a quelqu'un, to express a desire of 
hurting somebody ; as, I know that he seeks to injure 
you, je sais qu'il vous en veut. 

We say a qui en vouLz-vcus ? Whom do you ask, 
whom do you look for ? A qui en veut.il f What ails him ? 
What does he complain of? 

Que veut dire cet homme signifies, what means this 
man ? What does he want ? And, to express mere sur- 
prise, we sometimes say que veut dire cela ? What is 
that ? In the same manner, we say, of words or things 
which we do not understand, que *veut dire ce mot ? Que 
*veut dire ce procedc* 

Vue. 

This word, besides it's various significations, which are 
to be met with in dictionaries, has several others. Per* 
dre tine chose de vue> signifies to cease to see a thing ; as, 
le vaisseau s'eloigna en pcu de temps , et nous le per dimes 
de vue. We likewise say of an affair, on Va perdue de 
*vue, to express that we do not know how it has gone on. 

Avoir vue sur quelqu'un signifies, in a figurative sense, 
to have a right to observe somebody, in order to rule and 
conduct him ; and avoir la vue sur quelqu'un signifies to 
liave a watchful eye upon somebody, to watch his con- 
duct. We say, avoir des vues pour quelqu'un, to have 
a design to procure somebody an advantage ; avoir des 
wues sur quelqu'un, to have a design to employ him to do 
something ; and avoir des vues sur que/que chose, to have 
a design to obtain a thing. 

There are some other practical irregularities ; the 
trcater part of which have been noticed in the third part 
°**his Grammar. 

THE END, 



Law and vWnlbert, Primers, St. Johns Square, London. 



^Ofthe Publishers of this Grammar 

MAY BE HAD THE FOLLOWING 

BOOKS, 

BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 



I. EXERCISES, Entertaining and Instructive, with the 
Rules of the French Syntax. The Twelfth Edition, revised and 
corrected agreeably to the Thirteenth Edition of the Author's 
Grammar, by C. Gkos. Price 3s. Gd. bound. 

This Edition is improved, by adding some Cards and familiar 
Letters ; likewise an Index to assist the Pupil in learning his 
Exercises. 

«. A NEW METHOD of learning the Spelling and Pro- 
nunciation of the French Language. In Two Parts.— Part I. 
Containing French Words arranged in Alphabetical Order, with 
their Significations in English, &c — Part II. A clear and con- 
cise Introduction to the Grammar, a Vocabulary of Words most 
generally used in both Languages, some familiar Phrases and 
short Dialogues, serving as an Introduction to the Elements of 
Conversation, and a New Dialogue upon Geography. A New 
Edition, revised and corrected, by C. Gros. Price 2s. bound. 

3. ELEMENTS OF FRENCH CONVERSATION, with 
Familiar tnd Easy Dialogues, each preceded by a suitable Vo- 
cabulary »n English and French. The Seventeenth Edition, 
revised and corrected, by C. Gros. Price Is. 6 i. bound. 

4. THE FRENCH VERBS, Regular and Irregular, alpha- 
betically conjugated, with Figures and preliminary Observations, 
in a new, pi? in, and easy Manner. Principally designed for 
those who are taught privately, to a?/oid the tedious learning tff 

; the Verbs. Price Is. 6d. 

5. Likewise the particular and common Terminations tf all 
the French Verbs, engraved on an Octavo-page. Price $d. 

6\ FABLES AMUSANTES ; avec un Table generale et 
particuliere des Mots, et de leur Signification en Anglois, selon 
rordre des jPables, pour en rendre la Traduction plus facile 
a TEcolier. Quinzieme Edition. Price fcs, 6d. bound. 



BOOKSjmbUihedktfLAW and WUITTAKER, NoA3, Ave-Maria pme. 



7. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, alphabetically exhibited, 
with Spelling Vocabularies, and new Fables. French and 
h. By C. Gnos. Price 2s. 

B. FRENCH DELECTUS; consisting of a Variety of short 

Sentences, Historical Anecdotes, Geographical Descriptions, 
and Passages from Natural History and Philosophy, intermixed 
with Pieces of Poetry; en a Plan similar to that of Dr. Valpy's 
Latin Delectus. By James Foley, of the University of Paris, 
Classical Master, and, during seme Years past, Teacher of the 
French Language at Reading School. Price 2s. bound. 

0. INTRODUCTION a la CONNOISSANCE de la 
NATURE; et a la Lecture de PEcriture Sainte. Par Mrs, 
Tbimmer. Traduite de la Treizieme Edition. Par C. Guos. 
Price 2s. bound. 

10. VISITE D'UNE SEMAINE. Ouvrage Traduit de 
P Anglofs. Par J. E. Le Febvre. Prix 4s. 6d. relie. 

11. LETTRES DE MADAME DU MONTIER, re- 
cueillies par Madame le Prince de Beaumont, Auteur du 
Magasin des Enfans, des Adolescentes, &c. Nouvelle Edition, 
Soigneusement revue et coixigee d'apres les Meilleures Editions 
de France. Prix 5s. reUe. 

12. AN IN PRODUCTION to the EPISTOLARY STYLE 
of the FRENCH ; or a Selection of Familiar Notes and Letters 
in French ; for the \he of Schools. With an alphabetical Index 

matory of the Words and idiomatical Expressions. By 
Saulez, D. F. I.M. Farnham, Surry; Author of. 
Theory and Practice of the French Language, and several other 
School Books. Price gs. bound. 

13. FIRST STEP TO FRENCH CONVERSATION; in 
two Paris* 1. New methodical Vocabulary of the most useful 
Words. 2; A Series of Lessons, containing the most common 
Phrases. By C. Gros. Price 2s. (id. bound. 

14. NEW ELEMENTS OF CONVERSATION; in two 

Parts. 1. The several ways of saluting, addressing, enquiring, 
&c. g. Familiar Dialogues, on the most interesting Subjects, 
By C. GR03, Price 2s.6d. bound. 

15. A FRENCH DICTIONARY, on a Plan entirely new ; 
whnein all the Words are so arranged and divided as to render 
their Pronunciation both easy and accurate. With an Index 
pointing out the Place of each : producing what in the Authors 
opinion was necessary and wanting toward the perfect Know. 
ledijc of this Language, By Willxam Smitu, A.M. Price 
<js. u*d. boards. 

LBJs'12 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 

nOA\ 77Q.9111 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




